Roland Musical Instrument V Synth User Guide

O W N ER’S MAN UAL  
Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the Roland V-Synth.  
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT SAFETY  
INSTRUCTIONS” (Owner’s Manual p. 2), “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” (Owner’s  
Manual p. 3), and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (Owner’s Manual p. 4). These sections  
provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit.  
Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every  
feature provided by your new unit, the Quick Start, Owner’s Manual, and Sound  
List should be read in their entirety. These manuals should be saved and kept on  
hand as a convenient reference.  
* Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.  
* Windows® is known officially as: “Microsoft® Windows® operating system.”  
* Macintosh are registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.  
* MacOS is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.  
* All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trade-  
marks of their respective owners.  
Copyright © 2002 ROLAND CORPORATION  
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form  
without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USIN G THE UN IT SAFELY  
The  
symbol alerts the user to important instructions  
Used for instructions intended to alert  
the user to the risk of death or severe  
injury should the unit be used  
improperly.  
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is  
determined by the design contained within the  
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for  
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.  
Used for instructions intended to alert  
the user to the risk of injury or material  
damage should the unit be used  
improperly.  
The  
symbol alerts the user to items that must never  
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that  
must not be done is indicated by the design contained  
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it  
means that the unit must never be disassembled.  
* Material damage refers to damage or  
other adverse effects caused with  
respect to the home and all its  
furnishings, as well to domestic  
animals or pets.  
The symbol alerts the user to things that must be  
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is  
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In  
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-  
cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.  
001  
008e  
Before using this unit, make sure to read the instructions  
Use only the attached power-supply cord.  
below, and the Owners Manual.  
........................................................................................................................  
........................................................................................................................  
002a  
009  
Do not open or perform any internal modifications on the  
Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord, nor place  
heavy objects on it. Doing so can damage the cord,  
producing severed elements and short circuits. Damaged  
cords are fire and shock hazards!  
unit.  
........................................................................................................................  
003  
Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts within it  
(except when this manual provides specific instructions  
directing you to do so). Refer all servicing to your retailer,  
the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized  
Roland distributor, as listed on the “Information” page.  
........................................................................................................................  
010  
This unit, either alone or in combination with an amplifier  
and headphones or speakers, may be capable of  
producing sound levels that could cause permanent  
hearing loss. Do not operate for a long period of time at a  
high volume level, or at a level that is uncomfortable. If  
you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you  
should immediately stop using the unit, and consult an  
audiologist.  
..........................................................................................................  
004  
Never use or store the unit in places that are:  
Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct sunlight  
in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating duct, on top of  
heat-generating equipment); or are  
........................................................................................................................  
011  
Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors); or are  
Humid; or are  
Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable material, coins,  
pins); or liquids of any kind (water, soft drinks, etc.) to  
penetrate the unit.  
Exposed to rain; or are  
Dusty; or are  
Subject to high levels of vibration.  
........................................................................................................................  
........................................................................................................................  
005  
013  
This unit should be used only with a rack or stand that is  
In households with small children, an adult should  
provide supervision until the child is capable of following  
all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit.  
recommended by Roland.  
........................................................................................................................  
006  
........................................................................................................................  
When using the unit with a rack or stand recommended  
by Roland, the rack or stand must be carefully placed so it  
is level and sure to remain stable. If not using a rack or  
stand, you still need to make sure that any location you  
choose for placing the unit provides a level surface that  
will properly support the unit, and keep it from wobbling.  
014  
Protect the unit from strong impact.  
(Do not drop it!)  
........................................................................................................................  
015  
Do not force the units power-supply cord to share an  
outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices. Be  
especially careful when using extension cords—the total  
power used by all devices you have connected to the  
extension cords outlet must never exceed the power  
rating (watts/ amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive  
loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and  
eventually melt through.  
........................................................................................................................  
008a  
The unit should be connected to a power supply only of  
the type described in the operating instructions, or as  
marked on the unit.  
........................................................................................................................  
........................................................................................................................  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
USIN G THE UN IT SAFELY  
016  
104  
Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult with  
your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an  
authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the “Infor-  
mation” page.  
Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled.  
Also, all cords and cables should be placed so they are out  
of the reach of children.  
........................................................................................................................  
106  
........................................................................................................................  
023  
Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on the unit.  
DO NOT play a CD-ROM disc on a conventional audio  
CD player. The resulting sound may be of a level that  
could cause permanent hearing loss. Damage to speakers  
or other system components may result.  
........................................................................................................................  
107b  
Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet hands  
when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this  
unit.  
........................................................................................................................  
........................................................................................................................  
101a  
108a  
The unit should be located so that its location or position  
Before moving the unit, disconnect the power plug from  
does not interfere with its proper ventilation.  
the outlet, and pull out all cords from external devices.  
........................................................................................................................  
........................................................................................................................  
101c  
109a  
This unit for use only with Roland keyboard stand KS-12.  
Use with other stands is capable of resulting in instability  
causing possible injury.  
Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and unplug  
the power cord from the outlet (Quick Start; p. 31).  
........................................................................................................................  
........................................................................................................................  
110a  
102b  
Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your  
Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply cord  
when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this  
unit.  
area, pull the plug on the power cord out of the outlet.  
........................................................................................................................  
118  
........................................................................................................................  
Should you remove screws, make sure to put them in a  
safe place out of childrens reach, so there is no chance of  
them being swallowed accidentally.  
........................................................................................................................  
IMPO RTAN T N O TES  
In addition to the items listed under “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” and “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” on pages 2–4, please read  
and observe the following:  
352b  
Po w e r Su p p ly  
Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices, such  
as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of this unit. Such noise  
could occur when receiving or initiating a call, or while  
conversing. Should you experience such problems, you should  
relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance  
from this unit, or switch them off.  
301  
Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any device  
that will generate line noise (such as an electric motor or variable  
lighting system).  
307  
Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the power to  
354a  
all units. This will help prevent malfunctions and/ or damage to  
speakers or other devices.  
Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near devices that  
radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed vehicle, or otherwise  
subject it to temperature extremes. Excessive heat can deform or  
discolor the unit.  
Pla ce m e n t  
355b  
351  
When moved from one location to another where the temperature  
Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment  
containing large power transformers) may induce hum. To  
alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this unit; or move  
it farther away from the source of interference.  
and/ or humidity is very different, water droplets (condensation)  
may form inside the unit. Damage or malfunction may result if  
you attempt to use the unit in this condition. Therefore, before  
using the unit, you must allow it to stand for several hours, until  
the condensation has completely evaporated.  
352a  
This device may interfere with radio and television reception. Do  
358  
not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers.  
Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard. This can be  
the cause of malfunction, such as keys ceasing to produce sound.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IMPO RTAN T N O TES  
Ma in te n a n ce  
401a  
Be fo re Usin g Ca rd s  
For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry cloth or one  
that has been slightly dampened with water. To remove stubborn  
dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a mild, non-abrasive detergent.  
Afterwards, be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft, dry  
cloth.  
Usin g DATA Ca rd s  
704  
Carefully insert the DATA card all the way in—until it is firmly in  
place.  
402  
Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any kind, to  
avoid the possibility of discoloration and/ or deformation.  
Ad d itio n a l Pre ca u tio n s  
551  
Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably  
lost as a result of a malfunction, or the improper operation of the  
unit. To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data,  
we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of  
important data you have stored in the units memory on a PC  
card.  
the terminals dirty.  
552  
Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents of data  
Ha n d lin g CD-RO Ms  
that was stored on a PC card once it has been lost. Roland Corpo-  
ration assumes no liability concerning such loss of data.  
801  
Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside (encoded  
surface) of the disc. Damaged or dirty CD-ROM discs may not be  
read properly. Keep your discs clean using a commercially  
available CD cleaner.  
553  
Use a reasonable amount of care when using the units buttons,  
sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks and connectors.  
Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.  
554  
Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.  
Co p y rig h t  
851  
Unauthorized recording, distribution, sale, lending, public perfor-  
mance, broadcasting, or the like, in whole or in part, of a work  
(musical composition, video, broadcast, public performance, or  
the like) whose copyright is held by a third party is prohibited by  
law.  
558a  
852b  
To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the units volume  
When exchanging audio signals through a digital connection with  
at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use headphones, so you do  
not need to be concerned about those around you (especially  
when it is late at night).  
an external instrument, this unit can perform recording without  
being subjected to some of the restrictions of the Serial Copy  
Management System (SCMS). This is because the unit is intended  
solely for musical production, and is designed not to be subject to  
restrictions as long as it is used to record works (such as your own  
compositions) that do not infringe on the copyrights of others.  
(SCMS is a feature that prohibits second-generation and later  
copying through a digital connection. It is built into MD recorders  
and other consumer digital-audio equipment as a copyright-  
protection feature.)  
559a  
When you need to transport the unit, package it in the box  
(including padding) that it came in, if possible. Otherwise, you  
will need to use equivalent packaging materials.  
561  
Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-**; sold separately).  
By connecting any other expression pedals, you risk causing  
malfunction and/ or damage to the unit.  
853  
Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a  
562  
copyright held by a third party. We assume no responsibility  
whatsoever with regard to any infringements of third-party  
copyrights arising through your use of this unit.  
Use a cable from Roland to make the connection. If using some  
other make of connection cable, please note the following precau-  
tions.  
Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use cables  
that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit. The use  
of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low,  
or impossible to hear. For information on cable specifications,  
contact the manufacturer of the cable.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ho w To Use Th is Ma n u a l  
This owners manual is organized as follows. Before you start  
N o ta tio n Use d in Th is O w n e r’s  
Ma n u a l  
reading it, wed like to suggest going through the Quick Start  
manual. For details on all the patches and waves that the V-Synth  
contains, refer to the separate “Sound List.”  
To make operation procedures easy to understand, the following  
notation system is adopted:  
Characters and graphics in square brackets [ ] indicate buttons and  
knobs on the front panel. For example, [MODE] indicates the MODE  
O ve rvie w o f th e V-Sy n th  
This explains the structure of the V-Synth, and basic operation.  
Reading it is essential for understanding V-Synth operational  
procedures.  
button, and [  
buttons.  
], [  
], [  
], and [  
] indicates the cursor  
Text or graphics enclosed in < > indicate objects in the screen (touch  
screen) that can be touched using your finger. The manual will  
instruct you to “touch” the object shown in the touch screen.  
(p. **) refers to pages within the manual.  
Pla y in g in Pa tch Mo d e  
This explains how to play the V-Synth in Patch mode. Reading it is  
essential for understanding V-Synth operational procedures.  
Below are the meanings of the symbols preceding certain sentences  
in the text.  
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
These are notes. Be sure to read them.  
This chapter explains how to create patches, and describes what the  
patch parameters do and how they are composed. Read this chapter  
when you wish to create patches.  
These are reference memos. Read it as necessary.  
Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g Sa m p le s (Sa m p le  
Mo d e )  
These are hints for operating the V-Synth. Read it as necessary.  
This explains how to sample, and how to edit and encode samples.  
Read this when you want to sample sounds.  
These provide information from related reference pages. Read it  
as necessary.  
Se ttin g s Co m m o n to All Mo d e s (Sy ste m  
Mo d e )  
The display screens printed in this owners manual are based on  
the factory settings. However, please be aware that in some cases  
they may differ from the actual factory settings.  
This chapter describes how the System parameters that determine  
the V-Synths operation environment work and how these  
parameters are organized. Read it as necessary.  
Disk -Re la te d Fu n ctio n s (Disk Mo d e )  
This chapter covers disk-related operations such as saving data to  
disk and loading data from disk. Read it as necessary.  
Tra n sfe rrin g Da ta (USB Mo d e )  
This explains how to connect the V-Synth to your computer, and  
transfer data such as patches and waves. Read this as necessary.  
O th e r Fu n ctio n s  
This explains how to transmit data to an external MIDI device (Data  
Transfer), and how to restore all data of the V-Synth to the factory  
settings (Factory Reset). Read it as necessary.  
Ap p e n d ice s  
This chapter contains a troubleshooting section for use when the V-  
Synth is not functioning as expected. There is also a list of messages  
that you can refer to if an message appears on the display. A list of  
parameters and a MIDI implementation chart are also provided.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Co n te n ts  
Initializing Patch Settings (PATCH Init) ................................................................................... 33  
Copying Patch Settings (PATCH Copy).................................................................................... 33  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Co n te n ts  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Co n te n ts  
Adjusting the Sensitivity of the Touch Screen/ Time Trip Pad/ D Beam Controller  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ma in Fe a tu re s  
W ith th is sy n th e size r, e ve ry co m p o n e n t in vo lve d in so u n d  
cre a tio n h a s b e e n ta k e n to th e n e x t sta g e o f e vo lu tio n  
The V-Synth brings together the ideal combination of sound generators, together with an interface that dynamically links your sensitivities with  
the sound. Its a powerful synthesizer that only Roland could have produced. The sounds of the V-Synth have a living character that goes beyond  
the limits of previous synthesizers.  
Th e id e a l co m b in a tio n o f so u n d  
An in te rfa ce th a t g ive s life to th e  
g e n e ra to rs  
so u n d  
Fle x ib le so u n d g e n e ra to r stru ctu re  
In tu itive u se r in te rfa ce  
The sound generator section consists of OSC, MOD, COSM, and  
TVA blocks, and allows you to flexibly change the way in which  
these blocks are connected. Sections other than the TVA provide  
multiple types, and can be combined freely.  
The V-Synth provides a rich variety of controllers for hands-on  
operation, which puts you in direct and intuitive control of the  
sound: a touch-operated display, the Time Trip pad, twin D Beam  
controllers that detect not only up/ down but also left/ right  
movement, and highly sensitive knobs.  
Since each section can be switched on/ off in real time from the  
panel, its always easy to understand how the sound is structured.  
Most of the sound generator parameters can be assigned to these  
controllers for direct control.  
Ve rsa tile o scilla to rs u sin g  
Po w e rfu l tim e -co n tro l fu n ctio n s  
Va riPh ra se te ch n o lo g y  
The VariPhrase sound generator of the V-Synth provides a Time Trip  
function that can bring the waveform playback to a stop in real time,  
and trace backward or forward from that point.  
Since the oscillators have independent envelopes and LFOs, they  
themselves have the functionality of synthesizers. You can choose  
from three types: analog, PCM, and external input.  
In addition, VariPhrase waveforms, LFO, envelope, arpeggiator, and  
effects can all be made to operate in synchronization at the same  
tempo. For example, a waveform with movement such as a rhythm  
loop can easily be synthesized in units of individual notes. Of course  
you can also synchronize to MIDI Clock messages from an external  
device.  
For example, since the PCM oscillators provide VariPhrase  
functionality, you can change the waveform playback speed in the  
forward or reverse directions.  
Approximately 300 different preset waveforms are built-in. In  
addition, you can use waveforms that you sampled from the analog  
or digital input.  
The arpeggiator lets you program a pattern for each sound, and also  
supports control changes.  
The powerful analog modeling sound generator creates a waveform  
by internal calculation, and is great for creating unique tonal  
changes, such as adding fatness or more of an edge to your sound.  
N e w sp e cia lly o p tim ize d p re se t  
so u n d s  
CO SM p ro ce ssin g fo r cre a tin g  
u n iq u e so u n d s  
The new built-in sounds created specifically for the V-Synth give  
you a wide range of expression simply when played from the  
keyboard, and are also optimized for performance from the Time  
Trip pad and D Beam controllers.  
The COSM section uses a rich variety of processing in addition to the  
usual TVF to vary the sound in extreme ways. For example, you can  
use a sideband filter to give a metallic resonance to simple white  
noise. You can use a resonator to add the body resonances of a  
musical instrument. Processes such as wave shaper and guitar amp  
modeling are also provided.  
From the day you start playing the V-Synth, you can start taking  
advantage of the performance potential offered by its Time Trip pad  
and D Beam controllers.  
Since these effects are independent for each voice, you can play  
chords while preserving the sense of pitch.  
Ca re fu lly se le cte d e ffe cts  
Three types of carefully selected effects are built-in: MFX (multi-  
effects), chorus, and reverb.  
Also included is a newly developed Pseudo Stereo effect that adds a  
sense of stereo to monaural sample data, allowing you to create a  
variety of sound fields.  
1 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ma in Fe a tu re s  
Use w ith o th e r d e vice s fo r e ve n  
g re a te r p o ssib ilitie s  
W h a t is Va riPh ra se ?  
VariPhrase has the following advantages:  
O p e n sy ste m a rch ite ctu re  
The V-Synth lets you customize all patches and wave data. By  
connecting your computer via USB, you can easily back up all of  
your data.  
1
Capable of changing the pitch, rate of time expansion/  
compression and voice characteristics (formant) on a real-  
time basis.  
2
3
Allows easy synchronization to tempo and pitch.  
A single sample covers an extended range of keys compared  
to conventional digital samplers.  
In addition to being able to sample using the V-Synth itself, you can  
also import WAV or AIFF format files, so audio data created on  
other devices can easily be loaded into the V-Synth and used.  
Furthermore, you can store data on PC cards for easy exchange of  
sound data.  
4
Retains sound quality, while implementing the above three  
advantages.  
VariPhrase overcomes many problems that conventional  
samplers and digital recorders have with audio phrases.  
Typical issues with Digital Samplers and Digital recorders  
A fu ll co m p le m e n t o f e x te rn a l  
in te rfa ce s  
Changing tempo affects Pitch.  
Changing the pitch of phrases affects tempo and formant of  
the sound.  
The digital audio interface supports both optical and coaxial  
connections, and sampling rates of 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, and 96 kHz,  
making the V-Synth ideal for any digital music production  
environment.  
Limited control of audio phrases. You cannot adjust a  
partial section of a sound in real-time.  
Most samplers require multiple samples over limited key  
ranges for realistic playback of a sound.  
Samples of the same tempo must be available for  
performing chords, otherwise the notes of the chord will be  
out of sync.  
The USB connector supports file transfer or MIDI communication,  
and you can select its function depending on your needs.  
The PC card slot makes it easy to store large amounts of data on  
commercially available media such as Compact Flash or SmartMedia  
via a PC card adaptor.  
Pitch or tempo changes on Digital samplers tends to  
degrade audio quality.  
V-LIN K fu n ctio n  
VariPhrase solves all of these problems.  
is a function that links music and video  
performance. By using a video device that supports V-LINK, you can  
easily link various video effects with your performances.  
If the V-Synth is connected to an Edirol DV-7PR, you can use the V-  
Synths controllers to adjust the brightness or color of the image,  
vary the playback speed, or switch between images.  
1 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Pa n e l De scrip tio n s  
Fro n t Pa n e l  
1
1 2  
3
Vo lu m e Slid e r  
Adjusts the overall volume that is output from the rear panel MAIN  
OUT jacks and PHONES jack.(Quick Start; p. 4)  
5
8
9
10  
4
2
IN PUT  
[PEAK] (Pe a k In d ica to r)  
6
7
This will light when the input volume is too high.  
[LEVEL]  
Adjusts the volume of the signal input through the INPUT jacks on  
the rear panel. (p. 57)  
17  
3
D BEAM  
You can apply a variety of effects to sounds simply by moving your  
hand. (p. 29)  
5
V-LIN K  
In d ica to rs (L, R)  
If the D Beam controller is on, these will light when you move your  
hand over the controller.  
Enables or disables control of an externally connected V-LINK  
device.  
[O N / O FF] (TIME TRIP, TIME, PITCH,  
ASSIGN ABLE)  
6
ASSIGN ABLE CO N TRO L  
Switches the D Beam controller on/ off. The effect to be controlled  
can be selected by pressing the relevant button.  
TIME TRIP: Apply the Time Trip effect.  
You can assign a variety of parameters and functions to the two  
knobs ([C1], [C2]), and use them to modify the sound in realtime.  
TIME: Apply the Time Control effect.  
PITCH: Apply the Pitch Control effect.  
7
ARPEGGIO  
ASSIGNABLE: Apply the effect that is specified for each sound.  
Here you can control the arpeggiator.  
4
TIME TRIP PAD  
[TEMPO ]  
By touching the pad surface with your finger you can apply a variety  
of effects to the sound.  
Adjusts the tempo of the arpeggios.  
[O N / O FF]  
In d ica to r  
Switches the Arpeggiator on/ off.  
This will light when you touch the Time Trip Pad.  
[HO LD]  
[TIME TRIP]  
Switches the Arpeggiator hold on/ off.  
Switches to the Time Trip effect.  
[ASSIGN ABLE]  
Switches to the effect that is specified for each patch.  
[HO LD]  
Switches hold on/ off for the effect controlled by the Time Trip pad.  
1 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
Pa n e l De scrip tio n s  
10  
Disp la y  
12  
13  
This displays information regarding the operation you are  
performing.  
11  
11  
VALUE Dia l  
14  
15  
16  
This is used to modify values. If you hold down [SHIFT] as you turn  
the VALUE dial, the value will change in greater increments.  
[DEC/ -], [IN C/ +]  
This is used to modify values. If you keep on holding down one  
button while pressing the other, the value change accelerates. If you  
press one of these buttons while holding down [SHIFT], the value  
will change in bigger increments. (p. 20)  
[
], [ ], [ ], [ ] (Cu rso r Bu tto n s)  
Moves the cursor location up/ down/ left/ right. (p. 20)  
8
KEYBO ARD  
[MO DE]  
Here you can change the pitch range of the keyboard.  
Opens the Mode Menu window.  
[TRAN SPO SE]  
[SHIFT]  
Specifies transposing the keyboard in semitone steps. (p. 22)  
Pressing this button while holding down [-OCT] or [+OCT] allows  
you to set the desired amount of transposition.  
This button is used in conjunction with other buttons to execute  
various functions.  
[-O CT], [+O CT]  
[EXIT]  
These buttons adjust the pitch of the keyboard in octave steps.  
Return to the PLAY screen, or close the currently open window. In  
some screens, this causes the currently executing function to be  
aborted.  
9
PATCH PALETTE  
12  
STRUCTURE  
Here you can register and recall your favorite patches.  
Here you can turn each sound-producing element (section) on or off.  
[N UMBER] (1 –8 )  
[1 ], [2 ], [3 ]  
These buttons let you select/ register your favorite patches.  
Switches the structure type (the way in which the sections are  
connected).  
[BAN K]  
You can change the Patch Palette bank by holding down this button  
and pressing [NUMBER] (1–8)  
[O SC1 ], [O SC2 ], [MO D], [CO SM1 ], [CO SM2 ],  
[TVA]  
[PATCH ASSIGN ]  
These buttons switch the corresponding section on/ off.  
Only the buttons of the structure type selected by [1], [2], or [3] are  
active.  
You can register the currently selected patch as a favorite patch by  
holding down this button and pressing [NUMBER] (1–8).  
1 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Pa n e l De scrip tio n s  
13  
15  
CO SM1 , CO SM2  
EFFECTS  
Here you can switch the onboard effects (multi-effects, chorus,  
reverb) on/ off. When an effect is on, the indicator for its button will  
light.  
Here you can adjust the COSM sections.  
These knobs are active when COSM is on (indicator lit). The result of  
adjusting these knobs will depend on the COSM type that is selected.  
[MFX]  
[W IDTH]/ [CUTO FF]/ [P1 ]  
Switches multi-effects on and off.  
WIDTH: Adjusts the width when SBF (Side Band Filter) is selected.  
CUTOFF: Adjusts the cutoff frequency when TVF is selected.  
P1: Adjusts the parameter specified for the type when other types  
are selected.  
[CHO RUS]  
Switches chorus on and off.  
[REVERB]  
[DETUN E]/ [RESO ]/ [P2 ]  
Switches reverb on and off.  
DETUNE: Adjusts the detune when SBF (Side Band Filter) is  
selected.  
RESO: Adjusts the resonance when TVF is selected.  
P2: Adjusts the parameter specified for the type when other types  
are selected.  
14  
O SC1 , O SC2  
Here you can adjust the oscillator section.  
These knobs are active if the oscillator is on (indicator lit). The result  
of adjusting these knob will depend on the oscillator type that is  
selected.  
16  
TVA  
Here you can adjust the TVA section.  
[PITCH]  
These sliders are active when the TVA is on (indicator lit).  
This modifies the pitch.  
[A]  
[TIME]/ [PW ]  
This modifies the Attack Time.  
TIME: This modifies the time.  
[D]  
PW: This modifies the pulse width.  
This modifies the Decay Time.  
[FO RMAN T]/ [FAT]  
[S]  
FORMANT: This modifies the formant.  
FAT: Adjusts the fatness of the sound when using an analog  
oscillator.  
This modifies the Sustain Level.  
[R]  
[LFO DP1 ], [LFO DP2 ], [LFO DP3 ]  
This modifies the Release Time.  
These knobs adjust the depth of the LFO that is applied to the  
parameters of the knobs located above each knob.  
You can also use these sliders to make envelope settings in the  
envelope setting screens of other sections.  
[LFO RATE]  
This modifies the LFO rate.  
17  
Pitch Be n d / Mo d u la tio n Le ve r  
[LEVEL]  
This allows you to control pitch bend or apply vibrato.  
This modifies the volume.  
(Quick Start; p. 17)  
1 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
Pa n e l De scrip tio n s  
Re a r Pa n e l  
fig.00-02  
fig.00-03  
fig.00-07  
MIDI Co n n e cto rs (IN , O UT, THRU)  
These connectors can be connected to other MIDI devices to receive  
and transmit MIDI messages.  
PO W ER Sw itch  
Press to turn the power on/ off. (Quick Start; p. 4)  
AC In le t  
fig.00-08  
Connect the included power cord to this inlet. (Quick Start; p. 3)  
fig.00-04  
CTRL 1 , CTLR 2 PEDAL Ja ck  
You can connect optional expression pedals (EV-5, etc.) to these  
jacks. By assigning a desired function to a pedal, you can use it to  
select or modify sound or perform various other control.  
PC CARD Slo t  
A PC card can be inserted here.  
HO LD PEDAL Ja ck  
An optional pedal switch (DP series) can be connected to this jack for  
For details on installing the included PC card protector, refer to  
use as a hold pedal. (Quick Start; p. 18)  
fig.00-09  
fig.00-05  
IN PUT Ja ck s (L, R)  
An external audio source such as a CD player can be connected to  
USB Co n n e cto r  
these jacks for sampling or external input.  
This is a USB connector. You can connect it to your personal  
GAIN Sw itch  
computer to send or receive files and MIDI messages.  
This selects the input gain of the INPUT jacks.  
Set this to the “MIC” position if connecting a mic, or to the “LINE”  
position if connecting any other type of device.  
DIGITAL AUDIO IN TERFACE Co n n e cto r (O PTICAL  
IN / O UT, CO AXIAL IN / O UT)  
(conforming to S/ P DIF).  
fig.00-10  
These connectors input/ output a digital audio signal (stereo). The  
output signal is identical to the signal that is output from the MAIN  
OUT jacks.  
DIRECT O UT Ja ck s (L, R)  
S/ P DIF is a digital interface format used for consumer digital  
audio devices.  
This jack is a stereo output of the sound unprocessed by onboard  
effects. An external effects processor or other devices can be  
connected to these jacks.  
fig.00-06  
MAIN O UT Ja ck s (L (MO N O ), R)  
These jacks output the audio signal to the connected mixer/ amplifier  
system in stereo. For mono output, use the L jack.  
(Quick Start; p. 3)  
LCD CO N TRAST Kn o b  
Adjusts the display contrast. (Quick Start; p. 5)  
PHO N ES Ja ck  
This is the jack for connecting headphones (sold separately).  
(Quick Start; p. 3)  
1 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
O ve rvie w o f th e V-Sy n th  
Ho w th e V-Sy n th Is O rg a n ize d  
Section name  
Function  
OSC1, OSC2  
This section generates the sound on which  
a patch is based. The sound is produced ei-  
ther by built-in preset waves or sampled  
waves, or by calculating an analog model-  
ing waveform. An external audio input  
source can also be used.  
Ba sic Stru ctu re  
Broadly speaking, the V-Synth consists of a controller section and a  
sound generator section.  
fig.01-01.e  
MOD  
This section mixes and modulates the two  
audio signals.  
COSM1, COSM2  
This section applies a wide variety of pro-  
cessing including filtering. This differs  
from the effects in that effects are applied to  
the final mix of the sound, COSM is applied  
to each individual note.  
Sound  
Generator  
Section  
TVA  
This section creates time-variant changes in  
volume, and sets the pan position.  
Play  
Effects  
function  
Controller Section (controllers such as  
MFX  
The multi-effects are multi-purpose effects  
that can completely change the nature of  
the patchs sound. There are 41 different ef-  
fects types; select and use the type that suits  
your aims.  
keyboard, pitch bend lever, etc.)  
The right side of the V-Synths front panel is where the controls for  
the Sound Generator section are located. The controls on the left side  
CHORUS  
Applies a chorus effect to give the sound  
depth and spaciousness.  
are mainly those of the Controller section.  
REVERB  
Applies a reverb effect to add ambience to  
the sound.  
So u n d Ge n e ra to r Se ctio n  
The sounds you play on the V-Synth are called patches. Each patch  
Co n tro lle r Se ctio n  
consists of a structure (an arrangement of its six sections), zones  
(which allow for sixteen individual setups for sixteen key ranges),  
The controller section consists of the keyboard, pitch bend/  
modulation lever, time trip pad, D Beam controller, C1/ C2 knobs,  
arpeggiator, and pedals connected to the rear panel. When you  
manipulate these controllers, they send performance data to the  
sound generator section, causing the V-Synth to create sound.  
and three effects.  
fig.01-02.e  
Zone 16  
Zone 15  
Patch  
Zone 2  
Zone 1  
Po ly p h o n y  
The maximum polyphony of the V-Synth depends on the OSC and  
COSM types used by the patch.  
Changing the effect type or switching effects on/ off does not  
affect the available polyphony.  
Ab o u t Mu ltitim b ra l Pe rfo rm a n ce  
The V-Synth allows up to 16-part multitimbral operation, and can be  
played multitimbrally by performance data sent from an external  
device. You can use the V-Synth to play the sounds of a song you  
created on your sequencer, or as part of an ensemble. From the  
keyboard you can play only the patch that is assigned to part 1. The  
PATCH Information window shows you the patch that is assigned  
A sound module that allows you to control multiple sounds  
independently in this way is called a multitimbral sound module.  
1 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
O ve rvie w o f th e V-Sy n th  
W o rk Are a / Te m p o ra ry Are a  
Me m o ry  
When you turn on the power of the V-Synth, or when you load a  
project in Disk mode, the project data is placed in temporary  
memory called the work area.  
Me m o ry Stru ctu re  
fig.01-03.e  
Sampling and sample editing operations modify the data that is in  
the work area.  
V-Synth  
The currently playable patch data is then further placed (from the  
work area) into a location called the temporary area. This means  
that even after editing a patch, you can return to the unedited  
condition by once again recalling that patch.  
Internal Memory  
Project  
Patch  
512  
Since sample data and patch data that you edit will disappear if you  
simply turn off the power, you must save (SAVE/ WRITE) it if you  
want to keep your changes.  
Wave  
999  
PC Ca rd s  
System  
Internal memory can hold only one project, but you can use  
commercially available PC cards to store additional projects.  
Sa m p lin g Me m o ry  
Preset Memory  
The amount of memory you can use for sampling will depend on the  
state of the project that is currently loaded into the work area. With  
the factory-set project, there is approximately 115 seconds (stereo) /  
230 seconds (monaural) of sampling memory. If you delete the  
factory-set waves, you will be able to use a maximum of  
Select  
Save  
Work Area  
Temporary Area  
approximately 280 seconds (stereo) / 560 seconds (monaural) of  
sampling memory. However since a maximum of approximately 56  
seconds (stereo) / 113 seconds (monaural) can be saved in internal  
memory, you will need to use a commercially available PC card if  
you want to store more samples than this.  
USB  
PC Card  
* The above values are for when the sample is encoded using the “LITE”  
type.  
Project  
Load  
Save  
Patch  
512  
Wave  
999  
The factory-set waves can be restored using the Factory Reset  
System  
Computer  
Pre se t Me m o ry  
Preset memory contains the state of the internal memory when the  
unit is shipped from the factory. If, after erasing the internal  
memory, you once again want to use the factory-set patches or  
waves, you can either perform the Factory Reset operation or use  
Disk mode to import the factory data from preset memory.  
Pro je ct  
The largest unit of memory used by the V-Synth is the project. A  
project contains up to 512 patches, up to 999 waves, and various  
system settings.  
The V-Synth uses one project at a time.  
USB  
In te rn a l Me m o ry  
If you connect the V-Synth to your computer via a USB cable,  
projects, patches, and wave data in the V-Synths internal memory or  
on a PC card can be saved (backed up) to the hard disk or other  
media on your computer.  
The V-Synth has internal memory that stores a project. When the V-  
Synth is shipped from the factory, this memory already contains  
patch and wave data, but you are free to overwrite any of this. You  
can always restore the memory to the factory-set contents (Factory  
Reset).  
In addition, wave data created on the V-Synth can also be used by  
software running on your computer, or wave data created by your  
computer software can be used on the V-Synth.  
1 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
O ve rvie w o f th e V-Sy n th  
Sa m p le Mo d e  
Ba sic O p e ra tio n o f th e V-Sy n th  
fig.SAMPLE_50  
Ch a n g in g O p e ra tin g Mo d e s  
([MO DE])  
The V-Synth has eight operating modes: Patch mode, Sample mode,  
System mode, Disk mode, USB mode, Calibration mode, Factory  
reset mode and Demo play mode. To access the desired V-Synth  
feature, you must select the appropriate mode.  
Heres how to change modes.  
1 . Press [MODE].  
The V-SYNTH MODE MENU window appears.  
fig.MODE_50  
In this mode, you can sample the waves that form the basis of the  
sounds you create, and edit the sampled waves.  
Sy ste m Mo d e  
fig.SYSTEM_50  
2 . Touch the touch screen to select the desired mode.  
When you select a mode, the screen for that mode appears. The  
currently selected mode is shown in the upper left of each  
In this mode, you can set the overall behavior of the V-Synth, such as  
its tuning and how it handles received MIDI messages.  
screen.  
fig.01-04  
Disk Mo d e  
fig.DISK_50  
Pa tch Mo d e  
fig.PATCH_50  
In this mode, you can perform operations related to disks, such as  
saving data on a disk or loading data from a disk.  
In this mode you can play a single patch from the keyboard, and edit  
patch settings.  
1 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
O ve rvie w o f th e V-Sy n th  
USB Mo d e  
Ba sic To u ch Scre e n O p e ra tio n  
fig.USB_50  
The V-Synth features a touch screen. The touch screen lets you  
perform a variety of operations by lightly touching the screen.  
The touch screen responds to a light touch. Pressing the touch  
screen with too much force, or with a hard object, may damage  
it. Be careful not to apply excessive force, and touch it only with  
your finger.  
En a b lin g / Disa b lin g th e Be e p To n e  
You can specify whether or not a beep tone will be heard when you  
touch a valid point on the touch screen.  
In this mode, you can connect the V-Synth to your computer and  
exchange patch or wave data.  
Ca lib ra tio n Mo d e  
At the factory setting, the beep tone will be sounded.  
fig.CALIBRATION_50  
1 . In the upper right of the screen, touch <>.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.01-05_50  
In this mode you can adjust the response of the touch screen and D  
Beam controller.  
2 . In the pulldown menu, touch <Beep> to add a check mark  
().  
Fa cto ry Re se t Mo d e  
fig.FACTORY_50  
With this setting, the beep tone will be heard. If you perform the  
same procedure once again, the check mark will be cleared and  
the beep tone will no longer be heard.  
If you have turned off the beep tone, a “” appears in the title  
area at the top of the screen when you touch a valid point on the  
touch screen.  
fig.01-06  
In this mode, you can reset to default factory settings.  
De m o Pla y Mo d e  
fig.DEMO_50  
In this mode, you can play the built-in demo songs.  
Demo Song: New Toys  
Amin Bhatia © 2002 Roland Corporation  
1 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
O ve rvie w o f th e V-Sy n th  
Mo vin g th e Cu rso r  
Ed itin g a Va lu e  
A single screen or window displays multiple parameters or items for  
selection. To edit a parameters value, move the cursor to the value.  
To select an item, move the cursor to the item. The cursor is a black  
rectangle, and the parameter value or item you select with the cursor  
To edit a value, you can use the VALUE dial, [INC/ +] [DEC/ -], or  
drag on the touch screen.  
In each V-Synth screen, you can select a value using the cursor as  
described earlier, and modify its value.  
is highlighted (displayed in inverted colors).  
fig.01-07.e  
Cursor  
Each parameter has its own range of possible values. You cannot  
set any value smaller than the minimum value or greater than  
the maximum value.  
VALUE Dia l  
Turning the VALUE dial clockwise increases the value, and turning  
it counterclockwise decreases its value. Hold down [SHIFT] as you  
move the VALUE dial to increase value increments to make large  
value changes more quickly.  
fig.01-10  
Cu rso r Bu tto n s  
Press [  
], [  
], [  
], or [  
] (the cursor buttons) to move the  
cursor.  
fig.01-08  
[IN C/ +] a n d [DEC/ -]  
Press [INC/ +] to increase the selected value, and [DEC/ -] to  
decrease it. Keep the button pressed for continuous adjustment. For  
faster value increases, keep [INC/ +] pressed down and press [DEC/  
-]. To decrease values quickly, keep [DEC/ -] pressed down and  
[
[
[
[
]: moves the cursor up.  
]: moves the cursor down.  
]: moves the cursor to the left.  
]: moves the cursor to the right.  
press [INC/ +].  
fig.01-11  
To u ch Scre e n  
Directly touch a parameter value to move the cursor.  
fig.01-09  
To u ch Scre e n  
Touch a parameter value, and drag your finger up/ down or left/  
right. Dragging upward or to the right increases the value, and  
dragging downward or to the left decreases the value.  
fig.01-12  
2 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Pla y in g in Pa tch Mo d e  
Patch mode is the mode in which you can play the keyboard using a  
Fu n ctio n s in th e PATCH PLAY Scre e n  
fig.02-01.e  
single sound (patch or rhythm set).  
Indicates a list of patches.  
Indicates the current mode.  
Ab o u t th e PATCH PLAY Scre e n  
Indicates the MIDI transmit channel (Tx) and receive channel (Rx).  
Indicates/sets the tempo.  
Disp la y in g PATCH PLAY Scre e n  
To access the PATCH PLAY screen, use the following procedure.  
1 . Press [MODE].  
Sets the Transpose and the Octave Shift.  
Indicates the name and zone  
of the selected patch.  
Indicates/sets the zone  
The V-SYNTH Mode MENU window appears.  
Opens the pulldown menu.  
fig.MODE_50  
Indicates/selects the  
number and name  
of the selected patch.  
Graphically displays  
the parameter settings  
of the selected patch.  
2 . Touch <PATCH>.  
Displays the various patch setting screens.  
You will enter Patch mode, and the PATCH PLAY screen  
appears.  
fig.PATCH_50  
Se le ctin g a Pa tch  
V-Synth contains 512 patches for you to select and use.  
All of these patches can be overwritten.  
fig.02-02.e  
Patch number  
2 . Move the cursor to the patch number, either by using the  
cursor buttons or by touching the patch number display.  
3 . Turn the VALUE dial, or press [INC/+][DEC/-] to select a  
patch number. You can also do this by dragging on the  
touch screen.  
2 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Pla y in g in Pa tch Mo d e  
4 . To view other patches, touch <017-032>–<241-256>, located  
at either side of the screen. To view higher-numbered  
patches, touch <257-512>, located at the bottom of the  
screen.  
Se le ctin g Fa vo rite Pa tch e s (Pa tch  
Pa le tte )  
You can bring together your favorite and most frequently used  
patches in one place by registering them into the patch palette. By  
using this function, you can rapidly select favorite patches from  
internal memory or a Wave Expansion Board.  
5 . Touch <OK>.  
The patch is selected and the PATCH List window closes.  
For details on how to register a patch in the patch palette, refer  
Tra n sp o sin g th e Ke y b o a rd in  
Se m ito n e Ste p s (Tra n sp o se )  
Transpose changes keyboard pitch in units of semitones.  
This function is useful when you play transposed instruments such  
as trumpet or clarinet following a printed score.  
2 . Press NUMBER [1]–[8] to select a patch.  
fig.02-03  
1 . Press [TRANSPOSE] to light indicator.  
This turns Transpose on.  
2 . While holding down [TRANSPOSE], press [+OCT] or [-OCT]  
to transpose the keyboard.  
3 . To switch the patch palette bank, hold down [BANK] and  
press NUMBER [1]–[8].  
Pressing [+OCT] once while holding down [TRANSPOSE] will  
raise the keyboard one semitone.  
When you press [BANK], the indicator of the currently selected  
bank button (NUMBER [1]–[8]) will blink.  
Pressing [-OCT] once while holding down [TRANSPOSE] will  
lower the keyboard one semitone.  
If you continue pressing [PATCH ASSIGN] or [BANK], the  
PATCH PALETTE window will appear. In this window you can  
view the patches that are registered in the currently selected  
bank.  
The specified Transpose setting will be shown in the “Trans”  
indication of PATCH PLAY screen.  
fig.02-06  
Se le ctin g Pa tch e s fro m th e List  
You can display a list of patches and select a patch from that list.  
2 . Touch <List> in the upper left area of the display.  
The PATCH List window appears.  
fig.02-04_50  
Alternatively, you can move the cursor to “Trans” in the PATCH  
PLAY screen and turn the VALUE dial or use [INC/ +] [DEC/ -]  
to make the setting. You can also do this by dragging on the  
touch screen.  
3 . To turn off Transpose, press [TRANSPOSE] once again so  
that its indicator goes off.  
The Transpose setting you make will be maintained.  
3 . Select a patch from the list.  
There is a single Transpose setting (Setup parameter) for the  
entire V-Synth. The changed setting will be remembered even if  
you switch patches.  
Either turn the VALUE dial or use [INC/ +][DEC/ -] to select a  
patch. You can also select a patch by touching it on the display.  
If you select a patch in the list and play the keyboard, the  
selected patch will sound. This is a useful way to audition the  
sound of a patch.  
2 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Pla y in g in Pa tch Mo d e  
Tra n sp o sin g th e Ke y b o a rd in  
O cta ve Un its (O cta ve Sh ift)  
Pla y in g Sin g le N o te s (Mo n o )  
When using a patch for a naturally monophonic instrument such as  
sax or flute, it is effective to play in mono.  
The Octave Shift function transposes the pitch of the keyboard in 1  
octave units (-3– +3 octaves).  
For playing a bass part more easily using your right hand, transpose  
the keyboard down by 1 or 2 octaves.  
2 . At the bottom of the screen, touch <Common>.  
3 . In the left side of the screen, touch the <General> tab.  
1 . Press [+OCT] or [-OCT] and its indicator will light.  
Pressing [+OCT] once will raise the keyboard 1 octave.  
Pressing [-OCT] once will lower the keyboard 1 octave.  
The specified Octave Shift setting will be shown in the “Oct”  
The Patch Edit Com General screen appears.  
fig.02-07_50  
indication of PATCH PLAY screen.  
fig.02-05  
4 . In the “Mono/Poly” field, touch <  
>.  
Now you can play in mono mode.  
Cre a tin g Sm o o th Pitch Ch a n g e s  
(Po rta m e n to )  
Alternatively, you can move the cursor to “Oct” in the PATCH  
PLAY screen and turn the VALUE dial or use [INC/ +] [DEC/ -]  
to make the setting. You can also do this by dragging on the  
touch screen.  
Portamento is an effect which smoothly changes the pitch from the  
first-played key to the next-played key. By applying portamento  
when Mono mode is selected (see the preceding item), you can  
simulate performance effects such as slurring on a violin.  
There is a single Octave Shift setting (Setup parameter) for the  
entire V-Synth. The changed setting will be remembered even if  
you switch patches.  
fig.02-07_50  
2 . To turn off the Octave Shift function, press the other button  
[+OCT] or [-OCT] of that pressed in step 1. The indicator will  
go off.  
2 . In the “Portamento” field, touch the on/off switch to turn it  
“ON.”  
Youre ready to play portamento.  
3 . When you want to change the portamento setting, edit the  
following parameters in the screen of step 2.  
Mode (Portamento Mode), Type (Portamento Type), Time  
(Portamento Time), Time Velo Sens (Portamento Time Velocity  
Sens)  
2 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Pla y in g in Pa tch Mo d e  
Usin g a n Ex te rn a l MIDI Ke y b o a rd  
to Pla y Arp e g g io s  
Pla y in g Arp e g g io s  
(Arp e g g ia to r)  
You can also use the keyboard of an external MIDI instrument to  
The V-Synth comes with an arpeggiator that can play arpeggios  
automatically. Once you turn on the arpeggiator, the keys you press  
will automatically be played as an arpeggio.  
play arpeggios.  
1 . Use a MIDI cable to connect the V-Synth’s MIDI IN connector  
to the MIDI OUT connector of your external MIDI keyboard.  
2 . Press ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] to make the indicator light.  
3 . Touch <> in the upper right of the screen.  
The arpeggiator is turned on.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.01-05_50  
3 . Play the keyboard.  
The V-Synth arpeggiates what youve played.  
4 . To adjust the tempo of the arpeggio, turn ARPEGGIO  
[TEMPO].  
Turning the knob toward the right will speed up the tempo, and  
turning it toward the left will slow down the tempo.  
5 . To finish playing arpeggios, press ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF]  
again so the indicator turns off.  
Ho ld in g a n Arp e g g io  
By using the following procedure, you can produce arpeggios even  
4 . In the pulldown menu, touch <System>.  
without continuing to press the keyboard.  
5 . At the bottom of the screen, touch <Controller>.  
6 . In the left side of the screen, touch the <KBD> tab.  
1 . Press ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] to turn the Arpeggiator on.  
2 . Press ARPEGGIO [HOLD] to make the indicator light.  
3 . Play the keyboard.  
The SYSTEM Ctrl KBD screen appears.  
fig.02-08_50  
4 . If you play a different chord or notes while the arpeggio is  
being held, the arpeggio will change accordingly.  
5 . To cancel Arpeggio Hold, press ARPEGGIO [HOLD] again.  
W h e n Usin g a Ho ld Pe d a l  
If you play an arpeggio while pressing the hold pedal, the arpeggio  
will continue to be played even if you release the keyboard.  
1 . Connect an optional pedal switch (DP series) to the HOLD  
PEDAL jack.  
7 . In the “Remote KBD Sw” field, touch the on/off switch to  
2 . Press ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] to turn the Arpeggiator on.  
turn it “ON.”  
3 . Play the keyboard while pressing the hold pedal.  
8 . Play your external MIDI keyboard.  
4 . To play another chord, release the pedal, press it again as  
you play the next chord.  
2 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Pla y in g in Pa tch Mo d e  
Ma k in g Arp e g g ia to r Se ttin g s  
Cre a tin g a n O rig in a l Arp e g g io  
Pa tte rn (Pa tte rn Ed it)  
2 . At the bottom of the screen, touch <Common>.  
3 . In the left side of the screen, touch the Arpeggio> tab.  
You can create your own arpeggio pattern that specifies how an  
arpeggio will be sounded. This gives you even more interesting  
ways to use arpeggios.  
The PATCH Edit Com Arpeggio screen appears.  
fig.02-09_50  
An arpeggio pattern is a set of data that can be up to 32 steps  
(horizontally) x 16 lines (vertically).  
An arpeggio pattern can be saved for an individual patch as part  
of the patch settings. This means that you can create a patch  
designed specifically for that arpeggio pattern (or vice versa).  
Ab o u t th e Pa tte rn Ed it W in d o w  
2 . Touch <Pattern Edit>.  
In this screen you can set the following arpeggiator parameters.  
Arpeggio Switch: Switches the Arpeggiator on/ off.  
Hold: Switch between Hold On/ Hold Off for the Arpeggiator  
performance.  
The Pattern Edit window will appear.  
fig.02-09a.e  
Pattern input area  
Patch Tempo: Specify the tempo of an arpeggio.  
Octave Range: Specify the range of the arpeggio performance,  
in octave units.  
KBD Velo: Specify the note strength of the keys you play.  
Accent Rate: Vary the strength and note length of the accents to  
modify the rhythmic feel (groove) of the performance.  
Motif: Specifies how the arpeggio will be sounded.  
Shuffle Duration: Create shuffle rhythms by modifying the  
timing at which notes are sounded.  
Shuffle Resolution: Specify the timing of the notes in terms of  
note value.  
Cursor  
Sta te  
For details regarding each parameter, refer to “Arpeggio” (p.  
Specifies the status of each line.  
NOTE: Note pitch  
CTRL: Control change  
Arpeggiator settings can be saved with each patch as part of the  
patch settings. This means that you can create patches that  
contain the most effective settings.  
N o te / CC (N o te / Co n tro l Ch a n g e )  
Specifies the note number or control change number assigned to  
each line. If Status is “NOTE,” this will be a note number (C-1–G9). If  
Status is “CTRL,” this will be a control change number (0–127).  
Pa tte rn In p u t Are a  
This area is where you input or edit notes or control changes. The  
symbols have the following meaning:  
: Note  
=: Tie  
: Control change  
Va lu e  
Shows the velocity of the note or the value of the control change  
selected in the pattern input area.  
2 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Pla y in g in Pa tch Mo d e  
0 , 3 2 , 6 4 , 9 6 , 1 2 7 , Tie / Clr  
Cre a tin g a Pa tte rn b y Pla y in g in Re a l  
Tim e (Re a l Re c)  
When inputting notes: When you touch one of these buttons, a note  
with the velocity shown on that button will be input at the cursor  
location within the pattern input area. When you touch <Tie>, a tie  
will be input at the cursor location.  
This method lets you create a pattern in a way similar to realtime  
recording on a sequencer. Your playing on the V-Synths keyboard  
and your controller operations will be recorded “as is.”  
When inputting control changes: A control change with the value  
shown on that button will be input at the cursor location within the  
pattern input area. When you touch <Clr>, the selected control  
change will be erased.  
1 . Specify the Grid and End Point of the arpeggio pattern that  
you will be creating.  
Move the cursor to each value box and set the value.  
When you are editing, these buttons modify the velocity of the note  
that is selected in the pattern input area, or the value of the control  
change.  
2 . Touch <Real Rec>.  
The V-Synth will be in realtime-input standby mode, and the  
metronome will sound a guide rhythm.  
fig.02-09c_50  
You can also input the note velocity or control change value by  
using the VALUE dial or [INC/ +][DEC/ -].  
Co n tro lle r  
When you operate the Time Trip pad (TTPadX/ Y), D Beam  
controller (DBeamL/ R), or assignable controllers (Ctrl_1/ 2), the  
value is shown here.  
Grid  
Specifies the note value that will correspond to “one step” of the  
3 . If you want to adjust the tempo, turn ARPEGGIO [TEMPO].  
Turn the knob toward the right to make the tempo faster, or  
toward the left to make it slower.  
arpeggio pattern.  
fig.02-09b.e  
(Quarter note),  
(Eighth note),  
(Dotted eighth note),  
(Thirty-second note)  
(Sixteenth note),  
(Dotted sixteenth note),  
4 . In time with the guide rhythm sounded by the metronome,  
play the V-Synth’s keyboard and operate the controllers.  
You can repeatedly record over the pattern length (number of  
steps) you specified in step 1. On each pass, you can add new  
notes and control changes to build up the pattern.  
En d Po in t  
Specifies the pattern length as a number of steps (1–32).  
Cle a r  
The notes (specified pitches) and control changes in a single  
pattern cannot exceed a total of 16. All further (seventeenth and  
later) notes having a new pitch or control changes will not be  
recorded.  
Re a l Re c (Re a ltim e Re co rd in g )  
Ste p Re c (Ste p Re co rd in g )  
5 . When you are finished with realtime input, touch <Stop>.  
The metronome guide will stop sounding.  
6 . Press ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] to turn on the arpeggiator, and  
play the keyboard to hear your realtime-recorded pattern.  
2 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Pla y in g in Pa tch Mo d e  
Cre a tin g a Pa tte rn b y In p u ttin g O n e  
Ste p a t a Tim e (Ste p Re c)  
Era sin g a Pa tte rn (Cle a r)  
Heres how to erase data from the pattern. You can erase a specific  
line or the entire pattern.  
This method lets you create a pattern in a way similar to step-  
recording on a sequencer. You can record notes and control changes  
by inputting them one by one.  
1 . To specify a line that you want to erase, move the cursor to  
that line.  
1 . Specify the End Point of the arpeggio pattern that you want  
2 . Touch <Clear>.  
to create.  
A window like the following will appear.  
Move the cursor to the End Point value box and make the  
setting.  
fig.02-09e_50  
2 . Touch <Step Rec>.  
The V-Synth will be in step-input standby mode.  
fig.02-09d_50  
3 . To erase a line of data, touch <LINE CLEAR>. To erase the  
entire pattern, touch <ALL CLEAR>. If you decide you don’t  
want to clear anything, touch <CANCEL>.  
3 . Play the V-Synth’s keyboard or operate a controller to input  
the first step.  
You can repeatedly record over the pattern length (number of  
steps) you specified in step 1. On each pass, you can add new  
notes and control changes to build up the pattern.  
To input a tie, hold down the key of the note that you want to tie  
and press [ ]. You will advance as many steps as the number  
of times you press [ ].  
Step input records the strength (velocity) with which you press  
the key, and this will be reflected in the level or dynamics of the  
arpeggiated notes.  
Control changes will be input with the value that was in effect  
when you pressed [  
].  
The notes (specified pitches) and control changes in a single  
pattern cannot exceed a total maximum of 16. A newly pitched  
note or a control change that would exceed this total will not be  
recorded.  
Be aware that if you input another note while still holding down  
the key for the previously input note, these notes will be input as  
a chord located at the same step.  
4 . When you are finished with step input, touch <Stop>.  
5 . Press ARPEGGIO [ON/OFF] to turn on the arpeggiator, and  
play the keyboard to hear your step-recorded pattern.  
2 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Pla y in g in Pa tch Mo d e  
[TIME TRIP]: Apply the Time Trip effect.  
Ap p ly in g Va rio u s Effe cts to th e  
So u n d  
[ASSIGNABLE]: Apply the effect that is specified by each patch.  
If [ASSIGNABLE] is on, the effect is applied via matrix control.  
This means that matrix control settings must be made separately.  
Set the matrix control Source to “PAD-Xor “PAD-Y,” and  
specify the parameter to be controlled in Destination. For details  
on these settings, refer to “Matrix Ctrl” (p. 38).  
The V-Synth provides numerous ways in which you can make your  
performance more expressive, such as the Time Trip pad, D Beam  
controller, and assignable controllers.  
By setting matrix control Source to “TRIP-R,” you can apply the  
Time Trip effect and the matrix control effect simultaneously. In  
this case, turn [TIME TRIP] on.  
Ap p ly in g a n Effe ct b y To u ch in g  
Yo u r Fin g e r to th e Pa d (Tim e Trip  
Pa d )  
3 . While you play the keyboard to produce sound, place your  
fingertip on the Time Trip pad and move your finger in the  
following way.  
You can apply a variety of effects by touching your fingertip to the  
Time Trip pad located at the left side of the V-Synths panel.  
If [TIME TRIP] is on  
The effect will be applied when you move your finger in a circle  
W h a t is th e Tim e Trip fu n ctio n ?  
on the Time Trip pad.  
fig.02-11  
One of the advantages of VariPhrase is that the playback  
location and speed of the wave can be changed in real time. The  
Time Trip function takes advantage of this ability to manually  
control the playback location and speed of the wave. In patches  
that use VariPhrase, switch the Time Trip Pad function to  
“TIME TRIP” to use this function. While playing the keyboard,  
touch the Time Trip pad and the currently sounding wave will  
stop at the current playback location. Then as you move your  
finger from that point in a circle, the wave playback will  
advance in the direction of conventional playback (clockwise),  
or the reverse (counterclockwise). Unlike “scratching” on a  
turntable, this lets you control the playback without affecting  
the pitch, so you can play the sound at the pitch you specify  
from the keyboard.  
You can use the D Beam controller to produce similar results.  
If you are using matrix control as well, the effect will be applied  
when you move your finger from the circumference of the Time  
Trip pad toward the center.  
fig.02-12  
2 . Choose the function that you want to control from the Time  
Trip pad, and press the TIME TRIP PAD button for that  
function.  
fig.02-10  
2 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Pla y in g in Pa tch Mo d e  
If [ASSIGNABLE] is on  
[TIME TRIP]: Apply the Time Trip effect.  
The effect will be applied when you move your finger up/  
down/ left/ right on the Time Trip pad.  
[TIME]: Apply the time control effect.  
[PITCH]: Apply the pitch control effect.  
fig.02-13  
[ASSIGNABLE]: Apply the effect that is specified by each patch.  
By turning [ASSIGNABLE] on, you can apply the effect that is  
specified by each patch. In this case, however, unlike the other  
three functions, simply pressing the button to turn it on will not  
apply an effect. You will also need to make matrix control  
settings. Set the matrix control Source to “BEAM-L” or “BEAM-  
R,” and specify the parameter to be controlled in Destination.  
For details on these settings, refer to “Matrix Ctrl” (p. 38).  
3 . While playing the keyboard to produce sound, place your  
hand over the D Beam, and slowly move it up and down.  
Effects will be applied to the sound according to the button you  
pressed in step 2.  
4 . To turn off the D Beam controller, once again press the  
button that you pressed in step 2, so its indicator goes out.  
By pressing TIME TRIP PAD [HOLD], you can cause the effect to  
be held even after you take your finger off the Time Trip pad.  
The Time Trip Pad settings are saved with each patch. This  
means that you can create patches that contain Time Trip Pad  
settings you like.  
The D Beam controller settings are saved with each patch. This  
means that you can create patches that contain D Beam settings  
you like.  
By assigning a MIDI controller number to the D Beam controller,  
you can use the D Beam to control an external MIDI device that  
is connected. For details, refer to “Beam” (p. 79).  
Ap p ly in g a n Effe ct b y Pa ssin g Yo u r  
Ha n d O ve r th e D Be a m (D Be a m  
Co n tro lle r)  
Th e u sa b le ra n g e o f th e D Be a m co n tro lle r  
The D Beam controller can be used simply by waving your hand  
over it. It can be used to apply various effects, depending on the  
function that is assigned to it. You can also create effects in which the  
sound changes instantaneously, in a way that would not be possible  
by operating a knob or the bender lever.  
The following diagram shows the  
usable range of the D Beam controller.  
Waving your hand outside this range  
will produce no effect.  
The D BEAM indicator will light when  
the D Beam controller is responding.  
The D BEAM indicator will not light if  
you are outside the valid range of the  
D Beam controller.  
2 . Choose the function that you want to control from the D  
Beam controller, and press the D BEAM button for that  
function to turn on the D Beam controller.  
fig.02-14  
The usable range of the D Beam controller will become  
extremely small when used under strong direct sunlight.  
Please be aware of this when using the D Beam controller  
outside.  
2 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Pla y in g in Pa tch Mo d e  
Ap p ly in g a n Effe ct b y Tu rn in g a  
Kn o b (Assig n a b le Co n tro lle r)  
Sy n ch ro n izin g Mu sic a n d  
Vid e o W h ile Yo u Pla y th e V-  
Sy n th (V-LIN K)  
You can turn the ASSIGNABLE CONTROL knobs to modify the  
sound in real time.  
The V-Synth lets you use the pitch bend/ modulation lever, Time  
Trip pad, D Beam controller, and C1/ C2 knobs to control an  
externally connected video device that supports V-LINK. This means  
that your performance on the V-Synth can control not only sound  
but also images, producing sound and video effects that are linked to  
The assignable controllers use matrix control to apply effects to the  
sound. This means that you will need to make matrix control settings  
separately. Set the matrix control Source to “KNOB1” or “KNOB2,”  
and specify the parameter to be controlled in Destination. For  
details on this setting, refer to “Matrix Ctrl” (p. 38).  
your playing.  
fig.02-17.e  
2 . While playing the keyboard to produce sound, turn the  
ASSIGNABLE CONTROL knobs ([C1], [C2]).  
The sound will change according to the function assigned to  
each knob.  
fig.02-16  
The assignable controller settings are saved with each patch.  
This means that you can create patches that contain assignable  
controller settings you like.  
V-Synth Controller Section  
By assigning MIDI controller numbers to the assignable  
controllers, you can turn [C1] or [C2] to control an external MIDI  
device that is connected. For details, refer to “TT Pad/Knob” (p.  
Video  
Sound  
Generator  
Generator  
V-LINK (  
) is a function that provides for the  
play of music and visual material. By using V-LINK function,  
visual effects can be easily linked to, and made part of the  
expressive elements of a performance.  
3 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Pla y in g in Pa tch Mo d e  
Ex a m p le Co n n e ctio n s  
fig.02-18.e  
V-LIN K Fu n ctio n s th a t th e V-Sy n th  
Ca n Co n tro l a n d MIDI Me ssa g e s  
Edirol DV-7PR  
You can assign the following functions to the V-Synths controllers  
to control a V-LINK compatible video device.  
Projector  
V-LINK function  
Transmitted MIDI message  
REMOTE  
Playback Speed  
CC 10 (Panpot)  
Dissolve Time (amount time the CC 5 (Portamento Time)  
video clips overlap)  
Audio (Volume of audio play-  
back)  
CC 7 (Volume)  
Color Cb (color-difference sig-  
nal)  
CC 72 (Release)  
Edirol UM-1  
Display  
Color Cr (color-difference signal) CC 71 (Resonance)  
Brightness  
CC 74 (Cutoff)  
CC 1 (Modulation)  
CC 91 (Reverb)  
CC 94 (Celeste)  
CC 95 (Phaser)  
CC 73 (Attack)  
CC 11 (Expression)  
CC 64 (Hold 1)  
VFX1 (Visual Effects 1)  
VFX2 (Visual Effects 2)  
VFX3 (Visual Effects 3)  
VFX4 (Visual Effects 4)  
Output Fade  
MIDI OUT  
T Bar  
Dual Stream  
Time Trip  
CC 92 (Tremolo)  
CC 93 (Chorus)  
Palette1–8 (Selecting a palette)  
Clip1–8 (Selecting a video clip)  
CC 0 (Bank Select): 00H07H  
Program Change: 00H–07H  
V-Synth  
En te r V-LIN K Mo d e  
1 . Press [V-LINK] so the indicator lights.  
A PATCH PLAY screen like the one shown below appears, and  
the V-Synth will enter V-LINK mode.  
fig.02-19_50  
In this screen you can view the V-LINK functions that are  
assigned to the various controllers.  
For details on how to assign V-LINK functions to the controllers,  
2 . To exit V-LINK mode, press [V-LINK] once again so the  
indicator goes out.  
3 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
With the V-Synth, you have total control over a wide variety of  
settings. Each item that can be set is known as a parameter. When  
you change the values of parameters, you are doing what is referred  
to as Editing. This chapter explains the procedures used in creating  
patches, and the functions of the patch parameters.  
1 . Access the PATCH PLAY screen, and select the patch  
If you want to create all your patches from the ground up, rather  
than the patches that have already been prepared, carry out the  
2 . The parameters are organized into several editing groups.  
Touch one of the buttons at the bottom of the screen to  
select the edit group containing the parameters you want to  
set.  
Ho w to Ma k e th e Pa tch  
Se ttin g s  
Start with an existing patch and edit it to create a new patch. The  
sound of a patch is created by six sections of parameters. When  
editing a patch, you need to be aware of how each section affects the  
overall sound.  
In the PATCH PLAY screen, you can touch the display area for  
each section to jump to the setting screen for that section.  
3 . Touch one of the tabs in the left of the screen to select the  
Fo u r Tip s fo r Ed itin g Pa tch e s  
desired editing screen.  
Select a patch that is similar to the sound you wish to  
create.  
For details on how the parameters are grouped, refer to “Patch  
It’s hard to create a new sound thats exactly what you want if  
you just select a patch and modify its parameters at random. It  
makes sense to start with a patch whose sound is related to  
what you have in mind.  
4 . In each editing screen, touch the touch screen to set the  
parameters.  
Check the Structure setting.  
For details on how to use the touch screen, refer to “Basic  
The structure type is an important parameter which determines  
how the six sections are combined. Before you actually begin  
editing, you should understand how the sections are related to  
each other.  
5 . When editing a parameter that requires you to specify a  
value, move the cursor to the value box of that parameter.  
Then modify the value by either turning the VALUE dial or  
pressing [INC/+] or [DEC/-]. You can also modify a value by  
dragging over the touch screen.  
Decide which section(s) you will use.  
When creating a patch, it is very important to decide which  
section(s) you will use. In the Edit screen of each section, use the  
on/ off switch to specify whether that section will be used (on)  
or not used (off). You can also use the on/ off buttons located in  
the STRUCTURE section of the V-Synth’s panel.  
Turn Effects off.  
6 . Repeat steps 2–5 to complete a patch.  
7 . If you wish to save the changes you’ve made, perform the  
press [EXIT] to return to the PATCH PLAY screen.  
If you return to the PATCH PLAY screen without saving, the  
display will indicate “EDITED,” reminding you that the patch  
settings have been modified.  
Since the V-Synth effects have such a profound impact on its  
sounds, turn them off to listen to the sound itself so you can  
better evaluate the changes youre making. Since you will hear  
the original sound of the patch itself when the effects are turned  
off, the results of your modifications will be easier to hear.  
Actually, sometimes just changing effects settings can give you  
the sound you want.  
If you turn off the power or select a different patch while the  
display indicates “EDITED,” your edited patch will be lost.  
3 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
2 . Touch <> in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
In itia lizin g Pa tch Se ttin g s (PATCH  
In it)  
fig.01-05_50  
“Initialize” means to return the settings of the currently selected  
patch to a standard set of values.  
The Initialize operation will affect only the currently selected  
patch in temporary area; the patches that are stored in internal  
memory and work area will not be affected. If you wish to  
restore all of the V-Synths settings to their factory values,  
1 . Access the PATCH PLAY screen, and select the patch that  
3 . In the pulldown menu, touch <PATCH Copy>.  
2 . Touch <> in the upper right of the screen.  
The PATCH Copy window appears.  
fig.03-02_50  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.01-05_50  
4 . Touch a button in the left side of the screen to select the  
object you want to copy.  
3 . In the pulldown menu, touch <PATCH Init>.  
A window like the following appears.  
fig.03-01_50  
<NAME>: Copy only the patch name.  
<ZONE>: Copy patch settings for one zone.  
<OSC>: Copy oscillator parameter settings. Specify the copy-  
source (Source) and copy-destination (Destination) oscillator  
(OSC1/ OSC2).  
<COSM>: Copy COSM parameter settings. Specify the copy-  
source (Source) and copy-destination (Destination) COSM  
section (COSM1/ COSM2).  
<TVA>: Copy TVA parameter settings.  
<MFX>: Copy MFX settings.  
<CHO>: Copy chorus settings.  
<REV>: Copy reverb settings.  
4 . Touch <EXECUTE>.  
<ARP>: Copy arpeggiator settings.  
The initialization will be carried out, and youll be returned to  
the Patch Edit screen.  
5 . Specify the zone (Zone 01–Zone 16) for the copy source  
(Source) and copy destination (Destination). Move the  
cursor to “Zone**” and make your selection.  
Co p y in g Pa tch Se ttin g s (PATCH  
Co p y )  
6 . Move the cursor to “Src Patch” and select the copy-source  
patch number.  
This operation copies the settings of any desired patch to the  
currently selected patch. You can use this feature to make the editing  
process faster and easier.  
For the Zone Copy, Oscillator Copy, COSM Copy, and TVA  
Copy operations, you can specify the currently selected patch as  
the copy source by setting “SrcPatch” to “TEMP.”  
1 . Access the PATCH PLAY screen, and select the copy-  
7 . Touch <Execute> to execute the copy operation.  
3 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
N a m in g a Pa tch (PATCH  
N a m e )  
Sa vin g Pa tch e s (PATCH W rite )  
Changes you make to sound settings are temporary, and will be lost  
if you turn off the power or select another sound. If you want to keep  
the modified sound, you must save it in the internal (internal  
memory).  
Before you save the patch, heres how to give it a new name.  
1 . Make sure that the patch that you want to name is selected.  
2 . Touch <> in the upper right of the screen.  
When you modify the settings of a patch, the PATCH PLAY screen  
will indicate “EDITED.” Once you save the patch into internal  
memory, the “EDITED” indication goes away.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.03-02a_50  
When you perform the save procedure, the data that previously  
occupied the save destination will be lost. However, the factory  
setting data can be recovered by performing the Factory Reset  
1 . Make sure that the patch you wish to save is selected.  
2 . Touch <> in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.03-03a_50  
3 . In the pulldown menu, touch <PATCH Name>.  
The PATCH Name window appears.  
fig.03-03_50  
3 . In the pulldown menu, touch <PATCH Write>.  
The PATCH Write window appears.  
fig.03-04_50  
4 . Touch the on-screen alphabetic or numeric keys to enter the  
new name in the text box.  
The on-screen keys have the following functions.  
<><>: Move the cursor in the text box to the desired input  
location.  
<SHIFT>: Turn this on when you want to input uppercase letters  
or symbols.  
<Insert>: Turn this on when you want to insert a character at the  
cursor location.  
<Clear>: Erases all characters in the text box.  
<Delete>: Deletes the character at the cursor location.  
<Back>: Deletes the character that precedes the cursor location.  
4 . Turn the VALUE dial to specify the save-destination patch.  
You can also move the input location cursor by pressing the  
[
][  
] cursor buttons. Pressing [  
] will change the  
character at the cursor location to uppercase, and pressing [  
will change it to lowercase.  
]
5 . When you have finished inputting, touch <OK> to finalize the  
patch name.  
3 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
Re g iste rin g a Fa vo rite Pa tch (Pa tch  
Pa le tte )  
You can bring together your favorite and most frequently used  
patches in one place by registering them into the patch palette. By  
using this function you can rapidly select favorite patches from  
internal memory. You can register a total of 64 sounds (8 sounds x 8  
banks) as favorite sounds.  
By touching <Compare> you can check the save-destination  
patch (Compare function).  
When you touch <List>, the PATCH List window will appear,  
allowing you to select the save-destination patch from the list.  
fig.03-05_50  
For details on how to select patches that are registered in the  
1 . Access the PATCH PLAY screen, and select the patch that  
2 . Hold down [BANK] and press a NUMBER [1]–[8] to select the  
bank in which you wish to register the sound.  
When you press [BANK], the indicator of the currently selected  
bank button (NUMBER [1]–[8]) will blink.  
5 . Touch <Execute> to execute the Save operation.  
Au d itio n in g th e Sa ve -De stin a tio n  
Pa tch (Co m p a re )  
Before you save a patch, you can audition the patch which currently  
occupies the save destination to make sure that it is one you dont  
mind overwriting. This can help prevent important patches from  
being accidentally overwritten and lost.  
If you continue pressing [PATCH ASSIGN] or [BANK], the  
PATCH PALETTE window will appear. In this window you can  
view the patches that are registered in the currently selected  
bank.  
3 . Hold down [PATCH ASSIGN] and press a NUMBER [1]–[8] to  
select the button at which you wish to register the sound.  
When the display indicates “Completed!,” registration has been  
completed.  
1 . Follow the procedure in “Saving Patches (PATCH Write)”  
through step 4 to select the save destination.  
2 . Touch <Compare> to turn it on.  
Now you can play the patch that is in the currently selected save  
destination.  
fig.03-06_50  
3 . Play the keyboard to sound the save destination patch, then  
check whether you really want to overwrite it.  
The patch auditioned using the Compare function may sound  
slightly different than when it is played normally.  
4 . If you wish to change the save destination, re-specify the  
save-destination patch by using the VALUE dial.  
5 . Touch <Execute> to execute the Save operation.  
3 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
De le tin g Pa tch e s (PATCH  
De le te )  
Fu n ctio n s o f Pa tch Pa ra m e te rs  
This section explains the functions the different patch parameters  
have, as well as the composition of these parameters.  
Delete unneeded patches from the internal memory.  
1 . Touch <> in the upper right of the screen.  
Parameters marked by “” can be controlled by specific MIDI  
messages (Matrix Control). In the PATCH Edit Com Matrix Ctrl  
38). Parameters marked by “” can be controlled by panel  
buttons or knobs.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.01-05_50  
Se ttin g s Co m m o n to th e En tire Pa tch  
(Co m m o n )  
Ge n e ra l  
fig.03-07_50  
2 . In the pulldown menu, touch <PATCH Delete>.  
The PATCH Delete List window appears.  
fig.03-06a_50  
Stru ctu re Ty p e ▼  
Specifies how the various sound-creating elements will be combined.  
Value  
3 . From the list, select the patch that you want to delete.  
Either turn the VALUE dial or use [INC/ +][DEC/ -] to select a  
patch. You can also select a patch by touching it on the display.  
TYPE1: This is the most conventional structure. Different sounds  
from OSC1 and OSC2 are mixed by MOD, processed by COSM1 to  
create the tonal character (e.g., using SBF (Side Band Filter)), and  
then processed by COSM2 to adjust the tone (e.g., using TVF).  
TYPE2: This structure connects OSC1 and OSC2 asymmetrically.  
This is effective when using a modulation that has the modulator set  
to anything other than “MIX.” Typically, you will use OSC1 and  
COSM1 to create the basic sound, then select the OSC2 sound and  
MOD settings to add variation, and finally select TVF in COSM2 to  
adjust the tone.  
Each screen in the PATCH Delete List window shows a group of  
16 patches. To view other patches, touch <017-032>–<241-256>,  
located at either side of the screen. To view higher-numbered  
patches, touch <257-512>, located at the bottom of the screen.  
4 . Touch <Execute>.  
TYPE3: In this structure, OSC1 is paired with COSM1, and OSC2 is  
paired with COSM2. You can use a controller such as the Time Trip  
Pad to morph between the sound created by OSC1 and COSM1 and  
the sound created by OSC2 and COSM2.  
The selected patch will be deleted.  
5 . If you want to continue deleting other patches, repeat steps  
3 and 4.  
6 . Press [EXIT].  
Po rta m e n to (Po rta m e n to Sw itch )  
The PATCH Delete List window closes.  
Specifies whether the portamento effect will be applied (ON) or not  
(OFF).  
Value: OFF, ON  
3 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
Le g a to (Le g a to Sw itch )  
Legato is valid when the Mono/ Poly parameter is set to  
monophonic. This setting specifies whether the Legato function will  
be used (ON) or not (OFF).  
Po rta m e n to  
Portamento is an effect which smoothly changes the pitch from  
the first-played key to the next-played key. By applying  
portamento when the Mono/ Poly parameter is monophonic,  
you can simulate slide performance techniques on a violin or  
similar instrument.  
Value: OFF, ON  
With the Legato Switch parameter “ON,” pressing a key while  
continuing to press a previous key causes the note to change  
pitch to the pitch of the most recently pressed key, sounding all  
the while. This creates a smooth transition between notes, which  
is effective when you wish to simulate the hammering-on and  
pulling-off techniques used by a guitarist.  
Mo d e (Po rta m e n to Mo d e )  
Specifies the performance conditions for which portamento will be  
applied.  
Value  
D Be a m / Be n d e r  
fig.03-08_50  
NORMAL: Portamento will always be applied.  
LEGATO: Portamento will be applied only when you play legato  
(i.e., when you press the next key before releasing the previous key).  
Ty p e (Po rta m e n to Ty p e )  
Specifies the type of portamento effect.  
Value  
RATE: The time it takes will depend on the distance between the  
two pitches.  
TIME: The time it takes will be constant, regardless of how far apart  
in pitch the notes are.  
Tim e (Po rta m e n to Tim e )  
O cta ve Sh ift  
When portamento is used, this specifies the time over which the  
pitch will change. Higher settings will cause the pitch change to the  
next note to take more time.  
Adjusts the pitch of the patchs sound up or down in units of an  
octave (+/ -3 octaves).  
Value: -3– +3  
Value: 0–127  
D Be a m (D Be a m Ty p e ) ▼  
Tim e Ve lo Se n s (Po rta m e n to Tim e Ve lo city  
Se n sitivity )  
Specifies the effect that will be controlled by the D Beam controller.  
Value  
This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the portamento Time. If you  
want portamento Time to be speeded up for strongly played notes,  
set this parameter to a positive (+) value. If you want it to be slowed  
down, set this to a negative (-) value.  
OFF: The D Beam controller will not be used.  
Time Trip: The D Beam controller will control the Time Trip effect.  
Time: The D Beam controller will control the Time Control effect.  
Pitch: The D Beam controller will control the Pitch Control effect.  
Assignable: The D Beam controller will control the effect specified  
for each patch.  
Value: -63– +63  
Mo n o / Po ly  
Specifies whether the patch will play monophonically or  
polyphonically. The monophonic setting is effective when playing a  
solo instrument patch such as sax or flute.  
Value  
For details on how to specify the effect that will be controlled  
when “Assignable” is selected, refer to “Matrix Ctrl” (p. 38).  
: Only the last-played note will sound.  
The level meters at both sides of “D Beam” in the screen show  
the state of response as you move your hand closer to the D  
Beam controller.  
: Two or more notes can be played simultaneously.  
Be n d Ra n g e Up (Pitch Be n d Ra n g e Up )  
Specifies the degree of pitch change in semitones when the Pitch  
Bend lever is all the way right. For example, if this parameter is set to  
“12,” the pitch will rise one octave when the pitch bend lever is  
moved to the right-most position.  
Value: 0–48  
3 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
Be n d Ra n g e Do w n (Pitch Be n d Ra n g e Do w n )  
Ma trix Ctrl  
Specifies the degree of pitch change in semitones when the Pitch  
Bend lever is all the way left. For example if this is set to “-48” and  
you move the pitch bend lever all the way to the left, the pitch will  
fall 4 octaves.  
fig.03-10_50  
Value: 0–48  
TT Pa d  
fig.03-09_50  
Ma trix Co n tro l  
Ordinarily, if you wanted to change tone parameters using an  
external MIDI device, you would need to send System  
Exclusive messages—MIDI messages designed exclusively for  
the V-Synth. However, System Exclusive messages tend to be  
complicated, and the amount of data that needs to be  
transmitted can get quite large.  
Mo d e (Tim e Trip Pa d Mo d e )  
For that reason, a number of the more typical of the V-Synths  
patch parameters have been designed so they accept the use of  
Control Change (or other) MIDI messages for the purpose of  
making changes in their values. This provides you with a  
variety of means of changing the way patches are played. For  
example, you can use the Pitch Bend lever to change the LFO  
cycle rate, or use the keyboards touch to open and close a filter.  
The function which allows you use MIDI messages to make  
these changes in realtime to the tone parameters is called the  
Matrix Control.  
Specifies the operating mode of the Time Trip pad.  
Value  
: XY mode. The effect will be applied when you move your  
finger up/ down/ left/ right on the Time Trip pad.  
: Time Trip mode. The effect will be applied when you move  
your finger in a circle over the Time Trip pad.  
Ho ld (Tim e Trip Pa d Ho ld Sw itch ) ■  
To use the Matrix Control, specify which MIDI message (Source  
parameter) will be used to control which parameter  
(Destination parameter), and how greatly (Sns parameter).  
Specifies whether the current value will be maintained (ON) when  
you remove your finger from the Time Trip pad, or not maintained  
(OFF).  
Value: OFF, ON  
Up to eight Matrix Controls can be used in a single patch. In the right  
side of the screen, touch the “Control 1/ 2”–”Control 7/ 8” tabs to  
select the matrix control that you want to use.  
For details on settings for the Time Trip effect, refer to “Matrix  
So u rce (Ma trix Co n tro l So u rce )  
In the screen, “X-Y” and “Time Trip” indicate the effect that is  
assigned and the location of the pad that your finger touched.  
Sets the MIDI message used to change the patch parameter with the  
Matrix Control.  
Value  
OFF: Matrix control will not be used.  
CC01–31, 33–95: Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95  
For more information about Control Change messages, please  
BEND: Pitch Bend  
AFT: Aftertouch  
+PAD-X: Time Trip pad (horizontal direction from the center)  
+PAD-Y: Time Trip pad (vertical direction from the center)  
PAD-X: Time Trip pad (horizontal direction)  
PAD-Y: Time Trip pad (vertical direction)  
TRIP-R: Time Trip pad (center from the circumference)  
3 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
BEAM-L: D Beam controller (left)  
BEAM-R: D Beam controller (right)  
KNOB1: Assignable Controller ([C1])  
KNOB2: Assignable Controller ([C2])  
VELO: Velocity (pressure you press a key with)  
KEYF: Note Number  
CSM1/2-LFO-RATE: COSM LFO Rate (p. 49)  
CSM1/2-LFO-PRM1: (p. 111)  
Se n s (Ma trix Co n tro l Se n s)  
Sets the amount of the Matrix Controls effect that is applied. If you  
wish to modify the selected parameter in a positive (+) direction –  
i.e., a higher value, toward the right, or faster etc. – from its current  
setting, select a positive (+) value. If you wish to modify the selected  
parameter in a negative (-) direction – i.e., a lower value, toward the  
left, or slower etc. – from its current setting, select a negative (-)  
value. When both positive and negative are selected, the changes are  
greater as the value increases. Set it to “0” if you dont want this  
effect.  
CSM1/2-LFO-PRM2: (p. 111)  
Value: -63– +63  
MFX1–3: (p. 116)  
De stin a tio n 1 , 2 (Ma trix Co n tro l De stin a tio n 1 ,  
2 )  
Specifies the parameters that will be controlled by the matrix  
controllers. When not controlling parameters with the Matrix  
Control, set this to “OFF.” Up to two parameters can be specified for  
each Matrix Control, and controlled simultaneously.  
Value  
TVA-PAN: Pan (p. 47)  
When you touch <List>, the Destination List window will  
appear, allowing you to select the Matrix Control Destination  
from the list.  
You can control the following parameters. For details on each  
parameter, refer to the corresponding reference page.  
In this manual, Parameters that can be controlled using the  
Matrix Control are marked with a “H.”  
OSC1/2-LVL: Level (p. 45)  
CSM1/2-PRM1: (p. 111)  
CSM1/2-PRM2: (p. 111)  
3 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
Mo tif (Arp e g g io Mo tif)  
Arp e g g io  
fig.03-11_50  
Sets the order in which notes of the chord will sound.  
Value  
UP: Notes you press will be sounded, beginning from low to high.  
DOWN: Notes you press will be sounded, from high to low.  
UP&DOWN: Notes you press will be sounded, from low to high, and  
then back down from high to low.  
RANDOM: Notes you press will be sounded, in random order.  
NOTE ORDER: Notes you press will be sounded in the order in  
which you pressed them. By pressing the notes in the appropriate  
order you can produce melody lines. Up to 128 notes will be  
remembered.  
RHYTHM: Unlike a conventional arpeggio, the notes that you  
specified when inputting the pattern will always sound. The keys  
that you press while performing will not affect the result; the  
specified pattern will play regardless of the pitch of the keys you  
PHRASE: Pressing a single key will sound the phrase based on the  
pitch of that key. If multiple keys are pressed, the last-pressed key  
will be valid.  
Arp e g g io Sw itch ◆  
Switches the Arpeggiator on/ off.  
Value: OFF, ON  
Pa tch Te m p o ◆  
Value: 20.0–250.0  
AUTO: The timing at which the keys are sounded is assigned  
automatically, starting at the lowest key that you pressed.  
Ho ld (Arp e g g io Ho ld Sw itch ) ◆  
Sh u ffle Ra te (Arp e g g io Sh u ffle Ra te )  
Switch between Hold On/ Hold Off for the Arpeggiator  
performance.  
This setting lets you modify the note timing to create shuffle  
Value: OFF, ON  
rhythms.  
With a setting of “50%” the notes will be spaced evenly. As the value  
is increased, the note timing will have more of a “dotted” (shuffle)  
feel.  
O cta ve Ra n g e (Arp e g g io O cta ve Ra n g e )  
Sets the key range in octaves over which arpeggio will take place. If  
you want the arpeggio to sound using only the notes that you  
actually play, set this parameter to “0.” To have the arpeggio sound  
using the notes you play and notes 1 octave higher, set this  
parameter to “+1.” A setting of “-1” will make the arpeggio sound  
using the notes you play and notes 1 octave lower.  
Value: -3– +3  
Value: 0–100%  
fig.Shuffle Rate  
Shuffle Rate = 50%  
Shuffle Rate = 90%  
50  
50  
50  
50  
90  
10  
90  
10  
Sh u ffle Re so lu tio n (Arp e g g io Sh u ffle  
Re so lu tio n )  
Pa tte rn Ed it  
Press this when you want to create an original arpeggio pattern.  
Specify the timing resolution in terms of a note value. The note value  
can be specified as either an 16th note or a eighth note.  
Value:  
,
KBD Ve lo (Arp e g g io Ke y b o a rd Ve lo city )  
Specifies the loudness of the notes that you play.  
If you want the velocity value of each note to depend on how  
strongly you play the keyboard, set this parameter to “REAL.” If you  
want each note to have a fixed velocity regardless of how strongly  
you play the keyboard, set this parameter to the desired value (1–  
127).  
Value: REAL, 1–127  
Du ra tio n (Arp e g g io Du ra tio n )  
Modifies the length of the notes to adjust the “groove” feel of the  
arpeggio. A setting of “100%” will produce the most pronounced  
groove feel.  
Value: 0–100%  
4 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
Tu n e  
fig.03-12_50  
Eq u a l Te m p e ra m e n t  
This tuning divides the octave into 12 equal parts, and is the  
most widely used method of temperament used in Western  
music. The V-Synth employs equal temperament when the  
Scale Tune Switch is set to “OFF.”  
Ju st Te m p e ra m e n t (To n ic o f C)  
Compared with equal temperament, the principle triads sound  
pure in this tuning. However, this effect is achieved only in one  
key, and the triads will become ambiguous if you transpose.  
Ara b ia n Sca le  
Pa tch Co a rse Tu n e  
In this scale, E and B are a quarter note lower and C#, F# and G#  
are a quarter-note higher compared to equal temperament. The  
intervals between G and B, C and E, F and G#, Bb and C#, and  
Eb and F# have a natural third—the interval between a major  
third and a minor third. On the V-Synth, you can use Arabian  
temperament in the three keys of G, C and F.  
Adjusts the pitch of the patchs sound up or down in semitone steps  
(+/ -4 octaves).  
Value: -48– +48  
Pa tch Fin e Tu n e  
Adjusts the pitch of the patchs sound up or down in 1-cent steps (+/  
-50 cents).  
<Example>  
Value: -50– +50  
Note  
name  
Equal tem-  
perament  
Just Tempera- Arabian Scale  
ment (tonic C)  
C
C#  
D
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-6  
+45  
-2  
One cent is 1/ 100th of a semitone.  
-8  
+4  
Sca le Tu n e (Sca le Tu n e Sw itch )  
Eb  
E
+16  
-14  
-2  
-12  
-51  
-8  
Turn this on when you wish to use a tuning scale other than equal  
temperament.  
F
Value: OFF, ON  
F#  
G
-10  
+2  
+43  
-4  
The V-Synth allows you to play the keyboard using temperaments  
other than equal temperament. The pitch is specified in one-cent  
units relative to the equal tempered pitch.  
G#  
A
+14  
-16  
+14  
-12  
+47  
0
Bb  
B
-10  
-49  
One-cent is 1/ 100th of a semitone.  
The selected scale applies to MIDI messages received from an  
external MIDI device.  
Sca le Tu n e C–B  
Make scale tune settings.  
Value: -100– +100  
4 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
W a ve fo rm (An a lo g O scilla to r W a ve fo rm )  
Mo d ify in g W a ve fo rm s (O SC1 /  
O SC2 )  
Selects the wave upon which the sound is to be based when using an  
analog oscillator.  
O scilla to r Sw itch ■  
Value  
Switches the oscillator on/ off.  
Waveform  
PulseWidth Fat (p. 44)  
(p. 44)  
Value: OFF, ON  
SAW: Sawtooth wave  
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
SQR: Square wave  
O SC Ty p e  
TRI: Triangle wave  
Analog Oscillator  
SINE: Sine wave  
RAMP: Ramp wave  
JUNO: Modulated sawtooth wave  
HQ-SAW: High quality sawtooth wave  
HQ-SQR: High quality square wave  
NOISE: Noise wave  
O: effective X: ineffective  
Im p a ct (An a lo g O scilla to r Im p a ct)  
Specifies the sharpness of the attack of the analog oscillator. Higher  
settings will produce a sharper attack.  
Value: 0.0–4.0  
PCM Oscillator  
Tim e Trip Sw (Tim e Trip Sw itch )  
Selects whether Time Trip will operate (ON) or not (OFF).  
Value: OFF, ON  
Be a t Ke e p (Tim e Trip Be a t Ke e p )  
After Time Trip is operated, this selects whether you will “chase” to  
the beat location where you otherwise would have been if Time Trip  
had not been operated (ON), or whether this “chase” will not occur  
(OFF).  
Value: OFF, ON  
O scilla to r Ty p e  
W a ve fo rm (PCM O scilla to r W a ve fo rm )  
Selects the type of oscillator.  
Selects the wave upon which the sound is to be based when using a  
PCM oscillator.  
By selecting “EXT IN,” the signal that is input through the rear panel  
INPUT jack can be used as an oscillator. This lets you play the  
externally input signal from the keyboard.  
Value  
Value: 1–999 (wave number)  
When you touch <List>, the Wave List window will appear,  
allowing you to select the wave from the list.  
ANALOG: Analog Oscillator  
PCM: PCM Oscillator  
EXT IN: External Input Oscillator  
When you select a wave, the wave name, encoding type, and  
stereo/ mono will also be displayed.  
W a ve Ga in  
Sets the gain (amplification) of the waveform.  
Va ri Sw (PCM O scilla to r Va ri Sw itch )  
Value: -12– +12 dB  
Switches whether the sound will be produced using Vari Phrase  
(ON) or linearly (OFF).  
Value: OFF, ON  
Sta rt O ffse t (PCM O scilla to r Sta rt O ffse t)  
Specifies the starting address of the wave.  
Value: 0–**  
4 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
Pla y b a ck Mo d e (PCM O scilla to r Pla y b a ck  
Mo d e )  
Pitch KF (O scilla to r Pitch Ke y Fo llo w )  
This specifies the amount of pitch change that will occur when you  
play a key one octave higher (i.e., 12 keys upward on the keyboard).  
If you want the pitch to rise one octave as on a conventional  
keyboard, set this to “+100.” If you want the pitch to rise two  
octaves, set this to “+200.” Conversely, set this to a negative value if  
you want the pitch to fall. With a setting of “0,” all keys will produce  
the same pitch.  
Specifies how the wave will be assigned to each key.  
Value  
RETRIGGER: The sample will play back from the beginning each  
time you play a key.  
LEGATO: When you play legato, the playback point will be  
synchronized with the currently playing sound.  
STEP: Each time you play a key, the sample will play back to the  
Value: -200– +200  
fig.Pitch KF.e  
Pitch  
EVENT: The sample will be divided at each event and assigned to  
separate keys. Each time you press a key, the sample will play from  
the beginning of the corresponding event.  
+200  
+100  
+50  
0
Lo o p (PCM O scilla to r Lo o p Sw itch )  
Specifies whether the wave will be played as a loop (ON) or not  
(OFF).  
-50  
Value: OFF, ON  
Ro b o t Vo ice (PCM O scilla to r Ro b o t Vo ice  
Sw itch )  
-200  
C6  
-100  
C7  
Key  
C1  
C2  
C3  
C4  
C5  
Specifies whether the pitch of the wave will be held steady (ON) or  
not (OFF).  
Co a rse (O scilla to r Co a rse Tu n e )  
Value: OFF, ON  
Adjusts the pitch of the oscillator up or down in semitone steps (+/ -4  
Te m p o Sy n c (PCM O scilla to r Te m p o Sy n c  
Sw itch )  
octaves).  
Value: -48– +48  
Specifies whether the wave will be sounded in sync with the tempo  
clock (ON) or not (OFF).  
Fin e (O scilla to r Fin e Tu n e )  
Value: OFF, ON  
Adjusts the pitch of the oscillator up or down in 1-cent steps (+/ -50  
cents).  
Value: -50– +50  
Pitch  
fig.03-14_50  
One cent is 1/ 100th of a semitone.  
Ra n d o m (O scilla to r Ra n d o m Pitch De p th )  
This specifies the width of random pitch deviation that will occur  
each time a key is pressed. If you do not want the pitch to change  
randomly, set this to “0.” These values are in units of cents (1/ 100th  
of a semitone).  
Value: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 200,  
300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1100, 1200  
Pit LFO Dp (O scilla to r Pitch LFO De p th ) ■  
Pitch (O scilla to r Pitch ) ■  
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect pitch.  
Adjusts the pitch of the oscillator.  
Value: -63– +63  
Value: -63– +63  
In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects  
the pitch. For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making  
4 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
Fa t LFO De p th ■  
Pu lse W id th (AN ALO G)  
fig.03-15_50  
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect fat.  
Value: -63– +63  
In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects  
the fat. For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making  
Tim e (PCM)  
fig.03-17_50  
Pu lse W id th ■  
Specifies the amount by which the wave shape will be modified.  
Value: -63– +63  
PW KF (Pu lse W id th Ke y Fo llo w )  
Specifies the amount by which the pulse width value will be affected  
by the key you play.  
Value: -200– +200  
Tim e ■  
PW LFO De p th (Pu lse W id th LFO De p th ) ■  
This sets the range of change in playback speed (time).  
Value: -63– +63  
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect pulse width.  
Value: -63– +63  
<How the Time parameter is related to playback speed>  
Time  
-40  
-20  
0
20  
40  
In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects  
the pulse width. For details on envelope settings, refer to  
FWD  
Reverse  
playback  
Stop  
Normal  
speed  
2x speed 4x speed  
ZERO  
BWD  
-2x speed Reverse  
playback  
Stop  
Normal  
speed  
2x speed  
4x speed -2x speed Reverse  
playback  
Stop  
Normal  
speed  
Fa t (AN ALO G)  
fig.03-16_50  
Tim e KF (Tim e Ke y Fo llo w )  
Specifies the amount by which the time value will be affected by the  
key you play.  
Value: -200– +200  
Tim e O ffse t  
Specifies the basic speed for a time value of “0”.  
Value  
BWD: Specifies a backward direction.  
ZERO: Specifies a pause.  
FWD: Specifies a forward direction.  
Fa t ■  
Emphasizes the low-frequency region of the sound.  
Tim e LFO De p th ■  
Value: 0–127  
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect time.  
Value: -63– +63  
Fa t KF (Fa t Ke y Fo llo w )  
Specifies the amount by which the fat value will be affected by the  
In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects  
the time. For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making  
key you play.  
Value: -200– +200  
4 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                               
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
Fo rm a n t (PCM)  
O SC TVA  
fig.03-18_50  
fig.03-19_50  
Le ve l ■  
The parameters of this screen are ignored when the Vari switch  
“ENSEMBLE.”  
Specifies the volume of the oscillator.  
Value: 0–127  
Le ve l KF (Le ve l Ke y Fo llo w )  
Fo rm a n t ■  
Use this parameter if you want the volume of the oscillator to change  
according to the key that is pressed. Relative to the volume at the C4  
key (center C), positive (+) settings will cause the volume to rise for  
notes higher than C4, and negative (-) settings will cause the volume  
to fall for notes higher than C4. Larger settings will produce greater  
change.  
This sets the range of change in vocal quality (formant).  
Value: -63– +63  
Fo rm a n t KF (Fo rm a n t Ke y Fo llo w )  
Specifies the amount by which the formant value will be affected by  
the key you play.  
Value: -200– +200  
Value: -200– +200  
Le ve l LFO Dp (Le ve l LFO De p th ) ■  
En e rg y  
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect the volume of the oscillator.  
Specifies how much the fundamental pitch will be emphasized in  
order to make the sound more well-defined. Set this to “OFF” if you  
do not want to use the Energy parameter.  
Value: -63– +63  
In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects  
the sub TVA. For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making  
Value: OFF, 1–127  
Fm t LFO De p th (Fo rm a n t LFO De p th ) ■  
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect formant.  
LFO  
Value: -63– +63  
fig.03-20_50  
In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects  
the formant. For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making  
In this screen you can make settings for the LFO that affects the  
oscillator. For details on LFO settings, refer to “Making LFO  
4 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
Mix in g / Mo d u la tin g Tw o So u n d s  
(Mo d )  
Ap p ly in g Va rio u s Effe cts to Ea ch  
N o te Yo u Pla y (CO SM1 / CO SM2 )  
Mo d u la to r Sw itch ■  
CO SM Sw itch ■  
Switches the modulator on/ off.  
Switches the COSM on/ off.  
Value: OFF, ON  
Value: OFF, ON  
Mo d Ty p e  
CO SM Ty p e  
fig.03-21_50  
fig.03-22_50  
Mo d u la to r Ty p e  
CO SM Ty p e  
Selects the type of modulator.  
Use this parameter to select from among the 15 available COSMs.  
For details on COSM parameters, refer to “COSM Parameters” (p.  
Value  
MIX: Add OSC1 and OSC2.  
Value: THRU, OD/ DS, W-SHAPE, AMP, SPEAKER, RESONATOR,  
SBF1/ 2, COMB, DUAL, TVF, DYN-TVF, COMP, LIMITER, F-SHIFT,  
LO-FI  
RING: Use OSC2 to apply ring modulation to OSC1.  
FM: Use OSC2 to apply FM (frequency modulation) to OSC1.  
ENV RING: Use the envelope of OSC2 to control the volume of  
OSC1.  
LFO  
fig.03-23_50  
OSC SYNC: Synchronize the output waveform of OSC1 to the  
output waveform of OSC2.  
OSC SYNC is valid only when OSC2 is an analog oscillator.  
O rig in a l Le ve l (Mo d u la to r O rig in a l Le ve l)  
Specifies the volume for the original sound of OSC1.  
Value: 0–127  
This can be set if Modulator Type is set to “RING” or “FM.”  
Atta ck (Mo d u la to r Atta ck Tim e )  
Specifies the attack time of the OSC2 envelope.  
For some COSM selections that you choose in COSM Type, you  
can make LFO settings. For details on LFO settings, refer to  
Value: 0–127  
This can be set if Modulator Type is set to “ENV RING.”  
Re le a se (Mo d u la to r Re le a se Tim e )  
Specifies the release time of the OSC2 envelope.  
Value: 0–127  
This can be set if Modulator Type is set to “ENV RING.”  
4 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
Pa n KF (Pa n Ke y Fo llo w )  
Ad ju stin g th e Vo lu m e a n d Pa n  
(TVA)  
Use this parameter if you want key position to affect panning.  
Positive (+) settings will cause notes higher than C4 key (center C) to  
be panned increasingly further toward the right, and negative (-)  
settings will cause notes higher than C4 key (center C) to be panned  
toward the left. Larger settings will produce greater change.  
TVA Sw itch ■  
Switches the TVA on/ off.  
Value: OFF, ON  
Value: -200– +200  
fig.Pan KF.e  
TVA  
Pan  
fig.03-24_50  
+100  
+50  
0
R
o
-50  
-100  
C7  
L
Key  
C1  
C2  
C3  
C4  
C5  
C6  
Le ve l ■  
Pa n LFO Dp (Pa n LFO De p th ) ■  
Specifies the volume of the patch.  
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect the pan.  
Value: 0–127  
Value: -63– +63  
Le ve l KF (Le ve l Ke y Fo llo w )  
Use this parameter if you want the volume of the patch to change  
according to the key that is pressed. Relative to the volume at the C4  
key (center C), positive (+) settings will cause the volume to rise for  
notes higher than C4, and negative (-) settings will cause the volume  
to fall for notes higher than C4. Larger settings will produce greater  
change.  
In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects  
the TVA. For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making  
LFO  
fig.03-25_50  
Value: -200– +200  
Lvl LFO Dp (Le ve l LFO De p th ) ■  
Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect the volume of the patch.  
Value: -63– +63  
Pa n  
Specifies the pan of the patch. “L64” is far left, “0” is center, and  
“63R” is far right.  
Value: L64–0–63R  
In this screen you can make settings for the LFO that affects the  
TVA. For details on LFO settings, refer to “Making LFO  
4 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
ADSR Atta ck (En ve lo p e Atta ck Tim e ) ★  
Ma k in g En ve lo p e Se ttin g s  
Specifies the attack time of the envelope (the time from when you  
press a key until the envelope level reaches the maximum value).  
Value: 0–127, Note  
This section explains the envelope setting screens.  
fig.03-26_50  
ADSR De ca y (En ve lo p e De ca y Tim e ) ★  
Specifies the decay time of the envelope (the time from when the  
envelope level reaches the maximum value until it falls to a constant  
value).  
Ve lo city Cu rve (En ve lo p e Ve lo city Cu rve )  
Value: 0–127, Note  
Choose from the following seven curves to specify how your  
keyboard playing strength will affect the envelope depth. If you  
dont want your keyboard playing strength to affect the envelope  
depth, set this to “0”.  
ADSR Su sta in (En ve lo p e Su sta in Le ve l) ★  
Specifies the sustain level of the envelope (the level at which the  
envelope remains constant).  
Value: 0–127  
Value: 0–7  
fig.Curve-7  
ADSR Re le a se (En ve lo p e Re le a se Tim e ) ★  
Specifies the release time of the envelope (the time from when you  
release a key until the envelope level reaches 0).  
Value: 0–127, Note  
0
4
1
5
2
6
3
7
“ENVELOPE” in the lower right of the screen shows a graphical  
representation of the envelope produced by the current settings.  
Ve lo city Se n s (En ve lo p e Ve lo city Se n sitivity )  
En v De p th (En ve lo p e De p th )  
Keyboard playing dynamics can be used to control the depth of the  
envelope. If you want the envelope to have more effect for strongly  
played notes, set this parameter to a positive (+) value. If you want  
the pitch envelope to have less effect for strongly played notes, set  
this to a negative (-) value.  
Specifies the depth of the envelope. Higher settings will cause the  
envelope to produce greater change. Negative (-) settings will invert  
the shape of the envelope.  
Value: -63– +63  
Value: -63– +63  
En v Tim e KF (En ve lo p e Tim e Ke y Fo llo w )  
Ve lo city A-Se n s (En ve lo p e Atta ck Tim e Ve lo city  
Se n sitivity )  
Make this setting when you want the decay time and subsequent  
times of the envelope to be affected by the location of the key you  
play. Based on the envelope times for the C4 key (center C), positive  
(+) settings will cause notes higher than C4 to have increasingly  
shorter times, and negative (-) settings will cause them to have  
increasingly longer times. Larger settings will produce greater  
change.  
This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the attack time of the  
envelope. If you want attack time to be speeded up for strongly  
played notes, set this parameter to a positive (+) value. If you want it  
to be slowed down, set this to a negative (-) value.  
Value: -63– +63  
Value: -200– +200  
fig.Time KF.e  
Ve lo city D-Se n s (En ve lo p e De ca y Tim e Ve lo city  
Se n sitivity )  
Time  
+100  
This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the decay time of the  
envelope. If you want decay time to be speeded up for strongly  
played notes, set this parameter to a positive (+) value. If you want it  
to be slowed down, set this to a negative (-) value.  
Value: -63– +63  
+50  
0
Ve lo city R-Se n s (En ve lo p e Re le a se Tim e  
Ve lo city Se n sitivity )  
-50  
The parameter to use when you want key release speed to control  
the release time value of the envelope. If you want release time to be  
speeded up for quickly released notes, set this parameter to a  
positive (+) value. If you want it to be slowed down, set this to a  
negative (-) value.  
-100  
Key  
C7  
C1  
C2  
C3  
C4  
C5  
C6  
Value: -63– +63  
4 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
Ra te (LFO Ra te ) ■  
Ma k in g LFO Se ttin g s  
Adjusts the modulation rate, or speed, of the LFO.  
Value: 0–127, Note  
This section explains the LFO setting screens.  
fig.03-27_50  
LFO Rate sets the beat length for the synchronized tempo when the  
tempo that specifies the LFO cycle (Patch Tempo) is synchronized  
with the tempo set in a external sequencer.  
(Example)  
For a tempo of 120 (120 quarter notes occur in 1 minute (60 seconds))  
Setting  
(half note)  
Delay time  
1 second (60 / 60 =1 (second))  
0.5 seconds (60 / 120= 0.5 (seconds))  
0.25 seconds (60 / 240= 0.25 (seconds))  
(quarter note)  
(eighth note)  
W a ve fo rm (LFO W a ve fo rm )  
Selects the waveform of the LFO.  
Value  
SIN: Sine wave  
This setting will be ignored if the Waveform parameter is set to  
“CHAOS.”  
TRI: Triangle wave  
SAW: Sawtooth wave  
SQR: Square wave  
“LFO” in the lower right of the screen shows a diagram of the  
wave cycle that corresponds to the current settings.  
RND: Random wave  
TRP: Trapezoidal wave  
S&H: Sample & Hold wave (one time per cycle, LFO value is  
changed)  
Fa d e Mo d e (LFO Fa d e Mo d e )  
Specifies how the LFO will be applied.  
CHAOS: Chaos wave  
Value: ON <<, ON >>, OFF <<, OFF >>  
“LFO” in the lower right of the screen shows a wave graphic that  
corresponds to the current settings.  
setting until the desired effect is achieved.  
O ffse t (LFO O ffse t)  
Fa d e Tim e (LFO Fa d e Tim e )  
Raises or lowers the LFO waveform relative to the central value.  
Positive (+) settings will move the waveform so that modulation will  
occur from the central value upward. Negative (-) settings will move  
the waveform so that modulation will occur from the central value  
downward.  
Specifies the time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the  
maximum (minimum).  
Value: 0–127  
Value: -100, -50, 0, +50, +100  
setting until the desired effect is achieved.  
Ke y Sy n c (LFO Ke y Sy n c Sw itch )  
Ho w to Ap p ly th e LFO  
This specifies whether the LFO cycle will be synchronized to begin  
when the key is pressed (ON) or not (OFF).  
Value: OFF, ON  
Ap p ly th e LFO g ra d u a lly a fte r th e k e y is  
p re sse d  
fig.LFO-1.e  
De la y Tim e (LFO De la y Tim e )  
Delay  
Time  
high (more)  
Fade Time  
Delay Time (LFO Delay Time) specifies the time elapsed before the  
Pitch  
Cutoff Frequency  
Level  
LFO effect is applied (the effect continues) after the key is pressed (or  
Depth  
released).  
Pan  
Note on  
Value: 0–127  
low (less)  
Fade Mode: ON <  
setting until the desired effect is achieved.  
Fade Time: The time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the  
maximum after the Delay Time has elapsed.  
Delay Time: The time from when the keyboard is played until the  
LFO begins to be applied.  
4 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
Ap p ly th e LFO im m e d ia te ly w h e n th e k e y is  
p re sse d , a n d th e n g ra d u a lly b e g in to  
d e cre a se th e e ffe ct  
Se ttin g Effe cts fo r a Pa tch (Effe ct)  
Ro u tin g  
fig.03-28_50  
fig.LFO-2.e  
high (more)  
Delay Time  
Fade Time  
Pitch  
Cutoff Frequency  
Level  
Depth  
Pan  
Note on  
low (less)  
Fade Mode: ON >>  
Fade Time: The time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the  
minimum after the Delay Time has elapsed.  
Delay Time: The time that the LFO will continue after the keyboard  
is played.  
MFX Se n d (MFX Se n d Le ve l) ■  
Ap p ly th e LFO g ra d u a lly a fte r th e k e y is  
Sets the level of the signal sent to tMFX.  
re le a se d  
Value: 0–127  
fig.LFO-3.e  
Delay  
Time  
high (more)  
Fade Time  
CHO Se n d (Ch o ru s Se n d Le ve l) ■  
Pitch  
Cutoff Frequency  
Sets the level of the signal sent to chorus.  
Depth  
Level  
Pan  
Value: 0–127  
Note  
on  
Note  
off  
REV Se n d (Re ve rb Se n d Le ve l) ■  
low (less)  
Sets the level of the signal sent to reverb.  
Fade Mode: OFF <<  
Value: 0–127  
Fade Time: The time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the  
maximum after the Delay Time has elapsed.  
O u tp u t Assig n  
Delay Time: The time from when the keyboard is released until the  
LFO begins to be applied.  
Sets the direct sounds output method.  
Value  
Ap p ly th e LFO fro m w h e n th e k e y is p re sse d  
u n til it is re le a se d , a n d g ra d u a lly b e g in to  
d e cre a se th e e ffe ct w h e n th e k e y is re le a se d  
MULTI: Output in stereo through MFX. You can also apply chorus or  
reverb to the sound that passes through MFX.  
MAIN: Output to the MAIN OUT jacks in stereo without passing  
through MFX.  
fig.LFO-4.e  
Delay  
Time  
DIR: Output to the DIRECT OUTjacks in stereo without passing  
through MFX. Make this setting when you want to use external  
effects.  
high (more)  
Fade Time  
Pitch  
Cutoff Frequency  
Level  
Depth  
Pan  
MFX (MFX O n / O ff Sw itch ) ■  
low (less)  
Note on  
Note off  
Switches MFX on and off.  
Fade Mode: OFF >>  
Value:  
(OFF),  
(ON)  
Fade Time: The time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the  
minimum after the Delay Time has elapsed.  
Delay Time: The time that the LFO will continue after the keyboard  
is released.  
MFX Ty p e  
Use this parameter to select from among the 41 available MFX. For  
details on MFX parameters, refer to “MFX Parameters” (p. 116).  
Value: 00 (Thru)–41  
MFX Ma ste r Le ve l  
Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through the MFX.  
Value: 0–127  
5 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
MFX To CHO (MFX Ch o ru s Se n d Le ve l)  
MFX  
Adjusts the amount of chorus for the sound that passes through  
MFX. If you dont want to add the Chorus effect, set it to “0.”  
Value: 0–127  
fig.03-29_50  
MFX To REV (MFX Re ve rb Se n d Le ve l)  
Adjusts the amount of reverb for the sound that passes through  
MFX. If you dont want to add the Reverb effect, set it to “0.”  
Value: 0–127  
CHO (Ch o ru s O n / O ff Sw itch ) ■  
Switches chorus on and off.  
Value:  
(OFF),  
(ON)  
MFX Ty p e  
Use this parameter to select from among the 41 available MFX. For  
details on MFX parameters, refer to “MFX Parameters” (p. 116).  
Value: 00 (Thru)–41  
CHO Ty p e (Ch o ru s Ty p e )  
Use this parameter to select from among the 8 available chorus. For  
details on chorus parameters, refer to “Chorus Parameters” (p.  
In this setting screen, you can edit the parameters of the MFX that is  
selected by the MFX Type setting. For details on the parameters that  
can be edited, refer to “MFX Parameters” (p. 116).  
Value: 00 (Off)–08  
CHO Ma ste r Le ve l (Ch o ru s Ma ste r Le ve l)  
When you touch <List>, the MFX List window will appear,  
allowing you to select the MFX from the list.  
Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through chorus.  
Value: 0–127  
CHO To REV (Ch o ru s Re ve rb Se n d Le ve l)  
CHO  
Adjusts the amount of reverb for the sound that passes through  
chorus. If you dont want to add the Reverb effect, set it to “0.”  
Value: 0–127  
fig.03-30_50  
REV (Re ve rb O n / O ff Sw itch ) ■  
Switches reverb on and off.  
Value:  
(OFF),  
(ON)  
REV Ty p e (Re ve rb Ty p e )  
Use this parameter to select from among the 10 available reverb. For  
details on reverb parameters, refer to “Reverb Parameters” (p. 138).  
Value: 00 (Off)–10  
CHO Ty p e (Ch o ru s Ty p e )  
Use this parameter to select from among the 8 available chorus. For  
details on chorus parameters, refer to “Chorus Parameters” (p.  
REV Ma ste r Le ve l (Re ve rb Ma ste r Le ve l)  
Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through reverb.  
Value: 0–127  
Value: 00 (Off)–08  
In this setting screen, you can edit the parameters of the chorus that  
is selected by the CHO Type setting. For details on the parameters  
that can be edited, refer to “Chorus Parameters” (p. 138).  
When you touch <List>, the Chorus List window will appear,  
allowing you to select the chorus from the list.  
5 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
REV  
fig.03-31_50  
Zo n e Se ttin g s (Zo n e )  
V-Synth lets you divide the keyboard into as many as sixteen zones,  
with each zone playing a different sound.  
The following patch settings are applied in common to each of  
the individual sounds that are divided by zone.  
Common group settings (except for Structure Type)  
Effect group settings for MFX, Chorus, and Reverb type, and  
effect settings  
Sp littin g th e Ke y b o a rd to Pla y  
Diffe re n t So u n d s (Sp lit)  
REV Ty p e (Re ve rb Ty p e )  
A patch that contains settings to play different patches in each  
keyboard zone is called a split patch. Heres how to create a split  
patch.  
Use this parameter to select from among the 10 available reverb. For  
details on reverb parameters, refer to “Reverb Parameters” (p. 138).  
Value: 00 (Off)–10  
In this setting screen, you can edit the parameters of the reverb that  
is selected by the REV Type setting. For details on the parameters  
that can be edited, refer to “Reverb Parameters” (p. 138).  
1 . Access the PATCH PLAY screen, and select the patch  
If you want to create all your patches from the ground up, rather  
than the patches that have already been prepared, carry out the  
When you touch <List>, the Reverb List window will appear,  
allowing you to select the reverb from the list.  
2 . Touch <> in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.01-05_50  
3 . In the pulldown menu, touch <Zone>.  
The PATCH Zone window appears.  
fig.03-32_50  
5 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
4 . In the lower part of the screen, touch <Split>.  
Cre a tin g a Dru m Pa tch (Dru m )  
A window like the following appears.  
By dividing the keyboard into sixteen zones and assigning a  
percussion instrument sound to each zone, you can create a patch  
that lets you play drums. Such a patch is called a drum patch.  
You can think of a drum patch as a group containing various  
percussion instrument sounds. Since percussion instrument sounds  
are not usually used to play melodies, you do not need to be able to  
use the keyboard to play a scale.  
fig.03-33_50  
1 . Access the PATCH PLAY screen, and select the patch  
If you want to create all your patches from the ground up, rather  
than the patches that have already been prepared, carry out the  
5 . Touch <01>.  
Zone 01 will be selected, and the top note number of zone 01 will  
be displayed in the upper right of the screen.  
2 . Touch <> in the upper right of the screen.  
6 . Specify the split point between zones 01 and 02. Either turn  
the VALUE dial or use [INC/+][DEC/-] to specify the note  
number. You can also specify the note number by dragging  
to left or right on the keyboard graphic in the touch screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.01-05_50  
If you want to divide the keyboard into three zones, lower the  
top note of zone 02, and specify the split point between zones 02  
and 03. By lowering the top note of the highest zone in this way,  
you can add more zones. You can specify a maximum of sixteen  
zones.  
7 . Touch <OK>.  
The zones will be established, and you will return to the PATCH  
PLAY screen.  
3 . In the pulldown menu, touch <Zone>.  
The PATCH Zone window appears.  
8 . In this state, zone 01 is selected. Specify the sound that you  
fig.03-32_50  
want to play in zone 01.  
9 . After you have specified the sound that you want to play in  
zone 01, next specify the sound for zone 02. Perform steps 2  
and 3 once again to access the PATCH Zone window.  
1 0 . Touch <02>, and then touch <OK>.  
Zone 02 will be selected, and you will return to the PATCH  
PLAY screen.  
1 1 . Since zone 02 is now selected, specify the sound that you  
want to play in zone 02.  
In this way you can create a patch that plays different sounds on  
either side of the split point you specified in step 6.  
1 2 . To save the patch you created, perform the Write operation  
5 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Cre a tin g a Pa tch  
4 . In the lower part of the screen, touch <Drum>.  
A window like the following appears.  
fig.03-34_50  
5 . To change the split point of each zone, refer to the  
procedure described in the preceding section, “Splitting the  
Keyboard to Play Different Sounds (Split).”  
6 . Specify the sounds (percussion instrument sounds) that  
you want to play in each zone. For the procedure, refer to the  
procedure described in the preceding section, “Splitting the  
Keyboard to Play Different Sounds (Split).”  
In this way you can create a patch that plays various percussion  
instrument sounds when you press different notes of the  
keyboard.  
7 . To save the patch you created, perform the Write operation  
5 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g Sa m p le s (Sa m p le Mo d e )  
In this chapter, we will explain the procedures for:  
Ap p lica tio n s o f Ea ch Te m p la te  
The preset templates cover different input settings and pre-effect  
types.  
Converting samples so the VariPhrase function can be used  
Mic  
Sample in mono from a mic. Connect a mic to the rear  
panel INPUT jack, and set GAIN switch to “MIC.”  
Line  
Sample in stereo from a CD. Connect your CD player to  
the rear panel INPUT jacks, and set GAIN switch to  
“LINE.”  
Optical  
Sample a digital signal. Connect your audio device to  
the rear panel OPTICAL IN connector.  
Sa m p lin g  
Resampl Play a sample on the V-Synth and sample the result.  
This is called “resampling.” For details on resampling,  
Se ttin g s Be fo re Yo u Sa m p le (W h a t  
Is a Te m p la te ? )  
A sampling template is something that holds a collection of settings  
for sampling (the setup settings, pre-effect settings, and metronome  
settings described below).  
Comp  
Use the compressor pre-effect. The sample will be re-  
corded from the rear panel INPUT jacks.  
Limiter  
Use the limiter pre-effect. The sample will be recorded  
from the rear panel INPUT jacks.  
Noise-  
Sup  
Use the noise suppressor pre-effect. The sample will be  
recorded from the rear panel INPUT jacks.  
You can store eight different sampling templates. When you sample,  
you will always select one of these eight templates.  
MIDI  
Start sampling when a sequencer start (system realtime  
message: FA) is received. The sample will be recorded  
from the rear panel INPUT jacks.  
With the factory settings, eight sampling templates are preset.  
For details on modifying the settings, refer to “Sampling  
Fa cto ry Se ttin g s o f Ea ch Te m p la te  
Setup  
Mic  
Line  
Optical  
Resampl  
Sampling templates are system settings (with the exception of  
some metronome parameters). They are remembered even when  
you turn off the power. If you wish to restore all eight sampling  
templates to the factory settings, perform the Factory Reset  
SamplingType 1 (MIX)  
0 (Stereo)  
0 (Stereo)  
0 (Stereo)  
InputSource  
0 (Analog) 0 (Analog) 1 (Optical) 3 (Resam-  
pling)  
TriggerMode  
TriggerLevel  
PreTrigger  
0 (Manual) 2 (Level)  
2 (Level)  
3 (Note)  
-12 (dB)  
-12 (dB)  
-24 (dB)  
-12 (dB)  
0 (0msec)  
0 (0msec)  
0 (0msec)  
0 (0msec)  
PreGain  
0 (0dB)  
0 (0dB)  
0 (0dB)  
0 (0dB)  
PreFxType  
0 (off)  
0 (off)  
0 (off)  
0 (off)  
PreFxCS-Sus  
PreFxCS-Atk  
PreFxCS-Tone  
PreFxCS-Lvl  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PreFxLM-Thr -48  
-48  
-48  
-48  
PreFxLM-Rel  
PreFxLM-Rati  
PreFxLM-Tone  
PreFxLM-Lvl  
PreFxNS-Thr  
PreFxNS-Rel  
CountIN  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-60  
-60  
-60  
-60  
0
0
0
0
1 (1MES)  
1 (REC)  
0 (0MES)  
1 (REC)  
0 (0MES)  
1 (REC)  
1 (1MES)  
1 (REC)  
MetroType  
5 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g Sa m p le s (Sa m p le Mo d e )  
When sampling, you must make sure that the following two items  
are set correctly. If these two settings are incorrect, the sample will  
not be recorded as you intend.  
Setup  
Comp  
Limiter  
NoiseSup MIDI  
0 (Stereo) 0 (Stereo)  
SamplingType 0 (Stereo)  
0 (Stereo)  
InputSource  
TriggerMode  
TriggerLevel  
PreTrigger  
0 (Analog) 0 (Analog) 0 (Analog) 0 (Analog)  
0 (Manual) 0 (Manual) 0 (Manual) 1 (MIDI)  
What type of sample are you recording? (stereo or mono)  
In the SAMPLING General screen, set Sampling Type.  
Which input are you sampling from? (select the input jack)  
In the SAMPLING General screen, set Input Source.  
-12 (dB)  
0 (0msec)  
0 (0dB)  
-12 (dB)  
0 (0msec)  
0 (0dB)  
-12 (dB)  
0 (0msec)  
0 (0dB)  
-12 (dB)  
0 (0msec)  
PreGain  
0 (0dB)  
PreFxType  
1 (COMP) 2 (LIMIT) 3 (NS)  
0 (off)  
PreFxCS-Sus  
PreFxCS-Atk  
PreFxCS-Tone  
PreFxCS-Lvl  
64  
12  
0
0
0
0
be output from the DIRECT OUT jack during sampling.  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PreFxLM-Thr -48  
-36  
-48  
-48  
1 . Press [MODE].  
PreFxLM-Rel  
PreFxLM-Rati  
PreFxLM-Tone  
PreFxLM-Lvl  
PreFxNS-Thr  
PreFxNS-Rel  
CountIN  
0
80  
0
0
The V-SYNTH MODE MENU window appears.  
fig.MODE_50  
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-60  
-60  
-30  
-60  
0
0
22  
0
1 (1MES)  
1 (REC)  
1 (1MES)  
1 (REC)  
1 (1MES)  
1 (REC)  
0 (0MES)  
1 (REC)  
MetroType  
Sa m p lin g Pro ce d u re  
Heres how to input a sound from the input jacks and sample it. For  
resampling, refer to the following section.  
The V-Synth has the following input jacks.  
2 . Touch <SAMPLE>.  
INPUT L, R (GAIN: MIC/ LINE)  
DIGITAL AUDIO INTERFACE  
OPTICAL IN  
The SAMPLE Top screen appears.  
fig.04-01_50  
COAXIAL IN  
Use the input jack that is appropriate for your situation.  
Monaural sampling from a mic INPUT L, R (GAIN: MIC)  
Sampling from an analog source INPUT L, R (GAIN: LINE)  
Sampling from a digital source OPTICAL IN or COAXIAL IN  
Howling could be produced depending on the location of  
microphones relative to speakers. This can be remedied by:  
1. Changing the orientation of the microphone(s).  
2. Relocating microphone(s) at a greater distance from speakers.  
3. Lowering volume levels.  
5 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g Sa m p le s (Sa m p le Mo d e )  
3 . Select the location (sample number) that you wish to  
sample.  
8 . To set the value of a parameter, move the cursor to the value  
box of the parameter that you want to edit. Then adjust the  
value by turning the VALUE dial or by using [INC/+] [DEC/-].  
You can also adjust the value by dragging on the touch  
screen.  
Move the cursor to the desired sample. Normally, you will select  
a sample that has no wave; i.e., a sample number whose name is  
“NO SAMPLE.”  
In this screen you can use the following functions.  
9 . Adjust the sampling level.  
Select a sample by directly touching it.  
Adjust the volume of the device that is producing the sound.  
When sampling from the INPUT jacks, adjust the level by  
turning the front panel INPUT knob or setting the rear panel  
GAIN switch.  
Change the number in steps of eight by pressing [  
][  
].  
Change the number in steps of one by touching <><>  
located beside the sample list, by pressing [  
+][DEC/ -], or by turning the VALUE dial.  
][  
][INC/  
If you are sampling from the DIGITAL AUDIO INTERFACE IN  
Scroll the sample list by dragging the scroll bar located beside  
the sample list up or down.  
Move to the number 001 sample by touching <Top>.  
Move to the number 999 sample by touching <End>.  
Display information on the currently selected sample by  
displayed for the factory-set waves.  
1 0 . Touch <START> to start sampling.  
The way in which sampling will start depends on the Trigger  
Mode setting in the SAMPLING General screen, as follows.  
If “MANUAL” is selected, sampling will start after a count of the  
number of measures specified by the metronome Count-In  
setting.  
Audition the currently selected sample by touching <Prevw>.  
When you touch <Search Empty>, you will jump to the “NO  
SAMPLE” sample number that follows the current sample  
number.  
If “MIDI” is selected, sampling will wait for the sequencer to  
start (system realtime message: FA). Sampling will begin when  
the sequencer start message is received.  
4 . Touch <Sampling>.  
If “LEVEL” is selected, sampling will wait for an input signal.  
Sampling will begin when the input signal exceeds the level  
The SAMPLING Template screen appears.  
fig.04-02_50  
If “NOTE” is selected, Sampling will begin when you play the  
keyboard or note message is received.  
If you have selected “MIDI” or “LEVEL,” you can touch  
<START> once again to begin sampling without waiting for the  
sequencer to start or the input signal to be received.  
In the SAMPLING window, “Remain Time” indicates the  
remaining time (in seconds) available for sampling.  
5 . Touch <TMPL 1>–<TMPL 8> to select a sampling template.  
If you want to modify the settings of the selected sampling  
template, perform the following steps 6–8.  
If memory becomes full, sampling will be halted. If this occurs,  
6 . Touch one of the tabs displayed at the bottom of the screen  
to access the corresponding setting screen.  
1 1 . When you are finished sampling, touch <STOP>.  
The display will indicate “COMPLETED!” Touch <PREVIEW>  
to hear the sound that you sampled, and check whether the  
sample was recorded as you wish.  
1 2 . Operations from this point will depend on what you want to  
do.  
For details on each parameter, refer to the page references given.  
<Cancel>: Discard the sample that you just recorded, and return  
to the SAMPLING Template screen.  
7 . In each setting screen, touch the touch panel to set the  
parameters.  
<Decide>: Finalize the sample that you just recorded, and  
register it in the sample list.  
<RETRY>: Discard the sample that you just recorded, and  
sample once again.  
For details on operations in the touch panel, refer to “Basic  
5 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g Sa m p le s (Sa m p le Mo d e )  
N a m in g a Sa m p le (SAMPLE N a m e )  
Co p y in g a Sa m p le (SAMPLE Co p y )  
Assign a new name to the sample. You can assign a name consisting  
of up to twelve characters.  
2 . Touch <> in the upper right of the screen.  
1 . Access the SAMPLE Top screen, and select the sample that  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.04-03_50  
2 . Touch <> in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.04-03_50  
3 . In the pulldown menu, touch <SAMPLE Copy>.  
The SAMPLE Copy window appears.  
fig.04-04a_50  
3 . In the pulldown menu, touch <SAMPLE Name>.  
The SAMPLE Name window appears.  
fig.04-04_50  
4 . Move the cursor to “Source” and select the copy-source  
sample.  
5 . Move the cursor to “Destination” and select the copy-  
4 . Touch the on-screen alphabetic or numeric keys to enter the  
new name in the text box.  
destination sample.  
The on-screen keys have the following functions.  
<><>: Move the cursor in the text box to the desired input  
location.  
When you touch <List>, the Sample List window will appear,  
allowing you to select the sample from the list.  
6 . Touch <Execute> to execute the copy operation.  
<SHIFT>: Turn this on when you want to input uppercase letters  
or symbols.  
7 . Press [EXIT].  
<Insert>: Turn this on when you want to insert a character at the  
cursor location.  
The SAMPLE Copy window closes.  
<Clear>: Erases all characters in the text box.  
<Delete>: Deletes the character at the cursor location.  
<Back>: Deletes the character that precedes the cursor location.  
You can also move the input location cursor by pressing the  
[
][  
] cursor buttons. Pressing [  
] will change the  
character at the cursor location to uppercase, and pressing [  
will change it to lowercase.  
]
5 . When you have finished inputting, touch <OK> to finalize the  
sample name.  
5 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g Sa m p le s (Sa m p le Mo d e )  
Mo vin g a Sa m p le (SAMPLE Mo ve )  
Ex ch a n g in g a Sa m p le (SAMPLE  
Ex ch a n g e )  
2 . Touch <> in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
2 . Touch <> in the upper right of the screen.  
fig.04-03_50  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.04-03_50  
3 . In the pulldown menu, touch <SAMPLE Move>.  
The SAMPLE Move window appears.  
3 . In the pulldown menu, touch <SAMPLE Exchange>.  
fig.04-04b_50  
The SAMPLE Exchange window appears.  
fig.04-04c_50  
4 . Move the cursor to “Source” and select the move-source  
sample.  
4 . Move the cursor to “Source” and select the exchange-  
source sample.  
5 . Move the cursor to “Destination” and select the move-  
destination sample.  
5 . Move the cursor to “Destination” and select the exchange-  
destination sample.  
When you touch <List>, the Sample List window will appear,  
allowing you to select the sample from the list.  
When you touch <List>, the Sample List window will appear,  
allowing you to select the sample from the list.  
6 . Touch <Execute> to execute the move operation.  
6 . Touch <Execute> to execute the exchange operation.  
7 . Press [EXIT].  
The SAMPLE Move window closes.  
7 . Press [EXIT].  
The SAMPLE Exchange window closes.  
5 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g Sa m p le s (Sa m p le Mo d e )  
De le tin g a Sa m p le (SAMPLE De le te )  
Re sa m p lin g  
The V-Synth is able to resample samples from its internal memory.  
This is called resampling. In actuality, the sounds that are output  
from the rear panel MAIN OUT L(MONO), R jacks are sampled.  
For example, you could sample multiple samples played  
2 . Touch <> in the upper right of the screen.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.04-03_50  
simultaneously, and record them as a single sample. You can  
conserve voices in this way.  
fig.04-05.e  
Pre Gain  
INPUT  
Sampling  
OUTPUT  
Pre-FX  
Sound  
Effect  
Generator  
Before you enter Resampling mode, make settings so that you can  
play the sample(s) you wish to resample.  
3 . In the pulldown menu, touch <SAMPLE Delete>.  
The resampling procedure is essentially the same as the “Sampling  
Procedure” described in the preceding section. However, please be  
aware of the following points.  
The SAMPLE Delete List window appears.  
fig.04-04d_50  
You must set the Input Source in the SAMPLING General screen  
to “RESAMPL.”  
Se tu p Se ttin g s  
SAMPLIN G Ge n e ra l  
fig.04-06_50  
4 . From the list, select the sample that you want to delete.  
Either turn the VALUE dial or use [INC/ +][DEC/ -] to select a  
patch. You can also select a patch by touching it on the display.  
Each screen in the SAMPLE Delete List window shows a group  
of 16 samples. To view other samples, touch <017-032>–<241-  
256>, located at either side of the screen. To view higher-  
numbered samples, touch <257-512>–<769-999>, located at the  
bottom of the screen.  
5 . Touch <Execute>.  
The selected sample will be deleted.  
Sa m p lin g Ty p e  
Select the type of sampling.  
6 . If you want to continue deleting other samples, repeat steps  
Value  
4 and 5.  
STEREO L R: Sample in stereo.  
7 . Press [EXIT].  
MONORAL MIX: Mix the signals input to L and R, and sample in  
monaural.  
The SAMPLE Delete List window closes.  
MONORAL L: Sample the L input signal in monaural.  
MONORAL R: Sample the R input signal in monaural.  
6 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g Sa m p le s (Sa m p le Mo d e )  
In p u t So u rce  
Pre -Effe ct Se ttin g s  
Select the input from which the sound will be sampled.  
Value  
SAMPLIN G Pre -Effe ct  
ANALOG: INPUT jacks  
fig.04-07_50  
OPTICAL: OPTICAL IN connector  
COAXIAL: COAXIAL IN connector  
RESAMPL: Select this when you wish to resample. The sound that is  
output to MAIN OUT L(MONO) and R will be sampled.  
Trig g e r Mo d e  
Specifies how sampling will be started.  
Value  
MANUAL: Sampling will begin when you touch <START>.  
MIDI: Sampling will begin when an external sequencer start message  
(system realtime message: FA) is received.  
LEVEL: Sampling will start when the input signal exceeds the level  
specified by the Trigger Level setting.  
There are three pre-effects: compressor, limiter, and noise  
suppressor. By using these you can adjust the level of the sound  
being sampled.  
NOTE: Sampling will begin when you play the keyboard or note  
message is received.  
Compressor:  
By reducing high levels and raising low levels, this effect smoothes  
out unevenness in volume.  
Trig g e r Le ve l  
Limiter:  
Specifies the input level at which sampling will begin when the  
Trigger Mode is set to “LEVEL.” The trigger level is shown by the  
By compressing sounds that exceed a specified volume level, this  
effect prevents the sound from distorting.  
Noise suppressor:  
” and “ ” in the level meter located at the right of the screen.  
Value: -–00 dB  
This effect leaves the original sound untouched, but mutes the noise  
that is heard during periods of silence.  
If Trigger Mode is set to other than “LEVEL,” this parameter has  
no effect.  
Ty p e (Pre -Effe ct Ty p e )  
Value  
Pre Trig g e r  
OFF: No pre-effect will be used.  
COMP+NS: Compressor and noise suppressor settings can be made.  
LMT+NS: Limiter and noise suppressor settings can be made.  
NS: Noise suppressor settings can be made.  
After the selected trigger to start sampling has been received,  
previously received data for the length of time specified here will be  
included in the sampled data. When the Trigger Mode is set to  
“LEVEL” and the early portion of the sample is being lost, you can  
use this setting to include the early portion.  
Co m p re sso r  
Value: 0–1000 msec  
Su sta in  
Specifies the time over which a low-level signal is raised until it  
Pre Ga in  
reaches a fixed volume.  
Adjusts the input gain. This will apply to the sound that is received  
from all input jacks. It will also be applied to the sound being  
resampled. With positive (+) values, the gain will be higher than  
originally, and with negative (-) values the gain will be lower than  
originally.  
Value: 0–127  
Atta ck (Atta ck Tim e )  
Specifies the attack time of the input sound.  
Value: 0–127  
Value: -12– +36 dB  
To n e  
Adjusts the tone quality of the compressor.  
Value: -50– +50  
Le ve l (O u tp u t Le ve l)  
Adjusts the output volume.  
Value: 0– +24 dB  
6 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                 
Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g Sa m p le s (Sa m p le Mo d e )  
Lim ite r  
Me tro n o m e Se ttin g s  
Th re s (Th re sh o ld Le ve l)  
Me tro n o m e  
fig.04-08_50  
Specifies the level (threshold level) at which the limiter will begin to  
function.  
Value: -60–0 dB  
Re le a se (Re le a se Tim e )  
Specifies the time from when the input level drops below the  
threshold level until the limiter turns off.  
Value: 0–127  
To n e  
Adjusts the tonal quality of the limiter.  
Value: -50– +50  
Me tro Ty p e (Me tro n o m e Ty p e )  
Le ve l (O u tp u t Le ve l)  
Specifies when you want the metronome to sound.  
Value  
Adjusts the output volume.  
Value: 0– +24 dB  
OFF: The metronome will not sound.  
REC: The metronome will sound only during sampling.  
ALWAYS: The metronome will sound whenever you sample  
(including while you are making settings in preparation for  
sampling).  
Ra tio  
Specifies the compression ratio.  
Value: 1.5:1, 2:1, 4:1, 100:1  
N o ise Su p p re sso r  
Le ve l (Me tro n o m e Le ve l)  
Th re sh o ld (Th re sh o ld Le ve l)  
Specifies the volume of the metronome.  
Specifies the level at which the noise suppressor will begin to  
Value: 0–127  
operate. When the signal falls below the specified level, it will be  
Co u n t In  
muted.  
Value: -60–0 dB  
Specifies the number of measures for the count-in that will occur  
before sampling.  
Re le a se (Re le a se Tim e )  
Value  
Specifies the time from when the noise suppressor begins to operate  
until the volume reaches 0.  
OFF: A count will not be sounded.  
1MEASURE: A one-measure count will be sounded.  
2MEASURE: A two-measure count will be sounded.  
Value: 0–127  
If Trigger Mode is set to other than “MANUAL,” this parameter  
has no effect.  
Te m p o  
Specifies the tempo of the metronome.  
Value: 20.0–250.0  
Be a t  
Specifies the time signature of the metronome.  
Value  
Numerator: 1–31  
Denominator: 2, 4, 8, 16, 32  
6 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                               
Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g Sa m p le s (Sa m p le Mo d e )  
N a m in g a Te m p la te (Te m p la te N a m e )  
Ch e ck in g Sa m p le In fo rm a tio n  
A template can be given a name of up to eight characters.  
1 . Access the SAMPLE Top screen, and select the sample that  
2 . Touch <Info>.  
The SAMPLE Information screen appears.  
2 . Touch <> in the upper right of the screen.  
fig.04-10a_50  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.04-09_50  
In the SAMPLE Information screen you can check the following  
information for the sample.  
3 . In the pulldown menu, touch <Template Name>.  
The SAMPLING Template Name window appears.  
fig.04-10_50  
Original pitch  
Original fine tune  
Original Tempo, Original Pitch, and Original Fine Tune can be  
modified in this screen.  
If you want to set an accurate original tempo, make settings in  
4 . Touch the on-screen alphabetic or numeric keys to enter the  
new name in the text box.  
O rig in a l Pitch  
The on-screen keys have the following functions.  
<><>: Move the cursor in the text box to the desired input  
location.  
Specifies the key that will play the sample at the pitch at which it  
was sampled.  
<SHIFT>: Turn this on when you want to input uppercase letters  
or symbols.  
Value: C-1 (0)-G9 (127)  
O rig in a l Fin e Tu n e  
<Insert>: Turn this on when you want to insert a character at the  
cursor location.  
Adjusts the current pitch in one-cent steps (1/ 100 of a semitone) over  
a range of 1/ 2 semitone upward or downward.  
Value: -50-+50  
<Clear>: Erases all characters in the text box.  
<Delete>: Deletes the character at the cursor location.  
<Back>: Deletes the character that precedes the cursor location.  
3 . When you have finished viewing the information, touch  
<OK> to close the window.  
You can also move the input location cursor by pressing the  
LO O P MO DE  
[
][  
] cursor buttons. Pressing [  
] will change the  
One Shot: The sample will not loop, regardless of the Loop Switch  
character at the cursor location to uppercase, and pressing [  
will change it to lowercase.  
]
will loop in the forward direction between “LOOP START” and  
“LOOP END.”  
5 . When you have finished inputting, touch <OK> to finalize the  
template name.  
will loop alternately backward and forward between the “LOOP  
START” and “LOOP END.”  
6 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g Sa m p le s (Sa m p le Mo d e )  
Im p o rtin g a Sa m p le  
Ed itin g a Sa m p le  
To import samples you will use the Disk Save Project screen of Disk  
mode.  
When you have finished sampling, you can edit the sample data.  
When editing a sample, touching <PREVIEW> will play the sample  
so you can check whether it was edited as you expect.  
2 . Touch<Import>.  
Jump to the DISK Import Files screen in the Disk mode.  
fig.06-09_50  
When the editing screens are displayed, playing the keyboard  
will not produce sound.  
It is not possible to edit two or more samples simultaneously.  
With some exceptions, editing a sample that has been encoded  
will cause the encoding data to be discarded. In this case, you  
The factory-set waves (preset waves) cannot be edited.  
Co m m o n Pro ce d u re fo r Ed itin g  
Disp la y in g th e Sa m p le Ed it Scre e n  
1 . Press [MODE].  
For details on operations in this screen, refer to “Importing  
The V-SYNTH MODE MENU window appears.  
fig.MODE_50  
2 . Touch <SAMPLE>.  
The SAMPLE Top screen appears.  
fig.04-01_50  
3 . Select the sample that you wish to edit.  
For details on making this selection, refer to “Sampling  
6 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g Sa m p le s (Sa m p le Mo d e )  
4 . Touch <Edit>.  
(LEN GTH LO CK)  
The SAMPLE Loop FWD screen appears.  
fig.04-11_50  
This locks the length of the region between the start point (Start) and  
end point (End) of the sample. It is convenient to use this when you  
already know the length of the sample that you need, and want to  
find the right region to use.  
After the length has been locked, you can turn the VALUE dial, use  
[INC/ +] [DEC/ -], or drag your finger over the sample in the screen  
to adjust the Start and End locations while maintaining the distance  
between these two points.  
the length of the sample is locked.  
5 . Touch one of the tabs in the left side of the screen to access  
the desired editing screen.  
(LO O P)  
This switches loop playback on/ off. Turn this on if you want the  
loop region specified in the Loop FWD/ BWD screen to play  
repeatedly.  
(PREVIEW )  
For details on each editing operation, refer to the corresponding  
page.  
This plays the sample. During playback, you can touch this once  
again to stop playback.  
6 . When you have finished making settings, press [EXIT] to  
return to the SAMPLE Top screen.  
(Ad ju st)  
In the Loop FWD/ BWD screen, the Adjust function moves the Loop  
Start, Loop End, or Current locations to the nearest of the following  
locations 1–5.  
Fu n ctio n s Co m m o n to All Ed itin g  
Scre e n s  
In edit screens, the Adjust function moves the Edit Start, Edit End, or  
Current locations to the nearest of the following locations 1–7.  
“ Sta rt,” En d , a n d Cu rre n t” Se ttin g s  
The V-Synth uses seven terms to indicate locations within a sample.  
Sample Start: Beginning of the sample  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Sample Start location  
Sample End location  
Loop Start location  
Loop End location  
Current location  
Sample End: End of the sample  
Loop Start, Loop End: When the Loop Play is ON, the region  
between these two points will be played repeatedly.  
Edit Start, Edit End: Editing will affect the region between these  
two points.  
Edit Start location  
Edit End location  
Current: This is the currently selected location of the sample.  
Move the cursor to “Start,” “End,” or “Current” to select the point  
that you want to specify. Then specify the location by turning the  
VALUE dial, by using [INC/ +][DEC/ -], or by dragging your finger  
over the sample in the screen.  
Move the cursor to the point that you want to adjust (“Start,” “End,”  
or “Current”), and touch or  
Touching will move the point toward the left, and touching  
will move it toward the right.  
.
location to the closest event.  
The region of the sample between Edit Start and Edit End is  
displayed with the color inverted.  
When Current = Loop/ Edit Start, moving Loop/ Edit Start will  
cause Current to change as well.  
For example, if you wish to touch <PREVIEW> to check whether  
the results of your editing were satisfactory, you can jump the  
current location.  
It is not possible to move Loop/ Edit Start to the right of Loop/  
Edit End.  
In some cases nothing may happen, due to the relation between  
points or the Length Lock setting.  
6 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g Sa m p le s (Sa m p le Mo d e )  
Ed itin g th e Sp e cifie d Re g io n o f th e  
Sa m p le  
(Ze ro Cro ss Se a rch )  
This function searches for locations where the sample has a value of  
zero. When setting loop points or when cutting the sample, you  
should search for locations where the sample value is zero so that  
noise is not heard when you play the sample.  
You can specify a region of the sample, and edit the region by  
cutting or copying.  
Ba sic O p e ra tio n  
Move the cursor to the point (“Start,” “End,” or “Current”) for which  
you want to find a zero-cross point, and then touch  
Touching will search toward the left, and touching  
search toward the right.  
or  
.
will  
2 . Specify the region that you want to edit (Edit Start–Edit End),  
3 . Touch <> in the upper right of the screen.  
(Zo o m )  
A pulldown menu appears.  
This expands or shrinks the displayed sample.  
fig.04-16_50  
In any screen that displays the sample, you can touch the following  
buttons to expand or shrink the displayed sample.  
: Shrink vertically  
: Expand vertically  
: Shrink horizontally  
: Expand horizontally  
fig.04-12.e  
Zoom bar  
4 . In the pulldown menu, touch the editing function that you  
want to execute.  
A window appears, asking you to confirm the operation.  
fig.04-17_50  
Zoom bar  
Actual length of wave  
The vertical zoom bar indicates the magnification of the sample in  
the vertical direction. The horizontal zoom bar indicates the  
magnification of the sample in the horizontal direction, and shows  
the current location. As the display is magnified, the zoom bar will  
become narrower.  
Some editing functions require you to input a numerical value.  
For details, refer to the following explanations of each editing  
function.  
5 . Touch <OK> to execute the editing function.  
If you want to cancel without executing, touch <Cancel>.  
By touching “Undo” in the pulldown menu, you can return to  
the state prior to executing the operation (Undo). Depending on  
the type of edit function you execute, or on the state of the work  
area, there may be cases in which the Undo function cannot be  
executed. In such cases, you will not be able to select <Undo>.  
6 . If you want to save the edited result, perform the Save  
6 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g Sa m p le s (Sa m p le Mo d e )  
Ze ro In se rt  
Sa m p le Ed itin g Fu n ctio n s  
fig.04-18  
This operation inserts silent space at the current location. It can also  
be used to lengthen a sample to a precise number of measures and  
beats.  
In the SAMPLE Edit Zero Insert window, specify the length of the  
silent region that you want to insert. This setting is made in terms of  
a number of samples. Data in the V-Synth is handled as 44.1 kHz  
data, meaning that one second contains 44,100 data samples.  
For example, if you wish to insert one second of silence, you  
would specify “44100” and execute Zero Insert.  
If the amount of remaining memory is small, it may not be  
possible to execute Copy, Paste, Insert, or Zero Insert. In such  
LR-Mix  
The stereo sample will be mixed to L, converting it into a monaural  
sample. If this is set to monaural, less wave memory will be used.  
This will also decrease the number of voices.  
Cu t  
The region of the sample between Edit Start and Edit End will be cut.  
Trim (Trim m in g )  
If the beginning and end of the sample are values other than zero,  
noise will be heard when you play the sample. Trim sets the values  
at the beginning and end of the sample to zero.  
Tru n ca te  
The region of the sample between Edit Start and Edit End will be  
kept, and the remainder of the sample will be deleted.  
In the SAMPLE Edit Trim window, specify the length that you want  
to trim. This setting is made in terms of a number of samples. Data in  
the V-Synth is handled as 44.1 kHz data, meaning that one second  
contains 44,100 data samples.  
Co p y  
The sample between Edit Start and Edit End will be copied.  
Cle a r  
The sample between Edit Start and Edit End will be set to values of  
zero.  
For example, trimming at 100 samples. This will connect the first  
data sample and the one hundredth data sample by a smooth  
line of one hundred points. Similarly, the last data sample and  
the data sample one hundred samples before it will be connected  
by a smooth line of one hundred points.  
Pa ste  
The copied data will be overwritten, beginning at the current  
location.  
N o rm a lize  
The Normalize operation is used to uniformly increase or decrease  
the level of the entire sample without allowing it to distort. This is  
used when you wish to make the volume consistent with other  
samples.  
If there is any sample data following the current location, it will  
be lost as far as the pasted portion extends.  
In se rt  
In the SAMPLE Edit Normalize window, specify the degree of  
normalization that you want to use. The value is specified in terms of  
a percentage.  
The copied data will be inserted at the current location.  
You can cut, paste, and insert between different samples. After  
copying, press [EXIT] to return to the SAMPLE Top screen.  
Select a different sample, access the SAMPLE Edit screen, and  
then paste or insert.  
For example, lets suppose that 100 is the maximum volume at  
which the volume does not distort. Executing the Normal  
operation at a setting of 90% will make the maximum value of  
the sample be 90.  
6 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g Sa m p le s (Sa m p le Mo d e )  
Lo o p Re g io n Se ttin g s  
will be played back as a loop. The region of the sample between  
Loop Start and Loop End will be played back repeatedly.  
If you normalize at a low setting and then normalize at a high  
setting, the audio quality will deteriorate. This means that if you  
intend to normalize several times, you should start from the  
higher value and work downward.  
In the SAMPLE Loop FWD screen that appears when you touch  
<Loop FWD>, specify the loop region for forward playback. In the  
SAMPLE Loop BWD screen that appears when you touch <Loop  
Re ve rse  
The sample will be reversed between Edit Start and Edit End. If you  
want the sample to play backwards, execute Reverse to reverse the  
sample from the beginning.  
BWD>, specify the loop region for backward playback.  
fig.04-13_50  
Re g io n  
The region of the sample between Edit Start and Edit End can be  
stored in internal memory as a separate sample. The original sample  
will remain unchanged.  
Perform the following procedure.  
1 . Select the region that you want to extract as a separate  
sample, and execute Region.  
2 . In the SAMPLE Edit Region window, select the sample  
number to which you want to paste the extracted region of  
the sample, and touch <OK>.  
Immediately after sampling or loading a sample, Loop Start will be  
set to the beginning of the sample and Loop End to the end of the  
sample.  
3 . Assign a name to the new sample, and touch <OK>.  
If you set Loop Start and Loop End to locations within the sample,  
the sample will play back from the beginning, and then the region  
between Loop Start and Loop End will play back repeatedly.  
fig.04-14.e  
If in step 2 you select a sample number that already has a  
sample, the sample data between Edit Start and Edit End will be  
added to the end of the selected sample.  
Wave  
Start  
Loop  
Start  
Loop  
End  
Wave  
End  
The data in the V-Synth is handled as 44.1 kHz data, which  
means there are 44,100 data samples per second. The shortest  
possible loop that can be set is 16 data samples.  
is set to “STEP” or “EVENT.”  
6 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g Sa m p le s (Sa m p le Mo d e )  
O rig in a l Te m p o Se ttin g  
The Original Tempo is the reference tempo of the sample used when  
Co n ve rtin g th e Sa m p le to V-  
Sy n th Da ta (En co d e )  
synchronizing it to the master tempo.  
After you have finished editing the sample, you should encode it. By  
using the encoding that is appropriate for the sample, youll be able  
to maintain a higher quality of audio while controlling the pitch,  
time, and formant.  
Example: A sample whose original tempo is 100  
If the master tempo is set to 200 and the sample is synchronized, the  
sample will play back at double the speed at which it was recorded.  
If you set the master tempo to 50 and synchronize the sample, it will  
play back at half the speed at which it was  
fig.04-15_50  
The factory-set waves (preset waves) cannot be encoded.  
Disp la y in g th e En co d e Scre e n  
The exact original tempo can be calculated from the time signature,  
number of measures, and number of beats for the sample length  
between Loop Start and Loop End. This means that you must first  
specify the loop region, and then set the original tempo.  
Samples whose wave is too short (0.1 sec or less) cannot be  
encoded, and the SAMPLE Encode screen cannot be accessed for  
such samples.  
If you wish to play back a loop while simultaneously  
synchronizing another sample, you must specify the correct  
original tempo. If you fail to do this, the sounds will drift out of  
synchronization.  
1 . Press [MODE].  
The V-SYNTH MODE MENU window appears.  
fig.MODE_50  
1 . Move the cursor to the item that you wish to set.  
2 . Either turn the VALUE dial or press [INC/+][DEC/-] to set the  
“Sign” (time signature), “Meas” (measure), and Beat values.  
3 . Touch  
.
The precise tempo will be displayed at the right of the “->.” The  
tempo displayed here is the original tempo.  
You can also move the cursor to the original tempo, and set it by  
rotating the VALUE dial or by using [INC/ +][DEC/ -].  
2 . Touch <SAMPLE>.  
The SAMPLE Top screen appears.  
fig.04-01_50  
3 . Select the sample number that you wish to encode.  
For details on how to select a sample, refer to “Sampling  
6 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g Sa m p le s (Sa m p le Mo d e )  
4 . Touch <Encode>.  
Se le ctin g th e En co d in g Ty p e  
You can choose from the following four types of encoding. Touch the  
The SAMPLE Encode screen appears.  
fig.04-20_50  
appropriate button to select a type.  
fig.04-21  
LITE  
This is the simplest encoding type. When you sample on the V-  
Synth, this type is selected by default. This type can be used with a  
variety of sounds, but to obtain the highest quality we recommend  
that you encode using one of the other types.  
SO LO  
This is suitable for monophonic vocals or monophonic wind  
instruments (such as sax, trumpet, or flute). If you encode the sample  
you can still play the sample polyphonically.  
To Ex e cu te th e En co d e O p e ra tio n  
In the SAMPLE Encode screen, select the encode type, set the encode  
depth, and delete or add events. Then touch <Execute>.  
If you wish to stop the encode during the operation, touch <Abort>.  
When encoding is completed, you will return to the SAMPLE Top  
screen.  
BACKIN G  
This is suitable for decay-type instruments. It is particularly suitable  
for phrases that include instruments with a clear attack (such as  
drums, percussion, and guitar chords).  
For details on these settings, refer to the following sections.  
The amount of time required by the encoding process will  
depend on the sample. You may need to wait a certain amount  
of time for encoding to be completed.  
EN SEMBLE  
This is suitable for sustain-type instruments. It is particularly  
suitable when there are smooth changes in tone (such as choir or  
strings).  
If the data is encoded using “BACKING” or “ENSEMBLE,” it  
will not be possible to use the formant control or robot voice  
functions.  
Once a sample has been encoded, editing that sample (except for  
some operations) will cause the encoded data to be discarded. If  
you then access the SAMPLE Encode screen in this state, “LITE”  
will always be selected as the encoding type. Select the  
appropriate encoding type, and then re-encode the sample.  
Depending on the sample, encoding with “SOLO” may cause the  
sound to be different than you expect, such as changes in pitch  
being incorrect by one octave. If this occurs, re-encode the  
sample using “BACKING” or “ENSEMBLE.”  
If a sample that contains large amounts of reverb or delay is  
encoded using “SOLO,” it may not sound as you expect. If this  
occurs, re-encode the sample using “BACKING” or  
“ENSEMBLE.”  
7 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g Sa m p le s (Sa m p le Mo d e )  
Au to m a tica lly De te ctin g Eve n ts  
De le tin g a n d Ad d in g Eve n ts  
By specifying the Depth, you can automatically detect and “”mark  
Setting the Encode Depth and automatically detecting events does  
not guarantee that the events will be added at the locations that you  
expect. If necessary, you can delete or add events as you like.  
In the SAMPLE Encode screen, you can touch <PREVIEW> to play  
the sample from the current location until the next event. By  
touching <PREVIEW>, you can play the sample to see whether  
events have been assigned to the locations that you expect.  
locations where there is a strong attack (i.e., locations where the  
volume changes abruptly). Such marked locations are called events.  
fig.04-22  
Be aware that if you change the encode depth after deleting or  
adding events, the events that were modified manually will be  
discarded, and the events that were detected by depth will be  
displayed.  
If you modify the location of events after encoding, you must re-  
encode. The modified location of the events will take effect when  
you encode.  
De p th (En co d e De p th )  
In the SAMPLE Encode screen, move the cursor to “Depth” and set  
the value. The higher the value you set, the more events will be  
De le tin g a n Eve n t  
assigned.  
fig.04-23_50  
1 . Move the cursor to “Current.”  
2 . By turning the VALUE dial, pressing [INC/+][DEC/-], or  
dragging your finger over the sample in the screen, set  
Current to the location of the event that you want to delete.  
Value: 0–127  
3 . Touch either  
or  
.
The Current location will move to the location of the next event  
toward the left or right.  
the next event, and then stop each time you play the key. When  
the Playback Mode is set to “EVENT,” the sample will be  
divided at event locations, and assigned to each key.  
4 . Repeat step 3 to move Current to the location of the event  
that you wish to delete.  
5 . Touch  
to delete the event.  
If you set Depth to a high value, a large number of events may  
be detected. If you encode in such a state, the interval between  
events will be too short, and the expected result will not be  
obtained when you play back in event units.  
The events at the beginning and end of a sample cannot be  
deleted.  
If you change the location of an event after encoding, you must  
re-encode the sample. When you encode, the newly detected  
event locations will take effect.  
Ad d in g a n Eve n t  
1 . Move the cursor to “Current.”  
2 . By turning the VALUE dial, pressing [INC/+][DEC/-], or  
dragging your finger over the sample in the screen, move  
Current to the location at which you want to add the event.  
3 . Touch  
to add the event.  
7 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g Sa m p le s (Sa m p le Mo d e )  
Sa vin g a Sa m p le  
Samples that you sample or encode will be lost when you turn off  
the power. If you want to keep these samples, use the Disk Save  
Project screen in the Disk mode.  
2 . Touch <Save>.  
Jump to the DISK Save Project screen in the Disk mode.  
fig.06-06_50  
For details on operations in this screen, refer to “Saving Project  
7 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Se ttin g s Co m m o n to All Mo d e s (Sy ste m Mo d e )  
Settings that affect the entire operating environment of the V-Synth,  
such as tuning and MIDI message reception, are referred to as  
system functions. This section explains how to make settings for  
the System functions and describes the functions of the different  
System parameters.  
6 . When editing a parameter that requires you to specify a  
value, move the cursor to the value box of that parameter.  
Then modify the value by either turning the VALUE dial or  
pressing [INC/+] or [DEC/-]. You can also modify a value by  
dragging over the touch screen.  
7 . Repeat steps 3–6 to make the settings for the System  
function.  
Ho w to Ma k e th e Sy ste m  
Fu n ctio n Se ttin g s  
Sa vin g th e Sy ste m Se ttin g s (W rite )  
1 . Press [MODE].  
Changes you make to the System function settings are only  
temporary—they will be discarded as soon as the power is turned  
off. If you want to keep any changes youve made in the system  
settings, you must save them in internal memory.  
The V-SYNTH MODE MENU window appears.  
fig.MODE_50  
When you perform the save procedure, the data that previously  
occupied the save destination will be lost. However, the factory  
setting data can be recovered by performing the Initialization  
procedure.  
1 . After you have edited the settings of the System function,  
touch <Write>, located in the lower right of the screen.  
2 . Touch <SYSTEM>.  
In itia lizin g th e Sy ste m Se ttin g s (In it)  
The current settings of the system functions can be restored to a set  
The SYSTEM Com Master screen appears.  
fig.05-01_50  
of standard settings, or to the factory settings.  
2 . Touch <Init>, located in the lower right of the screen.  
If you want the factory settings to be in effect the next time the  
V-Synth is powered up, touch <Write> to save the settings.  
3 . The parameters are organized into several editing groups.  
Touch one of the buttons at the bottom of the screen to  
select the edit group containing the parameters you want to  
set.  
4 . Touch one of the tabs in the left of the screen to select the  
desired editing screen.  
5 . In each editing screen, touch the touch screen to set the  
parameters.  
For details on how to use the touch screen, refer to “Basic  
7 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Se ttin g s Co m m o n to All Mo d e s (Sy ste m Mo d e )  
Po w e ru p Mo d e  
Fu n ctio n s o f Sy ste m  
Pa ra m e te rs  
Specifies the condition that the V-Synth will be in when the power is  
turned on.  
This section explains what the different System parameters do, and  
also how these parameters are organized.  
Value  
LAST SET: Reinstates the patch selected at the time the V-Synth was  
last turned off.  
DEFAULT: The V-Synth will be ready to play Patch “001.”  
Se ttin g s Co m m o n to th e En tire  
Sy ste m (Co m m o n )  
IO  
fig.05-01a_50  
Ma ste r  
fig.05-01_50  
Ex te rn a l In p u t Ty p e  
set to “EXT IN.”  
Ma ste r Tu n e  
Adjusts the overall tuning of the V-Synth. The display shows the  
frequency of the A4 note (center A).  
Value  
STEREO L R: Input in stereo.  
Value: 415.3–466.2 Hz  
MONORAL MIX: Mix the L and R input signals and input in  
monaural.  
Ma ste r Ke y Sh ift  
MONORAL L: Input the L signal in monaural.  
MONORAL R: Input the R signal in monaural.  
Shifts the overall pitch of the V-Synth in semitone steps.  
Value: -24– +24  
Mix / Pa ra lle l  
Ma ste r Le ve l  
Specifies how the sound of the entire V-Synth will be output.  
Value  
Adjusts the volume of the entire V-Synth.  
Value: 0–127  
MIX: Set this to have the collective output of all sounds output from  
the OUTPUT A (MIX) jacks. When you want to check the final  
overall sound being output, set to MIX.  
Pa tch Re m a in (Pa tch Re m a in Sw itch )  
Specifies whether currently sounding notes will continue sounding  
when another patch is selected (ON), or not (OFF).  
Also, when this is “ON,” changes produced by incoming MIDI  
messages such as Volume (CC 7) or Pan (CC 10), as well as tonal  
quality and volume changes produced by the various controllers will  
be inherited.  
Sounds output from the PHONES jack are the same as those  
output from the MIX OUT jacks. Therefore, any sounds set with  
Output Assign to be output from the DIRECT OUT jacks is not  
output from the PHONES jack. Be sure to have any sound you  
want to hear through the headphones set to “MIX.”  
Value: OFF, ON  
PARALLEL: Output according to each Output Assign settings.  
Effects settings change as soon as you switch to a new patch,  
without being influenced by the Patch Remain setting. Because  
of this, certain effects settings can cause notes that were until  
then sounding to no longer be heard, even though Patch Remain  
has been set to on.  
O u tp u t Ga in  
This adjusts the output gain from the V-Synths Analog Out and  
Digital Out. When, for example, there are relatively few voices being  
sounded, boosting the output gain can let you attain the most  
suitable output level for recording and other purposes.  
Value: -12–+12 dB  
Dig ita l O u tp u t Fre q (Dig ita l O u tp u t Fre q u e n cy )  
Sets the sampling frequency of the digital output.  
Value: 44.1, 48, 96 KHz  
7 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Se ttin g s Co m m o n to All Mo d e s (Sy ste m Mo d e )  
MID 2 Ga in  
EQ  
fig.05-02_50  
Adjusts the gain of the middle range 1. Positive (+) settings will  
emphasize the middle range 2.  
Value: -15–+15 dB  
Hig h Fre q (Hig h Fre q u e n cy )  
Selects the frequency of the high range.  
Value: 2000, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, 10000, 12500, 16000, 20000 Hz  
HIGH Ga in  
Adjusts the gain of the high frequency. Positive (+) settings will  
emphasize the high-frequency range.  
Value: -15– +15 dB  
4 Ba n d EQ (4 -Ba n d Eq u a lize r Sw itch )  
TO TAL Ga in  
Switch the 4-Band equalizer on/ off.  
Adjusts the total gain.  
Value: OFF, ON  
Value: -15– +15 dB  
LO W Fre q (Lo w Fre q u e n cy )  
Selects the frequency of the low range.  
MIDI/ USB  
fig.05-03_50  
Value: 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000,  
1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000 Hz  
LO W Ga in  
Adjusts the gain of the low frequency. Positive (+) settings will  
emphasize the low-frequency range.  
Value: -15– +15 dB  
MID 1 Q  
Adjusts the width of the middle range 1. Set a higher value for Q to  
narrow the range to be affected.  
Value: 0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0  
De vice ID (De vice ID N u m b e r)  
MID 1 Fre q (Mid 1 Fre q u e n cy )  
When you want to transmit or receive System Exclusive messages,  
Selects the frequency of the middle range 1.  
Value: 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000,  
1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, 10000, 12500,  
16000, 20000 Hz  
set this parameter to match the Device ID number of the other MIDI  
device.  
Value: 17–32  
Clo ck So u rce  
MID 1 Ga in  
The LFO cycle or multi-effects changes can be synchronized to a  
clock (tempo). When this is used by the patch, this Clock Source  
setting determines the clock which will be used.  
Value  
Adjusts the gain of the middle range 1. Positive (+) settings will  
emphasize the middle range 1.  
Value: -15–+15 dB  
INTERNAL: The Patch Tempo will be used.  
MID 2 Q  
EXTERNAL: Synchronize to the clock of an external sequencer.  
Adjusts the width of the middle range 2. Set a higher value for Q to  
narrow the range to be affected.  
Rx PC (Re ce ive Pro g ra m Ch a n g e Sw itch )  
Value: 0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0  
Specifies whether Program Change messages will be received (ON)  
or not (OFF).  
MID 2 Fre q (Mid 2 Fre q u e n cy )  
Value: OFF, ON  
Selects the frequency of the middle range 2.  
Value: 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 315, 400, 500, 630, 800, 1000,  
1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, 10000, 12500,  
16000, 20000 Hz  
Rx Ba n k (Re ce ive Ba n k Se le ct Sw itch )  
Specifies whether Bank Select messages will be received (ON) or not  
(OFF).  
Value: OFF, ON  
7 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                   
Se ttin g s Co m m o n to All Mo d e s (Sy ste m Mo d e )  
Rx Sy s-Ex (Re ce ive Sy ste m Ex clu sive Sw itch )  
USB-MIDI Th ru Sw (USB-MIDI Th ru Sw itch )  
Specifies whether System Exclusive messages will be received (ON)  
When USB Mode is set to “MIDI,” this switch specifies whether  
MIDI messages received at the MIDI connector will be re-  
transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector (ON) or not (OFF).  
or not (OFF).  
Value: OFF, ON  
Value: OFF, ON  
Tx Ed it (Tra n sm it Ed it Da ta Sw itch )  
fig.05-03b.e  
Specify whether changes you make in the settings of a patch will be  
MIDI OUT  
MIDI IN  
USB OUT  
USB IN  
transmitted as system exclusive messages (ON), or will not be  
transmitted (OFF).  
Value: OFF, ON  
Clo ck O u t  
Specifies whether MIDI clock will be transmitted (ON) or not (OFF).  
Sound  
Generator  
Section  
Value: OFF, ON  
USB Se tu p  
Touch <USB Setup>, and a window like the following will appear.  
Controller Section  
fig.05-03a_50  
Local Switch  
V-Synth  
USB-MIDI Thru Sw=OFF  
MIDI OUT  
MIDI IN  
USB OUT  
USB IN  
Touch <OK> to apply the settings of this window, or touch <Cancel>  
to cancel and close the window.  
Sound  
Generator  
Section  
USB Mo d e  
Selects the mode in which the USB connector will be used.  
Available Settings  
Storage: Storage mode. Select this if you want to transfer files.  
MIDI: MIDI mode. Select this if you want to exchange MIDI  
messages with a sequencer or other program.  
Controller Section  
Local Switch  
V-Synth  
You must switch the USB Mode before you connect the V-Synth  
to your computer via the USB cable. If you change this setting  
while the V-Synth is connected, the computer may fail to  
recognize it correctly.  
USB-MIDI Thru Sw=ON  
For details on connections to your computer in each USB Mode,  
refer to “Connecting Your Computer Via USB (USB Mode).”  
7 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Se ttin g s Co m m o n to All Mo d e s (Sy ste m Mo d e )  
Pa rt MIDI  
fig.05-04_50  
Co n tro lle r Se ttin g s (Co n tro lle r)  
Tx  
fig.05-05_50  
Pa rt1 1 6 Rx Sw (Pa rt 1 –1 6 Re ce ive Sw itch )  
For each part, specify whether MIDI messages will be received (ON),  
Pa tch Tx Ch (Pa tch Tra n sm it Ch a n n e l)  
or not (OFF).  
If this is “ON,” you can play that part from an external MIDI device.  
Normally, you will select “ON” only for part 1 which you play from  
the keyboard.  
Specifies the transmit channel of MIDI messages in Patch mode. If  
you do not want to transmit MIDI messages to external MIDI  
devices, turn this parameter “OFF.” If you want the transmit channel  
to always match the Patch Receive Channel, set this parameter to  
“RX CH.”  
Value: OFF, ON  
Pa rt 1 1 6 Rx Ch (Pa rt 1 1 6 Re ce ive Ch a n n e l)  
Value: 1–16, RX CH, OFF  
Specifies the MIDI receive channel for each part.  
Tx PC (Tra n sm it Pro g ra m Ch a n g e Sw itch )  
Value: 1–16  
Specifies whether Program Change messages will be transmitted  
(ON) or not (OFF).  
Performance data directed to the V-Synth itself will be  
transmitted on the channel you specified for part 1.  
Value: OFF, ON  
Tx Ba n k (Tra n sm it Ba n k Se le ct Sw itch )  
Specifies whether Bank Select messages will be transmitted (ON) or  
not (OFF).  
Value: OFF, ON  
Tx Active Se n s (Tra n sm it Active Se n sin g  
Sw itch )  
Specifies whether Active Sensing messages will be transmitted (ON)  
or not (OFF).  
Value: OFF, ON  
7 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Se ttin g s Co m m o n to All Mo d e s (Sy ste m Mo d e )  
KBD  
TT Pa d / Kn o b  
fig.05-06_50  
fig.05-07_50  
KBD Se n s (Ke y b o a rd Se n sitivity )  
X Assig n -XY  
Adjusts the keyboards touch.  
Value  
Specifies the MIDI controller number that will be transmitted by  
movements in the X’ (horizontal) direction when the Time Trip pad  
is in XY mode.  
LIGHT: Light weight synthesizer keyboard like  
MEDIUM: Standard  
Value  
OFF: No message will be transmitted.  
CC01–31, 33–95: Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95  
HEAVY: Acoustic piano simulation  
KBD Ve lo city (Ke y b o a rd Ve lo city )  
Y Assig n -XY  
Specifies the velocity value that will be transmitted when you play  
the keyboard. If you want actual keyboard velocity to be  
transmitted, set this to “REAL.” If you want a fixed velocity value to  
be transmitted regardless of how you play, specify the desired value  
(1–127).  
Specifies the MIDI controller number that will be transmitted by  
movements in the Y’ (vertical) direction when the Time Trip pad is  
in XY mode.  
Value  
Value: REAL, 1–127  
OFF: No message will be transmitted.  
CC01–31, 33–95: Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95  
Afte r Se n s (Afte rto u ch Se n sitivity )  
X Assig n -TT (X Assig n -Tim e Trip )  
Specifies the Aftertouch sensitivity. Higher values will allow  
Aftertouch to be applied more easily. Normally you will leave this at  
Specifies the MIDI controller number that will be transmitted by  
movements in the X’ (horizontal) direction when the Time Trip pad  
is in Time Trip mode.  
“100.”  
Value: 0–200  
Value  
Lo ca l Sw (Lo ca l Sw itch )  
OFF: No message will be transmitted.  
CC01–31, 33–95: Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95  
The Local Switch determines whether the internal sound generator is  
disconnected (OFF) from the controller section (keyboard, pitch  
bend/ modulation lever, knobs, buttons, Time Trip Pad, D Beam  
controller, pedal, and so on); or not disconnected (ON). Normally  
this is left “ON,” but if you wish to use the V-Synths keyboard and  
controllers to control only external sound modules, set it to “OFF.”  
Value: OFF, ON  
Y Assig n -TT (Y Assig n -Tim e Trip )  
Specifies the MIDI controller number that will be transmitted by  
movements in the Y’ (vertical) direction when the Time Trip pad is  
in Time Trip mode.  
Value  
OFF: No message will be transmitted.  
CC01–31, 33–95: Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95  
Re m o te KBD Sw (Re m o te Ke y b o a rd Sw itch )  
Set this parameter “ON” when you want to use an external MIDI  
keyboard instead of the V-Synths keyboard. In this case, the MIDI  
transmit channel of the external MIDI keyboard can be set to any  
channel. Normally you will leave this parameter “OFF.”  
For details on control change messages, refer to “MIDI  
Turn this “ON” when you want to control the V-Synth from an  
7 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Se ttin g s Co m m o n to All Mo d e s (Sy ste m Mo d e )  
Kn o b 1 , 2 Assig n  
Pe d a l  
Specifies the MIDI controller number that will be transmitted by  
movements in the ASSIGNABLE CONTROL knob.  
Value  
fig.05-09_50  
OFF: No message will be transmitted.  
CC01–31, 33–95: Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95  
For more information about Control Change messages, please  
Be a m  
fig.05-08_50  
Ho ld Po la rity (Ho ld Pe d a l Po la rity )  
Select the polarity of the Hold pedal. On some pedals, the electrical  
signal output by the pedal when it is pressed or released is the  
opposite of other pedals. If your pedal has an effect opposite of what  
you expect, set this parameter to “REVERSE.” If you are using a  
Roland pedal (that has no polarity switch), set this parameter to  
“STANDARD.”  
Value: STANDARD, REVERSE  
Pe d a l 1 , 2 Assig n  
This specifies the function of each pedal connected to the CTRL 1,  
CTLR 2 PEDAL jacks.  
D Be a m Se n s L, R (D Be a m Se n sitivity L, R)  
This sets the D Beam Controllers sensitivity. Sens L is the left side.  
The higher the value set, the more readily the D Beam Controller  
goes into effect. Normally you will leave this at “100.”  
Value: 0–200  
Value  
OFF: The control pedal will not be used.  
CC01–31, 33–95: Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95  
For more information about Control Change messages, please  
BEND UP: Pitch bend (positive direction)  
BEND DOWN: Pitch bend (negative direction)  
AFT: Aftertouch  
D Be a m 1 –4 Assig n L, R  
Specifies the MIDI controller number that will be transmitted by  
movements in the D Beam Controller. Assign L is the left side, and  
Assign R is the right side.  
Value  
OFF: No message will be transmitted.  
CC01–31, 33–95: Controller numbers 1–31, 33–95  
Pe d a l 1 , 2 Po la rity  
Selects the polarity of the pedal. On some pedals, the electrical signal  
output by the pedal when it is pressed or released is the opposite of  
other pedals. If your pedal has an effect opposite of what you expect,  
set this parameter to “REVERSE.” If you are using a Roland pedal  
(that has no polarity switch), set this parameter to “STANDARD.”  
Value: STANDARD, REVERSE  
For more information about Control Change messages, please  
7 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Se ttin g s Co m m o n to All Mo d e s (Sy ste m Mo d e )  
X Assig n -XY (V-LIN K X Assig n -XY)  
V-LIN K Se ttin g s (V-LIN K)  
Specify the V-Link function that will be controlled when you operate  
the Time Trip pad in the X (horizontal) direction in XY mode.  
Value  
Tx  
fig.05-10_50  
OFF: The time trip pad will not be used.  
PLAYBACK-SPEED: Playback speed  
DISSOLVE-TIME: Dissolve time (time over which the image  
switches)  
AUDIO LEVEL: Volume during audio playback  
COLOR-CB: Color Cb (color-difference signal)  
COLOR-CR: Color Cr (color-difference signal)  
BRIGHTNESS: Brightness  
VFX1: Visual effects 1  
VFX2: Visual effects 2  
VFX3: Visual effects 3  
MIDI Ch a n n e l (V-LIN K MIDI Ch a n n e l)  
VFX4: Visual effects 4  
Specifies the channel used to transmit MIDI messages for V-LINK  
OUTPUT-FADE: Output fade  
control.  
T-BAR: T bar  
Value: 1–16  
Y Assig n -XY (Lin k Y Assig n -XY)  
Au d io (V-LIN K Au d io Sw itch )  
Specify the V-Link function that will be controlled when you operate  
the Time Trip pad in the Y (vertical) direction in XY mode.  
Value  
Specifies whether sound from the externally connected video device  
will be played (ON) or not played (OFF).  
Value: OFF, ON  
OFF: The time trip pad will not be used.  
PLAYBACK-SPEED: Playback speed  
DISSOLVE-TIME: Dissolve time (time over which the image  
switches)  
KBD O u tp u t (V-LIN K Ke y b o a rd O u tp u t Fa d e  
Sw itch )  
Specifies whether the video output from the video device will be  
stopped (ON) or will not be stopped (OFF) when you are not  
holding down a key.  
AUDIO LEVEL: Volume during audio playback  
COLOR-CB: Color Cb (color-difference signal)  
COLOR-CR: Color Cr (color-difference signal)  
BRIGHTNESS: Brightness  
Value: OFF, ON  
Pa le tte Lo ca l Sw (V-LIN K Pa tch Pa le tte Lo ca l  
Sw itch )  
VFX1: Visual effects 1  
VFX2: Visual effects 2  
Specify whether you will press PATCH PALETTE NUMBER [1]–[8]  
in V-Link mode to switch patches (ON) or not (OFF)  
Value: OFF, ON  
VFX3: Visual effects 3  
VFX4: Visual effects 4  
OUTPUT-FADE: Output fade  
T-BAR: T bar  
TT Pa d / Kn o b  
Assig n -TT (V-LIN K Assig n -Tim e Trip )  
fig.05-11_50  
Specify the V-Link function that will be controlled when you operate  
the Time Trip pad in Time Trip mode.  
Value  
OFF: The time trip pad will not be used.  
TIME-TRIP: Time trip  
Kn o b 1 , 2 Lo ca l Sw (V-LIN K Kn o b 1 , 2 Lo ca l  
Sw itch )  
Specify whether the assignable controller knobs 1 or 2 will be  
disconnected from the internal sound generator in V-Link mode  
(OFF) or not disconnected (ON).  
TT Pa d Lo ca l Sw (V-LIN K Tim e Trip Pa d Lo ca l  
Sw itch )  
Value: OFF, ON  
Specify whether the Time Trip pad and the internal sound generator  
will be disconnected in V-Link mode (OFF) or not disconnected (ON).  
Value: OFF, ON  
8 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Se ttin g s Co m m o n to All Mo d e s (Sy ste m Mo d e )  
VFX4: Visual effects 4  
Kn o b 1 , 2 Assig n (V-LIN K Kn o b 1 , 2 Assig n )  
OUTPUT-FADE: Output fade  
Specify the V-Link function that will be controlled when you turn  
the ASSIGNABLE CONTROL knob.  
Value  
Le ve r  
OFF: The assignable controller will not be used.  
PLAYBACK-SPEED: Playback speed  
DISSOLVE-TIME: Dissolve time (time over which the image  
switches)  
fig.05-13_50  
AUDIO LEVEL: Volume during audio playback  
COLOR-CB: Color Cb (color-difference signal)  
COLOR-CR: Color Cr (color-difference signal)  
BRIGHTNESS: Brightness  
VFX1: Visual effects 1  
VFX2: Visual effects 2  
VFX3: Visual effects 3  
VFX4: Visual effects 4  
Mo d Lo ca l Sw (V-LIN K Mo d u la tio n Lo ca l  
Sw itch )  
OUTPUT-FADE: Output fade  
Specify whether the modulation lever will be disconnected from the  
Be a m  
internal sound generator in V-Link mode (OFF) or not disconnected  
fig.05-12_50  
(ON).  
Value: OFF, ON  
Mo d Assig n (V-LIN K Mo d u la tio n Assig n )  
Specify the V-Link function that will be controlled when you operate  
the modulation lever.  
Value  
OFF: The modulation lever will not be used.  
PLAYBACK-SPEED: Playback speed  
DISSOLVE-TIME: Dissolve time (time over which the image  
switches)  
AUDIO LEVEL: Volume during audio playback  
COLOR-CB: Color Cb (color-difference signal)  
COLOR-CR: Color Cr (color-difference signal)  
BRIGHTNESS: Brightness  
Be a m Lo ca l Sw (V-LIN K D Be a m Lo ca l Sw itch )  
Specify whether the D Beam controller will be disconnected from the  
internal sound generator in V-Link mode (OFF) or not disconnected  
(ON).  
VFX1: Visual effects 1  
Value: OFF, ON  
VFX2: Visual effects 2  
VFX3: Visual effects 3  
D Be a m 1 –4 Assig n L, R (V-LIN K D Be a m 1 –4  
Assig n L, R)  
VFX4: Visual effects 4  
OUTPUT-FADE: Output fade  
Specify the V-Link function that will be controlled when you operate  
the D Beam controller. Assign L is the left side, and Assign R is the  
right side.  
Be n d Lo ca l Sw (V-LIN K Pitch Be n d Lo ca l  
Sw itch )  
Value  
Specify whether the pitch bend lever will be disconnected from the  
OFF: The D Beam controller will not be used.  
PLAYBACK-SPEED: Playback speed  
DISSOLVE-TIME: Dissolve time (time over which the image  
switches)  
internal sound generator in V-Link mode (OFF) or not disconnected  
(ON).  
Value: OFF, ON  
AUDIO LEVEL: Volume during audio playback  
COLOR-CB: Color Cb (color-difference signal)  
COLOR-CR: Color Cr (color-difference signal)  
BRIGHTNESS: Brightness  
VFX1: Visual effects 1  
VFX2: Visual effects 2  
VFX3: Visual effects 3  
8 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Se ttin g s Co m m o n to All Mo d e s (Sy ste m Mo d e )  
Be n d Assig n (V-LIN K Pitch Be n d Assig n )  
Specify the V-Link function that will be controlled when you operate  
the pitch bend lever.  
Value  
OFF: The pitch bend lever will not be used.  
PLAYBACK-SPEED: Playback speed  
DISSOLVE-TIME: Dissolve time (time over which the image  
switches)  
AUDIO LEVEL: Volume during audio playback  
COLOR-CB: Color Cb (color-difference signal)  
COLOR-CR: Color Cr (color-difference signal)  
BRIGHTNESS: Brightness  
VFX1: Visual effects 1  
VFX2: Visual effects 2  
VFX3: Visual effects 3  
VFX4: Visual effects 4  
OUTPUT-FADE: Output fade  
Afte r Lo ca l Sw (V-LIN K Afte rto u ch Lo ca l  
Sw itch )  
Specify whether keyboard aftertouch will be disconnected from the  
internal sound generator in V-Link Mode (OFF) or will not be  
disconnected (ON).  
Value: OFF, ON  
Afte r Assig n (V-LIN K Afte rto u ch Assig n )  
Specify the V-Link function that will be controlled by keyboard  
aftertouch.  
Value  
OFF: The aftertouch will not be used.  
PLAYBACK-SPEED: Playback speed  
DISSOLVE-TIME: Dissolve time (time over which the image  
switches)  
AUDIO LEVEL: Volume during audio playback  
COLOR-CB: Color Cb (color-difference signal)  
COLOR-CR: Color Cr (color-difference signal)  
BRIGHTNESS: Brightness  
VFX1: Visual effects 1  
VFX2: Visual effects 2  
VFX3: Visual effects 3  
VFX4: Visual effects 4  
OUTPUT-FADE: Output fade  
8 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Disk -Re la te d Fu n ctio n s (Disk Mo d e )  
Here you can load a project from disk into the internal work area  
Ba sic Disk Utility O p e ra tio n s  
(Load), or save the project that is in the work area (Save). You can  
also format a disk, or copy files and folders.  
1 . If you are using a PC card, insert the appropriate PC card  
into the PC CARD slot.  
In this chapter, we will collectively refer to internal memory and  
PC cards as “disks.”  
2 . Press [MODE] to access the V-SYNTH MODE MENU window.  
3 . Touch <Disk>.  
The DISK UTILITY MENU screen appears.  
fig.06-01_50  
Ab o u t Disk Utility  
Disk Utility contains the following functions. In the DISK UTILITY  
MENU screen, you can select the desired function and execute it.  
Lo a d Pro je ct  
This function loads project data from disk into the V-Synths work  
area. (p. 84)  
Sa ve Pro je ct  
This function saves project data to disk. (p. 85)  
4 . Touch the button for the function that you want to execute.  
Cle a n Pro je ct  
The screen for the function you intend to execute appears.  
fig.06-02.e  
Clean up a disk by deleting unwanted files. (p. 85)  
Path of the selected file/folder  
Disk free space  
Im p o rt File s  
Import individual patch or wave files. (p. 85)  
Fo rm a t  
Initialize (format) a disk. (p. 86)  
To o ls  
List of files stored  
on the disk  
Copy or move a file or folder. (p. 87)  
Path of the current project  
Disk to which the function to be executed will apply  
For details on operations in the Disk Utility screens, refer to the  
explanations on the following pages.  
5 . Verify the contents of the screen, and touch <OK> to  
execute.  
When the operation is completed, the display will briefly  
indicate “COMPLETED!.”  
To cancel the operation, touch <Cancel>.  
6 . Press [EXIT] to exit Disk mode.  
Never turn off the power of the V-Synth while performing an  
operation in Disk mode. Doing so may destroy the files.  
8 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Disk -Re la te d Fu n ctio n s (Disk Mo d e )  
So rtin g th e File s Disp la y e d in th e  
File List  
Lo a d in g a Pro je ct fro m Disk  
in to th e V-Sy n th (Lo a d Pro je ct)  
In each Disk Utility screen, you can change the order of the files  
This function loads a project on disk into the V-Synths work area.  
displayed in the file list.  
1 . In the upper right of the disk utility screen, touch <>.  
When a project is loaded, work area will be rewritten. If work  
area contains important data, you must save it to disk before you  
load other data.  
A pulldown menu like the following appears.  
fig.06-03_50  
2 . Touch <Load Project>.  
The Disk Load Project screen appears.  
fig.06-04_50  
2 . Choose the desired sorting order from the pull-down menu.  
<Sort By Name >: Sort in alphabetical order of file name.  
<Sort By Name >: Sort in reverse alphabetical order of file  
name.  
<Sort By Size >: Sort in ascending order of file size.  
<Sort By Size : Sort in descending order of file size.  
3 . To load from internal memory, touch <Int>. To load from a  
PC card, touch <Card>. Then select the project that you want  
to load.  
4 . Touch <OK>.  
A WARNING window like the following appears.  
fig.06-05_50  
If you want to cancel the procedure at this point, touch  
<CANCEL>.  
5 . Touch <EXECUTE> to execute the operation.  
8 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Disk -Re la te d Fu n ctio n s (Disk Mo d e )  
Sa vin g Pro je ct o n Disk (Sa ve  
Pro je ct)  
De le te Un n e e d e d File s (Cle a n  
Pro je ct)  
Save the project in the work area to disk.  
2 . Touch <Save Project>.  
This lets you clean up the contents of the disk by deleting files that  
cannot be used by the V-Synth or waves that are not used by  
patches. Executing this operation can increase the free space  
available on the disk. If there are any unused patch/ wave numbers,  
subsequent patches/ waves will be automatically renumbered  
forward.  
The Disk Save Project screen appears.  
fig.06-06_50  
2 . Touch <Clean Project>.  
The DISK Clean Project screen appears.  
fig.06-08_50  
3 . To save to internal memory, touch <Int>. To save to PC card,  
touch <Card>. Then select the save-destination project.  
If you want to save the data as a new project, touch <New  
Project>. The PROJECT Name window will appear. Assign a  
name to the new project.  
If you want to cancel the procedure at this point, touch  
<CANCEL>.  
4 . Touch <OK>.  
A WARNING window like the following appears.  
fig.06-07_50  
3 . Touch <EXECUTE> to execute the operation.  
Im p o rtin g In d ivid u a l Pa tch o r  
W a ve File s (Im p o rt File s)  
You can import individual patch or wave files or folders into the  
work area of the V-Synth.  
The data will be imported into unused patch/ wave numbers.  
Importing is not possible if there are no empty patches or waves.  
If you want to cancel the procedure at this point, touch  
<CANCEL>.  
2 . Touch <Import Files>.  
The Disk Import Files screen appears.  
fig.06-09_50  
5 . Touch <EXECUTE> to execute the operation.  
3 . Touch <Patch> if you want to import a patch, or touch  
<Wave> if you want to import a wave.  
8 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Disk -Re la te d Fu n ctio n s (Disk Mo d e )  
4 . Touch <Preset> if you want to import from preset memory,  
touch <Int> if you want to import from internal memory, or  
touch <Card> if you want to import from a PC card.  
In itia lizin g a Disk (Fo rm a t)  
You can initialize (format) a disk, erasing all data from it.  
2 . Touch <Format>.  
5 . From the file list, select the file/folder that you want to  
import.  
Here you can use the following functions. Touch the appropriate  
button to execute.  
The Disk Format screen appears.  
fig.06-11_50  
Prevw: Preview (audition) the selected file (.w00/ .wav/ .aif).  
Info: View information for the selected file.  
Mark All: Mark all files/ folders in the file list.  
Mark: Mark the selected file/ folder in the file list.  
Open: Open the selected folder.  
Close: Move to the next higher folder.  
If you have selected a patch whose oscillator type is “PCM,” the  
wave used by that patch will also be imported.  
6 . Touch <OK>.  
3 . If you want to format the internal memory, touch <Int>. If you  
want to format a PC card, touch <Card>.  
Here you can use the following functions. Touch the appropriate  
button to execute.  
A WARNING window like the following appears.  
fig.06-10_50  
Prevw: Preview (audition) the selected file (.w00/ .wav/ .aif).  
Info: View information for the selected file.  
Mark All: Mark all files/ folders in the file list.  
Mark: Mark the selected file/ folder in the file list.  
Open: Open the selected folder.  
Close: Move to the next higher folder.  
4 . When you format a PC card, the VOLUME Name window will  
appear, allowing you to assign a new volume name.  
5 . Touch <OK>.  
If you want to cancel the procedure at this point, touch  
<CANCEL>.  
A WARNING window like the following appears.  
fig.06-12_50  
7 . Touch <EXECUTE> to execute the operation.  
If you want to cancel the procedure at this point, touch  
<CANCEL>.  
6 . Touch <EXECUTE> to execute the operation.  
8 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Disk -Re la te d Fu n ctio n s (Disk Mo d e )  
8 . In the file list, select the copy-destination file or folder.  
Here you can use the following functions. Touch the appropriate  
button to execute.  
Fu n ctio n s Re la te d to File s a n d  
Fo ld e rs (To o ls)  
Prevw: Preview (audition) the selected file (.w00/ .wav/ .aif).  
Info: View information for the selected file.  
Open: Open the selected folder.  
You can manage files or folders by copying or moving them.  
Co p y in g File s/ Fo ld e rs (Co p y )  
2 . Touch <Tools>.  
Close: Move to the next higher folder.  
9 . Touch <OK>.  
A WARNING window like the following appears.  
fig.06-15_50  
The Disk Tools screen appears.  
fig.06-13_50  
3 . Touch <Copy>.  
If you want to cancel the procedure at this point, touch  
<CANCEL>.  
4 . If you want to copy from internal memory, touch <Int>. If you  
want to copy from a PC card, touch <Card>.  
1 0 . Touch <EXECUTE> to execute the operation.  
5 . In the file list, select the file or folder that you want to copy.  
Here you can use the following functions. Touch the appropriate  
button to execute.  
Mo vin g File s/ Fo ld e rs (Mo ve )  
2 . Touch <Tools>.  
Prevw: Preview (audition) the selected file (.w00/ .wav/ .aif).  
Info: View information for the selected file.  
Mark All: Mark all files/ folders in the file list.  
Mark: Mark the selected file/ folder in the file list.  
Open: Open the selected folder.  
The Disk Tools screen appears.  
fig.06-13_50  
Close: Move to the next higher folder.  
6 . Touch <OK>.  
The Disk Tools Copy Destination screen appears.  
fig.06-14_50  
3 . Touch <Move>.  
4 . If you want to move a file or folder from internal memory,  
touch <Int>. If you want to move it to a PC card, touch  
<Card>.  
7 . If you want to copy to internal memory, touch <Int>. If you  
want to copy to a PC card, touch <Card>.  
8 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Disk -Re la te d Fu n ctio n s (Disk Mo d e )  
5 . In the file list, select the file or folder that you want to move.  
Here you can use the following functions. Touch the appropriate  
button to execute.  
De le tin g File s/ Fo ld e rs (De le te )  
2 . Touch <Tools>.  
Prevw: Preview (audition) the selected file (.w00/ .wav/ .aif).  
Info: View information for the selected file.  
Mark All: Mark all files/ folders in the file list.  
Mark: Mark the selected file/ folder in the file list.  
Open: Open the selected folder.  
The Disk Tools screen appears.  
fig.06-13_50  
Close: Move to the next higher folder.  
6 . Touch <OK>.  
The Disk Tools Move Destination screen appears.  
fig.06-16_50  
3 . Touch <Delete>.  
4 . If you want to delete a file or folder from internal memory,  
touch <Int>. If you want to delete it from a PC card, touch  
<Card>.  
5 . In the file list, select the file or folder that you want to delete.  
Here you can use the following functions. Touch the appropriate  
button to execute.  
7 . If you want to move the file or folder to internal memory,  
touch <Int>. If you want to move it to a PC card, touch  
<Card>.  
Prevw: Preview (audition) the selected file (.w00/ .wav/ .aif).  
Info: View information for the selected file.  
Mark All: Mark all files/ folders in the file list.  
Mark: Mark the selected file/ folder in the file list.  
Open: Open the selected folder.  
8 . In the file list, select the move-destination file or folder.  
Here you can use the following functions. Touch the appropriate  
button to execute.  
Close: Move to the next higher folder.  
Prevw: Preview (audition) the selected file (.w00/ .wav/ .aif).  
Info: View information for the selected file.  
Open: Open the selected folder.  
6 . Touch <OK>.  
A WARNING window like the following appears.  
fig.06-18_50  
Close: Move to the next higher folder.  
9 . Touch <OK>.  
A WARNING window like the following appears.  
fig.06-17_50  
If you want to cancel the procedure at this point, touch  
<CANCEL>.  
7 . Touch <EXECUTE> to execute the operation.  
If you want to cancel the procedure at this point, touch  
<CANCEL>.  
1 0 . Touch <EXECUTE> to execute the operation.  
8 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Disk -Re la te d Fu n ctio n s (Disk Mo d e )  
7 . Touch the on-screen alphabetic or numeric keys to enter the  
new name in the text box.  
Re n a m in g a File s/ Fo ld e rs  
(Re n a m e )  
The on-screen keys have the following functions.  
<><>: Move the cursor in the text box to the desired input  
location.  
2 . Touch <Tools>.  
<SHIFT>: Turn this on when you want to input uppercase letters  
or symbols.  
The Disk Tools screen appears.  
fig.06-13_50  
<Insert>: Turn this on when you want to insert a character at the  
cursor location.  
<Clear>: Erases all characters in the text box.  
<Delete>: Deletes the character at the cursor location.  
<Back>: Deletes the character that precedes the cursor location.  
You can also move the input location cursor by pressing the  
[
][  
] cursor buttons. Pressing [  
] will change the  
character at the cursor location to uppercase, and pressing [  
will change it to lowercase.  
]
3 . Touch <Rename>.  
8 . When you have finished inputting, touch <OK> to execute  
the operation.  
4 . If you want to rename a file or folder in internal memory,  
touch <Int>. If you want to rename a file or folder in a PC  
card, touch <Card>.  
5 . In the file list, select the file or folder that you want to  
rename.  
Here you can use the following functions. Touch the appropriate  
button to execute.  
Prevw: Preview (audition) the selected file (.w00/ .wav/ .aif).  
Info: View information for the selected file.  
Open: Open the selected folder.  
Close: Move to the next higher folder.  
6 . Touch <OK>.  
The Rename window appears.  
fig.06-19_50  
8 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Co n n e ctin g to Yo u r Co m p u te r via USB (USB Mo d e )  
Se le ctin g USB Sto ra g e Mo d e  
Ab o u t USB Fu n ctio n s  
You must switch the V-Synth to USB Storage mode before you  
The V-Synth has two modes of USB functionality: storage mode for  
connect the V-Synth and your computer with a USB cable.  
transferring files, and MIDI mode for sending and receiving MIDI  
messages. You must switch between these two modes on the V-  
With the factory settings, the V-Synth is set to USB Storage  
mode.  
Synth; they cannot be used simultaneously.  
1 . Press [MODE] to access the V-SYNTH MODE MENU window.  
Each mode can be used with the following operating systems.  
Windows 98 or later  
Mac OS 9.04 or later  
2 . Touch <SYSTEM>.  
The SYSTEM Com Master screen appears.  
fig.05-01_50  
The USB mode (file transfer/ MIDI communication) must be  
switched before you connect the V-Synth with your computer.  
For the procedure, refer to “USB Setup” (p. 76).  
Yo u r Co m p u te r (Sto ra g e Mo d e )  
By connecting the V-Synth with your computer via a USB cable, you  
can transfer files such as projects, patches, and wave data from  
internal memory or a PC card to and from the hard disk or other  
media of your computer, in order to back up your data.  
You can use software on your computer to edit wave data youve  
created on the V-Synth. Conversely, wave data that youve created  
on your computer can be used on the V-Synth.  
3 . In the left side of the screen, touch the <MIDI USB> tab.  
The SYSTEM Com MIDI/ USB screen appears.  
fig.05-03_50  
In this way, USB Storage mode lets you transfer files such as patch  
and waves to or from a connected computer.  
Never connect or disconnect the USB cable or turn off the power  
while in USB mode or while data is being transferred.  
4 . Touch <USB Setup>.  
The SYSTEM Com USB Setting window appears.  
fig.05-03a_50  
5 . Touch USB Mode <Storage>.  
USB Storage mode will be selected.  
9 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Co n n e ctin g to Yo u r Co m p u te r via USB (USB Mo d e )  
6 . Touch <OK>.  
Co n n e ctin g th e V-Sy n th to Yo u r  
Co m p u te r  
7 . If a WARNING window like the following appears, touch  
<ACCEPT> to close the window.  
fig.07-01_50  
1 . Make sure that the power of the V-Synth is turned off.  
2 . Start up your computer.  
3 . Connect the V-Synth and your computer using a USB cable.  
fig.07-02.e  
USB Connector  
8 . In the lower right of the SYSTEM Com MIDI/USB screen,  
Computer  
USB cable  
touch <Write> to save the system settings.  
For the rest of the procedure, read either “Windows Me/ 2000/  
XP users” or “Macintosh users” as appropriate.  
Windows users: Continue reading from this page.  
Macintosh users: Read from page 93.  
USB  
W in d o w s Use rs  
W in d o w s 9 8 / 9 8 SE Use rs  
V-Synth  
You must install the driver from the included CD-ROM into your  
computer. Be sure to read the Readme file on the CD-ROM before  
installation.  
4 . Turn on the power of V-Synth.  
5 . If you are using a PC card, insert that PC card into the PC  
\Storage\Wn98\Readme_e.htm  
CARD slot.  
6 . Press [MODE] to access the V-SYNTH MODE MENU window.  
W in d o w s XP/ 2 0 0 0 / Me o r la te r Use rs  
7 . Touch <USB>.  
Installation is completely automatic.  
The USB Storage screen appears.  
fig.07-03_50  
If the USB Mode (p. 76) is set to “MIDI,” you will be unable to  
select <USB> in the V-SYNTH MODE MENU window. Set the  
USB Mode to “Storage.”  
9 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Co n n e ctin g to Yo u r Co m p u te r via USB (USB Mo d e )  
8 . Touch <Internal> or <PC Card> to establish the connection  
with your computer.  
Clo sin g th e USB Sto ra g e Scre e n  
1 . In the V-Synth’s USB Storage screen, make sure that  
<Internal>: Mounts the internal memory as an external drive on  
your computer.  
“Access” (the access indicator) is not blinking.  
2 . In My Computer, right-click the “Removable Disk” icon and  
<PC Card>: Mounts the PC card as an external drive on your  
computer.  
execute “Eject.”  
3 . Press [EXIT].  
The USB Storage screen will close.  
You cannot select “PC Card” unless a PC card is inserted in the  
PC CARD slot.  
If you press [EXIT] without performing the “Eject” operation on  
your computer, a WARNING window like the following will  
9 . When the USB connection is established, the driver  
installation will begin. A dialog box of “Found new  
hardware” will appear near the Windows task tray.  
Installation is completely automatic. Please wait for it to be  
completed.  
appear.  
fig.07-04_50  
1 0 . When installation is completed, open My Computer and you  
will see a new drive icon.  
In Windows Me/ 2000/ 98/ 98SE, a drive icon named  
“Removable Disk” will appear. In Windows XP, the drive icon  
will be named “V-SYNTH” if you selected “Internal.” If you  
selected “PC Card,” it will show the volume label that you  
assigned when formatting the card. If you formatted the card on  
the V-Synth, the volume label will be “PC CARD.”  
1 1 . Once the V-Synth is connected, you can transfer files by  
Touch <EXECUTE> to close this window only if you are unable to  
perform the “Eject” operation on your computer.  
operating your computer.  
Do not perform the following actions while “Access” (the access  
indicator) in the USB Storage screen is blinking. Doing so may  
cause your computer to freeze, and may also damage the files in  
the drive.  
Ca n ce lin g th e USB Co n n e ctio n  
Once you have connected the V-Synth and your computer in Storage  
mode, you must cancel the USB connection on your computer before  
you do either of the following actions:  
Do not disconnect the USB cable  
Disconnect the USB cable  
Do not remove the PC card while it is being accessed  
Do not suspend (standby), hibernate, restart, or shut down  
your computer  
Turn off the V-Synths power while the USB cable is connected  
1 . Use “Eject hardware” (displayed in the task bar in the lower  
right of the screen) to cancel the connection with the V-  
Synth.  
Do not turn off the power of V-Synth.  
The “Removable Disk” drive icon will disappear from My  
Computer, and the USB connection will be cancelled.  
Sw itch in g th e Co n n e cte d Drive  
When USB-connected, heres how to switch between “Internal” (the  
V-Synth’s internal memory) and “PC Card” (the PC card inserted in  
the V-Synth).  
1 . In the V-Synth’s USB Storage screen, make sure that  
“Access” (the access indicator) is not blinking.  
2 . In My Computer, right-click the “Removable Disk” icon and  
execute “Eject.”  
3 . In the V-Synth’s USB Storage screen, touch <Internal> or  
<PC Card> to change drives.  
9 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Co n n e ctin g to Yo u r Co m p u te r via USB (USB Mo d e )  
8 . Touch <Internal> or <PC Card> to establish the connection  
with your computer.  
Ma cin to sh Use rs  
<Internal>: Mounts the internal memory as an external drive on  
your computer.  
Co n n e ctin g th e V-Sy n th to Yo u r  
Co m p u te r  
<PC Card>: Mounts the PC card as an external drive on your  
computer.  
1 . Make sure that the power of the V-Synth is turned off.  
2 . Start up your computer.  
You cannot select “PC Card” unless a PC card is inserted in the  
PC CARD slot.  
3 . Connect the V-Synth and your computer using a USB cable.  
fig.07-05.e  
9 . When the USB connection is established, a new drive icon  
will appear on your desktop.  
If you have selected “Internal,” a drive icon named “V-SYNTH”  
will appear. If you selected “PC Card,” it will show the volume  
label that you assigned when formatting the card. If you  
formatted the card on the V-Synth, the volume label will be “PC  
CARD.”  
USB port  
Computer  
USB cable  
1 0 . Once the V-Synth is connected, you can transfer files by  
operating your computer.  
Do not perform the following actions while “Access” (the access  
indicator) in the USB Storage screen is blinking. Doing so may  
cause your computer to freeze, and may also damage the files in  
the drive.  
USB  
Do not disconnect the USB cable  
Do not remove the PC card while it is being accessed  
Do not sleep, restart, or shut down your computer  
Do not turn off the power of V-Synth.  
V-Synth  
Sw itch in g th e Co n n e cte d Drive  
4 . Turn on the power of V-Synth.  
When USB-connected, heres how to switch between “Internal” (the  
V-Synth’s internal memory) and “PC Card” (the PC card inserted in  
the V-Synth).  
5 . If you are using a PC card, insert that PC card into the PC  
CARD slot.  
6 . Press [MODE] to access the V-SYNTH MODE MENU window.  
1 . In the V-Synth’s USB Storage screen, make sure that  
7 . Touch <USB>.  
“Access” (the access indicator) is not blinking.  
The USB Storage screen appears.  
fig.07-03_50  
2 . Select the V-Synth drive icon on your desktop, and either  
choose “Eject” from the “Special” menu, or drag the icon  
into the trash.  
3 . In the V-Synth’s USB Storage screen, touch <Internal> or  
<PC Card> to change drives.  
select <USB> in the V-SYNTH MODE MENU window. Set the  
USB Mode to “Storage.”  
9 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Co n n e ctin g to Yo u r Co m p u te r via USB (USB Mo d e )  
Clo sin g th e USB Sto ra g e Scre e n  
Ex a m p le s o f Usin g Sto ra g e Mo d e  
1 . In the V-Synth’s USB Storage screen, make sure that  
Ba ck in g Up Pa tch a n d W a ve Da ta  
(Pro je ct) fro m th e V-Sy n th  
“Access” (the access indicator) is not blinking.  
2 . Select the V-Synth drive icon on your desktop, and either  
choose “Eject” from the “Special” menu, or drag the icon  
into the trash.  
When using USB in Storage mode, the data within the V-Synth may  
be damaged if you operate your computer incorrectly or if your  
computer crashes. As a precaution against such occurrences, we  
recommend that you create a backup as described below.  
3 . Press [EXIT].  
The USB Storage screen will close.  
Ba ck in g Up th e V-Sy n th ’s In te rn a l Da ta o n to  
Yo u r Co m p u te r  
If you press [EXIT] without performing the “Eject” operation on  
your computer, a WARNING window like the following will  
1 . Use a USB cable to connect the V-Synth to your computer as  
appear.  
fig.07-04_50  
2 . Using your computer, copy the V-Synth’s *****.prj folder onto  
a drive (e.g., hard disk) of your computer.  
Lo a d in g Ba ck u p Da ta fro m Yo u r Co m p u te r  
in to th e V-Sy n th  
1 . Use a USB cable to connect the V-Synth to your computer as  
2 . Using your computer, copy the *****.prj folder that you  
previously saved on your computer to the *****.prj folder  
(overwriting it) within the V-Synth.  
Touch <EXECUTE> to close this window only if you are unable to  
perform the “Eject” operation on your computer.  
Ca n ce lin g th e USB Co n n e ctio n  
Once you have connected the V-Synth and your computer in Storage  
mode, you must cancel the USB connection on your computer before  
you do either of the following actions:  
Disconnect the USB cable  
Turn off the V-Synths power while the USB cable is connected  
1 . Select the V-Synth drive icon on your desktop, and either  
choose “Eject” from the “Special” menu, or drag the icon  
into the trash.  
The V-Synth drive icon will disappear from the desktop, and the  
USB connection will be cancelled.  
9 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Co n n e ctin g to Yo u r Co m p u te r via USB (USB Mo d e )  
Lo a d in g a n Au d io File (W AV/ AIFF  
fo rm a t) fro m Yo u r Co m p u te r in to th e  
V-Sy n th (Im p o rt)  
Th e V-Sy n th ’s File Stru ctu re  
As seen from your computer, the V-Synths file structure is as  
follows.  
Do not perform operations on your computer to erase (format) or  
rename these folders or files.  
WAV/ AIFF format audio files created by another device can be  
loaded into the V-Synth and used in the same way as data youve  
sampled on the V-Synth.  
If the V-Synth stops operating correctly, break the USB connection  
1 . Use a USB cable to connect the V-Synth to your computer as  
This will erase all the data that has been saved on the V-Synth. As a  
precaution against such occurrences, we recommend that you  
2 . From your computer, copy (drag & drop) the audio file saved  
on your computer into the *****.prj folder within the V-Synth.  
In te rn a l Me m o ry  
fig.07-06  
[V-SYNTH]  
Disk mode to import the file you copied in step 2.  
[Internal.prj]  
that the imported data will sound correctly.  
V-Synth System.s00  
V-Synth Template.s00  
V-Synth Palette.s00  
6 . Use the Sample mode’s Save command (or the Disk mode’s  
Save Project command) to save the project.  
[PATCH]  
data you copied in step 2.  
001 xxxxxxxxxxxx.p00  
002 xxxxxxxxxxxx.p00  
:
512 xxxxxxxxxxxx.p00  
[WAVE]  
001 xxxxxxxxxxxx.wav  
002 xxxxxxxxxxxx.w00  
:
999 xxxxxxxxxxxx.wav  
PC Ca rd  
fig.07-07  
[PC CARD]  
[Project1.prj]  
V-Synth System.s00  
V-Synth Template.s00  
V-Synth Palette.s00  
[PATCH]  
001 xxxxxxxxxxxx.p00  
002 xxxxxxxxxxxx.p00  
:
512 xxxxxxxxxxxx.p00  
[WAVE]  
001 xxxxxxxxxxxx.wav  
002 xxxxxxxxxxxx.w00  
:
999 xxxxxxxxxxxx.wav  
[Project2.prj]  
9 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Co n n e ctin g to Yo u r Co m p u te r via USB (USB Mo d e )  
In order to use USB in MIDI mode, you must install the driver from  
the included CD-ROM into your computer.  
Ex ch a n g in g MIDI Me ssa g e s  
w ith Yo u r Co m p u te r (MIDI  
Mo d e )  
The correct driver and the installation procedure will depend on  
your system and on the other programs you are using. Be sure to  
read the Readme file on the CD-ROM before installation.  
Windows XP/ 2000  
Drive r In sta lla tio n a n d Se ttin g s  
\Midi\Usb_xp2k\Readme_e.htm  
In order to use the V-Synth as a USB MIDI device from your  
computer, you must first install the USB MIDI driver. The USB MIDI  
driver is on the included “V-Synth Driver CD-ROM.”  
Windows Me/ 98/ 98SE  
\Midi\Usb_me98\Readme_e.htm  
Mac OS 9 (9.04 or later)  
\OS_9\English\Readme_OMS-E.HTM  
\OS_9\English\Readme_FM-E.HTM  
W h a t is th e USB MIDI Drive r?  
Mac OS X  
The USB MIDI Driver is a software which passes data between  
the V-Synth and the application (sequencer software, etc.) that  
is running on the USB-connected computer.  
\OS_X\Readme-E.HTM  
The USB MIDI Driver sends data from the application to the V-  
Synth, and passes data from the V-Synth to the application.  
fig.07-08.e  
Application  
USB connector  
USB  
Driver  
USB cable  
Computer  
USB connector  
V-Synth  
9 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
O th e r Fu n ctio n s  
2 . In the pulldown menu, touch <Data Transfer>.  
Tra n sm ittin g Da ta to a n  
Ex te rn a l MIDI De vice (Da ta  
Tra n sfe r)  
The Data Transfer window appears.  
fig.08-02_50  
Patch, setup and system settings will be transmitted to an external  
MIDI device. This operation is called bulk dump. Use this operation  
when you want to connect another V-Synth and play it using the  
same settings, or to save your data on an external MIDI device as a  
precaution against possible loss of sound data or system settings.  
To transmit data to an external MIDI device, connect the external  
MIDI device and V-Synth as shown in the diagram.  
fig.08-01.e  
3 . In “Source,” select the type of data that you want to  
transmit.  
MIDI IN  
<ALL>: Patch, setup, system  
<SETUP>: Setup  
<SYSTEM>: System  
<PATCH>: Patch  
If you selected <PATCH>, specify the patch that is to be sent.  
<WORK>: Transmit patches from the work area. Use the  
“FROM” - “TO” fields to specify the range of patch numbers  
(001–512) that will be transmit.  
MIDI Sequencer  
MIDI OUT  
<TEMP>: Transmit patch from the temporary area.  
4 . Set the external MIDI device so that it will be ready to receive  
data, and touch <Execute> to execute data transmission.  
While the data is being transmitted, the display will indicate  
“Transmitting...” When “COMPLETED!” is displayed, the  
transmission has been completed.  
V-Synth  
1 . Touch <> in the upper right of the screen.  
To halt during transmission, touch <ABORT>.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.01-05_50  
9 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
O th e r Fu n ctio n s  
Re se t to De fa u lt Fa cto ry  
Se ttin g s (Fa cto ry Re se t)  
Vie w in g Va rio u s In fo rm a tio n  
(In fo )  
This restores all data in the V-Synth to the factory-set condition  
(Factory Reset).  
1 . In the upper right of the screen, touch <>.  
A pulldown menu appears.  
fig.01-05_50  
If there is important data youve created thats stored in the V-  
Synths internal memory, all such data is discarded when a  
Factory Reset is performed. If you want to keep the existing data,  
1 . Press [MODE].  
The V-SYNTH MODE MENU window appears.  
fig.MODE_50  
2 . In the pulldown menu, touch <Info>.  
The PATCH Information window appears.  
fig.08-04_50  
2 . Touch <FACTORY RESET>.  
The Factory Reset screen appears.  
fig.08-03_50  
This window shows the following information.  
Version: The V-Synth’s program version  
Part: The number and name of the patch assigned to each part  
3 . When you have finished viewing the information, touch  
<OK> to close the window.  
3 . Touch <Execute> to execute the Factory Reset.  
When the display indicates “COMPLETED!,” the factory reset  
operation has been completed.  
9 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
O th e r Fu n ctio n s  
Ad ju stin g th e Se n sitivity o f th e  
To u ch Scre e n  
Ad ju stin g th e Se n sitivity o f th e  
To u ch Scre e n / Tim e Trip Pa d / D  
Be a m Co n tro lle r (Ca lib ra tio n  
Mo d e )  
Perform this adjustment if the touch panel no longer responds as  
you expect.  
1 . In the CALIBRATION MENU screen, touch <TOUCH  
SCREEN>.  
Disp la y in g th e CALIBRATIO N MEN U  
Scre e n  
The T SCREEN CALIBRATION screen appears.  
fig.08-06_50  
1 . Press [MODE].  
The V-SYNTH MODE MENU window appears.  
fig.MODE_50  
2 . Touch the center of “+” symbol indicated by the square  
symbol in the screen, in the following order: left top →  
right bottom.  
When you have touched all four points, the screen will close, and  
the sensitivity of the touch screen will be calibrated.  
2 . Touch <CALIBRATION>.  
The CALIBRATION MENU screen appears.  
fig.08-05_50  
9 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
O th e r Fu n ctio n s  
Ad ju stin g th e Se n sitivity o f th e Tim e  
Trip Pa d  
Ad ju stin g th e Se n sitivity o f th e D  
Be a m Co n tro lle r  
Perform this adjustment if the Time Trip pad no longer responds as  
Perform this adjustment if the D Beam controller is functioning  
you expect.  
incorrectly, such as responding even though you have not operated  
it.  
1 . In the CALIBRATION MENU screen, touch <TIME TRIP PAD>.  
1 . In the CALIBRATION MENU screen, touch <D BEAM>.  
The TT PAD CALIBRATION screen appears.  
fig.08-07_50  
The D Beam CALIBRATION screen appears.  
fig.08-08_50  
2 . On the Time Trip pad, touch the points indicated by the  
square symbol in the screen, in the following order: left →  
top right bottom.  
When you place your hand over the D Beam controller, the “L”  
or “R” level meter in the screen will move upward or  
downward.  
When you have touched all four points, the screen will close, and  
the sensitivity of the Time Trip pad will be calibrated.  
2 . First specify the location at which the D Beam controller will  
begin responding (i.e., the minimum value).  
Move your hand toward the D Beam controller, and touch  
<Min> at the point where you want the controller to begin  
responding.  
3 . Next specify the location at which the D Beam controller will  
reach the peak (i.e., the maximum value).  
Continue moving your hand toward the D Beam controller, and  
touch <Max> at the point where you want the peak response to  
occur.  
4 . While watching the level meter in the screen, raise and lower  
your hand to check the response of the D Beam controller.  
5 . If you are satisfied with the response, touch <OK>.  
The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will be calibrated.  
1 0 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Ap p e n d ice s  
1 0 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Pa ra m e te r List  
Pa tch Pa ra m e te rs  
Parameter  
General  
Value  
Structure Type  
TYPE1, TYPE2, TYPE3  
OFF, ON  
Portamento  
Mode  
Portamento Switch  
Portamento Mode  
NORMAL, LEGATO  
RATE, TIME  
0–127  
Type  
Portamento Type  
Time  
Portamento Time  
Time Velo Sens  
Mono/ Poly  
Legato  
Portamento Time Velocity Sensitivity  
-63– +63  
Mono, Poly  
OFF, ON  
Legato Switch  
D Beam/Bender  
Octave Shift  
D Beam  
-3– +3  
D Beam Type  
OFF, Time Trip, Time, Pitch, Assignable  
Bend Range Up  
Bend Range Down  
TT Pad  
Pitch Bend Range Up  
Pitch Bend Range Down  
0–48  
0–48  
Mode  
Time Trip Pad Mode  
XY, TT  
Hold  
Time Trip Pad Hold Switch  
OFF, ON  
Matrix Ctrl  
Source  
Matrix Control Source  
OFF, CC01–31, CC33–95, BEND, AFT, +PAD-X/  
Y, PAD-X/ Y, TRIP-R, BEAM-L/ R, KNOB1/ 2,  
VELO, KEYF  
-63– +63  
(*)  
Sens  
Matrix Control Sens  
Destination 1, 2  
Arpeggio  
Arpeggio Switch  
Patch Tempo  
Hold  
Matrix Control Destination 1, 2  
OFF, ON  
20.0–250.0  
Arpeggio Hold Switch  
Arpeggio Octave Range  
Arpeggio Keyboard Velocity  
Arpeggio Duration  
OFF, ON  
Octave Range  
KBD Velo  
Duration  
-3– +3  
REAL, 1–127  
0–100 %  
Motif  
Arpeggio Motif  
UP, DOWN, UP&DOWN, RANDOM, NOTE  
ORDER, RHYTHM, PHRASE, AUTO  
0–100 %  
Shuffle Rate  
Arpeggio Shuffle Rate  
Shuffle Resolution  
Arpeggio Shuffle Resolution  
(Sixteenth note),  
(Eighth note)  
Tune  
Patch Coarse Tune  
Patch Fine Tune  
Scale Tune  
-48– +48  
-50– +50  
Scale Tune Switch  
OFF, ON  
-100– +100  
Scale Tune C–B  
Zone  
Current Zone  
Zone 01–16 Range Hi  
Zone 01–16  
C-1–G9  
* OSC1/ 2-PITCH, OSC1/ 2-TIME/ PW, OSC1/ 2-FORMA/ FAT, OSC1/ 2-LVL, OSC1/ 2-PENV-ATK, OSC1/ 2-PENV-DCY, OSC1/ 2-PENV-REL,  
OSC1/ 2-TENV-ATK, OSC1/ 2-TENV-DCY, OSC1/ 2-TENV-REL, OSC1/ 2-FENV-ATK, OSC1/ 2-FENV-DCY, OSC1/ 2-FENV-REL, OSC1/ 2-  
AENV-ATK, OSC1/ 2-AENV-DCY, OSC1/ 2-AENV-REL, OSC1/ 2-LFO-RATE, OSC1/ 2-LFO-PCH, OSC1/ 2-LFO-TM/ PW, OSC1/ 2-LFO-FR/  
FT, OSC1/ 2-LFO-LVL, CSM1/ 2-PRM1, CSM1/ 2-PRM2, CSM1/ 2-ENV1-ATK, CSM1/ 2-ENV1-DCY, CSM1/ 2-ENV1-REL, CSM1/ 2-ENV2-  
ATK, CSM1/ 2-ENV2-DCY, CSM1/ 2-ENV2-REL, CSM1/ 2-LFO-RATE, CSM1/ 2-LFO-PRM1, CSM1/ 2-LFO-PRM2, TVA-LVL, TVA-ENV-  
ATK, TVA-ENV-DCY, TVA-ENV-REL, TVA-LFO-RATE, TVA-LFO-LVL, TVA-LFO-PAN, MFX-SEND, CHO-SEND, REV-SEND, MFX-  
PRM1–3, TVA-PAN  
1 0 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Pa ra m e te r List  
Parameter  
Value  
Oscillator Switch  
OSC Type  
OFF, ON  
Oscillator Type  
Wave Gain  
ANALOG, PCM, EXT IN  
-12– +12 dB  
Waveform  
Analog Oscillator Waveform  
SAW, SQR, TRI, SINE, RAMP, JUNO, HQ-SAW,  
HQ-SQR, NOISE  
0.0–4.0  
Impact  
Analog Oscillator Impact  
Time Trip Switch  
Time Trip Sw  
Beat Keep  
Waveform  
Vari Sw  
OFF, ON  
Time Trip Beat Keep  
OFF, ON  
PCM Oscillator Waveform  
PCM Oscillator Vari Switch  
PCM Oscillator Start Offset  
PCM Oscillator Playback Mode  
PCM Oscillator Loop Switch  
PCM Oscillator Robot Voice Switch  
PCM Oscillator Tempo Sync Switch  
OFF, ON  
Start Offset  
Playback Mode  
Loop  
0–**  
RETRIGGER, LEGATO, STEP, EVENT  
OFF, ON  
OFF, ON  
OFF, ON  
Robot Voice  
Tempo Sync  
Pitch  
Pitch  
Oscillator Pitch  
-63 – +63  
Pitch KF  
Coarse  
Oscillator Pitch Key Follow  
Oscillator Coarse Tune  
Oscillator Fine Tune  
-200– +200  
-48– +48  
Fine  
-50– +50  
Random  
Oscillator Random Pitch Depth  
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80,  
90, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000,  
1100, 1200  
-63– +63  
Pit LFO Dp  
Oscillator Pitch LFO Depth  
Envelope Velocity Curve  
Velocity Curve  
Velocity Sens  
Velocity A-Sens  
Velocity D-Sens  
Velocity R-Sens  
ADSR Attack  
ADSR Decay  
ADSR Sustain  
ADSR Release  
Env Depth  
0–7  
Envelope Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Attack Time Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Decay Time Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Release Time Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Attack Time  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
0–127, note (*)  
0–127, note (*)  
0–127  
Envelope Decay Time  
Envelope Sustain Level  
Envelope Release Time  
0–127, note (*)  
-63– +63  
Envelope Depth  
Env Time KF  
Pulse Width (ANALOG)  
Pulse Width  
Envelope Time Key Follow  
-200– +200  
-63– +63  
-200– +200  
-63– +63  
0–7  
PW KF  
Pulse Width Key Follow  
PW LFO Depth  
Velocity Curve  
Velocity Sens  
Velocity A-Sens  
Velocity D-Sens  
Velocity R-Sens  
ADSR Attack  
ADSR Decay  
ADSR Sustain  
ADSR Release  
Env Depth  
Pulse Width LFO Depth  
Envelope Velocity Curve  
Envelope Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Attack Time Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Decay Time Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Release Time Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Attack Time  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
0–127  
Envelope Decay Time  
0–127  
Envelope Sustain Level  
0–127  
Envelope Release Time  
0–127  
Envelope Depth  
-63– +63  
-200– +200  
Env Time KF  
Envelope Time Key Follow  
1 0 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pa ra m e te r List  
Parameter  
Value  
Fat (ANALOG)  
Fat  
0–127  
Fat KF  
Fat Key Follow  
-200– +200  
-63– +63  
0–7  
Fat LFO Depth  
Velocity Curve  
Velocity Sens  
Velocity A-Sens  
Velocity D-Sens  
Velocity R-Sens  
ADSR Attack  
ADSR Decay  
ADSR Sustain  
ADSR Release  
Env Depth  
Envelope Velocity Curve  
Envelope Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Attack Time Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Decay Time Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Release Time Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Attack Time  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
0–127, note (*)  
0–127, note (*)  
0–127  
Envelope Decay Time  
Envelope Sustain Level  
Envelope Release Time  
0–127, note (*)  
-63– +63  
-200– +200  
Envelope Depth  
Env Time KF  
Time (PCM)  
Time  
Envelope Time Key Follow  
-63– +63  
Time KF  
Time Key Follow  
-200– +200  
BWD, ZERO, FWD  
-63– +63  
Time Offset  
Time LFO Depth  
Velocity Curve  
Velocity Sens  
Velocity A-Sens  
Velocity D-Sens  
Velocity R-Sens  
ADSR Attack  
ADSR Decay  
ADSR Sustain  
ADSR Release  
Env Depth  
Envelope Velocity Curve  
0–7  
Envelope Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Attack Time Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Decay Time Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Release Time Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Attack Time  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
0–127, note (*)  
0–127, note (*)  
0–127  
Envelope Decay Time  
Envelope Sustain Level  
Envelope Release Time  
0–127, note (*)  
-63– +63  
Envelope Depth  
Env Time KF  
Formant (PCM)  
Formant  
Envelope Time Key Follow  
-200– +200  
-63– +63  
-200– +200  
0–127  
Formant KF  
Energy  
Formant Key Follow  
Fmt LFO Depth  
Velocity Curve  
Velocity Sens  
Velocity A-Sens  
Velocity D-Sens  
Velocity R-Sens  
ADSR Attack  
ADSR Decay  
ADSR Sustain  
ADSR Release  
Env Depth  
Formant LFO Depth  
-63– +63  
0–7  
Envelope Velocity Curve  
Envelope Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Attack Time Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Decay Time Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Release Time Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Attack Time  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
0–127, note (*)  
0–127, note (*)  
0–127  
Envelope Decay Time  
Envelope Sustain Level  
Envelope Release Time  
0–127, note (*)  
-63– +63  
-200– +200  
Envelope Depth  
Env Time KF  
OSC TVA  
Envelope Time Key Follow  
Level  
0–127  
Level KF  
Level Key Follow  
-200– +200  
-63– +63  
Level LFO Dp  
Velocity Curve  
Velocity Sens  
Velocity A-Sens  
Velocity D-Sens  
Velocity R-Sens  
ADSR Attack  
ADSR Decay  
ADSR Sustain  
ADSR Release  
Env Time KF  
Level LFO Depth  
Envelope Velocity Curve  
0–7  
Envelope Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Attack Time Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Decay Time Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Release Time Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Attack Time  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
0–127, note (*)  
0–127, note (*)  
0–127  
Envelope Decay Time  
Envelope Sustain Level  
Envelope Release Time  
0–127, note (*)  
-200– +200  
Envelope Time Key Follow  
1 0 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pa ra m e te r List  
Parameter  
LFO  
Value  
Waveform  
Offset  
LFO Waveform  
LFO Offset  
SIN, TRI, SAW, SQR, RND, TRP, S&H, CHAOS  
-100, -50, 0, +50, +100  
Key Sync  
Delay Time  
Rate  
LFO Key Sync Switch  
LFO Delay Time  
LFO Rate  
OFF, ON  
0–127  
0–127, note (*)  
Fade Mode  
Fade Time  
*
LFO Fade Mode  
LFO Fade Time  
ON <<, ON >>, OFF <<, OFF >>  
0–127  
(Sixteenth note),  
(Eighth-note triplet),  
(Dotted sixteenth note),  
(Eighth note),  
(Thirty-second note),  
(Quarter-note triplet),  
(Dotted eighth note),  
(Dotted half note),  
(Quarter note),  
(Whole note),  
(Half-note triplet),  
(Dotted quarter note),  
(Dotted whole note),  
(Half note),  
(Double note)  
(Whole-note triplet),  
(Double-note triplet),  
Parameter  
Modulator Switch  
Mod Type  
Value  
OFF, ON  
Modulator Type  
Original Level  
Attack  
MIX, RING, FM, ENV RING, OSC SYNC  
Modulator Original Level  
Modulator Attack Time  
Modulator Release Time  
0–127  
0–127  
0–127  
Release  
Parameter  
Value  
COSM Switch  
COSM Type  
COSM Type  
OFF, ON  
THRU, OD/ DS, W-SHAPE, AMP, SPEAKER,  
RESONATOR, SBF1/ 2, COMB, DUAL, TVF,  
DYN-TVF, COMP, LIMITER, F-SHIFT, LO-FI  
LFO  
Waveform  
Offset  
LFO Waveform  
LFO Offset  
SIN, TRI, SAW, SQR, RND, TRP, S&H, CHAOS  
-100, -50, 0, +50, +100  
Key Sync  
Delay Time  
Rate  
LFO Key Sync Switch  
LFO Delay Time  
LFO Rate  
OFF, ON  
0–127  
0–127, note (*)  
Fade Mode  
Fade Time  
LFO Fade Mode  
LFO Fade Time  
ON <<, ON >>, OFF <<, OFF >>  
0–127  
*
(Sixteenth note),  
(Eighth-note triplet),  
(Dotted sixteenth note),  
(Eighth note),  
(Thirty-second note),  
(Quarter-note triplet),  
(Dotted eighth note),  
(Dotted half note),  
(Quarter note),  
(Whole note),  
(Half-note triplet),  
(Dotted quarter note),  
(Dotted whole note),  
(Half note),  
(Whole-note triplet),  
(Double-note triplet),  
(Double note)  
For details on the parameters of each COSM section, refer to “COSM Parameters” (p. 111).  
1 0 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pa ra m e te r List  
Parameter  
TVA Switch  
TVA  
Value  
OFF, ON  
Level  
0–127  
Level KF  
Level Key Follow  
Level LFO Depth  
-200– +200  
-63– +63  
Lvl LFO Dp  
Pan  
L64–0–63R  
-200– +200  
-63– +63  
Pan KF  
Pan Key Follow  
Pan LFO Dp  
Velocity Curve  
Velocity Sens  
Velocity A-Sens  
Velocity D-Sens  
Velocity R-Sens  
ADSR Attack  
ADSR Decay  
ADSR Sustain  
ADSR Release  
Env Time KF  
LFO  
Pan LFO Depth  
Envelope Velocity Curve  
0–7  
Envelope Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Attack Time Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Decay Time Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Release Time Velocity Sensitivity  
Envelope Attack Time  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
-63– +63  
0–127, note (*)  
0–127, note (*)  
0–127  
Envelope Decay Time  
Envelope Sustain Level  
Envelope Release Time  
0–127, note (*)  
-200– +200  
Envelope Time Key Follow  
Waveform  
Offset  
LFO Waveform  
LFO Offset  
SIN, TRI, SAW, SQR, RND, TRP, S&H, CHAOS  
-100, -50, 0, +50, +100  
Key Sync  
LFO Key Sync Switch  
LFO Delay Time  
LFO Rate  
OFF, ON  
Delay Time  
Rate  
0–127  
0–127, note (*)  
Fade Mode  
Fade Time  
LFO Fade Mode  
LFO Fade Time  
ON <<, ON >>, OFF <<, OFF >>  
0–127  
*
(Sixteenth note),  
(Quarter note),  
(Eighth-note triplet),  
(Half-note triplet),  
(Dotted sixteenth note),  
(Eighth note),  
(Thirty-second note),  
(Quarter-note triplet),  
(Dotted eighth note),  
(Dotted half note),  
(Dotted quarter note),  
(Dotted whole note),  
(Half note),  
(Double note)  
(Whole-note triplet),  
(Whole note),  
(Double-note triplet),  
1 0 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pa ra m e te r List  
Parameter  
Routing  
Value  
MFX Send  
CHO Send  
REV Send  
Output Assign  
MFX  
MFX Send Level  
0–127  
Chorus Send Level  
Reverb Send Level  
0–127  
0–127  
MULTI, MAIN, DIR  
OFF, ON  
00 (Thru)–41  
0–127  
MFX On/ Off Switch  
MFX Type  
MFX Master Level  
MFX To CHO  
MFX To REV  
CHO  
MFX Chorus Send Level  
MFX Reverb Send Level  
Chorus On/ Off Switch  
0–127  
0–127  
OFF, ON  
00 (Off)–08  
0–127  
CHO Type  
CHO Master Level  
CHO To REV  
REV  
Chorus Master Level  
Chorus Reverb Send Level  
Reverb On/ Off Switch  
0–127  
OFF, ON  
00 (Off)–10  
0–127  
REV Type  
REV Master Level  
MFX  
Reverb Master Level  
MFX Type  
CHO  
00 (Thru)–41  
00 (Off)–08  
00 (Off)–10  
CHO Type  
REV  
Chorus Type  
Reverb Type  
REV Type  
For details on the parameters of each MFX section, refer to “MFX Parameters” (p. 116).  
For details on the parameters of each chorus section, refer to “Chorus Parameters” (p. 138).  
For details on the parameters of each reverb section, refer to “Reverb Parameters” (p. 138).  
1 0 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pa ra m e te r List  
Sy ste m Pa ra m e te rs  
Parameter  
Master  
Value  
Master Tune  
Master Key Shift  
Master Level  
415.3–466.2 Hz  
-24– +24  
0–127  
Patch Remain  
Powerup Mode  
IO  
Patch Remain Switch  
OFF, ON  
Last Set, Default  
External Input Type  
STEREO L R, MONORAL MIX, MONORAL L,  
MONORAL R  
Mix/ Parallel  
Output Gain  
Digital Output Freq  
EQ  
MIX, PARALLEL  
-12– +12 dB  
Digital Output Frequency  
44.1, 48, 96 KHz  
4 Band EQ  
4-Band Equalizer Switch  
Low Frequency  
OFF, ON  
LOW Freq  
50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 315, 400, 500,  
630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000  
Hz  
LOW Gain  
MID 1 Q  
-15– +15 dB  
0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0  
MID 1 Freq  
Mid 1 Frequency  
50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 315, 400, 500,  
630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000,  
5000, 6300, 8000, 10000, 12500, 16000, 20000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
MID 1 Gain  
MID 2 Q  
0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0  
MID 2 Freq  
Mid 2 Frequency  
High Frequency  
50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 315, 400, 500,  
630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3150, 4000,  
5000, 6300, 8000, 10000, 12500, 16000, 20000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
MID 2 Gain  
HIGH Freq  
2000, 4000, 5000, 6300, 8000, 10000, 12500, 16000,  
20000 Hz  
HIGH Gain  
TOTAL Gain  
MIDI/USB  
Device ID  
Clock Source  
Rx PC  
-15– +15 dB  
-15– +15 dB  
Device ID Number  
17–32  
INTERNAL, EXTERNAL  
OFF, ON  
Receive Program Change Switch  
Receive Bank Select Switch  
Rx Bank  
OFF, ON  
Rx Sys-Ex  
Tx Edit  
Receive System Exclusive Switch  
Transmit Edit Data Switch  
OFF, ON  
OFF, ON  
Clock Out  
Part MIDI  
OFF, ON  
Part 1–16 Rx Sw  
Part 1–16 Rx Ch  
Part 1–16 Receive Switch  
Part 1–16 Receive Channel  
OFF, ON  
1–16  
1 0 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Pa ra m e te r List  
Parameter  
Tx  
Value  
Patch Tx Ch  
Tx PC  
Patch Transmit Channel  
1–16, RX CH, OFF  
OFF, ON  
Transmit Program Change Switch  
Transmit Bank Select Switch  
Tx Bank  
OFF, ON  
Tx Active Sens  
KBD  
Transmit Active Sensing Switch  
OFF, ON  
KBD Sens  
Keyboard Sensitivity  
Keyboard Velocity  
Aftertouch Sensitivity  
Local Switch  
LIGHT, MEDIUM, HEAVY  
REAL, 1–127  
0–200  
KBD Velocity  
After Sens  
Local Sw  
OFF, ON  
Remote KBD Sw  
TT Pad/Knob  
X Assign-XY  
Y Assign-XY  
X Assign-TT  
Y Assign-TT  
Knob 1, 2 Assign  
Beam  
Remote Keyboard Switch  
OFF, ON  
OFF, CC01–31, CC33–95  
OFF, CC01–31, CC33–95  
OFF, CC01–31, CC33–95  
OFF, CC01–31, CC33–95  
OFF, CC01–31, CC33–95  
X Assign-Time Trip  
Y Assign-Time Trip  
D Beam Sens L, R  
D Beam 1–4 Assign L, R  
Pedal  
D Beam Sensitivity L, R  
Hold Pedal Polarity  
0–200  
OFF, CC01–31, CC33–95  
Hold Polarity  
Pedal 1, 2 Assign  
STANDARD, REVERSE  
OFF, CC01–31, CC33–95, BEND UP, BEND  
DOWN, AFTERTOUCH  
1 0 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pa ra m e te r List  
Parameter  
Tx  
Value  
Channel  
V-LINK MIDI Channel  
1–16  
Audio  
V-LINK Audio Switch  
OFF, ON  
OFF, ON  
OFF, ON  
Output  
V-LINK Keyboard Output Fade Switch  
V-LINK Patch Palette Local Switch  
Local Sw  
TT Pad/Knob  
Local Sw  
X Assign-XY  
V-LINK Time Trip Pad Local Switch  
V-LINK X Assign-XY  
OFF, ON  
OFF, PLAYBACK-SPEED, DISSOLVE-TIME,  
AUDIO-LEVEL, COLOR-CB, COLOR-CR,  
BRIGHTNESS, VFX1, VFX2, VFX3, VFX4, OUT-  
PUT-FADE, T-BAR  
Y Assign-XY  
V-LINK X Assign-XY  
OFF, PLAYBACK-SPEED, DISSOLVE-TIME,  
AUDIO-LEVEL, COLOR-CB, COLOR-CR,  
BRIGHTNESS, VFX1, VFX2, VFX3, VFX4, OUT-  
PUT-FADE, T-BAR  
Assign-TT  
Local Sw  
V-LINK Assign-Time Trip  
V-LINK Knob1, 2 Local Switch  
V-LINK Knob1, 2 Assign  
OFF, TIME-TRIP  
OFF, ON  
1, 2 Assign  
OFF, PLAYBACK-SPEED, DISSOLVE-TIME,  
AUDIO-LEVEL, COLOR-CB, COLOR-CR,  
BRIGHTNESS, VFX1, VFX2, VFX3, VFX4, OUT-  
PUT-FADE, T-BAR  
Beam  
Local Sw  
V-LINK D Beam Local Switch  
V-LINK D Beam1–4 Assign L, R  
OFF, ON  
1–4 Assign L, R  
OFF, PLAYBACK-SPEED, DISSOLVE-TIME,  
AUDIO-LEVEL, COLOR-CB, COLOR-CR,  
BRIGHTNESS, VFX1, VFX2, VFX3, VFX4, OUT-  
PUT-FADE, T-BAR  
Lever  
Mod Local Sw  
Mod Assign  
V-LINK Modulation Local Switch  
V-LINK Modulation Assign  
OFF, ON  
OFF, PLAYBACK-SPEED, DISSOLVE-TIME,  
AUDIO-LEVEL, COLOR-CB, COLOR-CR,  
BRIGHTNESS, VFX1, VFX2, VFX3, VFX4, OUT-  
PUT-FADE, T-BAR  
Bend Local Sw  
Bend Assign  
V-LINK Pitch Bend Local Switch  
V-LINK Pitch Bend Assign  
OFF, ON  
OFF, PLAYBACK-SPEED, DISSOLVE-TIME,  
AUDIO-LEVEL, COLOR-CB, COLOR-CR,  
BRIGHTNESS, VFX1, VFX2, VFX3, VFX4, OUT-  
PUT-FADE, T-BAR  
After Local Sw  
After Assign  
V-LINK Aftertouch Local Switch  
V-LINK Aftertouch Assign  
OFF, ON  
OFF, PLAYBACK-SPEED, DISSOLVE-TIME,  
AUDIO-LEVEL, COLOR-CB, COLOR-CR,  
BRIGHTNESS, VFX1, VFX2, VFX3, VFX4, OUT-  
PUT-FADE, T-BAR  
1 1 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CO SM List  
O ve rd rive / Disto rtio n  
CO SM Pa ra m e te rs  
Overdrive produces a natural-sounding distortion  
similar to that produced by a vacuum tube amplifier.  
Distortion produces a more intense distortion than the  
overdrive effect.  
COSM provides 15 types. This section explains the features of each  
COSM, and the functions of the parameters.  
Explanations for each COSM Type are given on the following  
pages.  
Parameter  
COSM Type  
Drive Type  
Value  
Description  
Overdrive / Distortion  
Wave Shape  
OD/ DS  
W-SHAPE  
AMP  
OD, DS  
Selects whether to use over-  
drive (OD) or distortion  
(DS).  
Amp Simulator  
Speaker Simulator  
Resonator  
SPEAKER  
RESONATOR  
SBF1  
Output Level  
Drive  
0–127  
0–127  
Output Level  
Drive #1  
Degree of distortion  
Amount of LFO applied to  
distortion  
1st order SideBandFilter  
2nd order SideBandFilter  
Comb Filter  
Drive LFO Depth -63– +63  
#3  
SBF2  
COMB  
* For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making Envelope  
Dual Filter  
DUAL  
Tone  
Tone #2  
TVF  
TVF  
0–127  
Tonal character  
Dynamic TVF  
DYN-TVF  
COMP  
Tone KF  
Tone LFO Depth  
#4  
-200– +200  
-63– +63  
Key follow setting for tone  
Amount of LFO applied to  
tone  
Polyphonic Compressor  
Polyphonic Limiter  
Frequency Shifter  
Lo-Fi Processor  
LIMITER  
F-SHIFT  
LO-FI  
* For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making Envelope  
LFO  
* For details on LFO settings, refer to “Making LFO Settings” (p.  
Parameters marked by “#1”–“#4” can be selected as a destination  
parameter for matrix control (Destination). These correspond as  
follows.  
W a ve Sh a p e  
#1: Destination CSM1/ 2-PRM1  
You can use a variety of waveforms to create and  
#2: Destination CSM1/ 2-PRM2  
distort the sound.  
#3: Destination CSM1/ 2-LFO-PRM1  
#4: Destination CSM1/ 2-LFO-PRM2  
Parameter  
COSM Type  
Shape Type  
Output Level  
Drive  
Value  
Description  
1–6  
Type of waveform  
Output Level  
0–127  
Drive #1  
0–127  
Degree of distortion  
Amount of LFO applied to  
distortion  
Drive LFO Depth -63– +63  
#3  
* For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making Envelope  
Tone  
Tone #2  
0–127  
Tonal character  
Tone KF  
Tone LFO Depth  
#4  
-200– +200  
-63– +63  
Key follow setting for tone  
Amount of LFO applied to  
tone  
* For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making Envelope  
LFO  
* For details on LFO settings, refer to “Making LFO Settings” (p.  
1 1 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
CO SM List  
Am p Sim u la to r  
1 st o rd e r Sid e Ba n d Filte r  
Simulates an amp.  
By boosting the fundamental and overtones, you can  
apply a pitch to unpitched input sounds such as a  
noise or a drum phrase.  
Parameter  
COSM Type  
Amp Type  
Bass  
Value  
Description  
Parameter  
COSM Type  
HPF  
Value  
Description  
1–3  
Type of guitar amp  
Tone of the bass/ mid/ tre-  
ble range  
0–127  
0–127  
Cutoff frequency of the  
high pass filter  
Middle  
Treble  
LPF  
0–127  
Cutoff frequency of the low  
pass filter  
Output Level  
Gain  
0–127  
0–127  
Output Level  
LPF KF  
-200– +200  
Key follow setting for cut-  
off frequency of low-pass  
filter  
Gain #1  
Degree of distortion  
Amount of LFO applied to  
distortion  
Gain LFO Depth  
#3  
-63– +63  
Sub  
-100– +100  
-2, -1, 0  
Sub detune  
* For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making Envelope  
Octave  
Width  
Octave setting  
LFO  
Width #1  
Width KF  
0–127  
Bandwidth  
* For details on LFO settings, refer to “Making LFO Settings” (p.  
-200– +200  
Key follow setting for  
bandwidth  
Dyn Env  
-63– +63  
Envelope depth for the in-  
put sound  
Sp e a k e r Sim u la to r  
Simulates the speaker type.  
Width LFO Depth -63– +63  
#3  
Amount of LFO applied to  
bandwidth  
* For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making Envelope  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Detune  
COSM Type  
Speaker Type  
Detune #2  
Dyn Env  
0–127  
Detune  
1–12  
-63– +63  
Envelope depth for the in-  
put sound  
Detune LFO  
Depth #4  
-63– +63  
Amount of LFO applied to  
detune  
Re so n a to r  
* For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making Envelope  
Simulates the resonance of a guitar body.  
LFO  
Parameter  
COSM Type  
Filter Type  
Value  
Description  
* For details on LFO settings, refer to “Making LFO Settings” (p.  
BANJO, AC.GTR, Type of filter (guitar)  
RE.GTR  
Size  
Size #1  
Size KF  
0–127  
Body size  
-200– +200  
Key follow setting for gui-  
tar body  
Size LFO Depth #3 -63– +63  
Amount of LFO applied to  
guitar body  
* For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making Envelope  
Balance  
Balance #2  
0–127  
Volume balance between  
the direct sound and the ef-  
fect sound  
Balance LFO  
Depth #4  
-63– +63  
Amount of LFO applied to  
the volume balance  
* For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making Envelope  
LFO  
* For details on LFO settings, refer to “Making LFO Settings” (p.  
1 1 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
CO SM List  
2 n d o rd e r Sid e Ba n d Filte r  
Co m b Filte r  
By boosting the fundamental and overtones, you can  
apply a pitch to unpitched input sounds such as noise  
or a drum phrase. This lets you create a stronger effect  
than the first-order sideband filter.  
A comb filter can be used to boost or cut the  
fundamental or overtones.  
Parameter  
COSM Type  
Octave  
Value  
Description  
-2, -1, 0, +1, +2  
Octave setting  
Parameter  
COSM Type  
Q
Value  
Description  
Tone  
Tone #1  
0–127  
Tonal character  
Amount of LFO applied to  
tone  
0–127  
0–127  
Frequency bandwidth  
Cutoff frequency of the low  
pass filter  
Tone LFO Depth  
#3  
-63– +63  
LPF  
* For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making Envelope  
LPF KF  
-200– +200  
-2, -1, 0  
Key follow setting for cut-  
off frequency of low-pass  
filter  
Detune  
Detune #2  
Detune LFO  
Depth #4  
0–127  
Detune  
Octave  
Octave setting  
-63– +63  
Amount of LFO applied to  
detune  
Width  
Width #1  
Width KF  
0–127  
Bandwidth  
* For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making Envelope  
-200– +200  
Key follow setting for  
bandwidth  
LFO  
Dyn Env  
-63– +63  
Envelope depth for the in-  
put sound  
* For details on LFO settings, refer to “Making LFO Settings” (p.  
Width LFO Depth -63– +63  
#3  
Amount of LFO applied to  
bandwidth  
* For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making Envelope  
Du a l Filte r  
Two filters can be connected in series or parallel.  
Detune  
Detune #2  
Dyn Env  
0–127  
Detune  
-63– +63  
Envelope depth for the in-  
put sound  
Parameter  
COSM Type  
Filter Type  
Value  
Description  
Detune LFO  
Depth #4  
-63– +63  
Amount of LFO applied to  
detune  
LPF/ HPF, LPF-  
>HPF, BPF/ BPF  
Type of filter  
* For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making Envelope  
Filter1/2  
LFO  
Freq #1/ #2  
0–127  
Cutoff frequency of the fil-  
ter  
* For details on LFO settings, refer to “Making LFO Settings” (p.  
Freq KF  
-200– +200  
Key follow setting for filter  
cutoff frequency  
Reso  
0–127  
Resonance  
Freq LFO Depth  
#3/ #4  
-63– +63  
Amount of LFO applied to  
filter cutoff frequency  
* For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making Envelope  
LFO  
* For details on LFO settings, refer to “Making LFO Settings” (p.  
1 1 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
CO SM List  
TVF  
Dy n a m ic TVF  
Cuts off a specific frequency band to change a sounds  
Cuts off a specific frequency band to change a sounds  
brightness, thickness, and other qualities. A wah effect  
can be applied by using the volume of the input sound  
to vary the center frequency.  
brightness, thickness, and other qualities.  
Parameter  
COSM Type  
Filter Type  
Value  
Description  
LPF, BPF, HPF,  
NOTCH, PEAK  
Type of filter  
Parameter  
COSM Type  
Filter Type  
Value  
Description  
db/ Octave  
-24dB/ oct, -12dB/ Amount of attenuation per  
LPF, BPF, HPF,  
NOTCH, PEAK  
Type of filter  
oct, -6dB/ oct  
0–127  
octave  
Cutoff  
db/ Octave  
-24dB/ oct, -12dB/ Amount of attenuation per  
Freq #1  
Cutoff frequency of the fil-  
ter  
oct, -6dB/ oct  
0–127  
octave  
Cutoff  
Freq KF  
-200– +200  
-63– +63  
Key follow setting for filter  
cutoff frequency  
Freq #1  
Cutoff frequency of the fil-  
ter  
LFO Dp #3  
Amount of LFO applied to  
filter cutoff frequency  
Freq KF  
Dyn  
-200– +200  
-63– +63  
Key follow setting for filter  
cutoff frequency  
* For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making Envelope  
Envelope depth for the in-  
put sound  
Resonance  
LFO Dp #4  
-63– +63  
Amount of LFO applied to  
filter cutoff frequency  
Reso #2  
0–127  
Resonance  
R LFO Depth #4  
-63– +63  
Amount of LFO applied to  
resonance  
* For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making Envelope  
* For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making Envelope  
Resonance  
Reso #2  
0–127  
Resonance  
LFO  
Dyn Env  
-63– +63  
Envelope depth for the in-  
put sound  
* For details on LFO settings, refer to “Making LFO Settings” (p.  
R LFO Dp #4  
-63– +63  
Amount of LFO applied to  
resonance  
* For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making Envelope  
LFO  
* For details on LFO settings, refer to “Making LFO Settings” (p.  
Po ly p h o n ic Co m p re sso r  
Flattens out high levels and boosts low levels,  
smoothing out unevenness in volume.  
Parameter  
COSM Type  
Attack #1  
Value  
Description  
0–127  
0–127  
0–127  
Attack time  
Sustain level  
Output Level  
Sustain #2  
Output Level  
1 1 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
CO SM List  
Po ly p h o n ic Lim ite r  
Lo -Fi Pro ce sso r  
Compresses signals that exceed a specified volume  
By changing the bit count and sample rate, this effect  
recreates the Lo-Fi (Low-Fidelity) sounds of the early  
digital samplers and similar machines. After the Lo-Fi  
processor, a filter to change the tone is arranged in  
series.  
level, preventing distortion from occurring.  
Parameter  
COSM Type  
Thres  
Value  
Description  
0–127  
Sets the volume level at  
which the compression be-  
gins.  
Parameter  
COSM Type  
Bit Down  
Value  
Description  
Ratio  
2:1, 4:1, 16:1, 100:1 Compression ratio  
0–15  
This setting is for reducing  
the bit count.  
Attack #1  
Release #2  
Output  
0–127  
0–127  
0–127  
Attack time  
Release time  
Output Level  
Sample Rate  
Down  
Normal, 1/ 2, 1/ 4, Sets the fraction of current  
1/ 8, 1/ 16, 1/ 32  
sampling rates to be used  
for processing.  
Filter  
Fre q u e n cy Sh ifte r  
Filter #1  
0–127  
Cutoff frequency of the fil-  
ter  
By shifting the frequency relationship of the  
fundamental and overtones, a human voice can be  
given a “groaning” character.  
Filter KF  
-200– +200  
Key follow setting for filter  
cutoff frequency  
Filter LFO Depth -63– +63  
#3  
Amount of LFO applied to  
filter cutoff frequency  
Parameter  
Effect  
Value  
Description  
* For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making Envelope  
Balance  
Effect #1  
Effect KF  
0–127  
Effect depth  
Balance #2  
0–127  
Volume balance between  
the direct sound and the ef-  
fect sound  
-200– +200  
Key follow setting for the  
effect volume  
Effect LFO Depth -63– +63  
#3  
Amount of LFO applied to  
the effect volume  
Balance LFO  
Depth  
-63– +63  
Amount of LFO applied to  
the volume balance  
* For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making Envelope  
LFO  
* For details on LFO settings, refer to “Making LFO Settings” (p.  
Balance  
Balance #2  
0–127  
Volume balance between  
the direct sound and the ef-  
fect sound  
Balance LFO  
Depth  
-63– +63  
Amount of LFO applied to  
the volume balance  
* For details on envelope settings, refer to “Making Envelope  
LFO  
* For details on LFO settings, refer to “Making LFO Settings” (p.  
1 1 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Effe cts List  
MFX Pa ra m e te rs  
Explanations for each MFX Type are given on the following  
pages.  
MFX (Multi-Effects) provides 41 types of effect. This section explains  
the features of each MFX, and the functions of the parameters.  
01: Parametric EQ  
02: Graphic EQ  
Para EQ  
Graph EQ  
ResoFilt  
03: Resonant Filter  
04: Isolator and Filter  
05: Distortion / OD  
06: Amp Simulator  
07: Auto Wah  
Parameters marked by “#1”–“#3” can be selected as a destination  
parameter for matrix control (Destination MFX1–MFX3). These  
correspond as follows.  
Isolator  
DS / OD  
Gtr Amp  
Auto Wah  
Humanizer  
Dynamic  
TapeEcho  
St Delay  
TapDelay  
RvsDelay  
VocalEcho  
BP Delay  
AD->Cho  
DigiCho  
SpaceCho  
Hex Cho  
Ana Flgr  
BOSSFlgr  
StepFlgr  
Ana Phsr  
DigiPhsr  
Rotary  
#1: Destination MFX1  
#2: Destination MFX2  
#3: Destination MFX3  
08: Humanizer  
09: Dynamic Processor  
10: Tape Echo Simulator  
11: Stereo Delay  
12: Multi Tap Delay  
13: Reverse Delay  
14: Vocal Echo  
15: Band Pass Delay  
16: Analog DelayChorus  
17: Digital Chorus  
18: Space Chorus  
19: Hexa Chorus  
20: Analog Flanger  
21: BOSS Flanger  
22: Step Flanger  
23: Analog Phaser  
24: Digital Phaser  
25: Rotary  
26: Tremolo/ Auto Pan  
27: Stereo Pitch Shifter  
28: OD/ DSCho/ Flg  
29: OD/ DSDelay  
30: Cho/ FlgDelay  
31: EnhCho/ Flg  
32: EnhDelay  
Trem/ Pan  
PitchSft  
OD->Cho  
OD->Dly  
Cho->Dly  
Enh->Cho  
Enh->Dly  
VocalMt  
GuitarMt  
BASS Mt  
RhodesMt  
Kbd Mt  
33: Vocal Multi  
34: Guitar Multi  
35: Bass Multi  
36: Rhodes Multi  
37: Keyboard Multi  
38: Phonograph  
Phonogrp  
Radio  
39: Radio Tuning  
40: Bit Rate Converter  
41: Pseudo Stereo  
Bit Conv  
PseudoSt  
1 1 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Effe cts List  
0 1 : Pa ra m e tric EQ  
0 3 : Re so n a n t Filte r  
(Pa ra m e tric Eq u a lize r)  
This is a 4 band (low range, midrange x 2, high range) stereo  
It allows for cyclical control of the cutoff frequency using an LFO. It  
allows you to make drastic changes in the frequency response of the  
input signal by the cutoff frequency and feedback, making the sound  
parametric equalizer.  
fig.MFX-01  
brighter or darker, or giving it a distinctive character.  
fig.MFX-03  
L
4-Band EQ  
R
L
Resonant  
Filter  
R
Parameter  
Low Freq  
Low Gain  
Mid 1 Freq  
Mid 1 Q  
Value  
Description  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
50–20000 Hz  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
Frequency of the middle range 1  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 2.0, Width of the middle range 1  
4.0, 8.0  
Cutoff Freq  
50–20000 Hz  
Basic frequency of the filter  
The LFO will control the cutoff  
frequency with this value as its  
maximum level.  
Set a higher value for Q to nar-  
row the range to be affected.  
Gain of the middle range 1  
Mid 1 Gain  
Mid 2 Freq  
Mid 2 Q  
-15– +15 dB  
50–20000 Hz  
Frequency of the middle range 2  
Resonance  
0–127  
Filter’s resonance level  
Raising the setting increases res-  
onance near the cutoff frequen-  
cy, producing a uniquely  
characteristic sound.  
0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 2.0, Width of the middle range 2  
4.0, 8.0  
Set a higher value for Q to nar-  
row the range to be affected.  
Gain of the middle range 2  
Mid 2 Gain  
Hi Freq  
-15– +15 dB  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
Band Mode  
LOW, MID,  
HIGH,  
LOW+MID,  
MID+HIGH,  
ALL  
Frequency range to which the  
filter will be applied  
Hi Gain  
-15– +15 dB  
-15– +15 dB  
Gain of the high range  
Output Level  
Total Gain  
LOW: low frequency band  
MID: mid-range frequency  
HIGH: high frequency  
LOW+MID: low and middle  
range frequency  
0 2 : Gra p h ic EQ (Gra p h ic Eq u a lize r)  
This simulates a 12-band stereo graphic equalizer.  
MID+HIGH: middle and high  
range frequency  
fig.MFX-02  
L
ALL: all ranges  
12-Band  
Sweep Wave-  
form  
TRI, SAWUP,  
LFO waveform  
Graphic EQ  
R
SAWDN, SQR TRI: Triangle wave  
SAWUP: Sawtooth Wave  
SAWDN: Sawtooth Wave  
SQR: Square wave  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
180Hz Gain  
250Hz Gain  
355Hz Gain  
500Hz Gain  
710Hz Gain  
1000Hz Gain  
1400Hz Gain  
2000Hz Gain  
2800Hz Gain  
4000Hz Gain  
5600Hz Gain  
8000Hz Gain  
Total Gain #1  
-15– +15 dB  
Gain of each frequency band  
SAWUP  
SAWDN  
Sweep Rate  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
Frequency of the LFO modula-  
tion  
Sweep Depth  
Balance  
0–127  
Modulation depth of the LFO  
DRY100:0WET– Volume balance between the di-  
DRY0:100WET rect sound (DRY) and the effect  
sound (WET)  
-15– +15 dB  
Output Level  
1 1 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Effe cts List  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
0 4 : Iso la to r a n d Filte r  
A 3-band isolator, filter, and low booster are connected in stereo in  
Filter Slope  
-12, -24 dB/ O  
Filter’s attenuation slope  
-24 dB per octave: steep  
-12 dB per octave: gentle  
Cutoff frequency of the filter  
The closer to zero it is set, the  
lower the cutoff frequency be-  
comes; set it closer to 127, and  
the cutoff frequency becomes  
higher.  
series.  
Isolator is an equalizer which cuts the volume greatly, allowing you  
to add a special effect to the sound by cutting the volume in varying  
ranges.  
Filter Cutoff  
0–127  
The filters allow you to modify the frequency response of the input  
sound widely and give sound a character.  
Filter Reso-  
nance  
0–127  
Resonance level of the filter  
Raising the setting increases res-  
onance near the cutoff frequen-  
cy, giving the sound a special  
characteristic.  
The low booster emphasizes the bottom to create a heavy bass  
sound.  
fig.MFX-04  
L
3-Band  
Isolator  
Low  
Booster  
Filter  
Filter Gain  
0– +24 dB  
Compensates for the volume  
dropped in the cut frequency  
range with some filters.  
The level of compensation in-  
creases as the value is increased,  
and raise the volume.  
R
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Low Band Level -60– +4 dB  
#1  
These specify each level of the  
Low, Mid, and High frequency  
ranges.  
LowBoost Level -15– +15 dB  
Increasing this value gives you a  
heavier low end.  
* Depending on the Isolator and  
filter settings this effect may be  
hard to distinguish.  
Mid Band Level  
At -60 dB, the sound becomes in-  
audible. 0 dB is equivalent to the  
input level of the sound.  
#2  
Hi Band Level  
#3  
AP Low Sw  
OFF, ON  
Turns the Anti-Phase function  
on and off for the Low frequency  
ranges.  
0 5 : Disto rtio n / O D  
(Disto rtio n / O ve rd rive )  
When turned on, the counter-  
channel of stereo sound is in-  
verted and added to the signal.  
Adjusts the level settings for the  
Low frequency ranges.  
Adjusting this level for certain  
frequencies allows you to lend  
emphasis to specific parts. (This  
is effective only for stereo  
source.)  
Overdrive produces a natural-sounding distortion similar to that  
AP Low Level  
0–127  
produced by a vacuum tube amplifier. Distortion produces a more  
intense distortion than the overdrive effect.  
fig.MFX-05  
L
Overdrive/  
Distortion  
Amp  
2-Band  
EQ  
Simulator  
R
AP Mid Sw  
OFF, ON  
0–127  
Settings of the Anti-Phase func-  
tion for the Middle frequency  
ranges  
AP Mid Level  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
The parameters are the same as  
for the Low frequency ranges.  
Type of filter  
THRU: no filter is used  
LPF: Passes frequencies below  
the Cutoff.  
BPF: Passes frequencies near the  
Cutoff.  
HPF: Passes frequencies above  
the Cutoff.  
Input Mode  
MONO, STE-  
REO  
Selects whether to input in ste-  
reo or in monaural.  
If MONO is selected, the left and  
right sound will be mixed, and  
input as monaural.  
Filter Type  
THRU, LPF,  
BPF, HPF,  
NOTCH  
Distortion  
Mode  
OD, DS  
Selects whether to use overdrive  
(OD) or distortion (DS).  
Degree of distortion  
Drive #1  
Amp Sim Sw  
0–127  
OFF, ON  
Turns the Amp Simulator on/  
off.  
NOTCH: Passes frequencies  
other than those near the Cutoff.  
Amp Type  
SMALL,  
Type of guitar amp  
SMALL: small amp  
BUILT-IN, 2-  
STACK, 3-  
STACK  
Level  
Level  
BUILT-IN: single-unit type amp  
2-STACK: large double stack  
amp  
3-STACK: large triple stack amp  
Output Level  
Freq.  
Freq.  
Output Level  
Ps Low Freq  
Ps Low Gain  
Ps Hi Freq  
0–127  
LPF  
HPF  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
Level  
Level  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB Gain of the high range  
Ps Hi Gain  
Freq.  
Freq.  
BPF  
NOTCH  
1 1 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effe cts List  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
0 6 : Am p Sim u la to r  
(Gu ita r Am p Sim u la to r)  
Volume  
0–127  
Volume and degree of distortion  
of the amp  
This is an effect that simulates an guitar amp.  
fig.MFX-06  
Bass  
0–127  
Tone of the bass/ mid/ treble  
range  
* Middle cannot be set if  
MATCH DRIVE is selected  
for the Amp Type.  
Middle  
Treble  
L
Noise  
Amp  
Speaker  
Suppressor  
Simulator  
Simulator  
Presence  
0–127  
Tone for the ultra high frequen-  
cy range  
R
Master Volume 0–127  
Volume of the entire amp  
Turning this On will produce a  
sharper and brighter sound.  
This parameter can be set if the  
Amp Type is set to JC-120,  
CLEAN TWIN, or BG LEAD.  
Degree of amp distortion  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Brightness Sw  
OFF, ON  
NS Sw  
OFF, ON  
Turns the noise suppressor on/  
off.  
The noise suppressor leaves the  
original sound unmodified, but  
mutes only the noise during the  
silent intervals.  
Gain Sw  
LOW, MID,  
HIGH  
NS Threshold  
0–127  
0–127  
Adjusts the level at which the  
noise suppressor will begin to  
take effect.  
* When the signal drops below  
the specified level, it will be  
muted.  
Sp Sim Sw  
OFF, ON  
Turns the Speaker Simulator  
on/ off.  
Sp Type  
(see below)  
1–10  
Type of speaker  
Mic Setting  
Adjusts the location of the mic  
that is recording the sound of  
the speaker.  
Increasing this value will pro-  
duce the effect of the mic being  
further away from the center of  
the speaker cone.  
NS Release  
Amp Type  
Sets the transition time from  
when the noise suppression  
starts to the point where the vol-  
ume reaches 0.  
JC-120, CLEAN Type of guitar amp  
TWIN,MATCH  
DRIVE, BG  
Mic Level  
Direct Level  
Level  
0–127  
0–127  
0–127  
Volume of the microphone  
Volume of the direct sound  
Output Level  
LEAD,  
MS1959I,  
MS1959II,  
MS1959I+II,  
SLDN LEAD,  
Specifications of each Speaker Type  
The speaker column indicates the diameter of each speaker unit (in  
inches) and the number of units.  
METAL 5150,  
METAL LEAD,  
OD-1, OD-2  
TURBO, DIS-  
TORTION,  
FUZZ  
Type  
Cabinet  
Speaker Microphone  
SMALL  
small open-back en-  
closure  
10  
dynamic  
MIDDLE  
open back enclosure  
open back enclosure  
open back enclosure  
open back enclosure  
open back enclosure  
open back enclosure  
open back enclosure  
sealed enclosure  
12 x 1  
12 x 2  
12 x 2  
12 x 2  
12 x 2  
12 x 2  
12 x 2  
12 x 2  
dynamic  
JC-120  
dynamic  
BUILT IN 1  
BUILT IN 2  
BUILT IN 3  
BUILT IN 4  
BUILT IN 5  
BG STACK 1  
BG STACK 2  
MS STACK 1  
MS STACK 2  
dynamic  
JC-120: The sound of a Roland JC-120.  
CLEAN TWIN: The sound of a standard built-in  
type vacuum tube amp.  
condenser  
condenser  
condenser  
condenser  
condenser  
condenser  
condenser  
condenser  
condenser  
MATCH DRIVE: The sound of a recent vacuum  
tube amp widely used in blues, rock, and fusion.  
BG LEAD: The sound of a vacuum tube amp repre-  
sentative of the late 70s and the 80s.  
MS1959 I: The sound of the large vacuum tube amp  
stack that was indispensable to the British hard  
rock of the 70’s, with input I connected.  
MS1959 II: The same amp as MS1959 I, but with in-  
put II connected.  
large sealed enclosure 12 x 2  
large sealed enclosure 12 x 4  
large sealed enclosure 12 x 4  
METAL STACK large double stack  
12 x 4  
Recommended combination of pre-amp and speaker  
MS1959 I+II: The same amp as MS1959 I, but with  
inputs I and II connected in parallel.  
SLDN LEAD: The sound of a vacuum tube amp us-  
able in a wide variety of styles.  
METAL 5150: The sound of a large vacuum tube  
amp suitable for heavy metal.  
METAL LEAD: A metal lead sound with a distinc-  
tive mid-range.  
OD-1: The sound of the BOSS OD-1 compact effects  
processor.  
OD-2 TURBO: The sound of the BOSS OD-2 com-  
pact effects processor with the Turbo switch on.  
DISTORTION: Distortion sound.  
FUZZ: Fuzz sound.  
Amp type  
Speaker type  
BG LEAD  
BG STACK 1, BG STACK 2, MIDDLE  
BG STACK 1–2, METAL STACK  
BG STACK 1–2, METAL STACK  
BG STACK 1–2, METAL STACK  
BG STACK 1–2, METAL STACK  
BG STACK 1–2, METAL STACK  
BUILT IN 1–4  
MS1959 II  
MS1959 I+II  
SLDN LEAD  
METAL 5150  
METAL LEAD  
OD-2 TURBO  
DISTORTION  
FUZZ  
BUILT IN 1–4  
BUILT IN 1–4  
1 1 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Effe cts List  
0 7 : Au to W a h  
0 8 : Hu m a n ize r  
Wah is an effect that modifies the frequency characteristics of a filter  
This adds a vowel character to the sound, making it similar to a  
over time, producing a unique tone. The wah effect can change in  
human voice.  
fig.MFX-08  
relation to the volume of the input signal, and/ or cyclically.  
fig.MFX-07  
L
2-Band  
L
Humanizer  
EQ  
Auto  
Wah  
2-Band  
EQ  
R
R
Parameter  
Filter Type  
Value  
Description  
Parameter  
Overdrive Sw  
Drive  
Value  
Description  
LPF, BPF  
Type of filter  
OFF, ON  
0–127  
Turns Drive on/ off.  
LPF: The wah effect will be ap-  
plied over a wide frequency  
range.  
BPF: The wah effect will be ap-  
plied over a narrow frequency  
range  
Degree of distortion  
Vowel 1  
Vowel 2  
Rate #1  
a, e, i, o, u  
a, e, i, o, u  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
First vowel  
Second vowel  
Frequency at which the two  
vowels will be switched  
Effect depth  
With a setting of 0, it will be  
fixed at Vowel 1.  
Depth  
0–127  
Polarity  
DOWN, UP  
When using the volume of the  
input signal to control the wah  
effect, this setting determines  
whether the frequency of the fil-  
ter will be moved upward (UP)  
or downward (DOWN).  
Adjusts the frequency at which  
the wah effect will apply.  
Adjusts the amount of the wah  
effect that will occur in the range  
of the center frequency.  
Set a higher value for Q to nar-  
row the range to be affected.  
Adjusts the sensitivity with  
which the wah effect is con-  
trolled.  
Trigger Sens #2 -60–0 dB, LFO  
Level at which the two vowels  
will be switched  
-60–0 dB: When the specified  
level is exceeded, the sound will  
change to the other vowel at the  
frequency (speed) specified by  
Rate.  
LFO: The two vowel sounds will  
alternate at the frequency speci-  
fied by Rate, regardless of the  
level.  
Frequency #1  
Peak  
0–127  
0–127  
Trigger Sens #2 0–127  
Ps Low Freq  
Ps Low Gain  
Ps Hi Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB Gain of the high range  
Rate  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
Frequency of modulation  
Ps Hi Gain  
Depth  
0–127  
Depth of modulation  
Ps Low Freq  
Ps Low Gain  
Ps Hi Freq  
Ps Hi Gain  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB Gain of the high range  
1 2 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effe cts List  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
0 9 : Dy n a m ic Pro ce sso r  
(Ste re o Dy n a m ic Pro ce sso r)  
NS Release  
0–127  
Sets the transition time from  
when the noise suppression  
starts to the point where the vol-  
ume reaches 0.  
A comp/ limiter, enhancer, 3-band equalizer, and noise suppressor  
are connected in series.  
Comp/ Limiter is able to use as a compressor, which controls  
inconsistencies in sound levels by suppressing high sound levels  
while lifting weaker signals, or as a limiter that prevents the signal  
from reaching exceedingly high levels.  
1 0 : Ta p e Ech o Sim u la to r  
This virtual tape echo gives you real tape delay sound. This  
simulates the tape echo part of Rolands RE-201 Space Echo.  
Enhancer regulates the high-end overtones, clarifying the sound and  
the sound contour.  
fig.MFX-10  
3-Band Equalizer works in three frequency ranges: Low, Mid, and  
High. You can set the frequencies and boost or cut the level.  
Noise Suppressor leaves the original sound unmodified, but mutes  
L
Tape Echo  
R
only the noise during the silent intervals.  
fig.MFX-09  
L
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
3-Band  
EQ  
Noise  
Suppressor  
Comp/  
Limiter  
Enhancer  
Mode  
S, M, L, S+M,  
S+L, M+L,  
S+M+L  
Sets the combination of play-  
back heads to be used.  
R
The RE-201 had three playback  
heads to make different delay  
times (Short, Medium, and Long  
delay) at once. For example, to  
use the short and middle heads,  
select S+M.  
Parameter  
Comp Sw  
Value  
OFF, ON  
Description  
Turns the comp/ limiter on/ off.  
Sets the volume level at which  
the compression begins.  
Sets the time after the sound vol-  
ume is crossed the compressor  
threshold until compression be-  
gins.  
Comp Thresh- -60–0 dB  
old #1  
Comp Attack  
Comp Release  
Comp Ratio  
0–127  
Repeat Rate #1 0–127  
Sets the tape speed.  
This corresponds to the delay  
time in a contemporary delay ef-  
fect.  
0–127  
Specifies the time from when the  
volume drops below the com-  
pressor threshold until com-  
pression is no longer applied.  
Sets the “source sound:output  
sound” compression ratio.  
Output gain  
Intensity #2  
0–127  
Sets the repeat times of the de-  
layed sound.  
This is analogous to a contempo-  
rary delays feedback setting.  
These are the echo sounds bass  
and treble adjustments.  
When set to 0, they make no  
change to the sound.  
1.5:1, 2:1, 4:1,  
100:1  
Bass  
-100– +100  
L63–63R  
Treble  
Comp Gain  
Enhan Sw  
-60– +12 dB  
OFF, ON  
0–127  
Turns the enhancer on/ off.  
Sensitivity of the enhancer  
Sets the lower limit of the fre-  
quencies to which the enhance-  
ment effect is added.  
Enhan Sens  
Head S Pan  
Head M Pan  
Head L Pan  
These are the pan (left-right) set-  
tings for each of the heads for  
Short, Medium, and Long delay  
time.  
* This parameter does not  
appear on the original RE-201.  
Adds the distortion characteris-  
tic of tape.  
The distortion gets more intense  
as the value is increased.  
Frequency of the wow and flut-  
ter modulation  
The wavering of multiple pitch-  
es that appears from tape wear  
and irregularities in rotation is  
called wow and flutter.  
Modulation depth of the wow  
and flutter  
Enhan Frequen- 0–127  
cy  
Enhan Mix Lev- 0–127  
el  
Level of the overtones generated  
by the enhancer  
Enhan Level  
EQ Low Freq  
EQ Low Gain  
EQ Mid Freq  
EQ Mid Q  
0–127  
Volume of the enhancer sound  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
Tape Distortion 0–5  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
50–20000 Hz  
Frequency of the middle range  
0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 2.0, Gain of the middle range  
W/ F Rate  
0–127  
4.0, 8.0  
Set a higher value for Q to nar-  
row the range to be affected.  
Gain of the middle range  
EQ Mid Gain  
EQ Hi Freq  
EQ Hi Gain  
NS Sw  
-15– +15 dB  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB  
OFF, ON  
Gain of the high range  
Turns the noise suppressor on/  
off.  
W/ F Depth  
Echo Level  
0–127  
0–127  
Volume of the echo sound.  
NS Threshold  
#2  
0–127  
Adjusts the level at which the  
noise suppressor will begin to  
take effect.  
* When the signal drops below  
the specified level, it will be  
muted.  
1 2 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effe cts List  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
1 1 : Ste re o De la y  
This is a stereo delay. Depending on the length of the delay you set,  
Feedback  
-98– +98 %  
Adjusts the proportion of the de-  
lay sound that is fed back into  
the effect. Negative (-) settings  
will invert the phase.  
you can get long echoes, thick sounds, or spatial sounds.  
fig.MFX-11.e  
Low Damp Freq 50–4000 Hz  
Adjusts the frequency below  
which sound fed back to the ef-  
fect will be cut.  
L
2-Band  
Delay  
The Low Damp function damps  
the low frequency band of the  
delay sound quicker than other  
bands, which makes for a clearer  
delay effect.  
EQ  
R
When Mode parameter is STEREO:  
Low Damp  
Gain  
-36–0 dB  
Degree of Low Damp  
Hi Damp Freq 2000–20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above  
which sound fed back to the ef-  
fect will be cut.  
L
2-Band  
Delay  
EQ  
High Damp, by attenuating the  
higher frequencies first, makes  
R
the delay sound more natural.  
Hi Damp Gain -36–0 dB  
Degree of High Damp  
When Mode parameter is MONO or ALTERNATE:  
Balance  
DRY100:0WET– Volume balance between the di-  
DRY0:100WET rect sound (DRY) and the delay  
sound (WET)  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Ps Low Freq  
Ps Low Gain  
Ps Hi Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
Mode  
MONO, STE-  
REO, ALTER-  
NATE  
Switches stereo, monaural, or al-  
ternate.  
MONO: This is a single-input,  
dual-output delay. Stereo sound  
(left and right) are mixed before  
being input.  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB Gain of the high range  
Ps Hi Gain  
STEREO: This is a dual-input,  
dual-output delay. The delay  
sound output features the same  
stereo placement as that of the  
input.  
ALTERNATE: The left and right  
delay sound output alternately.  
(Alternate delay)  
Delay Time  
L-R Shift  
0–1300 ms  
Adjusts the delay time from the  
(MONO), 0–650 direct sound until the delay  
ms (STEREO,  
ALTERNATE),  
note  
sound is heard.  
0–650 ms, note Of the left and right delay  
sounds, the delay time will be  
increased for only one side.  
If the L-R order is LR, the R  
sound will be later. In the case of  
RL, the L sound will be later.  
* When the mode is set to  
MONO or ALTERNATE, this  
setting will be ignored.  
L-R Order  
LR, RL  
In STEREO or ALTERNATE  
mode, this setting determines  
which of the left or right sides  
has the delay sound before the  
other  
LR: The left side is expressed  
first  
RL: The right side is expressed  
first  
* In MONO mode, this setting  
will be ignored.  
1 2 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Effe cts List  
1 2 : Mu lti Ta p De la y  
1 3 : Re ve rse De la y  
The effect has five delays. Each of the Delay Time parameters can be  
Adds the reverse of the input sound as the delay sound.  
fig.MFX-13  
specified as a note length of the selected tempo. You can also set the  
panning and level of each delay sound.  
fig.MFX-12  
L
Reverse  
Delay  
2-Band  
EQ  
Delay 1  
L
R
Delay 2  
2-Band  
EQ  
Multi Tap Delay  
Delay 3  
Delay 4  
Delay 5  
R
Parameter  
Value  
0–127  
Description  
Threshold  
pecify the input level at which  
the delay will begin to apply.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Rvs Dly Time  
0–650 ms, note Specifies the delay time from the  
original sound until the delay  
sound is heard.  
Delay 1–5  
0–1300 ms, note Specifies the delay time from the  
original sound until each delay  
sound (Delay 1/ 2/ 3/ 4/ 5) is  
heard.  
Rvs Feedback  
-98– +98 %  
Adjusts the proportion of the re-  
verse delay sound that is fed  
back into the effect. Negative (-)  
settings will invert the phase.  
Adjusts the frequency below  
which sound fed back to the ef-  
fect will be cut.  
Fbk Dly Time  
Feedback #1  
0–1300 ms, note Adjusts the delay time for the  
feedback sound  
-98– +98 %  
Adjusts the proportion of the de-  
lay sound that is fed back into  
the effect. Negative (-) settings  
will invert the phase.  
Low Damp Freq 50–4000 Hz  
The Low Damp function damps  
the low frequency band of the  
delay sound quicker than other  
bands, which makes for a clearer  
delay effect.  
Delay 1–5 Level 0–127  
Adjusts the volume of each de-  
lay sound (Delay 1/ 2/ 3/ 4/ 5)  
Adjusts the pan of each delay  
sound (Delay 1/ 2/ 3/ 4/ 5)  
Adjusts the frequency below  
which sound fed back to the ef-  
fect will be cut.  
The Low Damp function damps  
the low frequency band of the  
delay sound quicker than other  
bands, which makes for a clearer  
delay effect.  
Delay 1–5 Pan  
L63–63R  
Low Damp  
Gain  
-36–0 dB  
Degree of Low Damp  
Low Damp Freq 50–4000 Hz  
Hi Damp Freq 2000–20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above  
which sound fed back to the ef-  
fect will be cut.  
High Damp, by attenuating the  
higher frequencies first, makes  
the delay sound more natural.  
Low Damp  
Gain  
-36–0 dB  
Degree of Low Damp  
Hi Damp Gain -36–0 dB  
Degree of High Damp  
Balance  
DRY100:0WET– Volume balance between the di-  
DRY0:100WET rect sound (DRY) and the effect  
sound (WET)  
Hi Damp Freq 2000–20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above  
which sound fed back to the ef-  
fect will be cut.  
Ps Low Freq  
Ps Low Gain  
Ps Hi Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
High Damp, by attenuating the  
higher frequencies first, makes  
the delay sound more natural.  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB Gain of the high range  
Ps Hi Gain  
Hi Damp Gain -36–0 dB  
Degree of High Damp  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
Ps Low Freq  
Ps Low Gain  
Ps Hi Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB Gain of the high range  
Ps Hi Gain  
1 2 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effe cts List  
1 4 : Vo ca l Ech o  
This effect simulates a karaoke echo.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Phaser Manual 0–127  
Specifies the center frequency at  
which the sound is modulated.  
Specifies the frequency of mod-  
ulation.  
fig.MFX-14  
L
Phaser Rate  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
2-Band  
EQ  
LPF  
ECHO  
Phaser Depth  
0–127  
Specifies the depth of modula-  
tion.  
R
Phaser Reso-  
nance  
0–127  
Specifies the amount of feed-  
back for the phaser.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Higher settings will give the  
sound a stronger character.  
Specifies the volume of the  
phase-shifted sound, relative to  
the direct sound.  
Delay Time #1 0–650 ms, note Adjusts the delay time from the  
direct sound until the delay  
Phaser Mix Lev- 0–127  
el  
sound is heard.  
Pre LPF Freq  
Mod Rate  
500–15000 Hz, Sets the filter’s cutoff frequency  
THRU  
(THRU: no filter is used)  
Specifies the modulation speed  
of the modulation effect.  
Specifies the modulation depth  
of the modulation effect.  
Specifies the spaciousness of the  
delay sound.  
Delay Time  
0–1300 ms, note Adjusts the delay time from the  
direct sound until the each delay  
sound is heard.  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
Mod Depth  
Diffusion  
0–127  
Fbk Dly Time  
Dly Time Dev  
0–1300 ms, note Adjusts the delay time for the  
feedback sound.  
0–100  
0–1300 ms, note Specifies the differences in delay  
time for each of the delay  
Feedback #2  
-98– +98 %  
Adjusts the proportion of the de-  
lay sound that is fed back into  
the effect. Negative (-) settings  
will invert the phase.  
sounds.  
Delay Level  
0–127  
Adjusts the volume of each de-  
lay sound.  
Delay Feedback -98– +98 %  
#1  
Adjusts the proportion of the de-  
lay sound that is fed back into  
the effect. Negative (-) settings  
will invert the phase.  
Hi Damp Freq 500–15000 Hz, Adjusts the frequency above  
THRU  
which sound fed back to the ef-  
fect will be cut.  
High Damp, by attenuating the  
higher frequencies first, makes  
the delay sound more natural.  
Volume of the echo sound  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
Delay Pan Type 1–10  
Specifies the pan of each delay  
sound.  
Ten settings are provided as var-  
ious panning combinations of  
the delay sounds (see below).  
Sets the center frequency for  
each band pass filter (1–5).  
Specify the output bandwidth  
for each band pass filter (1-5).  
Echo Level #3  
Ps Low Freq  
Ps Low Gain  
Ps Hi Freq  
0–127  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
BPF 1–5 Freq  
50–20000 Hz  
0.3–24.0  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB Gain of the high range  
Ps Hi Gain  
BPF 1/ 2 Q  
BPF 3/ 4/ 5 Q  
Balance #2  
DRY100:0WET– Volume balance between the di-  
DRY0:100WET rect sound (DRY) and the delay  
sound (WET)  
1 5 : Ba n d Pa ss De la y  
This is a delay with a band pass filter (a filter that outputs only a  
specified frequency range) on each of five delays. A phaser is  
included before the delay. Phaser is an effect that adds a phase-  
shifted sound to the original sound to create time-varying change,  
Delay Pan Type  
Values  
Dly 1  
L63  
L63  
L63  
32R  
63R  
L32  
0
Dly 2  
L32  
32R  
63R  
L32  
0
Dly 3  
0
Dly 4  
32R  
63R  
32R  
0
Dly 5  
63R  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
modulating the sound.  
fig.MFX-15  
L32  
L32  
L63  
L63  
L63  
L63  
L32  
L32  
0
0
63R  
32R  
0
1
L32  
63R  
32R  
32R  
63R  
L32  
2
L
32R  
63R  
63R  
32R  
32R  
3
4
5
Phaser  
Delay  
L32  
L63  
L63  
L63  
R
0
0
63R  
1
2
3
4
5
BPF 1  
BPF 2  
BPF 3  
BPF 4  
BPF 5  
1 2 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effe cts List  
1 6 : An a lo g De la y Ch o ru s  
This effect reproduces the sound of the BOSS CE-1 Chorus  
1 7 : Dig ita l Ch o ru s  
This is a stereo chorus or flanger. Equalizers are provided before  
Ensemble. To reproduce the sound of the unit at the time, a  
(Pre) and after (Post) the chorus (or flanger).  
fig.MFX-17  
monaural analog-type delay is first inserted in series.  
fig.MFX-16  
L
2-Band  
EQ  
Chorus/  
Flanger  
2-Band  
EQ  
L
Analog  
Delay  
Analog  
Chorus  
R
R
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Parameter  
Dly Sw  
Value  
Description  
Mode  
Rate #1  
Depth  
Phase  
CHORUS,  
FLANGER  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
Selects either chorus or flanger.  
OFF, ON  
Turns the delay on/ off.  
Corresponds to the delay time in  
a delay effects.  
Dly Repeat Rate 0–127  
#1  
Sets the cycle for the chorus or  
flanger sound undulations.  
Adjusts the depth of modulation  
for the chorus or flanger.  
Dly Intensity #2 0–127  
Corresponds to the feedback set-  
ting in a delay effects.  
0–127  
Dly Level  
0–127  
Sets the volume of the delay  
sound.  
0–180 deg  
Specifies the spaciousness of the  
chorus or flanger sound.  
Chorus Sw  
OFF, ON  
Turns chorus or vibrato on/ off.  
Switches the sound between  
chorus and vibrato modes.  
When Chorus Mode is CHO-  
RUS, this sets the pitch vibrato  
speed.  
Pre Low Freq  
Pre Low Gain  
Pre Hi Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
Frequency of the low range (Pre)  
Gain of the low range (Pre)  
Chorus Mode  
CHORUS, VI-  
BRATO  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
(Pre)  
Chorus Intensi- 0–127  
ty #3  
Pre Hi Gain  
-15– +15 dB  
0–50.0 ms  
Gain of the high range (Pre)  
Adjusts the delay time from the  
direct sound until the chorus or  
flanger sound is heard.  
Pre Dly Time  
Vibrato Depth  
Vibrato Rate  
0–127  
0–127  
When Chorus Mode is VIBRA-  
TO, this sets the pitch vibrato  
depth.  
Feedback  
-98– +98 %  
Adjusts the proportion of the  
chorus or flanger sound that is  
fed back into the effect. Negative  
(-) settings will invert the phase.  
Attenuates the effect in the  
range below the specified fre-  
quency.  
When Chorus Mode is VIBRA-  
TO, this sets the pitch vibrato  
speed.  
Chorus Out  
Mode  
MONO, ST-1,  
ST-2  
Switches the output format  
(mono/ stereo).  
Xover LowFreq 50–4000 Hz  
Xover Low Gain -36–0 dB  
MONO: Output is monaural.  
ST-1: Chorus sound of the pitch  
vibration which phase is invert-  
ed between left and right is  
mixed with the source sound.  
This is a broader chorus, with a  
weaker feeling of placement.  
ST-2: The left output contains  
the source sound, and the right  
side has the wavering chorus  
sound.  
Specifies how greatly the low  
range will be attenuated.  
Xover HiFreq  
2000–20000 Hz Attenuates the effect in the  
range above the specified fre-  
quency.  
Xover Hi Gain -36–0 dB  
Specifies how greatly the high  
range will be attenuated.  
Volume of the chorus or flanger  
sound.  
Modulation  
Level  
0–127  
Ps Low Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
Frequency of the low range  
(Post)  
Ps Low Gain  
Ps Hi Freq  
Gain of the low range (Post)  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
(Post)  
Ps Hi Gain  
-15– +15 dB  
Gain of the high range (Post)  
1 2 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effe cts List  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
1 8 : Sp a ce Ch o ru s  
This effect reproduces the sound of Rolands SDD-320 spatial  
Pan Deviation  
L63–63R  
Specifies the difference in stereo  
position between each of the  
chorus sounds.  
0: All of the chorus sounds will  
be panned to the center.  
L20/ R20: each chorus sound  
will be placed in 30 degree inter-  
vals relative to the center posi-  
tion.  
expression effects. Greater breadth is added.  
fig.MFX-18  
L
Space  
2-Band  
EQ  
Chorus  
R
Chorus Level #2 0–127  
Volume level of the chorus  
sound  
Pre Low Freq  
Pre Low Gain  
Pre Hi Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
Frequency of the low range (Pre)  
Gain of the low range (Pre)  
Parameter  
Mode  
Value  
Description  
1, 2, 3, 4, 1+4,  
2+4, 3+4  
Selects the way in the chorus  
will change.  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
(Pre)  
The SDD-320 features four  
mode buttons for changing the  
effect. This setting determines  
which buttons are to be pressed.  
(“1+4” represents the condition  
when Buttons 1 and 4 are  
pressed simultaneously.)  
Volume level of the chorus  
sound  
Pre Hi Gain  
Ps Low Freq  
Ps Low Gain  
Ps Hi Freq  
-15– +15 dB  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
Gain of the high range (Pre)  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB Gain of the high range  
Ps Hi Gain  
Chorus Level #1 0–127  
2 0 : An a lo g Fla n g e r  
This effect reproduces the sound of Rolands SBF-325 analog flanger.  
Ps Low Freq  
Ps Low Gain  
Ps Hi Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
You can get three different types of flanger sounds (adding a  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB Gain of the high range  
metallic swelling sound to the source sound) and chorus like effect.  
fig.MFX-20  
Ps Hi Gain  
L
Analog  
Flanger  
R
1 9 : He x a Ch o ru s  
Hexa-chorus is a six-stage chorus which adds depth and  
spaciousness to the sound. (Six chorus sounds with different delay  
times are overlaid.) An equalizer is provided before (Pre) and after  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Mode  
FL1, FL2, FL3,  
CHO  
Sets the effect type.  
FL1: A general monaural flanger  
FL2: A stereo flanger that utiliz-  
es the stereo placement of the  
source sound  
(Post) the hexa chorus.  
fig.MFX-19  
FL3: A cross mix flanger that  
providing a more intense effect  
CHO: Chorus effect  
L
2-Band  
EQ  
Hexa  
Chorus  
2-Band  
EQ  
R
Rate #1  
0.02–5.00 Hz,  
note  
Sets the rate of the swelling of  
the flanger sound.  
Depth #2  
Manual  
0–127  
Specifies the modulation depth  
of the flanger sound.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
0–127  
0–127  
Adjusts the center frequency to  
which the flanger effect is ap-  
plied.  
Pre Dly Time  
0–50.0 ms  
Adjusts the delay time from the  
direct sound until the chorus  
sound is heard.  
Feedback #3  
Sets the intensity of the flangers  
effect.  
* When the mode is set to CHO,  
this setting will be ignored.  
Sets the phase of the right chan-  
nel.  
This is usually set to Normal  
(NORM). Setting this to Invert  
(INV) inverts the phase of the  
modulation (rise and fall) in the  
right channel.  
Pre Dly Dev  
0–50.0 ms  
Specifies the differences in Pre  
Delay time for each of the chorus  
sounds  
Rate #1  
Depth  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
Specifies the modulation fre-  
quency of the chorus sound.  
Specifies the modulation depth  
of the chorus sound.  
CH-R Mod  
Phase  
NORM, INV  
0–127  
Depth Devia-  
tion  
0–127  
Specifies the difference in mod-  
ulation depth between each of  
the chorus sounds.  
CH-L Phase  
CH-R Phase  
NORM, INV  
Sets the phase of the left and  
right channels when the source  
sound is mixed with the flang-  
ing sound.  
NORM: Positive phase (+)  
INV: negative phase (-)  
1 2 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Effe cts List  
2 1 : BO SS Fla n g e r  
2 2 : Ste p Fla n g e r  
This effect features a pair of the same flanger circuits used in the  
This is a flanger in which the flanger pitch changes in steps. The  
BOSS compact flangers, connected in parallel for stereo input. This  
speed at which the pitch changes can also be specified in terms of a  
adds a particular metallic-sounding modulation to the source sound.  
note-value of a specified tempo.  
fig.MFX-21  
fig.MFX-22  
L
2-Band  
Flanger  
EQ  
L
R
Step  
Flanger  
2-Band  
EQ  
R
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Type  
NORMAL, HI- Selects the model of flanger sim-  
BAND  
ulated.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
NORMAL: Normal type (BOSS  
BF-2)  
Pre Dly Time  
0–50.0 ms  
Specifies the time delay from the  
original sound until the flanger  
sound is heard.  
HI-BAND: High-Band type  
(BOSS HF-2). Setting HI-B raise  
the flanging sound one octave  
above that at the NORM.  
Sets the center frequency for the  
effect.  
Rate #1  
Depth  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
Specifies the modulation fre-  
quency of the flanger sound.  
Specifies the modulation depth  
of the flanger sound.  
Manual  
0–127  
0–127  
0–127  
Depth #1  
Rate #2  
Sets the depth of the swelling of  
the flanger sound.  
Feedback  
-98– +98 %  
Adjusts the proportion of the  
flanger sound that is fed back  
into the effect. Negative (-) set-  
tings will invert the phase.  
Specifies the spaciousness of the  
flanger sound.  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
Adjusts the modulation speed of  
the flanger effect.  
Phase  
0–180 deg  
Resonance  
0–127  
Sets the intensity of the flangers  
effect.  
* If the Feedback Mode is  
CROSS, this setting is  
Step Rate #2  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
Specifies the frequency of pitch  
change.  
ignored.  
Flanger Level  
Ps Low Freq  
Ps Low Gain  
Ps Hi Freq  
0–127  
Volume of the flanger sound  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
Phase  
0–180 deg  
Specifies the spaciousness of the  
flanger sound.  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
Feedback Mode NORMAL,  
CROSS  
Specifies the input destination to  
which the flanger sound will be  
returned.  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB Gain of the high range  
Ps Hi Gain  
NORMAL: The left flanger  
sound will be returned to the left  
input, and the right flanger  
sound to the right input.  
CROSS: The left flanger sound  
will be returned to the right in-  
put, and the right flanger sound  
to the left input.  
Feedback  
-98– +98 %  
This setting makes the flanging  
sound of each of right and left  
channels return to the input of  
the opposite channel. Negative  
(-) settings will invert the phase.  
* When the Feedback Mode is set  
to NORMAL, this setting will  
be ignored.  
Cross Mix Level -100– +100  
This setting makes the flanging  
sound from each of the right and  
left channels mix it with the  
flanging sound of the opposite  
channel. Negative (-) settings  
will invert the phase.  
Ps Low Freq  
Ps Low Gain  
Ps Hi Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB Gain of the high range  
Ps Hi Gain  
1 2 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effe cts List  
2 3 : An a lo g Ph a se r  
2 4 : Dig ita l Ph a se r  
This effect features two analog-type phasers arranged in parallel,  
making it stereo compatible. The sound as it cyclically drifts in and  
out of phase is added to the source sound, creating the modulation  
Phaser is an effect that adds a phase-shifted sound to the original  
sound to create time-varying change, modulating the sound.  
fig.MFX-24  
with the characteristic of phasers.  
fig.MFX-23  
L
2-Band  
Phaser  
L
EQ  
Analog  
R
Phaser  
R
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Shift Mode  
4STAGE,  
8STAGE  
Sets the number of stages in the  
phase shift circuit (four (4STAG)  
or eight (8STAGE)).  
Setting this to eight stages  
(8STAGE) increases the number  
of the frequency points that  
sound is canceled, giving a  
sharper effect.  
Shift Mode  
4STAGE,  
8STAGE  
Sets the number of stages in the  
phase shift circuit (four (4STAG)  
or eight (8STAGE)).  
Setting this to eight stages  
(8STAGE) increases the number  
of the frequency points that  
sound is canceled, giving a  
sharper effect.  
Level  
Level  
Level  
4 stage  
4 stage  
Freq.  
Freq.  
Level  
8 stage  
8 stage  
Freq.  
Freq.  
Center Freq #1 0–127  
Sets the center frequency to  
which the phaser effect is ap-  
plied.  
Increasing this value moves the  
effect point of the phaser into  
higher frequency ranges.  
Amount of feedback  
Increasing this value gives a  
more distinctive sound to the ef-  
fect.  
Manual  
Rate #1  
Depth #2  
Phase  
0–127  
Specifies the center frequency at  
which the sound is modulated.  
Specifies the frequency of mod-  
ulation.  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
0–127  
Specifies the depth of modula-  
tion.  
Resonance  
0–127  
NORM, INV  
Sets the phase of both left and  
right swelling.  
NORM: The left and right phase  
will be the same.  
INV: The left and right phase  
will be opposite.  
LFO 1/ 2 Rate  
0.02–5.00 Hz,  
note  
Sets the rate of the swelling  
sound.  
LFO 1/ 2 Depth 0–127  
Specifies the depth of modula-  
tion.  
Resonance  
Mix Level  
0–127  
0–127  
Specifies the amount of feed-  
back for the phaser.  
LFO 1/ 2 Phase NORM, INV  
Sets the phase of both left and  
right swelling.  
NORM: The left and right phase  
will be the same.  
INV: The left and right phase  
will be opposite.  
Higher settings will give the  
sound a stronger character.  
Volume of the phase-shifted  
sound, relative to the direct  
sound  
Ps Low Freq  
Ps Low Gain  
Ps Hi Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB Gain of the high range  
Ps Hi Gain  
1 2 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effe cts List  
2 5 : Ro ta ry  
2 6 : Tre m o lo / Au to Pa n  
The Rotary effect simulates the sound of the rotary speakers often  
used with the electric organs of the past. Since the movement of the  
high range and low range rotors can be set independently, the  
unique type of modulation characteristic of these speakers can be  
simulated quite closely. This effect is most suitable for electric organ  
This is a stereo tremolo or auto-pan effect. Tremolo cyclically  
modulates the volume to add tremolo effect to the sound. The Auto  
Pan effect cyclically modulates the stereo location of the sound.  
fig.MFX-26  
Patches.  
fig.MFX-25  
L
Tremolo/  
Auto Pan  
2-Band  
EQ  
L
R
2-Band  
Rotary  
EQ  
R
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Mode  
TREMOLO,  
AUTO PAN  
Selects whether to use tremolo  
or auto pan.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Speed  
SLOW, FAST  
Simultaneously switch the rota-  
tional speed of the low frequen-  
cy rotor and high frequency  
rotor  
Waveform  
TRI, SAWUP,  
SAWDN, SQR, TRI: Triangle wave  
SIN SAWUP/ SAWDN: Sawtooth  
Selects the type of modulation.  
Wave  
SQR: Square wave  
SIN: Sine wave  
SLOW: Slows down the rotation  
to the Slow Rate.  
FAST: Speeds up the rotation to  
the Fast Rate.  
SAWUP  
SAWDN  
Low Slow Rate 0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
Slow speed (SLOW) of the low  
frequency rotor  
Low Fast Rate  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
Fast speed (FAST) of the low fre-  
quency rotor  
Rate #1  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
Frequency of modulation  
Depth of modulation  
Low Accelera- 0–15  
tion  
Adjusts the time it takes the low  
frequency rotor to reach the  
newly selected speed when  
switching from fast to slow (or  
slow to fast) speed.  
Depth #2  
Balance  
0–127  
DRY100:0WET– Volume balance between the di-  
DRY0:100WET rect sound (DRY) and the effect  
sound (WET)  
Ps Low Freq  
Ps Low Gain  
Ps Hi Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
Low Level  
0–127  
Volume of the low frequency ro-  
tor  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB Gain of the high range  
Hi Slow Rate  
Hi Fast Rate  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
Slow speed (SLOW) of the high  
frequency rotor  
Ps Hi Gain  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
Fast speed (FAST) of the high  
frequency rotor  
Hi Acceleration 0–15  
Adjusts the time it takes the high  
frequency rotor to reach the  
newly selected speed when  
switching from fast to slow (or  
slow to fast) speed.  
Hi Level  
0–127  
Volume of the high frequency  
rotor  
Separation #1  
Ps Low Freq  
Ps Low Gain  
Ps Hi Freq  
0–127  
Spatial dispersion of the sound  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB Gain of the high range  
Ps Hi Gain  
1 2 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effe cts List  
2 7 : Ste re o Pitch Sh ifte r  
This effect features two pitch shifters arranged in parallel, making it  
2 8 : O D/ DSCh o / Flg (O ve rd rive /  
Disto rtio n Ch o ru s/ Fla n g e r)  
stereo compatible. It can shift the pitch of the input signal up to one  
This effect connects either Overdrive or Distortion and either Chorus  
octave up or down.  
fig.MFX-27  
or Flanger.  
fig.MFX-28  
L
L
Overdrive/  
Distortion  
Chorus/  
Flanger  
2-Band  
EQ  
A
2-Band  
Stereo Pitch Shifter  
EQ  
R
B
R
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Distortion  
Mode  
OD, DS  
Selects whether to use overdrive  
(OD) or distortion (DS).  
Degree of distortion  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Drive #1  
0–127  
Input Mode  
MONO, STE-  
REO  
Selects either stereo input or  
monaural input.  
Amp Sim Sw  
Amp Type  
OFF, ON  
SMALL,  
BUILT-IN, 2-  
STACK, 3-  
STACK  
Turns the amp simulator on/ off.  
Type of guitar amp  
SMALL: small amp  
BUILT-IN: single-unit type amp  
2-STACK: large double stack  
amp  
3-STACK: large triple stack amp  
Volume of the overdrive or dis-  
tortion sound.  
Grade  
1–5  
Sets the grade of the effect  
sound.  
The higher the value is set, the  
more natural-sounding can be  
obtained; however, this increas-  
es the delay from the source  
sound as well.  
Distortion Level 0–127  
Coarse Pitch A/ -12– +12 semi- Specifies the pitch shift amount  
B #1/ #2  
tone  
in semitones for pitch shift A or  
B.  
Mod Mode  
Mod Rate #2  
Mod Depth  
Mod Phase  
CHORUS,  
Selects whether to use chorus or  
flanger.  
FLANGER  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
Fine Pitch A/ B -100– +100 cent Adjusts the pitch shift amount in  
2-cent units (1 cent = 1/ 100 of a  
Adjusts the speed of modulation  
for the chorus or flanger.  
Adjusts the depth of modulation  
for the chorus or flanger.  
Sets how the chorus or flanger  
sound is spread.  
semitone) for pitch shift A or B.  
0–127  
Pre Delay A/ B 0–500 ms  
Adjusts the delay time from the  
direct sound until the pitch shift  
A or B sound is heard.  
0–180 deg  
Level A/ B  
Pan A/ B  
0–127  
Volume of the pitch shift A or B  
sound.  
Mod Pre Delay 0–50.0 ms  
Mod Feedback -98– +98 %  
Adjusts the delay time from the  
direct sound until the chorus or  
flanger sound is heard.  
Adjusts the proportion of the ef-  
fect sound that is fed back into  
the effect. Negative (-) settings  
will invert the phase.  
L63–63R  
Pan of the pitch shift A or B  
sound.  
Direct Level  
Feedback #3  
0–127  
Volume of the direct sound.  
Adjusts the proportion of the  
pitch shift sound that is fed back  
into the effect. Negative (-) set-  
tings will invert the phase.  
Adjusts the frequency below  
which sound fed back to the ef-  
fect will be cut.  
-98– +98 %  
Xover LowFreq 50–4000 Hz  
Xover Low Gain -36–0 dB  
Attenuates the effect in the  
range below the specified fre-  
quency.  
Low Damp Freq 50–4000 Hz  
Specifies how greatly the low  
range will be attenuated.  
The Low Damp function damps  
the low frequency band of the  
pitch shift sound quicker than  
other bands.  
Xover HiFreq  
2000–20000 Hz Attenuates the effect in the  
range above the specified fre-  
quency.  
Xover Hi Gain -36–0 dB  
Specifies how greatly the high  
range will be attenuated.  
Volume of the chorus or flanger  
sound.  
Low Damp  
Gain  
-36–0 dB  
Degree of Low Damp  
Mod Level  
0–127  
Hi Damp Freq 2000–20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above  
which sound fed back to the ef-  
fect will be cut.  
Ps Low Freq  
Ps Low Gain  
Ps Hi Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
High Damp, by attenuating the  
higher frequencies first.  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB Gain of the high range  
Ps Hi Gain  
Hi Damp Gain -36–0 dB  
Degree of High Damp  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
Ps Low Freq  
Ps Low Gain  
Ps Hi Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB Gain of the high range  
Ps Hi Gain  
1 3 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effe cts List  
2 9 : O D/ DSDe la y  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
(O ve rd rive / Disto rtio n De la y )  
Mod Mode  
CHORUS,  
FLANGER  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
Selects whether to use chorus or  
flanger.  
This effect connects either Overdrive or Distortion and Delay in series.  
fig.MFX-29  
Mod Rate #1  
Mod Depth  
Mod Phase  
Adjusts the speed of modulation  
for the chorus or flanger.  
Adjusts the depth of modulation  
for the chorus or flanger.  
Sets how the chorus or flanger  
sound is spread.  
L
0–127  
Overdrive/  
Distortion  
2-Band  
EQ  
Delay  
0–180 deg  
R
Mod Pre Delay 0–50.0 ms  
Mod Feedback -98– +98 %  
Adjusts the delay time from the  
direct sound until the chorus or  
flanger sound is heard.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Distortion  
Mode  
OD, DS  
Selects whether to use overdrive  
(OD) or distortion (DS).  
Degree of distortion  
Adjusts the proportion of the ef-  
fect sound that is fed back into  
the effect. Negative (-) settings  
will invert the phase.  
Drive #1  
0–127  
Amp Sim Sw  
Amp Type  
OFF, ON  
SMALL,  
BUILT-IN, 2-  
STACK, 3-  
STACK  
Turns the amp simulator on/ off.  
Type of guitar amp  
SMALL: small amp  
BUILT-IN: single-unit type amp  
2-STACK: large double stack  
amp  
3-STACK: large triple stack amp  
Volume of the overdrive or dis-  
tortion sound.  
Xover LowFreq 50–4000 Hz  
Xover Low Gain -36–0 dB  
Attenuates the effect in the  
range below the specified fre-  
quency.  
Specifies how greatly the low  
range will be attenuated.  
Xover HiFreq  
2000–20000 Hz Attenuates the effect in the  
range above the specified fre-  
quency.  
Distortion Level 0–127  
Delay Time  
0–1300 ms, note Adjusts the delay time from the  
direct sound until the delay  
Xover Hi Gain -36–0 dB  
Specifies how greatly the high  
range will be attenuated.  
Volume of the chorus or flanger  
sound.  
sound is heard.  
Mod Level  
Delay Time  
0–127  
Delay Feedback -98– +98 %  
#2  
Adjusts the proportion of the de-  
lay sound that is fed back into  
the effect. Negative (-) settings  
will invert the phase.  
0–1300 ms, note Adjusts the delay time from the  
direct sound until the delay  
sound is heard.  
Low Damp Freq 50–4000 Hz  
Adjusts the frequency below  
which sound fed back to the ef-  
fect will be cut.  
The Low Damp function damps  
the low frequency band of the  
delay sound quicker than other  
bands, which makes for a clearer  
delay effect.  
Delay Feedback -98– +98 %  
Low Damp Freq 50–4000 Hz  
Adjusts the proportion of the de-  
lay sound that is fed back into  
the effect. Negative (-) settings  
will invert the phase.  
Adjusts the frequency below  
which sound fed back to the ef-  
fect will be cut.  
The Low Damp function damps  
the low frequency band of the  
delay sound quicker than other  
bands, which makes for a clearer  
delay effect.  
Low Damp  
Gain  
-36–0 dB  
Degree of Low Damp  
Hi Damp Freq 2000–20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above  
which sound fed back to the ef-  
fect will be cut.  
Low Damp  
Gain  
-36–0 dB  
Degree of Low Damp  
High Damp, by attenuating the  
higher frequencies first, makes  
Hi Damp Freq 2000–20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above  
which sound fed back to the ef-  
fect will be cut.  
the delay sound more natural.  
Hi Damp Gain -36–0 dB  
Degree of High Damp  
Delay Level  
Ps Low Freq  
Ps Low Gain  
Ps Hi Freq  
0–127  
Volume of the delay sound.  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
High Damp, by attenuating the  
higher frequencies first, makes  
the delay sound more natural.  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB Gain of the high range  
Hi Damp Gain -36–0 dB  
Degree of High Damp  
Ps Hi Gain  
Delay Level  
Ps Low Freq  
Ps Low Gain  
Ps Hi Freq  
0–127  
Volume of the delay sound.  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
3 0 : Ch o / Flg De la y  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB Gain of the high range  
(Ch o ru s/ Fla n g e rDe la y )  
Ps Hi Gain  
This effect connects either Chorus or Flanger and Delay in series.  
fig.MFX-30  
L
Chorus/  
Flanger  
2-Band  
EQ  
Delay  
R
1 3 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effe cts List  
3 1 : En h Ch o / Flg  
3 2 : En h De la y (En h a n ce rDe la y )  
(En h a n ce rCh o ru s/ Fla n g e r)  
This effect connects an Enhancer and a Delay in series.  
fig.MFX-32  
This effect connects Enhancer and either Chorus or Flanger in series.  
fig.MFX-31  
L
2-Band  
EQ  
Enhancer  
Delay  
L
R
Chorus/  
Flanger  
2-Band  
EQ  
Enhancer  
R
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Enhan Sens #1 0–127  
Enhan Frequen- 0–127  
cy  
Sensitivity of the enhancer  
Sets the lower limit of the fre-  
quencies to which the enhance-  
ment effect is added.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Enhan Sens #1 0–127  
Enhan Frequen- 0–127  
cy  
Sensitivity of the enhancer  
Sets the lower limit of the fre-  
quencies to which the enhance-  
ment effect is added.  
Enhan Mix Lev- 0–127  
el  
Level of the overtones generated  
by the enhancer  
Enhan Mix Lev- 0–127  
el  
Level of the overtones generated  
by the enhancer  
Enhan Level  
Delay Time  
0–127  
Volume of the enhancer sound  
0–1300 ms, note Adjusts the delay time from the  
direct sound until the delay  
Enhan Level  
Mod Mode  
0–127  
Volume of the enhancer sound  
Selects whether to use chorus or  
flanger.  
CHORUS,  
FLANGER  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
sound is heard.  
Delay Feedback -98– +98 %  
#2  
Adjusts the proportion of the de-  
lay sound that is fed back into  
the effect. Negative (-) settings  
will invert the phase.  
Mod Rate #2  
Mod Depth  
Mod Phase  
Adjusts the speed of modulation  
for the chorus or flanger.  
Adjusts the depth of modulation  
for the chorus or flanger.  
Sets how the chorus or flanger  
sound is spread.  
0–127  
Low Damp Freq 50–4000 Hz  
Adjusts the frequency below  
which sound fed back to the ef-  
fect will be cut.  
The Low Damp function damps  
the low frequency band of the  
delay sound quicker than other  
bands, which makes for a clearer  
delay effect.  
0–180 deg  
Mod Pre Delay 0–50.0 ms  
Mod Feedback -98– +98 %  
Adjusts the delay time from the  
direct sound until the chorus or  
flanger sound is heard.  
Adjusts the proportion of the ef-  
fect sound that is fed back into  
the effect. Negative (-) settings  
will invert the phase.  
Low Damp  
Gain  
-36–0 dB  
Degree of Low Damp  
Xover LowFreq 50–4000 Hz  
Xover Low Gain -36–0 dB  
Attenuates the effect in the  
range below the specified fre-  
quency.  
Hi Damp Freq 2000–20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above  
which sound fed back to the ef-  
fect will be cut.  
Specifies how greatly the low  
range will be attenuated.  
High Damp, by attenuating the  
higher frequencies first, makes  
the delay sound more natural.  
Xover HiFreq  
2000–20000 Hz Attenuates the effect in the  
range above the specified fre-  
quency.  
Hi Damp Gain -36–0 dB  
Degree of High Damp  
Delay Level  
Ps Low Freq  
Ps Low Gain  
Ps Hi Freq  
0–127  
Volume of the delay sound.  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
Xover Hi Gain -36–0 dB  
Specifies how greatly the high  
range will be attenuated.  
Volume of the chorus or flanger  
sound.  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
Mod Level  
0–127  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB Gain of the high range  
Ps Hi Gain  
Ps Low Freq  
Ps Low Gain  
Ps Hi Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB Gain of the high range  
Ps Hi Gain  
1 3 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effe cts List  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
3 3 : Vo ca l Mu lti  
A limiter/ de-esser, enhancer, 3-band equalizer, and delay are  
Low Damp Freq 50–4000 Hz  
Adjusts the frequency below  
which sound fed back to the ef-  
fect will be cut.  
connected in series.  
The Low Damp function damps  
the low frequency band of the  
delay sound quicker than other  
bands, which makes for a clearer  
delay effect.  
A limiter holds down high signal levels to prevent distortion.  
A de-esser cuts the sibilant sounds of a voice, producing a gentler  
tone.  
fig.MFX-33  
L
Low Damp  
Gain  
-36–0 dB  
Degree of Low Damp  
Limiter/  
De-esser  
3-Band  
EQ  
Enhancer  
Delay  
Hi Damp Freq 2000–20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above  
which sound fed back to the ef-  
fect will be cut.  
R
High Damp, by attenuating the  
higher frequencies first, makes  
the delay sound more natural.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Limtr Mode  
LIMITER, DE- Selects whether the effect will  
ESSER  
function as a limiter or as a de-  
esser.  
Hi Damp Gain -36–0 dB  
Delay Level 0–127  
Degree of High Damp  
Volume of the delay sound.  
* When the limiter mode is DE-  
ESSER, the setting for Limtr  
xxxxx will be ignored. When  
the mode is LIMITER, the  
setting for DE xxxxx will be  
ignored.  
3 4 : Gu ita r Mu lti  
Guitar Multi provides Comp/ Limiter, Overdrive or Distortion,  
Chorus or Flanger, and Delay effects connected in series.  
fig.MFX-34  
Limtr Thresh-  
old  
-60–0 dB  
0–127  
Adjusts the level (Threshold  
Level) at which the limiter will  
begin to operate.  
L
Comp/  
Limiter  
Overdrive/  
Distortion  
Chorus/  
Flanger  
Limtr Release  
#1  
Adjusts the time until when the  
limiter will turn off after the in-  
put level falls below the thresh-  
old level.  
R
Limtr Gain  
DE Sens  
-60– +12 dB  
0–127  
Adjusts the gain of the sound  
that passes through the limiter.  
Adjusts the sensitivity relative  
to the input volume, which con-  
trols how the effect is applied.  
Delay  
DE Frequency  
Enhan Sens  
1000–10000 Hz Adjusts the frequency at which  
the de-esser effect will apply.  
Parameter  
Comp Sw  
Value  
OFF, ON  
Description  
0–127  
Sensitivity of the enhancer  
Sets the lower limit of the fre-  
quencies to which the enhance-  
ment effect is added.  
Turns the comp/ limiter on/ off.  
Sets the volume level at which  
the compression begins.  
Sets the time after the sound vol-  
ume is crossed the compressor  
threshold until compression be-  
gins.  
Enhan Frequen- 0–127  
cy  
Comp Thresh- -60–0 dB  
old  
Comp Attack  
Comp Release  
Comp Ratio  
0–127  
Enhan Mix Lev- 0–127  
el  
Level of the overtones generated  
by the enhancer  
Enhan Level  
EQ Low Freq  
EQ Low Gain  
EQ Mid Freq  
EQ Mid Q  
0–127  
Volume of the enhancer sound  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
50–20000 Hz  
0–127  
Specifies the time from when the  
volume drops below the com-  
pressor threshold until com-  
pression is no longer applied.  
Sets the “source sound:output  
sound” compression ratio.  
Adjusts the output gain.  
Selects whether to use overdrive  
or distortion.  
Frequency of the middle range  
0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 2.0, Gain of the middle range  
4.0, 8.0  
Set a higher value for Q to nar-  
row the range to be affected.  
Gain of the middle range  
1.5:1, 2:1, 4:1,  
100:1  
EQ Mid Gain  
EQ Hi Freq  
EQ Hi Gain  
Delay Time  
-15– +15 dB  
Comp Gain  
-60– +12 dB  
OFF, ON  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB Gain of the high range  
Distortion Sw  
Distortion  
Mode  
OD, DS  
Selects whether to use overdrive  
(OD) or distortion (DS).  
Degree of distortion  
0–1300 ms, note Adjusts the delay time from the  
direct sound until the delay  
sound is heard.  
Drive  
0–127  
Delay Feedback -98– +98 %  
Adjusts the proportion of the de-  
lay sound that is fed back into  
the effect. Negative (-) settings  
will invert the phase.  
Amp Sim Sw  
Amp Type  
OFF, ON  
SMALL,  
BUILT-IN, 2-  
STACK, 3-  
STACK  
Turns the amp simulator on/ off.  
Type of guitar amp  
SMALL: small amp  
BUILT-IN: single-unit type amp  
2-STACK: large double stack  
amp  
3-STACK: large triple stack amp  
Volume of the overdrive or dis-  
tortion sound.  
Distortion Level 0–127  
1 3 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effe cts List  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Mod Mode  
CHORUS,  
FLANGER  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
Selects whether to use chorus or  
flanger.  
Distortion Sw  
OFF, ON  
Selects whether to use overdrive  
or distortion.  
Mod Rate  
Adjusts the speed of modulation  
for the chorus or flanger.  
Adjusts the depth of modulation  
for the chorus or flanger.  
Sets how the chorus or flanger  
sound is spread.  
Distortion  
Mode  
OD, DS  
Selects whether to use overdrive  
(OD) or distortion (DS).  
Degree of distortion  
Mod Depth  
Mod Phase  
0–127  
Drive  
0–127  
Amp Sim Sw  
Amp Type  
OFF, ON  
SMALL,  
BUILT-IN, 2-  
STACK, 3-  
STACK  
Turns the amp simulator on/ off.  
Type of guitar amp  
SMALL: small amp  
BUILT-IN: single-unit type amp  
2-STACK: large double stack  
amp  
3-STACK: large triple stack amp  
Volume of the overdrive or dis-  
tortion sound.  
0–180 deg  
Mod Pre Delay 0–50.0 ms  
Mod Feedback -98– +98 %  
Adjusts the delay time from the  
direct sound until the chorus or  
flanger sound is heard.  
Adjusts the proportion of the ef-  
fect sound that is fed back into  
the effect. Negative (-) settings  
will invert the phase.  
Distortion Level 0–127  
EQ Low Freq  
EQ Low Gain  
EQ Mid Freq  
EQ Mid Q  
50–4000 Hz  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
Frequency of the middle range  
Mod XoverLPF 500–15000 Hz, Adjusts the cutoff frequency of  
-15– +15 dB  
50–20000 Hz  
THRU  
the low pass filter. (THRU: no  
filter is used)  
0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 2.0, Gain of the middle range  
4.0, 8.0  
Mod XoverHPF THRU, 50–800 Adjusts the cutoff frequency of  
Set a higher value for Q to nar-  
row the range to be affected.  
Gain of the middle range  
Hz  
the high pass filter. (THRU: no  
filter is used)  
EQ Mid Gain  
EQ Hi Freq  
EQ Hi Gain  
Mod Mode  
-15– +15 dB  
Mod Level  
Delay Time  
0–127  
Volume of the chorus or flanger  
sound.  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB  
CHORUS,  
FLANGER  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
Gain of the high range  
0–1300 ms, note Adjusts the delay time from the  
direct sound until the delay  
Selects whether to use chorus or  
flanger.  
sound is heard.  
Mod Rate  
Adjusts the speed of modulation  
for the chorus or flanger.  
Adjusts the depth of modulation  
for the chorus or flanger.  
Sets how the chorus or flanger  
sound is spread.  
Delay Feedback -98– +98 %  
Adjusts the proportion of the de-  
lay sound that is fed back into  
the effect. Negative (-) settings  
will invert the phase.  
Mod Depth  
Mod Phase  
0–127  
0–180 deg  
Hi Damp Freq 500–15000 Hz, Adjusts the frequency above  
THRU  
which sound fed back to the ef-  
fect will be cut.  
High Damp, by attenuating the  
higher frequencies first, makes  
the delay sound more natural.  
Volume of the delay sound.  
Mod Pre Delay 0–50.0 ms  
Mod Feedback -98– +98 %  
Adjusts the delay time from the  
direct sound until the chorus or  
flanger sound is heard.  
Adjusts the proportion of the ef-  
fect sound that is fed back into  
the effect. Negative (-) settings  
will invert the phase.  
Delay Level  
0–127  
Mod XoverLPF 500–15000 Hz, Adjusts the cutoff frequency of  
3 5 : Ba ss Mu lti  
Bass Multi provides Comp/ Limiter, Overdrive or Distortion, 3-band  
THRU  
the low pass filter. (THRU: no  
filter is used)  
equalizer, and Chorus or Flanger effects connected in series. This  
Mod XoverHPF THRU, 50–800 Adjusts the cutoff frequency of  
algorithm is a multi-effects for bass.  
fig.MFX-35  
Hz  
the high pass filter. (THRU: no  
filter is used)  
Mod Level  
0–127  
Volume of the chorus or flanger  
sound.  
L
Comp/  
Limiter  
Overdrive/  
Distortion  
3-Band  
EQ  
Chorus/  
Flanger  
R
Parameter  
Comp Sw  
Value  
OFF, ON  
Description  
Turns the comp/ limiter on/ off.  
Sets the volume level at which  
the compression begins.  
Comp Thresh- -60–0 dB  
old #1  
Comp Attack  
0–127  
Sets the time after the sound vol-  
ume is crossed the compressor  
threshold until compression be-  
gins.  
Comp Release  
0–127  
Specifies the time from when the  
volume drops below the com-  
pressor threshold until com-  
pression is no longer applied.  
Sets the “source sound:output  
sound” compression ratio.  
Adjusts the output gain.  
Comp Ratio  
Comp Gain  
1.5:1, 2:1, 4:1,  
100:1  
-60– +12 dB  
1 3 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Effe cts List  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
3 6 : Rh o d e s Mu lti  
Enhancer, Phaser, Chorus or Flanger, and Tremolo or Auto-pan are  
Trem/ Pan Sw  
OFF, ON  
Turns the tremolo/ auto pan ef-  
fect on/ off.  
connected in series. This effect is used for electric piano.  
fig.MFX-36  
Trem Mode  
TREMOLO,  
AUTO PAN  
TRI, SAWUP,  
SAWDN, SQR, TRI: Triangle wave  
SIN SAWUP/ SAWDN: Sawtooth  
Selects whether to use tremolo  
or auto pan.  
L
Trem Wave-  
form  
Selects the type of modulation.  
Enhancer  
Phaser  
Wave  
SQR: Square wave  
SIN: Sine wave  
R
SAWUP  
SAWDN  
Tremolo/  
Auto Pan  
Trem Rate  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
Frequency of modulation  
Depth of modulation  
Chorus/  
Flanger  
Trem Depth  
0–127  
3 7 : Ke y b o a rd Mu lti  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
A ring modulator, 3-band equalizer, pitch shifter, phaser, and delay  
Enhan Sw  
OFF, ON  
Turns the enhancer effect on/  
off.  
are connected in series.  
Enhan Sens  
0–127  
Sensitivity of the enhancer  
Sets the lower limit of the fre-  
quencies to which the enhance-  
ment effect is added.  
Ring Modulator is an effect which applies ring modulation using an  
Enhan Frequen- 0–127  
cy  
internal oscillator to the input signal, producing bell-like sounds.  
fig.MFX-37  
Enhan Mix Lev- 0–127  
el  
Level of the overtones generated  
by the enhancer  
L
Enhan Level  
0–127  
Volume of the enhancer sound  
Specifies the center frequency at  
which the sound is modulated.  
Specifies the frequency of mod-  
ulation.  
Ring  
Modulator  
3-Band  
EQ  
Pitch  
Shifter  
Phaser Manual 0–127  
R
Phaser Rate  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
Phaser Depth  
0–127  
Specifies the depth of modula-  
tion.  
Phaser Reso-  
nance  
0–127  
Specifies the amount of feed-  
back for the phaser.  
Phaser  
Delay  
Higher settings will give the  
sound a stronger character.  
Specifies the volume of the  
phase-shifted sound, relative to  
the direct sound.  
Phaser Mix Lev- 0–127  
el  
Parameter  
Ring Freq  
Value  
Description  
Mod Mode  
Mod Rate  
CHORUS,  
FLANGER  
Selects whether to use chorus or  
flanger.  
0–127  
Frequency at which modulation  
will be applied  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
Adjusts the speed of modulation  
for the chorus or flanger.  
Adjusts the depth of modulation  
for the chorus or flanger.  
Sets how the chorus or flanger  
sound is spread.  
Ring Balance #1 DRY100:0WET– Volume balance between the di-  
DRY0:100WET rect sound (DRY) and the ring  
modulated sound (WET)  
Mod Depth  
Mod Phase  
0–127  
EQ Low Freq  
EQ Low Gain  
EQ Mid Freq  
EQ Mid Q  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
50–20000 Hz  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
0–180 deg  
Frequency of the middle range  
Mod Pre Delay 0–50.0 ms  
Mod Feedback -98– +98 %  
Adjusts the delay time from the  
direct sound until the chorus or  
flanger sound is heard.  
Adjusts the proportion of the ef-  
fect sound that is fed back into  
the effect. Negative (-) settings  
will invert the phase.  
0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 2.0, Gain of the middle range  
4.0, 8.0  
Set a higher value for Q to nar-  
row the range to be affected.  
Gain of the middle range  
EQ Mid Gain  
EQ Hi Freq  
EQ Hi Gain  
PS Grade  
-15– +15 dB  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
-15– +15 dB  
1–5  
Gain of the high range  
Sets the grade of the effect  
sound.  
The higher the value is set, the  
more natural-sounding can be  
obtained; however, this increas-  
es the delay from the source  
sound as well.  
Mod XoverLPF 500–15000 Hz, Adjusts the cutoff frequency of  
THRU  
the low pass filter. (THRU: no  
filter is used)  
Mod XoverHPF THRU, 50–800 Adjusts the cutoff frequency of  
Hz  
the high pass filter. (THRU: no  
filter is used)  
Mod Level  
0–127  
Volume of the chorus or flanger  
sound.  
1 3 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effe cts List  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
PS Coarse  
-12– +12 semi- Specifies the pitch shift amount  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
tone  
in semitone steps.  
Input Mode  
MONO, STE-  
REO  
Use this setting to select either a  
stereo or monaural record play-  
er for the effect.  
PS Fine  
-100– +100 cent Adjusts the pitch shift amount in  
2-cent steps (1 cent = 1/ 100 of a  
semitone).  
Signal Dist  
Frequency  
Range  
0–127  
0–127  
Degree of distortion  
Sets the frequency response of  
the record player.  
Lowering the value degrades  
the frequency characteristics,  
making the sound resemble that  
from an older system.  
Sets the turntable rotation  
speed.  
PS Balance  
DRY100:0WET– Volume balance between the di-  
DRY0:100WET rect sound (DRY) and the effect  
sound (WET)  
Phaser Manual 0–127  
Specifies the center frequency at  
which the sound is modulated.  
Specifies the frequency of mod-  
ulation.  
Phaser Rate  
0.05–10.0 Hz,  
note  
Disk Type  
LP, EP, SP  
Phaser Depth  
0–127  
Specifies the depth of modula-  
tion.  
LP: 33 1/ 3 r.p.m.  
EP: 45 r.p.m.  
SP: 78 r.p.m.  
Phaser Reso-  
nance  
0–127  
Specifies the amount of feed-  
back for the phaser.  
Total Noise #1 0–127  
Total noise level.  
Higher settings will give the  
sound a stronger character.  
Specifies the volume of the  
phase-shifted sound, relative to  
the direct sound.  
Scratch  
Dust  
0–127  
0–127  
0–127  
Scratches on the record.  
Dust on the record.  
Phaser Mix Lev- 0–127  
el  
Hiss  
Continuous hissing noise.  
* These settings add the typical record’s noise. The noises increase as  
the values are raised. Set each of the Scratch, Dust, and Hiss noise  
levels to get a balance, the adjust the overall amount of noise with the  
Total Noise Level control.  
Delay Time  
0–650 ms, note Adjusts the delay time from the  
direct sound until the delay  
sound is heard.  
Delay Feedback -98– +98 %  
Low Damp Freq 50–4000 Hz  
Adjusts the proportion of the de-  
lay sound that is fed back into  
the effect. Negative (-) settings  
will invert the phase.  
Total Wow/  
Flutter #2  
Wow  
0–127  
0–127  
0–127  
0–127  
Total wow and flutter.  
Wow, long cycle rotational ir-  
regularity.  
Adjusts the frequency below  
which sound fed back to the ef-  
fect will be cut.  
Flutter  
Flutter, short cycle rotational ir-  
regularity.  
Random  
Random rotational irregularity.  
The Low Damp function damps  
the low frequency band of the  
delay sound quicker than other  
bands, which makes for a clearer  
delay effect.  
These settings determine the rotational irregularities of the record  
player. Set each of the Wow, Flutter, and Random levels to get a bal-  
ance, the adjust the overall depth of the effect with the Total Wow/  
Flutter control.  
Balance  
DRY100:0WET– Volume balance between the di-  
DRY0:100WET rect sound (DRY) and the effect  
sound (WET)  
Low Damp  
Gain  
-36–0 dB  
Degree of Low Damp  
Hi Damp Freq 2000–20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above  
which sound fed back to the ef-  
fect will be cut.  
3 9 : Ra d io Tu n in g  
This effect reproduces the sound of an AM radio playing.  
High Damp, by attenuating the  
higher frequencies first, makes  
the delay sound more natural.  
fig.MFX-39  
Hi Damp Gain -36–0 dB  
Delay Level 0–127  
Degree of High Damp  
Volume of the delay sound.  
L
Radio  
Tuning  
3 8 : Ph o n o g ra p h  
R
This effect reproduces the sound of an analog record played on a  
record player. This includes the various noises with the characteristic  
of records and the uneven rotation of older turntables.  
fig.MFX-38  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Tuning #1  
-50– +50  
Adjusts the degree of noise that  
occurs when tuning a radio.  
Sets the noise level.  
Noise Level #2 0–127  
L
Frequency  
Range #3  
0–127  
Sets the frequency response of  
the radio.  
Phonograph  
R
Lowering the value worsens the  
frequency characteristics, mak-  
ing the sound appear to be com-  
ing from a tiny radio speaker.  
Balance  
DRY100:0WET– Volume balance between the di-  
DRY0:100WET rect sound (DRY) and the effect  
sound (WET)  
1 3 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effe cts List  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
4 0 : Bit Ra te Co n ve rte r  
By changing the bit count and sample rate, this effect recreates the  
Lo-Fi (Low-Fidelity) sounds of the early digital samplers and similar  
machines. After the Lo-Fi processor, a filter to change the tone is  
Filter Gain  
0– +24 dB  
Compensates for the volume  
dropped in the cut frequency  
range with some filters.  
The level of compensation in-  
creases as the value is increased,  
and raise the volume.  
arranged in series.  
fig.MFX-40  
4 1 : Pse u d o Ste re o  
Spreads the components of the monaural input sound to left and  
L
Lo-Fi  
Processor  
Filter  
R
right, creating an artificial sense of stereo output.  
fig.MFX-41  
L
Pseudo  
Stereo  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Pre Filter Sw  
OFF, ON  
This is the switch of the filter  
placed before the Lo-Fi process-  
ing  
R
Sample Rate  
1/ 1, 1/ 2, 1/ 4,  
1/ 8, 1/ 16, 1/ 32 pling rates to be used for pro-  
cessing.  
Sets the fraction of current sam-  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Depth #1  
0–15  
Spaciousness of the sound field  
Bit Down  
0–15  
This setting is for reducing the  
bit count.  
Post Filter Sw  
OFF, ON  
This is the switch of the filter  
placed after the Lo-Fi process-  
ing.  
Balance  
DRY100:0WET– Volume balance between the di-  
DRY0:100WET rect sound (DRY) and the effect  
sound (WET)  
Filter Type  
THRU, LPF,  
BPF, HPF,  
NOTCH  
Type of filter  
THRU: no filter is used  
LPF: Passes frequencies below  
the Cutoff.  
BPF: Passes frequencies near the  
Cutoff.  
HPF: Passes frequencies above  
the Cutoff.  
NOTCH: Passes frequencies  
other than those near the Cutoff.  
Level  
Level  
Freq.  
Freq.  
LPF  
HPF  
Level  
Level  
Freq.  
Freq.  
BPF  
NOTCH  
Filter Slope  
Filter Cutoff  
-12, -24 dB/ O  
Filter’s attenuation slope  
-24 dB per octave: steep  
-12 dB per octave: gentle  
Cutoff frequency of the filter  
The closer to zero it is set, the  
lower the cutoff frequency be-  
comes; set it closer to 127, and  
the cutoff frequency becomes  
higher.  
0–127  
Filter Reso-  
nance  
0–127  
Resonance level of the filter  
Raising the setting increases res-  
onance near the cutoff frequen-  
cy, giving the sound a special  
characteristic.  
1 3 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effe cts List  
Ch o ru s Pa ra m e te rs  
Ch o ru s Pa ra m e te rs  
The functions of Chorus parameters are explained.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Pre Low Freq  
500–15000 Hz,  
THRU  
Frequency of the low range  
(THRU: no filter is used)  
Ch o ru s Ty p e  
0 1 : Ch o ru s 1  
Pre Hi Freq  
Pre Dly Time  
Co LPF Freq  
THRU, 50–800 Hz Frequency of the high  
range (THRU: no filter is  
used)  
0–50.0 ms  
Adjusts the delay time from  
the direct sound until the  
chorus sound is heard.  
Adjusts the cutoff frequen-  
cy of the low pass filter.  
(THRU: no filter is used)  
The effect will be applied to  
the frequency range below  
the cutoff frequency.  
This conventional chorus effect adds spaciousness and depth to the  
sound. Slow modulation frequency with less depth.  
500–15000 Hz,  
THRU  
0 2 :Ch o ru s 2  
This conventional chorus effect adds spaciousness and depth to the  
sound. Rapid modulation frequency with less depth.  
Co HPF Freq  
THRU, 50–800 Hz Adjusts the cutoff frequen-  
cy of the high pass filter.  
0 3 : Ch o ru s 3  
(THRU: no filter is used)  
This conventional chorus effect adds spaciousness and depth to the  
sound. Slow modulation frequency with more depth.  
The effect will be applied to  
the frequency range above  
the cutoff frequency.  
Rate  
0.05–10.0 Hz, note Sets the cycle for the chorus  
or flanger sound undula-  
tions.  
0 4 : Ch o ru s 4  
This conventional chorus effect adds spaciousness and depth to the  
sound. Rapid modulation frequency with more depth.  
Depth  
Feedback  
0–127  
Adjusts the depth of modu-  
lation for the chorus or  
flanger.  
0 5 : Fe e d b a ck Ch o ru s  
-98– +98 %  
Adjusts the proportion of  
the effect sound that is fed  
back into the effect. Nega-  
tive (-) settings will invert  
the phase.  
This chorus offers a flanger-like effect, creating a soft sound.  
0 6 : Fla n g e r  
Cho/ Flg Sw  
CHORUS,  
FLANGER  
Selects either chorus or  
flanger.  
This effect sounds somewhat like a jet airplane taking off and  
landing.  
0 7 : Sh o rt De la y  
Re ve rb Pa ra m e te rs  
This is a delay with a short delay time.  
The functions of Reverb parameters are explained.  
0 8 : Fb k Sh o rt De la y  
Explanations for each Reverb Type are given on the following  
pages.  
This is a short delay with many repeats.  
01: Room 1  
02: Room 2  
03: Room 3  
04: Hall 1  
05: Hall 2  
06: Hall 3  
07: Garage  
08: Plate  
09: Non-Linear  
10: Delay  
1 3 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Effe cts List  
0 1 : Ro o m 1  
0 2 : Ro o m 2  
Reverb which simulates the reverberation within a room. It is  
This simulates the reverberation of a room. It is suitable for  
standard room reverb.  
simulating a fairly small room, and produces a clear reverberation.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Pre Low Freq  
Pre Low Gain  
Pre Mid Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
50–20000 Hz  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
Frequency of the middle  
range  
Pre Low Freq  
Pre Low Gain  
Pre Mid Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
50–20000 Hz  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
Frequency of the middle  
range  
Pre Mid Q  
0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 2.0,  
4.0, 8.0  
Gain of the middle range  
Set a higher value for Q to  
narrow the range to be af-  
fected.  
Pre Mid Q  
0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 2.0,  
4.0, 8.0  
Gain of the middle range  
Set a higher value for Q to  
narrow the range to be af-  
fected.  
Pre Mid Gain  
Pre Hi Freq  
-15– +15 dB  
Gain of the middle range  
Frequency of the high  
range  
Pre Mid Gain  
Pre Hi Freq  
-15– +15 dB  
Gain of the middle range  
Frequency of the high  
range  
2000–20000 Hz  
2000–20000 Hz  
Pre Hi Gain  
-15– +15 dB  
0.06–32.0 sec  
Gain of the high range  
Duration (time) of the re-  
verb for the low frequency  
band  
Pre Hi Gain  
Reverb Time  
-15– +15 dB  
0.06–32.0 sec  
Gain of the high range  
Duration (time) of the re-  
verb  
Low Rev Time  
Pre Dly Time  
0–200.0 ms  
Adjusts the delay time from  
the direct sound until the  
delay sound is heard.  
Density of the reverb  
Size of the room which is  
simulated  
Hi Rev Time  
Xover Freq  
0.06–32.0 sec  
Duration (time) of the re-  
verb for the high frequency  
band  
Density  
0–99  
1–10  
160–15000 Hz,  
THRU  
The reverberation specified  
by the Low Rev Time will  
be applied to the range be-  
low this frequency, and by  
the Hi Rev Time to the  
range above this frequency.  
Adjusts the delay time from  
the direct sound until the  
delay sound is heard.  
Density of the reverb  
Size of the room which is  
simulated  
Room Size  
Early Ref Level  
Low Damp Freq  
0–99  
Volume level of the initial  
reflected sound  
50–4000 Hz  
Adjusts the frequency be-  
low which sound fed back  
to the effect will be cut.  
The Low Damp function  
damps the low frequency  
band of the reverb sound  
quicker than other bands.  
Degree of Low Damp  
Adjusts the frequency  
above which sound fed  
back to the effect will be  
cut.  
High Damp, by attenuating  
the higher frequencies first.  
Degree of High Damp  
Frequency at which the  
high cut filter will begin to  
take effect (THRU: no filter  
is used)  
Pre Dly Time  
0–200.0 ms  
Density  
0–99  
Room Size  
5.6–32.6 m  
Low Damp Gain  
Hi Damp Freq  
-36–0 dB  
Early Ref Level  
Release Density  
0–99  
0–99  
Volume level of the initial  
reflected sound  
2000–20000 Hz  
Density of the sound that  
reaches the listener after  
many repeated reflections  
Adjusts the frequency be-  
low which sound fed back  
to the effect will be cut.  
The Low Damp function  
damps the low frequency  
band of the reverb sound  
quicker than other bands.  
Degree of Low Damp  
Adjusts the frequency  
above which sound fed  
back to the effect will be  
cut.  
Low Damp Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
Hi Damp Gain  
Post HC Freq  
-36–0 dB  
160–15000 Hz,  
THRU  
Low Damp Gain  
Hi Damp Freq  
-36–0 dB  
2000–20000 Hz  
High Damp, by attenuating  
the higher frequencies first.  
Degree of High Damp  
Frequency at which the  
high cut filter will begin to  
take effect (THRU: no filter  
is used)  
Hi Damp Gain  
Post HC Freq  
-36–0 dB  
160–15000 Hz,  
THRU  
1 3 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effe cts List  
0 3 : Ro o m 3  
0 4 : Ha ll 1  
Reverb which simulates the reverberation within a room. This is  
suitable for simulating a fairly large room, and produces  
reverberation with a strong mid and low range.  
This simulates the reverberation of a concert hall. It is a conventional  
hall reverb. You can also apply a chorus effect to the reverberation to  
adjust the sense of spaciousness or to create a special effect.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Pre Low Freq  
Pre Low Gain  
Pre Mid Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
50–20000 Hz  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
Frequency of the middle  
range  
Pre Low Freq  
Pre Low Gain  
Pre Mid Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
50–20000 Hz  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
Frequency of the middle  
range  
Pre Mid Q  
0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 2.0,  
4.0, 8.0  
Gain of the middle range  
Set a higher value for Q to  
narrow the range to be af-  
fected.  
Pre Mid Q  
0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 2.0,  
4.0, 8.0  
Gain of the middle range  
Set a higher value for Q to  
narrow the range to be af-  
fected.  
Pre Mid Gain  
Pre Hi Freq  
-15– +15 dB  
Gain of the middle range  
Frequency of the high  
range  
Pre Mid Gain  
Pre Hi Freq  
-15– +15 dB  
Gain of the middle range  
Frequency of the high  
range  
2000–20000 Hz  
2000–20000 Hz  
Pre Hi Gain  
Reverb Time  
-15– +15 dB  
0.06–32.0 sec  
Gain of the high range  
Duration (time) of the re-  
verb  
Pre Hi Gain  
-15– +15 dB  
0.06–64.0 sec  
Gain of the high range  
Duration (time) of the re-  
verb for the low frequency  
band.  
Low Rev Time  
Pre Dly Time  
0–200.0 ms  
Adjusts the delay time from  
the direct sound until the  
delay sound is heard.  
Density of the reverb  
Size of the room which is  
simulated  
Hi Rev Time  
Xover Freq  
0.06–64.0 sec  
Duration (time) of the re-  
verb for the high frequency  
band  
Density  
0–99  
1–8  
160–15000 Hz,  
THRU  
The reverberation specified  
by the Low Rev Time will  
be applied to the range be-  
low this frequency, and by  
the Hi Rev Time to the  
range above this frequency.  
Adjusts the delay time from  
the direct sound until the  
delay sound is heard.  
Density of the reverb  
Size of the room which is  
simulated  
Room Size  
Early Ref Level  
Release Density  
0–99  
0–99  
Volume level of the initial  
reflected sound  
Density of the sound that  
reaches the listener after  
many repeated reflections  
Adjusts the frequency be-  
low which sound fed back  
to the effect will be cut.  
The Low Damp function  
damps the low frequency  
band of the reverb sound  
quicker than other bands.  
Degree of Low Damp  
Adjusts the frequency  
above which sound fed  
back to the effect will be  
cut.  
High Damp, by attenuating  
the higher frequencies first.  
Degree of High Damp  
Frequency at which the  
high cut filter will begin to  
take effect (THRU: no filter  
is used)  
Pre Dly Time  
0–200.0 ms  
Low Damp Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
Density  
0–99  
Room Size  
5.6–32.6 m  
Early Ref Level  
Release Density  
0–99  
0–99  
Volume level of the initial  
reflected sound  
Low Damp Gain  
Hi Damp Freq  
-36–0 dB  
Density of the sound that  
reaches the listener after  
many repeated reflections  
Adjusts the frequency be-  
low which sound fed back  
to the effect will be cut.  
The Low Damp function  
damps the low frequency  
band of the reverb sound  
quicker than other bands.  
Degree of Low Damp  
Adjusts the frequency  
above which sound fed  
back to the effect will be  
cut.  
2000–20000 Hz  
Low Damp Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
Hi Damp Gain  
Post HC Freq  
-36–0 dB  
160–15000 Hz,  
THRU  
Low Damp Gain  
Hi Damp Freq  
-36–0 dB  
2000–20000 Hz  
High Damp, by attenuating  
the higher frequencies first.  
Degree of High Damp  
Frequency at which the  
high cut filter will begin to  
take effect (THRU: no filter  
is used)  
Hi Damp Gain  
Post HC Freq  
-36–0 dB  
160–15000 Hz,  
THRU  
Chorus Rate  
0–127  
0–127  
Rate of modulation for the  
reverb  
Chorus Depth  
Depth of modulation for  
the reverb  
1 4 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effe cts List  
0 5 : Ha ll 2  
0 6 : Ha ll 3  
Simulates the reverberation in a concert hall. This is suitable for  
Simulates the reverberation in a concert hall. This is suitable for  
simulating a fairly large room, and produces reverberation with a  
strong mid and low range.  
simulating a smaller room, and produces a clear reverberation.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Pre Low Freq  
Pre Low Gain  
Pre Mid Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
50–20000 Hz  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
Frequency of the middle  
range  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Pre Low Freq  
Pre Low Gain  
Pre Mid Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
50–20000 Hz  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
Frequency of the middle  
range  
Pre Mid Q  
0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 2.0,  
4.0, 8.0  
Gain of the middle range  
Set a higher value for Q to  
narrow the range to be af-  
fected.  
Pre Mid Q  
0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 2.0,  
4.0, 8.0  
Gain of the middle range  
Set a higher value for Q to  
narrow the range to be af-  
fected.  
Pre Mid Gain  
Pre Hi Freq  
-15– +15 dB  
Gain of the middle range  
Frequency of the high  
range  
2000–20000 Hz  
Pre Mid Gain  
Pre Hi Freq  
-15– +15 dB  
Gain of the middle range  
Frequency of the high  
range  
2000–20000 Hz  
Pre Hi Gain  
Reverb Time  
-15– +15 dB  
0.06–64.0 sec  
Gain of the high range  
Duration (time) of the re-  
verb  
Pre Hi Gain  
Reverb Time  
-15– +15 dB  
0.06–64.0 sec  
Gain of the high range  
Duration (time) of the re-  
verb  
Pre Dly Time  
0–200.0 ms  
Adjusts the delay time from  
the direct sound until the  
delay sound is heard.  
Density of the reverb  
Size of the room which is  
simulated  
Pre Dly Time  
0–200.0 ms  
Adjusts the delay time from  
the direct sound until the  
delay sound is heard.  
Density of the reverb  
Size of the room which is  
simulated  
Density  
0–99  
1–10  
Room Size  
Density  
0–99  
1–8  
Room Size  
Early Ref Level  
Low Damp Freq  
0–99  
Volume level of the initial  
reflected sound  
Early Ref Level  
Release Density  
0–99  
0–99  
Volume level of the initial  
reflected sound  
50–4000 Hz  
Adjusts the frequency be-  
low which sound fed back  
to the effect will be cut.  
The Low Damp function  
damps the low frequency  
band of the reverb sound  
quicker than other bands.  
Degree of Low Damp  
Adjusts the frequency  
above which sound fed  
back to the effect will be  
cut.  
High Damp, by attenuating  
the higher frequencies first.  
Degree of High Damp  
Frequency at which the  
high cut filter will begin to  
take effect (THRU: no filter  
is used)  
Density of the sound that  
reaches the listener after  
many repeated reflections  
Adjusts the frequency be-  
low which sound fed back  
to the effect will be cut.  
The Low Damp function  
damps the low frequency  
band of the reverb sound  
quicker than other bands.  
Degree of Low Damp  
Adjusts the frequency  
above which sound fed  
back to the effect will be  
cut.  
High Damp, by attenuating  
the higher frequencies first.  
Degree of High Damp  
Frequency at which the  
high cut filter will begin to  
take effect (THRU: no filter  
is used)  
Low Damp Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
Low Damp Gain  
Hi Damp Freq  
-36–0 dB  
2000–20000 Hz  
Low Damp Gain  
Hi Damp Freq  
-36–0 dB  
2000–20000 Hz  
Hi Damp Gain  
Post HC Freq  
-36–0 dB  
160–15000 Hz,  
THRU  
Hi Damp Gain  
Post HC Freq  
-36–0 dB  
160–15000 Hz,  
THRU  
1 4 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effe cts List  
0 7 : Ga ra g e  
0 8 : PLATE  
This simulates the reverberation of a garage. It produces the  
reverberation of a room surrounded by hard-surfaced walls with  
many reflections.  
Simulates plate reverberation (a reverb unit that uses the vibration of  
a metallic plate).  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Pre Low Freq  
Pre Low Gain  
Pre Mid Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
50–20000 Hz  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
Frequency of the middle  
range  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Pre Low Freq  
Pre Low Gain  
Pre Mid Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
50–20000 Hz  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
Frequency of the middle  
range  
Pre Mid Q  
0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 2.0,  
4.0, 8.0  
Gain of the middle range  
Set a higher value for Q to  
narrow the range to be af-  
fected.  
Pre Mid Q  
0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 2.0,  
4.0, 8.0  
Gain of the middle range  
Set a higher value for Q to  
narrow the range to be af-  
fected.  
Pre Mid Gain  
Pre Hi Freq  
-15– +15 dB  
Gain of the middle range  
Frequency of the high  
range  
2000–20000 Hz  
Pre Mid Gain  
Pre Hi Freq  
-15– +15 dB  
Gain of the middle range  
Frequency of the high  
range  
2000–20000 Hz  
Pre Hi Gain  
-15– +15 dB  
0.06–32.0 sec  
Gain of the high range  
Duration (time) of the re-  
verb for the low frequency  
band.  
Low Rev Time  
Pre Hi Gain  
Reverb Time  
-15– +15 dB  
0.06–32.0 sec  
Gain of the high range  
Duration (time) of the re-  
verb  
Hi Rev Time  
Xover Freq  
0.06–32.0 sec  
Duration (time) of the re-  
verb for the high frequency  
band  
Pre Dly Time  
0–200.0 ms  
Adjusts the delay time from  
the direct sound until the  
delay sound is heard.  
Density of the reverb  
Size of the room which is  
simulated  
160–15000 Hz,  
THRU  
The reverberation specified  
by the Low Rev Time will  
be applied to the range be-  
low this frequency, and by  
the Hi Rev Time to the  
range above this frequency.  
Adjusts the delay time from  
the direct sound until the  
delay sound is heard.  
Density of the reverb  
Size of the room which is  
simulated  
Density  
0–99  
1–8  
Room Size  
Early Ref Level  
Release Density  
0–99  
0–99  
Volume level of the initial  
reflected sound  
Density of the sound that  
reaches the listener after  
many repeated reflections  
Adjusts the frequency be-  
low which sound fed back  
to the effect will be cut.  
The Low Damp function  
damps the low frequency  
band of the reverb sound  
quicker than other bands.  
Degree of Low Damp  
Adjusts the frequency  
above which sound fed  
back to the effect will be  
cut.  
High Damp, by attenuating  
the higher frequencies first.  
Degree of High Damp  
Frequency at which the  
high cut filter will begin to  
take effect (THRU: no filter  
is used)  
Pre Dly Time  
0–200.0 ms  
Low Damp Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
Density  
0–99  
Room Size  
5.6–34.7 m  
Early Ref Level  
Release Density  
0–99  
0–99  
Volume level of the initial  
reflected sound  
Density of the sound that  
reaches the listener after  
many repeated reflections  
Adjusts the frequency be-  
low which sound fed back  
to the effect will be cut.  
The Low Damp function  
damps the low frequency  
band of the reverb sound  
quicker than other bands.  
Degree of Low Damp  
Adjusts the frequency  
above which sound fed  
back to the effect will be  
cut.  
Low Damp Gain  
Hi Damp Freq  
-36–0 dB  
2000–20000 Hz  
Low Damp Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
Hi Damp Gain  
Post HC Freq  
-36–0 dB  
160–15000 Hz,  
THRU  
Low Damp Gain  
Hi Damp Freq  
-36–0 dB  
2000–20000 Hz  
High Damp, by attenuating  
the higher frequencies first.  
Degree of High Damp  
Frequency at which the  
high cut filter will begin to  
take effect (THRU: no filter  
is used)  
Hi Damp Gain  
Post HC Freq  
-36–0 dB  
160–15000 Hz,  
THRU  
1 4 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effe cts List  
0 9 : N o n -Lin e a r  
1 0 : De la y  
This uses digital processing to create an artificial reverberation that  
This is a stereo delay. Depending on the length of the delay you set,  
is quite different than naturally occurring reverberation.  
you can get long echoes, thick sounds, or spatial sounds.  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Pre Low Freq  
Pre Low Gain  
Pre Mid Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
50–20000 Hz  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
Frequency of the middle  
range  
Mode  
MONO, STE-  
REO, ALTER-  
NATE  
Switches stereo, monaural, or al-  
ternate.  
MONO: This is a single-input,  
dual-output delay. Stereo sound  
(left and right) are mixed before  
being input.  
STEREO: This is a dual-input,  
dual-output delay. The delay  
sound output features the same  
stereo placement as that of the  
input.  
ALTERNATE: The left and right  
delay sound output alternately.  
(Alternate delay)  
Pre Mid Q  
0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 2.0,  
4.0, 8.0  
Gain of the middle range  
Set a higher value for Q to  
narrow the range to be af-  
fected.  
Pre Mid Gain  
Pre Hi Freq  
-15– +15 dB  
Gain of the middle range  
Frequency of the high  
range  
2000–20000 Hz  
Pre Hi Gain  
-15– +15 dB  
0–200.0 ms  
Gain of the high range  
Adjusts the delay time from  
the direct sound until the  
delay sound is heard.  
Density of the reverb  
Volume level of the initial  
reflected sound  
Pre Dly Time  
Delay Time  
L-R Shift  
0–1300 ms  
Adjusts the delay time from the  
(MONO), 0–650 direct sound until the delay  
Density  
0–99  
0–99  
ms (STEREO,  
ALTERNATE),  
note  
sound is heard.  
Early Ref Level  
NLR Type  
LR, NORMAL, Method of output panning  
LR  
0–650 ms, note Of the left and right delay  
sounds, the delay time will be  
increased for only one side.  
If the L-R order is LR, the R  
sound will be later. In the case of  
RL, the L sound will be later.  
* When the mode is set to  
LR: Pan from the L chan-  
nel to the R channel  
NORMAL: Output without  
panning  
LR: Pan from the R chan-  
nel to the L channel  
The overall time will be ex-  
panded or contracted while  
preserving the time ratios  
of the various envelope  
times.  
Env Time Ratio  
10–120 %  
MONO or ALTERNATE, this  
setting will be ignored.  
L-R Order  
LR, RL  
In STEREO or ALTERNATE  
mode, this setting determines  
which of the left or right sides  
has the delay sound before the  
other  
Envelope T1–T4  
Envelope L1–L3  
0.1–1000 ms  
0–100  
Time until each point (T1–  
T4) is reached  
Output level for each point  
(L1–L3)  
LR: The left side is expressed  
first  
* If the total length of  
Envelope times  
RL: The right side is expressed  
first  
(T1+T2+T3+T4) exceeds  
1000 ms, the sound of the  
portion that extends  
* In MONO mode, this setting  
will be ignored.  
Feedback  
-98– +98 %  
Adjusts the proportion of the de-  
lay sound that is fed back into  
the effect. Negative (-) settings  
will invert the phase.  
beyond this will be cut.  
Level  
Low Damp Freq 50–4000 Hz  
Adjusts the frequency below  
which sound fed back to the ef-  
fect will be cut.  
L1  
L3  
The Low Damp function damps  
the low frequency band of the  
delay sound quicker than other  
bands, which makes for a clearer  
delay effect.  
L2  
Time  
Low Damp  
Gain  
-36–0 dB  
Degree of Low Damp  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
Feedback Time  
0.1–1000 ms  
Delay time for the feedback  
sound  
Hi Damp Freq 2000–20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above  
which sound fed back to the ef-  
fect will be cut.  
Feedback Level  
Post HC Freq  
0–99 %  
Amount of feedback  
Frequency at which the  
high cut filter will begin to  
take effect (THRU: no filter  
is used)  
160–15000 Hz,  
THRU  
High Damp, by attenuating the  
higher frequencies first, makes  
the delay sound more natural.  
Hi Damp Gain -36–0 dB  
Degree of High Damp  
1 4 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Effe cts List  
Parameter  
Value  
Description  
Balance  
DRY100:0WET– Volume balance between the di-  
DRY0:100WET rect sound (DRY) and the delay  
sound (WET)  
Ps Low Freq  
Ps Low Gain  
Ps Hi Freq  
50–4000 Hz  
-15– +15 dB  
Frequency of the low range  
Gain of the low range  
2000–20000 Hz Frequency of the high range  
Ps Hi Gain  
-15– +15 dB  
Gain of the high range  
1 4 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tro u b le sh o o tin g  
If the this unit does not function in the way you expect, first check the following points. If this does not resolve the  
problem, consult your dealer or a nearby Roland Service Station.  
* If a message appears during operation, consult the following section “Message List” (p. 149).  
Pro b le m s Re la te d to th e V-Sy n th  
Problem  
Cause  
Action  
Power does not turn on  
Is the AC cord connected correctly to the V-Synth and Check the AC cord connections.  
to an AC outlet?  
No Sound/Volume is low  
Is the power of the connected devices turned on?  
Make sure that the power of your amp or mixer system  
is turned on.  
Is the volume turned down?  
Check the volume of the V-Synth and of the connected  
amp or mixer.  
Is there sound in the headphones?  
If there is sound in the headphones, it is possible that  
the connection cables are broken, or that the amp or  
mixer is malfunctioning. Check the connection cables  
and your other equipment once again.  
Is the Demo Song playback selected?  
Press [EXIT] to exit Demo Song playback mode (Quick  
Start; p. 8).  
Is the Local Switch turned OFF?  
Is the Patch level set too low?  
Are the Effect settings correct?  
Check the Effect settings ON or OFF, in the Effect Bal-  
Are the settings for the output destination correct?  
Have volume messages been received from an external Check the volume.  
MIDI device to lower the volume?  
Could the oscillator be off?  
Press [OSC1] or [OSC2] to turn on the oscillator.  
Could the V-Synth be set to USB communication in  
Storage mode?  
The volume level of the instru- Could you be using a connection cable that contains a Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor.  
ment connected to INPUT  
Jacks is too low.  
resistor?  
Pitch is wrong  
Are the Pitch settings of the Oscillator section correct? Check the Coarse Tune/ Fine Tune parameter settings  
Is the Master Tune setting correct?  
Has a Pitch Bend message been received from an exter- Try moving the pitch bend lever of the connected MIDI  
nal device, leaving the pitch “hanging?”  
keyboard.  
When you play the keyboard, Is the pedal polarity of the Hold Pedal reversed?  
notes do not stop  
Sound is distorted  
Effects do not apply  
Is an effect which distorts the sound being applied?  
Has the Patch level been turned up?  
[MFX], [CHO], or [REV] effect switches may have been Turn them on.  
turned off.  
Are the various effect settings correct?  
If the send level of each effect is set to 0, the effect will  
Even with send levels to each effect set at 0, effects are  
not applied if the MFX Master Level, the Chorus Mas-  
ter Level, or the Reverb Master Level is set to 0. Check  
If Output Assign is set to other than “MULTI,” the  
Oscillator Type has been to  
“EXT IN,” but no sound is  
heard when audio is input  
through the INPUT jacks  
If the oscillator is set to external input (EXT IN), you  
will not hear sound unless you play the keyboard.  
Try playing the keyboard.  
No sound from connected  
MIDI device  
Is the instrument set to transmit MIDI messages?  
Does the MIDI transmit channel for the V-Synth match Check the Patch Tx Ch parameter setting (p. 77).  
the MIDI receive channel for the connected MIDI de-  
vice?  
1 4 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Tro u b le sh o o tin g  
Problem  
Cause  
Action  
Exclusive messages are not  
received  
Is the instrument set to receive Exclusive messages?  
Does the Device ID number of the transmitting device Check the Device ID parameter setting (p. 75).  
match the Device ID number of the V-Synth?  
Noise is heard while sampling During sampling, the output frequency of the digital  
audio interface is fixed at 44.1 kHz, regardless of the  
System mode setting. Noise may be heard from con-  
nected devices at this time.  
This is not a malfunction.  
Can’t edit or encode a wave  
Could you have selected a preset wave?  
The V-Synth’s factory-loaded preset waves cannot be  
edited or encoded. Select a sample that youve sampled  
or imported.  
Beep tone was turned off, but The Power-up Mode is set to “Default.”  
it continues to sound the next  
time power is turned on  
Pro b le m s Re la te d to th e USB Drive r (W in d o w s)  
Problem  
Cause  
Action  
When I start (or restart) my  
computer with the V-Synth  
It has been found that on some computers, starting (or Switch off the V-Synth and then restart your computer.  
restarting) the computer while the V-Synth is powered  
connected via USB, it freezes up and USB is connected will cause the computer to  
at the startup screen and fails freeze at the startup screen and fail to work.  
to work  
When I turned off the power of When using Windows Me, powering down the V-  
the V-Synth, an error oc-  
curred in Windows  
Synth without unmounting the drive may cause an er- turn off the power of the V-Synth.  
ror to occur in Windows.  
When I attempt to exit Win-  
dows while leaving the V-  
On some Windows computers, it has been reported  
that the computer cannot be powered down if you exit turn off the power of the V-Synth before you exit Win-  
Synth powered up, the com- Windows when the V-Synth is still powered up (with- dows.  
puter does not turn off  
out unmounting the drive). (The shutdown process  
halts before the computers power is switched off.)  
When I connect the V-Synth  
On some computers, waking up the computer from the Before you Suspend your computer, power down the  
via USB and wake up my com- Suspend state while a powered-up V-Synth is connect- V-Synth using the procedure described on p. 92.  
puter from Suspend, it stops ed via USB will cause the computer to freeze.  
functioning  
V-Synth driver is not mounted If a network drive is mounted in Windows XP, that  
Change the assignment of the network drive.  
in Windows XP  
drive number may conflict with the V-Synth drive,  
causing the V-Synth drive to not be recognized.  
“Find new hardware wizard” Is the USB cable connected correctly?  
does not execute automati-  
Make sure that the V-Synth and your computer are cor-  
rectly connected via a USB cable.  
cally  
Is USB enabled on your computer?  
Refer to the operation manual for your computer, and  
make sure that USB is enabled.  
The “Insert Disk” dialog box  
does not appear  
“Find new hardware wizard”  
ends before the process is  
completed  
Does your computer meet the USB specifications?  
If you are using a computer that does not fulfill the  
electrical requirements of the USB specifications, oper-  
ation may be unstable. In this case, you may be able to  
solve the problem by connecting a USB hub.  
* It may take about 15 seconds  
(or more) after the USB cable  
is connected for the V-Synth  
to be detected.  
If the above actions do not solve the problem, it is pos-  
sible that the V-Synth has been incorrectly detected by  
information, then re-install the driver.  
“Found unknown device” ap- If your computer or USB hub has two or more USB con- Refer to Readme file on the included CD-ROM, and in-  
pears even though you in-  
stalled the driver  
nectors, and you connect the V-Synth to a USB connec- stall the driver once again. This is not a malfunction.  
tor to which the V-Synth has never been connected If the “Found unknown device” dialog box appears  
before, the “Unknown device” dialog box may appear even though the V-Synth is connected to the same USB  
even on a computer onto which you have already in- connector as before, it is possible that the computer has  
stalled the driver.  
detected the V-Synth incorrectly. As described in “De-  
the incorrect device information, then re-install the  
driver.  
1 4 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tro u b le sh o o tin g  
Problem  
Cause  
Action  
An “Unknown driver found”  
It is possible that the computer has detected the V-  
then re-install the driver.  
dialog box appears, and you Synth incorrectly.  
are unable to install the driver  
Device Manager shows “?”,  
“!”, or “USB Composite De-  
vice”  
Driver is not installed correct-  
ly  
Can’t install/delete/use the  
driver in Windows XP/2000  
Did you log on to Windows as a user with administra- In order to install/ delete/ re-install the driver in Win-  
tive privileges?  
dows XP/ 2000, you must be logged into Windows as a  
user with administrative privileges, such as Adminis-  
trator. For details, please contact the system adminis-  
trator for your computer system.  
Did you make “Driver Signing Options”?  
In order to install/ re-install the driver, you must make  
“Driver Signing Options.”  
Windows XP/2000 displays a Did you make “Driver Signing Options”?  
“Hardware Installation” or  
In order to install/ re-install the driver, you must make  
the settings described in “Driver Signing Options.”  
“Digital Signature Not Found”  
dialog box  
De le tin g In co rre ct De vice In fo rm a tio n  
Use the following procedure to re-install the driver.  
1 . Turn off the power of your computer, and start up Windows with all USB cables disconnected (except for  
keyboard and mouse).  
2 . After Windows restarts, use a USB cable to connect the V-Synth to your computer.  
3 . Turn on the power of V-Synth.  
4 . Click the Windows Start button, and from the menu that appears, choose Settings | Control Panel.  
5 . Double-click the System icon. The System Properties dialog box will appear.  
6 . Click the Device Manager tab.  
In Windows XP, select the System Properties Hardware tab, and click Device Manager.  
7 . Check whether “Roland V-Synth” with an “!” or “?” symbol is displayed below “Other Devices,” “Sound,  
Video, and Game Controllers,” or “Universal Serial Bus Controller.” If you find any such indication, select it  
and click [Delete].  
8 . A dialog box will ask you to confirm deletion of the device. Verify the contents of the dialog box, and then click  
[OK]. In the same way, delete all occurrences of “Roland V-Synth” that have an “!” or “?” symbol.  
9 . Check whether “Composite USB Device,” “USB Device,” or “USB Composite Device” with an “!” or “?”  
symbol is displayed below “Other Devices,” “Sound, Video, and Game Controllers,” or “Universal Serial Bus  
Controller.” If you find any such indication, you need to determine whether it has appeared because the V-  
Synth has been detected incorrectly, or because there is a problem with some other device. To determine this,  
switch off the power of the V-Synth.  
* If the “Composite USB Device” (or other) indication disappears when you turn off the power of the V-Synth, then it is the V-  
Synth that has been incorrectly detected. Return to step 2 and continue the procedure, and when you reach step 8, delete the  
information that was detected incorrectly. If the indication does not disappear when you turn off the power of the V-Synth, then  
this indication refers to a different device. Do not delete it.  
“Composite USB Device,” “USB Device,” or “USB Compatible Device” may sometimes indicate a device other than the V-  
Synth. Be careful not to accidentally delete the registration for another device. If you delete the registration for another device, you  
will have to reinstall the driver for that device.  
1 4 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tro u b le sh o o tin g  
1 0 . A dialog box will ask you to confirm deletion of the device. Verify the contents of the dialog box, and click  
[OK]. Delete each unwanted occurrence of “Composite USB Device,” “USB Device,” or “USB composite  
device” indications with an “!” or “?” symbol.  
1 1 . Turn off the power of the V-Synth, then delete the driver.  
1 2 . Restart Windows. Then install the driver once again.  
* If the problem still occurs after you have taken the above measures, please refer also to the Readme file for the USB driver. The  
Readme file is on the CD-ROM.  
Pro b le m s Re la te d to th e USB Drive r (Ma cin to sh )  
Problem  
Cause  
Action  
A message of “Drivers need- It is possible that the V-Synths USB MIDI driver has  
Correctly install the USB MIDI driver as described in  
Readme file on the included CD-ROM.  
ed for the USB device “V-  
Synth” are not available.  
Would you like to look for  
these drivers over the inter-  
net?” is displayed  
not been correctly installed in your computer.  
It is possible that there is a conflict with the driver  
(function extension) of another USB device.  
We are aware of a problem that causes the V-Synth to  
not be recognized correctly if a driver for I-O Data Cor-  
porations USB CD-R drive is installed. In this case, dis-  
able “ISD 200 BOTBridge” or other driver file by  
moving it out of the Extensions folder, located within  
the system folder.  
When the computer returns  
The V-Synth’s USB MIDI driver does not support the Do not use the Sleep functionality of Mac OS. When  
from the Sleep state, an indi- Sleep functionality of Mac OS.  
cation of “MIDI off line!” ap-  
pears  
you use the V-Synth, open the “Energy Saver” control  
panel and specify “Never” as the period of inactivity  
before the system goes to sleep.  
1 4 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Me ssa g e List  
The V-Synth displays a variety of messages. There are three types of message screen.  
ERROR screen:  
WARNING screen:  
Message box:  
This will appear if you attempt to perform an incorrect operation, or if an operation could not be executed correctly.  
This will appear when caution is necessary.  
This informs you of the current status. It will also appear if you attempt to perform an incorrect operation, or if an  
operation could not be executed correctly.  
Messages are listed here alphabetically for each type of message screen.  
ERRO R Scre e n s  
If an ERROR screen appears, touch <ACCEPT> to erase the message.  
Message  
Meaning  
Action  
DISK  
Disk Full!  
The media is full, and no further writing is possible. Delete unneeded files from the media (p. 88). Alter-  
natively, provide other media that has free space.  
DISK  
There is an identically named file or folder.  
please write to a folder that does not contain an  
identically-named file or folder.  
File/Folder Name Duplicate!  
DISK  
File Not Found!  
A patch or sample used by the project or patch was Re-create the project or patch, and save it.  
not found on disk.  
DISK  
The data is damaged, and cannot be loaded.  
Do not use this file.  
File Read Error!  
DISK  
File Write Error!  
The media is of a format to which the V-Synth can- Prepare a media that is of a format to which the V-  
not write. Synth is able to write.  
DISK  
Illegal Format!  
Since the format of this file is incorrect, it cannot be Do not use this file.  
loaded.  
DISK  
This file uses a type of compression that the V-  
Synth is unable to read.  
Use the device that created the file to convert the  
data into an 8 bit or 16 bit wave.  
Illegal PCM Wave!  
Cannot Load This Wave.  
DISK  
Since the wave memory has become full, the opera- Delete unneeded samples from the V-Synth. Alter-  
Memory Full!  
tion was halted.  
natively, individually import the patches or sam-  
ples that you want to use.  
DISK  
Path Duplicate!  
You are attempting to write to the same hierarchical Change the writing destination.  
level.  
DISK  
The path name is too long.  
Path Name Too Long!  
tively, move the entire folder to a shallower level of  
* The “path” indicates the hierarchical level at  
which the file is located. It is given together with the  
folder name.  
DISK  
The PC card is not ready.  
Insert another PC card.  
PC Card Not Ready!  
DISK  
This file contains waves for three or more channels, Do not use this file.  
and cannot be loaded into the V-Synth.  
Too Many Channels!  
Cannot Load This Wave.  
DISK  
This disk cannot be used by the V-Synth.  
Format the disk on the V-Synth.  
Unformatted Disk!  
DISK  
A disk error of unknown causes has occurred.  
Contact your dealer or a nearby Roland service cen-  
ter for service.  
Unknown Disk Error!  
DISK  
The operation you attempted to execute does not  
support this media.  
Do not select this media for this operation.  
You Cannot Use This Device!  
ENCODE  
For some reason, encoding is not possible.  
Change the encoding type and try again.  
Encoding Error!  
ENCODE  
Due to insufficient wave memory, encoding is not Shorten the wave (p. 66), or delete unwanted sam-  
Memory Full!  
possible.  
IMPORT  
There are no vacant patches.  
No Room for Patches!  
IMPORT  
There are no vacant samples.  
No Room for Samples!  
SAMPLE EDIT  
Copy Buffer Not Allocated!  
There is not enough wave memory to execute the  
Copy.  
1 4 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Me ssa g e List  
Message  
Meaning  
Action  
SAMPLE EDIT  
Memory Full!  
There is not enough wave memory to execute the  
wave editing operation (Insert, Zero Insert, Region,  
Paste).  
SAMPLING  
Memory Full!  
Since the wave memory has become full, the opera- Delete unneeded samples from the V-Synth (p. 60).  
tion was halted.  
W ARN IN G Scre e n s  
If a WARNING screen appears, follow the procedure described in the corresponding “Action.”  
Message  
Meaning  
Action  
CHANGE USB MODE  
USB Mode Will Be Changed.  
USB mode will be changed.  
Exit any USB MIDI-related applications on your  
computer.  
COPY FILE/FOLDER  
Are You Sure?  
The file(s) or folder(s) will be copied from the disk. To cancel the operation, touch <CANCEL>. To exe-  
Is it OK to execute? cute the operation, touch <EXECUTE>.  
The file(s) or folder(s) will be deleted from the disk. To cancel the operation, touch <CANCEL>. To exe-  
DELETE FILE/FOLDER  
This Will Clear the File(s)/Folder(s). Is it OK to execute?  
cute the operation, touch <EXECUTE>.  
Are You Sure?  
DISCONNECT USB  
Disconnection Will Be Done Before  
Ejecting.  
Will disconnect before ejecting. Is it OK to execute? Perform the Eject operation on your computer.  
Are You Sure?  
EDITED DATA EXISTS  
If You Need This Data, Save Immedi-  
ately.  
The V-Synth contains an unsaved patch or sample. If you need the patch or sample, save it now. Touch  
<ACCEPT> to erase the message.  
FILE/FOLDER EXISTS  
Overwrite Existing File/Folder?  
There is an identically named file or folder at the  
copy- or move-destination.  
To cancel the operation, touch <CANCEL>. To exe-  
cute the copying or moving operation, touch <EXE-  
CUTE>.  
FORMAT  
All Data on the Disk Will Be Lost.  
Are You Sure?  
When you format, all data on the disk will be lost. Is To cancel the operation, touch <CANCEL>. To exe-  
it OK to execute? cute the formatting operation, touch <EXECUTE>.  
IMPORT FILE  
Are You Sure?  
The file(s) will be imported from the disk. Is it OK To cancel the operation, touch <CANCEL>. To exe-  
to execute?  
cute the importing operation, touch <EXECUTE>.  
INITIALIZE PATCH  
Are You Sure?  
The patch will be initialized. Is it OK to execute?  
To cancel the operation, touch <CANCEL>. To exe-  
cute the operation, touch <EXECUTE>.  
LOAD DEMO  
When you load the demo data, all data in the VP-  
To cancel the operation, touch <CANCEL>. If you  
Replace All Data.  
Are You Sure?  
9000 will be lost. Is it OK to execute the operation? wish to load the demo data, touch <EXECUTE>.  
LOAD PROJECT  
Are You Sure?  
Project will be loaded. Is it OK to execute the oper- To cancel the operation, touch <CANCEL>. If you  
ation?  
wish to load the project, touch <EXECUTE>.  
MOVE FILE/FOLDER  
Are You Sure?  
The file(s) or folder(s) will be moved from the disk. To cancel the operation, touch <CANCEL>. To exe-  
Is it OK to execute?  
cute the operation, touch <EXECUTE>.  
OTHER SAMPLE EXISTS  
Number ‘****’ Already Contains a  
Sample.  
A different sample already exists in the selected  
sample number *****’.  
To cancel the operation, touch <CANCEL>. If you  
wish to overwrite the sample of the selected num-  
ber, touch <EXECUTE>.  
Clear Existing Sample?  
PROJECT NOT FOUND  
Internal Project Was Loaded.  
Cannot find the project specified as the current  
project. The internal project was loaded.  
Touch <ACCEPT> to erase the message.  
SAMPLE EDIT  
When you perform the Cut or Clear sample editing To cancel the operation, touch <CANCEL>. If you  
Copy Buffer Not Avail.  
Are You Sure?  
operation, the data is simultaneously copied as  
well. However, this message indicates that in this  
case, there is insufficient memory remaining to  
also want to Copy the data, shorten the range being  
copy the data. Do you still want to execute the Cut Clear operation, touch <EXECUTE>.  
or Clear? (Since a copy will not be made, you will be  
unable to restore the data simply by pasting it back.  
The Cut or Clear operation can still be carried out,  
though.)  
SAMPLE EXISTS  
Sample exists in the copy- or move-destination.  
To cancel the operation, touch <CANCEL>. To exe-  
Overwrite Existing Sample?  
cute the copying or moving operation, touch <EXE-  
CUTE>.  
SAVE PROJECT  
Are You Sure?  
Project will be saved. Is it OK to execute the opera- To cancel the operation, touch <CANCEL>. To exe-  
tion? cute the operation, touch <EXECUTE>.  
1 5 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Me ssa g e List  
Me ssa g e Bo x e s  
Message boxes are displayed briefly, and then disappear automatically.  
Message  
Meaning  
Action  
Canceled!  
The operation is canceled.  
Cannot Delete This Event!  
The events at the beginning and end of a wave can-  
not be deleted.  
Checksum Error!  
The received system exclusive message has an in- Correct the checksum value.  
correct checksum value.  
Completed!  
The operation has been completed.  
Now establishing a connection.  
Now breaking the connection.  
Connecting...  
Disconnecting...  
Event Doesn’t Exist Here!  
Event Interval Too Narrow!  
There is no event at the specified location.  
Specify a location where there is an event.  
The event interval is too narrow for events to be  
placed in it.  
Move the interval further from the nearest event.  
Improper Name!  
MIDI Buffer Full!  
The folder name or volume label is blank.  
An excessive amount of MIDI data was received all  
at once, and could not be processed properly.  
MIDI Communication Error!  
MIDI Offline!  
A MIDI hardware error has occurred.  
If the same message appears repeatedly, please con-  
tact your dealer or a nearby Roland service center  
for service.  
The MIDI IN connection has been broken.  
Check whether there is a problem with the MIDI ca-  
ble connected to the V-Synths MIDI IN, or whether  
the MIDI cable has been disconnected.  
Please Wait a Minute.  
Processing...  
Please wait a short time.  
The operation is being executed.  
The data is being transmitted.  
Transmitting...  
Error Receiving Data!  
MIDI message could not be received correctly.  
If the same message appears repeatedly, there is a  
problem with the content of the MIDI messages.  
USB Offline!  
Writing...  
USB cable is not connected.  
Data is being written.  
Check whether there is a problem with the USB ca-  
ble connected to the V-Synths USB connector, or  
whether the USB cable has been disconnected.  
1 5 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ab o u t MIDI  
MIDI (Musical Instruments Digital Interface) is a standard  
specification that allows musical data to be exchanged between  
electronic musical instruments and computers. MIDI With a MIDI  
cable connecting MIDI devices that are equipped with MIDI  
connectors, you can play multiple instruments with a single  
keyboard, have multiple MIDI instruments perform in ensemble,  
program the settings to change automatically to match the  
performance as the song progresses, and more.  
MIDI Ch a n n e ls a n d Mu lti-tim b ra l  
So u n d Ge n e ra to rs  
MIDI transmits many types of data over a single MIDI cable. This is  
made possible by the concept of MIDI channels. MIDI channels  
allow messages intended for a given instrument to be distinguished  
from messages intended for another instrument. In some ways,  
MIDI channels are similar to television channels. By changing the  
channel on a television set, you can view the programs that are being  
broadcast by different stations. In the same way, MIDI also allows a  
device to select the information intended for that device out of the  
If you mainly use the V-Synth as a standalone keyboard instrument,  
you may really not need to know much at all about MIDI.  
However, the following MIDI-related information is provided so  
you can play the V-Synth using an external MIDI device, or master  
other advanced techniques.  
variety of information that is being transmitted to it.  
fig.midi-01.e  
The cable from the antenna carries the TV  
signals from many broadcast stations.  
Station A  
Station B  
Station C  
Ab o u t MIDI Co n n e cto rs  
The V-Synth is equipped with the three types of MIDI connectors,  
each which works differently.  
fig.midi-con  
The TV is set to the channel of the station  
you wish to watch.  
MIDI uses sixteen channels; 1 through 16. Set the receiving device so  
that it will receive only the channel that it needs to receive.  
MIDI IN Co n n e cto r  
Example:  
This connector receives MIDI messages that are transmitted from  
external MIDI devices. The V-Synth can receive these messages to  
play notes or select sounds, etc.  
Set the V-Synth to send Channel 1 and Channel 2, then set sound  
module A to receive only Channel 1 and sound module B only  
Channel 2. With this setup, you can get an ensemble performance,  
with, for example, a guitar sound from sound module A and bass  
from sound module B.  
fig.midi-02.e  
MIDI O UT Co n n e cto r  
This connector transmits MIDI messages to external MIDI devices.  
The V-Synth’s MIDI OUT connector is used for sending the  
performance data of the keyboard controller section as well as data  
used for saving various settings and patterns.  
MIDI OUT  
MIDI IN  
MIDI THRU  
Transmit channel: 1, 2  
Receive channel: 1  
Sound  
Module  
A
Receive channel: 2  
MIDI IN  
MIDI keyboard  
Sound  
Module  
B
MIDI THRU Co n n e cto r  
MIDI messages received at MIDI IN are re-transmitted without  
change from this connector to an external MIDI device. Use this in  
situations such as when you use multiple MIDI devices  
simultaneously.  
When used as a sound module, the V-Synth can receive on up to  
sixteen MIDI channels. Sound modules like the V-Synth which can  
receive multiple MIDI channels simultaneously to play different  
sounds on each channel are called multi-timbral sound modules.  
1 5 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Mo d e l: V-Sy n th  
Da te : N o v. 2 0 , 2 0 0 2  
Ve rsio n : 1 .0 0  
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n  
Panpot (Controller number 10)  
1. Receive Data  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
0AH  
3rd byte  
vvH  
Channel Voice Messages  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Panpot:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 40H - 7FH (Left - Center - Right),  
*
Not received in Multitimbre mode or Performance mode when the Receive Switch  
parameter (MULTITIMBRE/ MIDI or PERFORM/ MIDI) is OFF.  
Expression (Controller number 11)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
0BH  
3rd byte  
vvH  
Note Off  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Expression:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
Status  
2nd byte  
kkH  
3rd byte  
vvH  
8nH  
9nH  
kkH  
00H  
Hold 1 (Controller number 64)  
n = MIDI channel number:  
kk = note number:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
40H  
3rd byte  
vv = note off velocity:  
vvH  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Control value:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127) 0-63 = OFF, 64-127 = ON  
Note On  
Status  
2nd byte  
kkH  
3rd byte  
vvH  
Portamento (Controller number 65)  
9nH  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
41H  
3rd byte  
n = MIDI channel number:  
kk = note number:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
01H - 7FH (1 - 127)  
vvH  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Control value:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
vv = note on velocity:  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127) 0 - 63 = OFF, 64 - 127 = ON  
Polyphonic Key Pressure  
Sostenuto (Controller number 66)  
Status  
2nd byte  
3rd byte  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
42H  
3rd byte  
AnH  
kkH  
vvH  
vvH  
n = MIDI channel number:  
kk = note number:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Control value:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127) 0 - 63 = OFF, 64 - 127 = ON  
vv = Polyphonic Key Pressure:  
Effect 1 (Reverb Send Level) (Controller number 91)  
Control Change  
If the corresponding Controller number is selected for the Patch Control Source 1, 2, 3, 4,  
5, 6, 7 or 8 parameter (PATCH Edit Com Matrix Ctrl), the corresponding effect will  
occur.  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
5BH  
3rd byte  
vvH  
*
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Reverb Send Level:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
Bank Select (Controller number 0, 32)  
Effect 3 (Chorus Send Level) (Controller number 93)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
00H  
3rd byte  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
5DH  
3rd byte  
vvH  
mmH  
BnH  
20H  
llH  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Chorus Send Level:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
n = MIDI channel number:  
mm, ll = Bank number:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00 00H - 7F 7FH (bank.1 - bank.16384)  
RPN MSB/LSB (Controller number 100, 101)  
*
*
Not received when the Receive Bank Select (SYSTEM Com MIDI/ USB) is OFF.  
The Patches corresponding to each Bank Select are as follows.  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
65H  
3rd byte  
mmH  
llH  
BnH  
64H  
BANK SELECT  
MSB | LSB  
| PROGRAM  
| NUMBER  
| PATCH  
| NUMBER  
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
-----+-----------+-----------+-----------  
mm = upper byte (MSB) of parameter number specified by RPN  
ll = lower byte (LSB) of parameter number specified by RPN  
087 | 000  
| 001  
| 001 - 128 | 001 - 128  
| 001 - 128 | 129 - 256  
| 001 - 128 | 257 - 384  
| 001 - 128 | 385 - 512  
| 002  
| 003  
<<< RPN >>>  
Control Changes include RPN (Registered Parameter Numbers), which are extended.  
When using RPNs, first RPN (Controller numbers 100 and 101; they can be sent in any  
order) should be sent in order to select the parameter, then  
Portamento Time (Controller number 5)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
05H  
3rd byte  
vvH  
Data Entry (Controller numbers 6 and 38) should be sent to set the value. Once RPN  
messages are received, Data Entry messages that is received at the same MIDI channel after  
that are recognized as changing toward the value of the RPN messages. In order not to  
make any mistakes, transmitting RPN Null is recommended after setting parameters you  
need.  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Portamento Time:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
Data Entry (Controller number 6, 38)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
06H  
3rd byte  
mmH  
llH  
BnH  
26H  
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
mm, ll = the value of the parameter specified by RPN/ NRPN  
mm = MSB, ll = LSB  
Volume (Controller number 7)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
07H  
3rd byte  
vvH  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Volume:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
1 5 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n  
This device receives the following RPNs.  
Channel Mode Messages  
RPN  
Data entry  
MSB, LSB  
mmH, llH  
*
Not received in when the Receive Switch parameter (SYSTEM Com Part MIDI) is OFF.  
MSB, LSB  
00H, 00H  
Notes  
Pitch Bend Sensitivity  
All Sounds Off (Controller number 120)  
Status  
mm: 00H - 18H (0 - 24 semitones)  
ll: ignored (processed as 00H)  
Up to 2 octave can be specified in semitone steps.  
2nd byte  
3rd byte  
BnH  
78H  
00H  
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H, 01H  
00H, 02H  
7FH, 7FH  
mmH, llH  
mmH, llH  
---, ---  
Channel Fine Tuning  
*
When this message is received, all notes currently sounding on the corresponding  
channel will be turned off.  
mm, ll: 20 00H - 40 00H - 60 00H  
(-4096 x 100 / 8192 - 0 - +4096 x 100 / 8192 cent)  
Channel Coarse Tuning  
Reset All Controllers (Controller number 121)  
Status  
mm: 10H - 40H - 70H (-48 - 0 - +48 semitones)  
ll: ignored (processed as 00H)  
2nd byte  
3rd byte  
BnH  
79H  
00H  
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
When this message is received, the following controllers will be set to their reset values.  
RPN null  
RPN and NRPN will be set as “unspecified”.  
Once this setting has been made, subsequent  
Data Entry messages will be ignored. (It is not  
necessary to transmit Data Entry for RPN Null  
settings.) Parameter values that were previously  
set will not change.  
*
Controller  
Reset value  
Pitch Bend Change  
Polyphonic Key Pressure  
Channel Pressure  
Modulation  
+/ -0 (center)  
0 (off)  
0 (off)  
mm, ll: ignored  
0 (off)  
Breath Type MSB  
Breath Type LSB  
Expression  
0 (min)  
0 (min)  
Program Change  
127 (max)  
Status  
2nd byte  
However the controller will be at minimum.  
CnH  
ppH  
Hold 1  
0 (off)  
n = MIDI channel number:  
pp = Program number:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (prog.1 - prog.128)  
Sostenuto  
0 (off)  
Soft  
0 (off)  
Hold 2  
0 (off)  
*
Not received when the Receive Program Change parameter (SYSTEM Com MIDI/ USB)  
is OFF.  
General Purpose Controller 1 MSB  
General Purpose Controller 2 MSB  
General Purpose Controller 3 MSB  
General Purpose Controller 4 MSB  
General Purpose Controller 1 LSB  
General Purpose Controller 2 LSB  
General Purpose Controller 3 LSB  
General Purpose Controller 4 LSB  
General Purpose Controller 5  
General Purpose Controller 6  
General Purpose Controller 7  
General Purpose Controller 8  
RPN  
0 (min)  
0 (min)  
0 (min)  
Channel Pressure  
Status  
0 (min)  
2nd byte  
0 (min)  
DnH  
vvH  
0 (min)  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Channel Pressure:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
0 (min)  
0 (min)  
0 (min)  
Pitch Bend Change  
Status  
0 (min)  
2nd byte  
3rd byte  
0 (min)  
EnH  
llH  
mmH  
0 (min)  
n = MIDI channel number:  
mm, ll = Pitch Bend value:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
unset; previously set data will not change  
00 00H - 40 00H - 7F 7FH (-8192 - 0 - +8191)  
All Notes Off (Controller number 123)  
Status  
2nd byte  
3rd byte  
BnH  
7BH  
00H  
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
*
When All Notes Off is received, all notes on the corresponding channel will be turned  
off. However, if Hold 1 or Sostenuto is ON, the sound will be continued until these are  
turned off.  
OMNI OFF (Controller number 124)  
Status  
2nd byte  
3rd byte  
BnH  
7CH  
00H  
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received.  
*
OMNI ON (Controller number 125)  
Status  
2nd byte  
3rd byte  
BnH  
7DH  
00H  
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
*
The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received. OMNI ON  
will not be turned on.  
1 5 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n  
MONO (Controller number 126)  
Universal Realtime System Exclusive Messages  
Master Volume  
Status  
2nd byte  
3rd byte  
BnH  
7EH  
mmH  
Status  
F0H  
Data byte  
Status  
F7H  
n = MIDI channel number:  
mm = mono number:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 10H (0 - 16)  
7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, llH, mmH  
Byte  
F0H  
7FH  
7FH  
04H  
01H  
llH  
Explanation  
*
The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received.  
Exclusive status  
ID number (universal realtime message)  
Device ID (Broadcast)  
POLY (Controller number 127)  
Status  
Sub ID#1 (Device Control)  
Sub ID#2 (Master Volume)  
Master Volume lower byte  
Master Volume upper byte  
EOX (End Of Exclusive)  
2nd byte  
3rd byte  
BnH  
7FH  
00H  
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received.  
mmH  
F7H  
*
*
*
The lower byte (llH) of Master Volume will be handled as 00H.  
The Master Level parameter (SYSTEM Com Master) will change.  
System Realtime Message  
Active Sensing  
Master Fine Tuning  
Status  
Status  
F0H  
Data byte  
Status  
F7H  
FEH  
7FH, 7FH, 04H, 03H, llH, mmH  
*
When Active Sensing is received, the unit will begin monitoring the intervals of all  
further messages. While monitoring, if the interval between messages exceeds 420 ms,  
the same processing will be carried out as when All Sounds Off, All Notes Off and Reset  
All Controllers are received, and message interval monitoring will be halted.  
Byte  
F0H  
7FH  
7FH  
04H  
03H  
llH  
Explanation  
Exclusive status  
ID number (universal realtime message)  
Device ID (Broadcast)  
Sub ID#1 (Device Control)  
Sub ID#2 (Master Fine Tuning)  
Master Fine Tuning LSB  
Master Fine Tuning MSB  
EOX (End Of Exclusive)  
System Exclusive Message  
Status  
Data byte  
Status  
mmH  
F7H  
F0H  
iiH, ddH, ......,eeH  
F7H  
F0H:  
System Exclusive Message status  
mm, ll: 00 00H - 40 00H - 7F 7FH (-100 - 0 - +99.9 [cents])  
The Master Tune parameter (SYSTEM Com Master) will change.  
ii = ID number:  
an ID number (manufacturer ID) to indicate the manufacturer whose  
Exclusive message this is. Rolands manufacturer ID is 41H.  
ID numbers 7EH and 7FH are extensions of the MIDI standard;  
Universal Non-realtime Messages (7EH) and Universal Realtime  
Messages (7FH).  
*
Master Coarse Tuning  
Status  
F0H  
Data byte  
Status  
F7  
dd,...,ee = data:  
F7H:  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
7FH, 7FH, 04H, 04H, llH, mmH  
EOX (End Of Exclusive)  
Byte  
F0H  
7FH  
7FH  
04H  
04H  
llH  
Explanation  
Of the System Exclusive messages received by this device, the Universal Non-realtime  
messages and the Universal Realtime messages and the Data Request (RQ1) messages and  
the Data Set (DT1) messages will be set automatically.  
Exclusive status  
ID number (universal realtime message)  
Device ID (Broadcast)  
Sub ID#1 (Device Control)  
Sub ID#2 (Master Coarse Tuning)  
Master Coarse Tuning LSB  
Master Coarse Tuning MSB  
EOX (End Of Exclusive)  
Universal Non-realtime System Exclusive Messages  
Identity Request Message  
mmH  
F7H  
Status  
F0H  
Data byte  
Status  
7EH, dev, 06H, 01H F7H  
llH:  
ignored (processed as 00H)  
Byte  
F0H  
7EH  
dev  
Explanation  
mmH:  
28H - 40H - 58H (-24 - 0 - +24 [semitones])  
Exclusive status  
ID number (Universal Non-realtime Message)  
Device ID (dev: 10H - 1FH, 7FH)  
Sub ID#1 (General Information)  
Sub ID#2 (Identity Request)  
EOX (End Of Exclusive)  
*
The Master Key Shift parameter (SYSTEM Com Master) will change.  
06H  
01H  
F7H  
*
1 5 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n  
Data Set 1  
Status  
DT1 (12H)  
Global Parameter Control  
Data byte  
Status  
F7H  
F0H  
41H, dev, 00H, 53H, 12H, aaH, bbH,  
ccH, ddH, eeH, ... ffH, sum  
Scale/Octave Tuning Adjust  
Status  
F0H  
Data byte  
Status  
7EH, 7FH, 08H, 08H, ffH, ggH, hhH, ssH... F7  
Byte  
F0H  
41H  
dev  
Explanation  
Exclusive status  
Byte  
F0H  
7EH  
7FH  
08H  
08H  
ffH  
Explanation  
ID number (Roland)  
Device ID (dev: 00H - 1FH, 7FH)  
Model ID #1 (V-Synth)  
Model ID #2 (V-Synth)  
Command ID (DT1)  
Exclusive status  
ID number (Universal Non-realtime Message)  
Device ID (Broadcast)  
00H  
53H  
12H  
aaH  
bbH  
Sub ID#1 (MIDI Tuning Standard)  
Sub ID#2 (scale/ octave tuning 1-byte form)  
Channel/ Option byte 1  
Address MSB: upper byte of the starting address of the data to be sent  
Address: upper middle byte of the starting address of the data to be  
sent  
bits 0 to 1 = channel 15 to 16  
bit 2 to 6 = Undefined  
ccH  
sent  
ddH  
eeH  
Address: lower middle byte of the starting address of the data to be  
ggH  
hhH  
ssH  
Channel byte 2  
bits 0 to 6 = channel 8 to 14  
Channel byte 3  
Address LSB: lower byte of the starting address of the data to be sent.  
Data: the actual data to be sent. Multiple bytes of data are transmitted  
bits 0 to 6 = channel 1 to 7  
12 byte tuning offset of 12 semitones from C to B  
00H = -64 [cents]  
in order starting from the address.  
:
:
ffH  
sum  
F7H  
Data  
40H = 0 [cents] (equal temperament)  
7FH = +63 [cents]  
Checksum  
EOX (End Of Exclusive)  
F7H  
EOX (End Of Exclusive)  
*
*
The amount of data that can be transmitted at one time depends on the type of data, and  
Data Transmission  
data will be transmitted from the specified starting address and size. Refer to the address  
This instrument can use exclusive messages to exchange many varieties of internal settings  
with other devices.  
Data larger than 256 bytes will be divided into packets of 256 bytes or less, and each  
packet will be sent at an interval of about 20 ms.  
The model ID of the exclusive messages used by this instrument is 00H 53H.  
*
*
Data Request 1RQ1 (11H)  
Not received when the Receive Exclusive parameter (SYSTEM Com MIDI/ USB) is OFF.  
This message requests the other device to transmit data. The address and size indicate the  
type and amount of data that is requested.  
Status  
F0H  
Data byte  
Status  
F7H  
When a Data Request message is received, if the device is in a state in which it is able to  
transmit data, and if the address and size are appropriate, the requested data is transmitted  
as a Data Set 1 (DT1) message. If the conditions are not met, nothing is transmitted.  
41H, dev, 42H, 12H, aaH, bbH, ccH,  
ddH, ... eeH, sum  
Byte  
F0H  
41H  
dev  
42H  
12H  
aaH  
Explanation  
Status  
F0H  
data byte  
status  
Exclusive status  
41H, dev, 00H, 53H, 11H, aaH, bbH, ccH, F7H  
ddH, ssH, ttH, uuH, vvH, sum  
ID number (Roland)  
Device ID (dev: 10H - 1FH, 7FH)  
Model ID (GS)  
Byte  
F0H  
41H  
dev  
00H  
53H  
11H  
aaH  
bbH  
ccH  
ddH  
ssH  
Remarks  
Command ID (DT1)  
Exclusive status  
ID number (Roland)  
device ID (dev: 10H - 1FH, 7FH)  
model ID #1 (V-Synth)  
model ID #2 (V-Synth)  
command ID (RQ1)  
address MSB  
address  
Address MSB: upper byte of the starting address of the transmitted  
data  
bbH  
ccH  
Address:  
middle byte of the starting address of the transmitted  
data  
Address LSB: lower byte of the starting address of the transmitted  
data  
ddH  
Data:  
the actual data to be transmitted. Multiple bytes of  
data are transmitted starting from the address.  
address  
:
:
address LSB  
eeH  
sum  
F7H  
Data  
size MSB  
Checksum  
ttH  
size  
EOX (End Of Exclusive)  
uuH  
vvH  
sum  
F7H  
size  
size LSB  
*
*
The amount of data that can be transmitted at one time depends on the type of data, and  
data will be transmitted from the specified starting address and size. Refer to the address  
checksum  
EOX (End Of Exclusive)  
Data larger than 256 bytes will be divided into packets of 256 bytes or less, and each  
packet will be sent at an interval of about 20 ms.  
*
The size of data that can be transmitted at one time is fixed for each type of data. And  
data requests must be made with a fixed starting address and size. Refer to the address  
*
*
Not received when the Receive Exclusive parameter (SYSTEM Com MIDI/ USB) is OFF.  
*
*
Not received when the Receive Exclusive parameter (SYSTEM Com MIDI/ USB) is OFF.  
1 5 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n  
General Purpose Controller 3 MSB (Controller number 18)  
2. Data Transmission  
Channel Voice Messages  
Note Off  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
12H  
3rd byte  
vvH  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Control value:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
General Purpose Controller 4 MSB (Controller number 19)  
Status  
2nd byte  
3rd byte  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
13H  
3rd byte  
vvH  
8nH  
kkH  
vvH  
n = MIDI channel number:  
kk = note number:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Control value:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
vv = note off velocity:  
Breath Type LSB (Controller number 34)  
Note On  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
22H  
3rd byte  
vvH  
Status  
2nd byte  
kkH  
3rd byte  
vvH  
9nH  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Control value:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
n = MIDI channel number:  
kk = note number:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
01H - 7FH (1 - 127)  
vv = note on velocity:  
General Purpose Controller 1 LSB (Controller number 48)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
30H  
3rd byte  
vvH  
Control Change  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Control value:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
*
By selecting  
a
controller number that corresponds to the setting of parameters of  
controllers (Time Trip Pad, D Beam, Knob, and so on), the V-Synth can transmit any  
control change message.  
General Purpose Controller 2 LSB (Controller number 49)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
31H  
3rd byte  
vvH  
Bank Select (Controller number 0, 32)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
00H  
3rd byte  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Control value:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
mmH  
BnH  
20H  
llH  
n = MIDI channel number:  
mm, ll = Bank number:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
General Purpose Controller 3 LSB (Controller number 50)  
00 00H - 7F 7FH (bank.1 - bank.16384)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
32H  
3rd byte  
vvH  
*
*
These messages are transmitted when Patch is selected. But not transmitted when  
Transmit Program Change or Transmit Bank Select parameter (SYSTEM Com MIDI/  
USB) is OFF.  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Control value:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
Although with the V-Synth you can select the Bank Select messages to be transmitted, be  
General Purpose Controller 4 LSB (Controller number 51)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
33H  
3rd byte  
vvH  
transmitted when the V-Synth is select  
Performance.  
a
Patch, Rhythm Set, Multitimbre or  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Control value:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
Modulation (Controller number 1)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
01H  
3rd byte  
vvH  
Hold 1 (Controller number 64)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
40H  
3rd byte  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Modulation depth:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
vvH  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Control value:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127) 0-63 = OFF, 64-127 = ON  
Breath Type MSB (Controller number 2)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
02H  
3rd byte  
vvH  
General Purpose Controller 5 (Controller number 80)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
50H  
3rd byte  
vvH  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Control value:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Control value:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
Volume (Controller number 7)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
07H  
3rd byte  
vvH  
General Purpose Controller 6 (Controller number 81)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
51H  
3rd byte  
vvH  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Volume:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Control value:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
Expression (Controller number 11)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
0BH  
3rd byte  
vvH  
General Purpose Controller 7 (Controller number 82)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
52H  
3rd byte  
vvH  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Expression:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Control value:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
General Purpose Controller 1 MSB (Controller number 16)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
10H  
3rd byte  
vvH  
General Purpose Controller 8 (Controller number 83)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
53H  
3rd byte  
vvH  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Control value:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Control value:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
General Purpose Controller 2 MSB (Controller number 17)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
11H  
3rd byte  
vvH  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Control value:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
1 5 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n  
Program Change  
Data Transmission  
Status  
2nd byte  
CnH  
ppH  
Data Set 1  
Status  
DT1 (12H)  
n = MIDI channel number:  
pp = Program number:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
Data byte  
Status  
F7H  
00H - 7FH (prog.1 - prog.128)  
F0H  
41H, dev, 00H, 53H, 12H, aaH, bbH,  
ccH, ddH, eeH, ... ffH, sum  
*
These messages are transmitted when Patch is selected. But not transmitted when  
Transmit Program Change parameter (SYSTEM Com MIDI/ USB) is OFF.  
Byte  
F0H  
41H  
dev  
00H  
53H  
12H  
aaH  
Explanation  
Exclusive status  
ID number (Roland)  
Device ID (dev: 00H - 1FH, 7FH)  
Model ID #1 (V-Synth)  
Model ID #2 (V-Synth)  
Command ID (DT1)  
Channel Pressure  
Status  
2nd byte  
DnH  
vvH  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Channel Pressure:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00H - 7FH (0 - 127)  
Address MSB: upper byte of the starting address of the data to be  
sent  
Pitch Bend Change  
bbH  
ccH  
ddH  
eeH  
Address:  
upper middle byte of the starting address of the data  
Status  
2nd byte  
3rd byte  
to be sent  
EnH  
llH  
mmH  
Address:  
lower middle byte of the starting address of the data  
to be sent  
n = MIDI channel number:  
mm, ll = Pitch Bend value:  
0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)  
00 00H - 40 00H - 7F 7FH (-8192 - 0 - +8191)  
Address LSB: lower byte of the starting address of the data to be  
sent.  
System Realtime Messages  
Data:  
the actual data to be sent. Multiple bytes of data are  
transmitted in order starting from the address.  
:
:
Active Sensing  
ffH  
sum  
F7H  
Data  
Status  
Checksum  
FEH  
EOX (End Of Exclusive)  
*
*
This message is transmitted at intervals of approximately 250 msec.  
*
*
The amount of data that can be transmitted at one time depends on the type of data, and  
This message is not sent when Transmit Active Sensing parameter (SYSTEM Ctrl Tx) is  
OFF.  
data will be transmitted from the specified starting address and size. Refer to the address  
Data larger than 256 bytes will be divided into packets of 256 bytes or less, and each  
packet will be sent at an interval of about 20 ms.  
System Exclusive Messages  
Universal Non-realtime System Exclusive Message and Data Set 1 (DT1) are the only  
System Exclusive messages transmitted by the V-Synth.  
Universal Non-realtime System Exclusive Message  
Identity Reply Message  
Receiving Identity Request Message, the V-Synth send this message.  
Status  
F0H  
Data byte  
Status  
F7H  
7EH, dev, 06H, 02H, 41H, 53H, 01H,  
00H, 00H, 00H, 01H, 00H, 00H  
Byte  
Explanation  
F0H  
Exclusive status  
7EH  
ID number (Universal Non-realtime Message)  
Device ID (dev: 10H - 1FH)  
Sub ID#1 (General Information)  
Sub ID#2 (Identity Reply)  
dev  
06H  
02H  
41H  
ID number (Roland)  
53H 01H  
00H 00H  
Device family code  
Device family number code  
00H 01H 00H 00H Software revision level  
F7H  
EOX (End of Exclusive)  
1 5 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 29 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 14 Program Number (PC)  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
3. Parameter Address Map  
00 2A | 0aaa aaaa | Part 15 Bank Select MSB (CC# 0)  
00 2B | 0aaa aaaa | Part 15 Bank Select LSB (CC# 32)  
00 2C | 0aaa aaaa | Part 15 Program Number (PC)  
00 2D | 0aaa aaaa | Part 16 Bank Select MSB (CC# 0)  
00 2E | 0aaa aaaa | Part 16 Bank Select LSB (CC# 32)  
00 2F | 0aaa aaaa | Part 16 Program Number (PC)  
*
Transmission of “#” marked address is divided to some packets. For example, ABH in  
hexadecimal notation will be divided to 0AH and 0BH, and is sent/ received in this  
order.  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 30 | 0000 000a | Transpose Switch  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(59 — 70) |  
—5 — +6  
(61 — 67) |  
—3 — +3 |  
|
|
|
00 31 | 0000 aaaa | Transpose Value  
|
|
|
00 32 | 0000 0aaa | Octave Shift  
1. V-Synth (ModelID = 00H 53H)  
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
00 33 | 0000 000a | Beep Switch  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(1 — 8) |  
|
|
|
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
00 34 | 0000 aaaa | Sampling Template  
| Start  
|
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
Address |  
Description  
|
|
00 35 | 0000 0aaa | Patch Palette Bank  
00 36 | 0000 0aaa | Patch Palette Number  
(0 — 7) |  
(0 — 7) |  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
| 01 00 00 00 | Setup  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
| 02 00 00 00 | System  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
| 10 00 00 00 | Temporary Patch (Part 1)  
| 10 01 00 00 | Temporary Patch (Part 2)  
|
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
| 00 00 00 37 | Total Size  
|
|
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|
|
|
|
System Common  
|
:
|
| 10 0F 00 00 | Temporary Patch (Part 16)  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
| Offset  
|
|
|
| 20 00 00 00 | User Patch (001)  
| 20 01 00 00 | User Patch (002)  
|
|
|
|
|
Address |  
Description  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
:
|
|#  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 00 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
|
|
| 23 7F 00 00 | User Patch (512)  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
| 0000 cccc |  
| 0000 dddd | Master Tune  
(24 — 2024) |  
|
|
—100.0 — +100.0 [cent]  
|
System  
00 04 | 00aa aaaa | Master Key Shift  
(40 — 88) |  
|
|
—24 — +24  
|
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
00 05 | 0aaa aaaa | Master Level  
00 06 | 0000 000a | Patch Remain  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 1) |  
| Offset  
|
|
|
|
Address |  
Description  
|
|
OFF, ON  
|
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
00 07 | 0000 000a | Mix/Parallel  
(0 — 1) |  
MIX, PARALLEL |  
|
|
00 00 00 | System Common  
|
|
|
|
00 40 00 | System Controller  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|
|
|
|
00 08 | 0000 000a | Clock Source  
(0 — 1) |  
|
|
INT, MIDI  
|
00 09 | 0000 000a | Clock Out  
(0 — 1) |  
Patch  
|
|
OFF, ON  
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|
|
|
|
00 0A | 0000 000a | Receive Program Change  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON |  
| Offset  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Address |  
Description  
00 0B | 0000 000a | Receive Bank Select  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 00 00 | Patch Common  
00 02 00 | Patch MFX  
00 04 00 | Patch Chorus  
00 06 00 | Patch Reverb  
00 08 00 | Patch Controller  
|
|
|
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
00 0C | 0000 000a | Part 1 Receive Switch (0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(0 — 15) |  
1 — 16  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(0 — 15) |  
1 — 16  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(0 — 15) |  
1 — 16  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(0 — 15) |  
1 — 16  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(0 — 15) |  
1 — 16  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(0 — 15) |  
1 — 16  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(0 — 15) |  
1 — 16  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(0 — 15) |  
1 — 16  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(0 — 15) |  
1 — 16  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(0 — 15) |  
1 — 16  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(0 — 15) |  
1 — 16  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(0 — 15) |  
1 — 16  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(0 — 15) |  
1 — 16  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(0 — 15) |  
1 — 16  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(0 — 15) |  
1 — 16  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(0 — 15) |  
1 — 16  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 0D | 0000 aaaa | Part 1 Receive Channel  
|
|
|
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
00 0E | 0000 000a | Part 2 Receive Switch  
|
|
|
|
00 10 00 | Patch Oscillator (Zone 1)  
00 11 00 | Patch Oscillator (Zone 2)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 0F | 0000 aaaa | Part 2 Receive Channel  
:
|
|
|
|
00 1F 00 | Patch Oscillator (Zone 16)  
00 10 | 0000 000a | Part 3 Receive Switch  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 20 00 | Patch Envelope (Zone 1)  
00 22 00 | Patch Envelope (Zone 2)  
|
|
|
|
00 11 | 0000 aaaa | Part 3 Receive Channel  
|
|
|
:
|
00 12 | 0000 000a | Part 4 Receive Switch  
00 3E 00 | Patch Envelope (Zone 16)  
|
|
|
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
00 13 | 0000 aaaa | Part 4 Receive Channel  
|
|
|
|
00 40 00 | Patch LFO (Zone 1)  
00 41 00 | Patch LFO (Zone 2)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 14 | 0000 000a | Part 5 Receive Switch  
:
|
|
|
|
00 4F 00 | Patch LFO (Zone 16)  
00 15 | 0000 aaaa | Part 5 Receive Channel  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 50 00 | Patch COSM1 (Zone 1)  
00 51 00 | Patch COSM1 (Zone 2)  
|
|
|
|
00 16 | 0000 000a | Part 6 Receive Switch  
|
|
|
:
|
00 17 | 0000 aaaa | Part 6 Receive Channel  
00 5F 00 | Patch COSM1 (Zone 16)  
|
|
|
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
00 18 | 0000 000a | Part 7 Receive Switch  
|
|
|
|
00 60 00 | Patch COSM2 (Zone 1)  
00 61 00 | Patch COSM2 (Zone 2)  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 19 | 0000 aaaa | Part 7 Receive Channel  
:
|
|
|
|
00 6F 00 | Patch COSM2 (Zone 16)  
00 1A | 0000 000a | Part 8 Receive Switch  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 70 00 | Patch Arpeggio (Note 1)  
00 71 00 | Patch Arpeggio (Note 2)  
|
|
|
|
00 1B | 0000 aaaa | Part 8 Receive Channel  
|
|
|
:
|
00 1C | 0000 000a | Part 9 Receive Switch  
00 7F 00 | Patch Arpeggio (Note 16)  
|
|
|
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
00 1D | 0000 aaaa | Part 9 Receive Channel  
|
|
|
00 1E | 0000 000a | Part 10 Receive Switch  
Setup  
|
|
|
00 1F | 0000 aaaa | Part 10 Receive Channel  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|
|
|
| Offset  
|
|
|
00 20 | 0000 000a | Part 11 Receive Switch  
|
Address |  
Description  
|
|
|
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
00 21 | 0000 aaaa | Part 11 Receive Channel  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 00 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 1 Bank Select MSB (CC# 0)  
00 01 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 1 Bank Select LSB (CC# 32)  
00 02 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 1 Program Number (PC)  
00 03 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 2 Bank Select MSB (CC# 0)  
00 04 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 2 Bank Select LSB (CC# 32)  
00 05 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 2 Program Number (PC)  
00 06 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 3 Bank Select MSB (CC# 0)  
00 07 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 3 Bank Select LSB (CC# 32)  
00 08 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 3 Program Number (PC)  
00 09 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 4 Bank Select MSB (CC# 0)  
00 0A | 0aaa aaaa | Part 4 Bank Select LSB (CC# 32)  
00 0B | 0aaa aaaa | Part 4 Program Number (PC)  
00 0C | 0aaa aaaa | Part 5 Bank Select MSB (CC# 0)  
00 0D | 0aaa aaaa | Part 5 Bank Select LSB (CC# 32)  
00 0E | 0aaa aaaa | Part 5 Program Number (PC)  
00 0F | 0aaa aaaa | Part 6 Bank Select MSB (CC# 0)  
00 10 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 6 Bank Select LSB (CC# 32)  
00 11 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 6 Program Number (PC)  
00 12 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 7 Bank Select MSB (CC# 0)  
00 13 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 7 Bank Select LSB (CC# 32)  
00 14 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 7 Program Number (PC)  
00 15 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 8 Bank Select MSB (CC# 0)  
00 16 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 8 Bank Select LSB (CC# 32)  
00 17 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 8 Program Number (PC)  
00 18 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 9 Bank Select MSB (CC# 0)  
00 19 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 9 Bank Select LSB (CC# 32)  
00 1A | 0aaa aaaa | Part 9 Program Number (PC)  
00 1B | 0aaa aaaa | Part 10 Bank Select MSB (CC# 0)  
00 1C | 0aaa aaaa | Part 10 Bank Select LSB (CC# 32)  
00 1D | 0aaa aaaa | Part 10 Program Number (PC)  
00 1E | 0aaa aaaa | Part 11 Bank Select MSB (CC# 0)  
00 1F | 0aaa aaaa | Part 11 Bank Select LSB (CC# 32)  
00 20 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 11 Program Number (PC)  
00 21 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 12 Bank Select MSB (CC# 0)  
00 22 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 12 Bank Select LSB (CC# 32)  
00 23 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 12 Program Number (PC)  
00 24 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 13 Bank Select MSB (CC# 0)  
00 25 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 13 Bank Select LSB (CC# 32)  
00 26 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 13 Program Number (PC)  
00 27 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 14 Bank Select MSB (CC# 0)  
00 28 | 0aaa aaaa | Part 14 Bank Select LSB (CC# 32)  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
|
|
|
00 22 | 0000 000a | Part 12 Receive Switch  
|
|
|
00 23 | 0000 aaaa | Part 12 Receive Channel  
|
|
|
00 24 | 0000 000a | Part 13 Receive Switch  
|
|
|
00 25 | 0000 aaaa | Part 13 Receive Channel  
|
|
|
00 26 | 0000 000a | Part 14 Receive Switch  
|
|
|
00 27 | 0000 aaaa | Part 14 Receive Channel  
|
|
|
00 28 | 0000 000a | Part 15 Receive Switch  
|
|
|
00 29 | 0000 aaaa | Part 15 Receive Channel  
|
|
|
00 2A | 0000 000a | Part 16 Receive Switch  
|
|
|
00 2B | 0000 aaaa | Part 16 Receive Channel  
|
|
|
00 2C | 000a aaaa | EQ Low Freq  
(0 — 19) |  
|
|
50 — 4000 [Hz]  
|
00 2D | 000a aaaa | EQ Low Gain  
(0 — 30) |  
|
|
—15 — +15 [dB]  
|
00 2E | 000a aaaa | EQ Mid 1 Freq  
(0 — 26) |  
|
|
50 — 20000 [Hz]  
|
00 2F | 0000 0aaa | EQ Mid 1 Q  
(0 — 5) |  
|
|
0.5 — 8.0  
|
00 30 | 000a aaaa | EQ Mid 1 Gain  
(0 — 30) |  
|
|
—15 — +15 [dB]  
|
00 31 | 000a aaaa | EQ Mid 2 Freq  
(0 — 26) |  
|
|
50 — 20000 [Hz]  
|
00 32 | 0000 0aaa | EQ Mid 2 Q  
(0 — 5) |  
|
|
0.5 — 8.0  
|
00 33 | 000a aaaa | EQ Mid 2 Gain  
(0 — 30) |  
|
|
—15 — +15 [dB]  
|
00 34 | 0000 aaaa | EQ Hi Freq  
(0 — 8) |  
|
|
2000 — 20000 [Hz]  
|
00 35 | 000a aaaa | EQ Hi Gain  
(0 — 30) |  
1 5 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
—15 — +15 [dB]  
|
|
|
|
20.0 — 250.0  
|
00 36 | 000a aaaa | EQ Total Gain  
(0 — 30) |  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
—15 — +15 [dB]  
|
|
|
00 1B | 00aa aaaa | Pitch Bend Range Up  
00 1C | 00aa aaaa | Pitch Bend Range Down  
(0 — 48) |  
(0 — 48) |  
00 37 | 0000 000a | EQ Switch  
(0 — 1) |  
|
|
OFF, ON  
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 1D | 0000 000a | MFX Switch  
(0 — 1) |  
| 00 00 00 38 | Total Size  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|
|
|
BYPASS, ON  
|
00 1E | 0000 000a | Chorus Switch  
(0 — 1) |  
|
|
OFF, ON  
|
00 1F | 0000 000a | Reverb Switch  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON |  
|
|
System Controller  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 20 | 0000 aaaa | Current Zone  
(0 — 15) |  
| Offset  
|
|
|
|
|
ZONE1 — ZONE16  
|
|
Address |  
Description  
00 21 | 0aaa aaaa | Zone 1 Range Upper  
(0 — 127) |  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
C—1 — G9  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 00 | 0000 000a | Transmit Program Change  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON |  
00 22 | 0aaa aaaa | Zone 2 Range Upper  
(0 — 127) |  
C—1 — G9  
(0 — 127) |  
C—1 — G9  
(0 — 127) |  
C—1 — G9  
(0 — 127) |  
C—1 — G9  
(0 — 127) |  
C—1 — G9  
(0 — 127) |  
C—1 — G9  
(0 — 127) |  
C—1 — G9  
(0 — 127) |  
C—1 — G9  
(0 — 127) |  
C—1 — G9  
(0 — 127) |  
C—1 — G9  
(0 — 127) |  
C—1 — G9  
(0 — 127) |  
C—1 — G9  
(0 — 127) |  
C—1 — G9  
(0 — 127) |  
C—1 — G9  
(0 — 127) |  
C—1 — G9  
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 01 | 0000 000a | Transmit Bank Select  
00 23 | 0aaa aaaa | Zone 3 Range Upper  
|
|
|
|
|
00 02 | 0aaa aaaa | Keyboard Velocity  
(0 — 127) |  
00 24 | 0aaa aaaa | Zone 4 Range Upper  
|
|
REAL, 1 — 127  
|
|
|
|
00 03 | 0000 00aa | Keyboard Sens  
(0 — 2) |  
00 25 | 0aaa aaaa | Zone 5 Range Upper  
|
|
LIGHT, MEDIUM, HEAVY  
|
|
|
|
00 04 | 000a aaaa | Aftertouch Sens  
(0 — 20) |  
0 — 200  
00 26 | 0aaa aaaa | Zone 6 Range Upper  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
00 27 | 0aaa aaaa | Zone 7 Range Upper  
|
|
00 05 | 000a aaaa | Patch Transmit Channel  
(0 — 17) |  
1 — 16, RX—CH, OFF |  
|
|
|
|
|
00 28 | 0aaa aaaa | Zone 8 Range Upper  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 06 | 000a aaaa | Beam Sens L  
(0 — 20) |  
0 — 200  
(0 — 20) |  
0 — 200 |  
00 29 | 0aaa aaaa | Zone 9 Range Upper  
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 07 | 000a aaaa | Beam Sens R  
00 2A | 0aaa aaaa | Zone 10 Range Upper  
|
|
|
|
|
00 08 | 0aaa aaaa | Beam 1 Assign L  
(0 — 95) |  
00 2B | 0aaa aaaa | Zone 11 Range Upper  
|
|
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95  
|
|
|
|
00 09 | 0aaa aaaa | Beam 1 Assign R  
(0 — 95) |  
00 2C | 0aaa aaaa | Zone 12 Range Upper  
|
|
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95  
|
|
|
|
00 0A | 0aaa aaaa | Beam 2 Assign L  
(0 — 95) |  
00 2D | 0aaa aaaa | Zone 13 Range Upper  
|
|
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95  
|
|
|
|
00 0B | 0aaa aaaa | Beam 2 Assign R  
(0 — 95) |  
00 2E | 0aaa aaaa | Zone 14 Range Upper  
|
|
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95  
|
|
|
|
00 0C | 0aaa aaaa | Beam 3 Assign L  
(0 — 95) |  
00 2F | 0aaa aaaa | Zone 15 Range Upper  
|
|
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95  
|
|
|
|
00 0D | 0aaa aaaa | Beam 3 Assign R  
(0 — 95) |  
00 30 | 0aaa aaaa | Zone 16 Range Upper  
|
|
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95  
|
|
|
|
00 0E | 0aaa aaaa | Beam 4 Assign L  
(0 — 95) |  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95  
|
|
|
00 31 | 0000 000a | Scale Tune Switch  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
00 0F | 0aaa aaaa | Beam 4 Assign R  
(0 — 95) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95  
|
|#  
|
00 32 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Patch Scale Tune for C  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
(28 — 228) |  
—100 — +100  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 10 | 0aaa aaaa | Pad Assign X  
(0 — 95) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95  
|
|#  
|
00 34 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Patch Scale Tune for C#  
00 11 | 0aaa aaaa | Pad Assign Y  
(0 — 95) |  
(28 — 228) |  
—100 — +100  
|
|
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95  
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 12 | 0aaa aaaa | Time Trip Assign X  
(0 — 95) |  
|#  
|
00 36 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Patch Scale Tune for D  
|
|
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95  
|
(28 — 228) |  
—100 — +100  
00 13 | 0aaa aaaa | Time Trip Assign Y  
(0 — 95) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95  
|
|#  
|
00 38 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Patch Scale Tune for D#  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
(28 — 228) |  
—100 — +100  
|
|
|
|
00 14 | 0aaa aaaa | Knob 1 Assign  
(0 — 95) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95  
|
|#  
|
00 3A | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Patch Scale Tune for E  
00 15 | 0aaa aaaa | Knob 2 Assign  
(0 — 95) |  
(28 — 228) |  
—100 — +100  
|
|
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|#  
|
00 3C | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Patch Scale Tune for F  
|
|
00 16 | 0000 0aaa | Hold Pedal Polarity  
(0 — 1) |  
STANDARD, REVERSE |  
(28 — 228) |  
—100 — +100  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|#  
|
00 3E | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Patch Scale Tune for F#  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 17 | 0aaa aaaa | Pedal 1 Assign  
(0 — 98) |  
(28 — 228) |  
—100 — +100  
|
|
|
|
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95, |  
|
|
|
|
|
BEND—UP, BEND—DOWN, AFT  
|
|#  
|
00 40 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Patch Scale Tune for G  
00 18 | 0000 0aaa | Pedal 1 Polarity  
(0 — 1) |  
(28 — 228) |  
—100 — +100  
|
|
STANDARD, REVERSE  
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 19 | 0aaa aaaa | Pedal 2 Assign  
(0 — 98) |  
|#  
|
00 42 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Patch Scale Tune for G#  
|
|
|
|
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95, |  
(28 — 228) |  
—100 — +100  
BEND—UP, BEND—DOWN, AFT  
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 1A | 0000 0aaa | Pedal 2 Polarity  
(0 — 1) |  
STANDARD, REVERSE |  
|#  
|
00 44 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Patch Scale Tune for A  
|
|
(28 — 228) |  
—100 — +100  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|
|
| 00 00 00 1B | Total Size  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|
|#  
|
00 46 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Patch Scale Tune for A#  
(28 — 228) |  
—100 — +100  
|
|
|
|
|
|#  
|
00 48 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Patch Scale Tune for B  
Patch Common  
(28 — 228) |  
—100 — +100  
|
|
|
|
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
| Offset  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 4A | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 1 Source  
(0 — 108) |  
|
Address |  
Description  
|
|
|
|
|
|
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95, BEND, AFT, |  
+PAD—X, +PAD—Y, PAD—X, PAD—Y, TRIP—R, |  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 00 | 0aaa aaaa | Patch Name 1  
(32 — 127) |  
32 — 127 [ASCII]  
(32 — 127) |  
32 — 127 [ASCII]  
(32 — 127) |  
32 — 127 [ASCII]  
(32 — 127) |  
32 — 127 [ASCII]  
(32 — 127) |  
32 — 127 [ASCII]  
(32 — 127) |  
32 — 127 [ASCII]  
(32 — 127) |  
32 — 127 [ASCII]  
(32 — 127) |  
32 — 127 [ASCII]  
(32 — 127) |  
32 — 127 [ASCII]  
(32 — 127) |  
32 — 127 [ASCII]  
(32 — 127) |  
32 — 127 [ASCII]  
(32 — 127) |  
32 — 127 [ASCII]  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
00 0C | 0aaa aaaa | (reserved) (0 — 127) |  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
00 0D | 0aaa aaaa | Patch Coarse Tune (16 — 112) |  
—48 — +48  
(14 — 114) |  
—50 — +50  
(61 — 67) |  
—3 — +3  
BEAM—L, BEAM—R, KNOB1, KNOB2, VELO, KEYF  
|
|
|
|
00 4B | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 1 Dest 1  
(0 — 77) |  
00 01 | 0aaa aaaa | Patch Name 2  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OFF, |  
|
|
|
OSC1—PITCH, OSC1—TIME/PW, OSC1—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC1—LVL, |  
00 02 | 0aaa aaaa | Patch Name 3  
|
|
|
OSC1—PENV—ATK, OSC1—PENV—DCY, OSC1—PENV—REL, |  
OSC1—TENV—ATK, OSC1—TENV—DCY, OSC1—TENV—REL, |  
OSC1—FENV—ATK, OSC1—FENV—DCY, OSC1—FENV—REL, |  
OSC1—AENV—ATK, OSC1—AENV—DCY, OSC1—AENV—REL, |  
OSC1—LFO—RATE, OSC1—LFO—PCH, OSC1—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC1—LFO—FR/FT, OSC1—LFO—LVL, |  
00 03 | 0aaa aaaa | Patch Name 4  
|
|
|
00 04 | 0aaa aaaa | Patch Name 5  
|
|
|
00 05 | 0aaa aaaa | Patch Name 6  
|
|
|
OSC2—PITCH, OSC2—TIME/PW, OSC2—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC2—LVL, |  
00 06 | 0aaa aaaa | Patch Name 7  
|
|
|
OSC2—PENV—ATK, OSC2—PENV—DCY, OSC2—PENV—REL, |  
OSC2—TENV—ATK, OSC2—TENV—DCY, OSC2—TENV—REL, |  
OSC2—FENV—ATK, OSC2—FENV—DCY, OSC2—FENV—REL, |  
OSC2—AENV—ATK, OSC2—AENV—DCY, OSC2—AENV—REL, |  
OSC2—LFO—RATE, OSC2—LFO—PCH, OSC2—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC2—LFO—FR/FT, OSC2—LFO—LVL, |  
00 07 | 0aaa aaaa | Patch Name 8  
|
|
|
00 08 | 0aaa aaaa | Patch Name 9  
|
|
|
00 09 | 0aaa aaaa | Patch Name 10  
|
|
|
CSM1—PRM1, CSM1—PRM2, |  
00 0A | 0aaa aaaa | Patch Name 11  
CSM1—ENV1—ATK, CSM1—ENV1—DCY, CSM1—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM1—ENV2—ATK, CSM1—ENV2—DCY, CSM1—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM1—LFO—RATE, CSM1—LFO—PRM1, CSM1—LFO—PRM2, |  
CSM2—PRM1, CSM2—PRM2, |  
|
|
|
00 0B | 0aaa aaaa | Patch Name 12  
|
|
|
CSM2—ENV1—ATK, CSM2—ENV1—DCY, CSM2—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM2—ENV2—ATK, CSM2—ENV2—DCY, CSM2—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM2—LFO—RATE, CSM2—LFO—PRM1, CSM2—LFO—PRM2, |  
TVA—LVL, |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|#  
|
|
|
|
|
|
TVA—ENV—ATK, TVA—ENV—DCY, TVA—ENV—REL, |  
TVA—LFO—RATE, TVA—LFO—LVL, TVA—LFO—PAN, |  
MFX—SEND, CHO—SEND, REV—SEND, |  
00 0E | 0aaa aaaa | Patch Fine Tune  
|
|
|
00 0F | 0000 0aaa | Octave Shift  
MFX—PRM1, MFX—PRM2, MFX—PRM3  
|
|
|
|
00 4C | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 1 Sens 1  
(1 — 127) |  
00 10 | 0000 000a | Mono/Poly  
(0 — 1) |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
|
MONO, POLY  
|
00 4D | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 1 Dest 2  
(0 — 77) |  
OFF, |  
00 11 | 0000 000a | Legato Switch  
(0 — 1) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OFF, ON  
|
OSC1—PITCH, OSC1—TIME/PW, OSC1—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC1—LVL, |  
00 12 | 0000 000a | Portamento Switch  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON |  
|
|
OSC1—PENV—ATK, OSC1—PENV—DCY, OSC1—PENV—REL, |  
OSC1—TENV—ATK, OSC1—TENV—DCY, OSC1—TENV—REL, |  
OSC1—FENV—ATK, OSC1—FENV—DCY, OSC1—FENV—REL, |  
OSC1—AENV—ATK, OSC1—AENV—DCY, OSC1—AENV—REL, |  
OSC1—LFO—RATE, OSC1—LFO—PCH, OSC1—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC1—LFO—FR/FT, OSC1—LFO—LVL, |  
00 13 | 0000 000a | Portamento Mode  
(0 — 1) |  
|
|
NORMAL, LEGATO  
|
00 14 | 0000 000a | Portamento Type  
(0 — 1) |  
|
|
RATE, TIME  
|
(0 — 127) |  
(1 — 127) |  
00 15 | 0aaa aaaa | Portamento Time  
00 16 | 0aaa aaaa | Portamento Time Velocity Sens  
OSC2—PITCH, OSC2—TIME/PW, OSC2—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC2—LVL, |  
OSC2—PENV—ATK, OSC2—PENV—DCY, OSC2—PENV—REL, |  
OSC2—TENV—ATK, OSC2—TENV—DCY, OSC2—TENV—REL, |  
OSC2—FENV—ATK, OSC2—FENV—DCY, OSC2—FENV—REL, |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
|
|
00 17 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
| 0000 cccc |  
| 0000 dddd | Patch Tempo  
(200 — 2500) |  
1 6 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OSC2—AENV—ATK, OSC2—AENV—DCY, OSC2—AENV—REL, |  
OSC2—LFO—RATE, OSC2—LFO—PCH, OSC2—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC2—LFO—FR/FT, OSC2—LFO—LVL, |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OSC2—LVL, |  
OSC2—PENV—ATK, OSC2—PENV—DCY, OSC2—PENV—REL, |  
OSC2—TENV—ATK, OSC2—TENV—DCY, OSC2—TENV—REL, |  
OSC2—FENV—ATK, OSC2—FENV—DCY, OSC2—FENV—REL, |  
OSC2—AENV—ATK, OSC2—AENV—DCY, OSC2—AENV—REL, |  
OSC2—LFO—RATE, OSC2—LFO—PCH, OSC2—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC2—LFO—FR/FT, OSC2—LFO—LVL, |  
CSM1—PRM1, CSM1—PRM2, |  
CSM1—ENV1—ATK, CSM1—ENV1—DCY, CSM1—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM1—ENV2—ATK, CSM1—ENV2—DCY, CSM1—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM1—LFO—RATE, CSM1—LFO—PRM1, CSM1—LFO—PRM2, |  
CSM2—PRM1, CSM2—PRM2, |  
CSM2—ENV1—ATK, CSM2—ENV1—DCY, CSM2—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM2—ENV2—ATK, CSM2—ENV2—DCY, CSM2—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM2—LFO—RATE, CSM2—LFO—PRM1, CSM2—LFO—PRM2, |  
TVA—LVL, |  
CSM1—PRM1, CSM1—PRM2, |  
CSM1—ENV1—ATK, CSM1—ENV1—DCY, CSM1—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM1—ENV2—ATK, CSM1—ENV2—DCY, CSM1—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM1—LFO—RATE, CSM1—LFO—PRM1, CSM1—LFO—PRM2, |  
CSM2—PRM1, CSM2—PRM2, |  
CSM2—ENV1—ATK, CSM2—ENV1—DCY, CSM2—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM2—ENV2—ATK, CSM2—ENV2—DCY, CSM2—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM2—LFO—RATE, CSM2—LFO—PRM1, CSM2—LFO—PRM2, |  
TVA—LVL, |  
TVA—ENV—ATK, TVA—ENV—DCY, TVA—ENV—REL, |  
TVA—LFO—RATE, TVA—LFO—LVL, TVA—LFO—PAN, |  
MFX—SEND, CHO—SEND, REV—SEND, |  
MFX—PRM1, MFX—PRM2, MFX—PRM3  
|
00 4E | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 1 Sens 2  
(1 — 127) |  
TVA—ENV—ATK, TVA—ENV—DCY, TVA—ENV—REL, |  
TVA—LFO—RATE, TVA—LFO—LVL, TVA—LFO—PAN, |  
MFX—SEND, CHO—SEND, REV—SEND, |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 4F | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 2 Source  
(0 — 108) |  
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95, BEND, AFT, |  
+PAD—X, +PAD—Y, PAD—X, PAD—Y, TRIP—R, |  
MFX—PRM1, MFX—PRM2, MFX—PRM3  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 58 | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 3 Sens 2  
(1 — 127) |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
BEAM—L, BEAM—R, KNOB1, KNOB2, VELO, KEYF  
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
00 50 | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 2 Dest 1  
(0 — 77) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 59 | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 4 Source  
(0 — 108) |  
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95, BEND, AFT, |  
+PAD—X, +PAD—Y, PAD—X, PAD—Y, TRIP—R, |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OFF, |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
OSC1—PITCH, OSC1—TIME/PW, OSC1—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC1—LVL, |  
BEAM—L, BEAM—R, KNOB1, KNOB2, VELO, KEYF  
|
OSC1—PENV—ATK, OSC1—PENV—DCY, OSC1—PENV—REL, |  
OSC1—TENV—ATK, OSC1—TENV—DCY, OSC1—TENV—REL, |  
OSC1—FENV—ATK, OSC1—FENV—DCY, OSC1—FENV—REL, |  
OSC1—AENV—ATK, OSC1—AENV—DCY, OSC1—AENV—REL, |  
OSC1—LFO—RATE, OSC1—LFO—PCH, OSC1—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC1—LFO—FR/FT, OSC1—LFO—LVL, |  
00 5A | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 4 Dest 1  
(0 — 77) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OFF, |  
OSC1—PITCH, OSC1—TIME/PW, OSC1—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC1—LVL, |  
OSC1—PENV—ATK, OSC1—PENV—DCY, OSC1—PENV—REL, |  
OSC1—TENV—ATK, OSC1—TENV—DCY, OSC1—TENV—REL, |  
OSC1—FENV—ATK, OSC1—FENV—DCY, OSC1—FENV—REL, |  
OSC1—AENV—ATK, OSC1—AENV—DCY, OSC1—AENV—REL, |  
OSC1—LFO—RATE, OSC1—LFO—PCH, OSC1—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC1—LFO—FR/FT, OSC1—LFO—LVL, |  
OSC2—PITCH, OSC2—TIME/PW, OSC2—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC2—LVL, |  
OSC2—PENV—ATK, OSC2—PENV—DCY, OSC2—PENV—REL, |  
OSC2—TENV—ATK, OSC2—TENV—DCY, OSC2—TENV—REL, |  
OSC2—FENV—ATK, OSC2—FENV—DCY, OSC2—FENV—REL, |  
OSC2—AENV—ATK, OSC2—AENV—DCY, OSC2—AENV—REL, |  
OSC2—LFO—RATE, OSC2—LFO—PCH, OSC2—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC2—LFO—FR/FT, OSC2—LFO—LVL, |  
OSC2—PITCH, OSC2—TIME/PW, OSC2—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC2—LVL, |  
OSC2—PENV—ATK, OSC2—PENV—DCY, OSC2—PENV—REL, |  
OSC2—TENV—ATK, OSC2—TENV—DCY, OSC2—TENV—REL, |  
OSC2—FENV—ATK, OSC2—FENV—DCY, OSC2—FENV—REL, |  
OSC2—AENV—ATK, OSC2—AENV—DCY, OSC2—AENV—REL, |  
OSC2—LFO—RATE, OSC2—LFO—PCH, OSC2—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC2—LFO—FR/FT, OSC2—LFO—LVL, |  
CSM1—PRM1, CSM1—PRM2, |  
CSM1—ENV1—ATK, CSM1—ENV1—DCY, CSM1—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM1—ENV2—ATK, CSM1—ENV2—DCY, CSM1—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM1—LFO—RATE, CSM1—LFO—PRM1, CSM1—LFO—PRM2, |  
CSM2—PRM1, CSM2—PRM2, |  
CSM1—PRM1, CSM1—PRM2, |  
CSM2—ENV1—ATK, CSM2—ENV1—DCY, CSM2—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM2—ENV2—ATK, CSM2—ENV2—DCY, CSM2—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM2—LFO—RATE, CSM2—LFO—PRM1, CSM2—LFO—PRM2, |  
TVA—LVL, |  
CSM1—ENV1—ATK, CSM1—ENV1—DCY, CSM1—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM1—ENV2—ATK, CSM1—ENV2—DCY, CSM1—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM1—LFO—RATE, CSM1—LFO—PRM1, CSM1—LFO—PRM2, |  
CSM2—PRM1, CSM2—PRM2, |  
TVA—ENV—ATK, TVA—ENV—DCY, TVA—ENV—REL, |  
TVA—LFO—RATE, TVA—LFO—LVL, TVA—LFO—PAN, |  
MFX—SEND, CHO—SEND, REV—SEND, |  
CSM2—ENV1—ATK, CSM2—ENV1—DCY, CSM2—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM2—ENV2—ATK, CSM2—ENV2—DCY, CSM2—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM2—LFO—RATE, CSM2—LFO—PRM1, CSM2—LFO—PRM2, |  
TVA—LVL, |  
MFX—PRM1, MFX—PRM2, MFX—PRM3  
|
00 51 | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 2 Sens 1  
(1 — 127) |  
TVA—ENV—ATK, TVA—ENV—DCY, TVA—ENV—REL, |  
TVA—LFO—RATE, TVA—LFO—LVL, TVA—LFO—PAN, |  
MFX—SEND, CHO—SEND, REV—SEND, |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
(0 — 77) |  
OFF, |  
|
00 52 | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 2 Dest 2  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
MFX—PRM1, MFX—PRM2, MFX—PRM3  
|
OSC1—PITCH, OSC1—TIME/PW, OSC1—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC1—LVL, |  
00 5B | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 4 Sens 1  
(1 — 127) |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
(0 — 77) |  
OFF, |  
|
OSC1—PENV—ATK, OSC1—PENV—DCY, OSC1—PENV—REL, |  
OSC1—TENV—ATK, OSC1—TENV—DCY, OSC1—TENV—REL, |  
OSC1—FENV—ATK, OSC1—FENV—DCY, OSC1—FENV—REL, |  
OSC1—AENV—ATK, OSC1—AENV—DCY, OSC1—AENV—REL, |  
OSC1—LFO—RATE, OSC1—LFO—PCH, OSC1—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC1—LFO—FR/FT, OSC1—LFO—LVL, |  
00 5C | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 4 Dest 2  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OSC1—PITCH, OSC1—TIME/PW, OSC1—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC1—LVL, |  
OSC1—PENV—ATK, OSC1—PENV—DCY, OSC1—PENV—REL, |  
OSC1—TENV—ATK, OSC1—TENV—DCY, OSC1—TENV—REL, |  
OSC1—FENV—ATK, OSC1—FENV—DCY, OSC1—FENV—REL, |  
OSC1—AENV—ATK, OSC1—AENV—DCY, OSC1—AENV—REL, |  
OSC1—LFO—RATE, OSC1—LFO—PCH, OSC1—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC1—LFO—FR/FT, OSC1—LFO—LVL, |  
OSC2—PITCH, OSC2—TIME/PW, OSC2—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC2—LVL, |  
OSC2—PENV—ATK, OSC2—PENV—DCY, OSC2—PENV—REL, |  
OSC2—TENV—ATK, OSC2—TENV—DCY, OSC2—TENV—REL, |  
OSC2—FENV—ATK, OSC2—FENV—DCY, OSC2—FENV—REL, |  
OSC2—AENV—ATK, OSC2—AENV—DCY, OSC2—AENV—REL, |  
OSC2—LFO—RATE, OSC2—LFO—PCH, OSC2—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC2—LFO—FR/FT, OSC2—LFO—LVL, |  
OSC2—PITCH, OSC2—TIME/PW, OSC2—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC2—LVL, |  
OSC2—PENV—ATK, OSC2—PENV—DCY, OSC2—PENV—REL, |  
OSC2—TENV—ATK, OSC2—TENV—DCY, OSC2—TENV—REL, |  
OSC2—FENV—ATK, OSC2—FENV—DCY, OSC2—FENV—REL, |  
OSC2—AENV—ATK, OSC2—AENV—DCY, OSC2—AENV—REL, |  
OSC2—LFO—RATE, OSC2—LFO—PCH, OSC2—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC2—LFO—FR/FT, OSC2—LFO—LVL, |  
CSM1—PRM1, CSM1—PRM2, |  
CSM1—ENV1—ATK, CSM1—ENV1—DCY, CSM1—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM1—ENV2—ATK, CSM1—ENV2—DCY, CSM1—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM1—LFO—RATE, CSM1—LFO—PRM1, CSM1—LFO—PRM2, |  
CSM2—PRM1, CSM2—PRM2, |  
CSM1—PRM1, CSM1—PRM2, |  
CSM2—ENV1—ATK, CSM2—ENV1—DCY, CSM2—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM2—ENV2—ATK, CSM2—ENV2—DCY, CSM2—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM2—LFO—RATE, CSM2—LFO—PRM1, CSM2—LFO—PRM2, |  
TVA—LVL, |  
CSM1—ENV1—ATK, CSM1—ENV1—DCY, CSM1—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM1—ENV2—ATK, CSM1—ENV2—DCY, CSM1—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM1—LFO—RATE, CSM1—LFO—PRM1, CSM1—LFO—PRM2, |  
CSM2—PRM1, CSM2—PRM2, |  
TVA—ENV—ATK, TVA—ENV—DCY, TVA—ENV—REL, |  
TVA—LFO—RATE, TVA—LFO—LVL, TVA—LFO—PAN, |  
MFX—SEND, CHO—SEND, REV—SEND, |  
CSM2—ENV1—ATK, CSM2—ENV1—DCY, CSM2—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM2—ENV2—ATK, CSM2—ENV2—DCY, CSM2—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM2—LFO—RATE, CSM2—LFO—PRM1, CSM2—LFO—PRM2, |  
TVA—LVL, |  
MFX—PRM1, MFX—PRM2, MFX—PRM3  
|
00 53 | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 2 Sens 2  
(1 — 127) |  
TVA—ENV—ATK, TVA—ENV—DCY, TVA—ENV—REL, |  
TVA—LFO—RATE, TVA—LFO—LVL, TVA—LFO—PAN, |  
MFX—SEND, CHO—SEND, REV—SEND, |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 54 | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 3 Source  
(0 — 108) |  
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95, BEND, AFT, |  
+PAD—X, +PAD—Y, PAD—X, PAD—Y, TRIP—R, |  
MFX—PRM1, MFX—PRM2, MFX—PRM3  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 5D | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 4 Sens 2  
(1 — 127) |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
BEAM—L, BEAM—R, KNOB1, KNOB2, VELO, KEYF  
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
00 55 | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 3 Dest 1  
(0 — 77) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 5E | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 5 Source  
(0 — 108) |  
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95, BEND, AFT, |  
+PAD—X, +PAD—Y, PAD—X, PAD—Y, TRIP—R, |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OFF, |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
OSC1—PITCH, OSC1—TIME/PW, OSC1—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC1—LVL, |  
BEAM—L, BEAM—R, KNOB1, KNOB2, VELO, KEYF  
|
OSC1—PENV—ATK, OSC1—PENV—DCY, OSC1—PENV—REL, |  
OSC1—TENV—ATK, OSC1—TENV—DCY, OSC1—TENV—REL, |  
OSC1—FENV—ATK, OSC1—FENV—DCY, OSC1—FENV—REL, |  
OSC1—AENV—ATK, OSC1—AENV—DCY, OSC1—AENV—REL, |  
OSC1—LFO—RATE, OSC1—LFO—PCH, OSC1—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC1—LFO—FR/FT, OSC1—LFO—LVL, |  
00 5F | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 5 Dest 1  
(0 — 77) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OFF, |  
OSC1—PITCH, OSC1—TIME/PW, OSC1—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC1—LVL, |  
OSC1—PENV—ATK, OSC1—PENV—DCY, OSC1—PENV—REL, |  
OSC1—TENV—ATK, OSC1—TENV—DCY, OSC1—TENV—REL, |  
OSC1—FENV—ATK, OSC1—FENV—DCY, OSC1—FENV—REL, |  
OSC1—AENV—ATK, OSC1—AENV—DCY, OSC1—AENV—REL, |  
OSC1—LFO—RATE, OSC1—LFO—PCH, OSC1—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC1—LFO—FR/FT, OSC1—LFO—LVL, |  
OSC2—PITCH, OSC2—TIME/PW, OSC2—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC2—LVL, |  
OSC2—PENV—ATK, OSC2—PENV—DCY, OSC2—PENV—REL, |  
OSC2—TENV—ATK, OSC2—TENV—DCY, OSC2—TENV—REL, |  
OSC2—FENV—ATK, OSC2—FENV—DCY, OSC2—FENV—REL, |  
OSC2—AENV—ATK, OSC2—AENV—DCY, OSC2—AENV—REL, |  
OSC2—LFO—RATE, OSC2—LFO—PCH, OSC2—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC2—LFO—FR/FT, OSC2—LFO—LVL, |  
OSC2—PITCH, OSC2—TIME/PW, OSC2—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC2—LVL, |  
OSC2—PENV—ATK, OSC2—PENV—DCY, OSC2—PENV—REL, |  
OSC2—TENV—ATK, OSC2—TENV—DCY, OSC2—TENV—REL, |  
OSC2—FENV—ATK, OSC2—FENV—DCY, OSC2—FENV—REL, |  
OSC2—AENV—ATK, OSC2—AENV—DCY, OSC2—AENV—REL, |  
OSC2—LFO—RATE, OSC2—LFO—PCH, OSC2—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC2—LFO—FR/FT, OSC2—LFO—LVL, |  
CSM1—PRM1, CSM1—PRM2, |  
CSM1—ENV1—ATK, CSM1—ENV1—DCY, CSM1—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM1—ENV2—ATK, CSM1—ENV2—DCY, CSM1—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM1—LFO—RATE, CSM1—LFO—PRM1, CSM1—LFO—PRM2, |  
CSM2—PRM1, CSM2—PRM2, |  
CSM1—PRM1, CSM1—PRM2, |  
CSM2—ENV1—ATK, CSM2—ENV1—DCY, CSM2—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM2—ENV2—ATK, CSM2—ENV2—DCY, CSM2—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM2—LFO—RATE, CSM2—LFO—PRM1, CSM2—LFO—PRM2, |  
TVA—LVL, |  
CSM1—ENV1—ATK, CSM1—ENV1—DCY, CSM1—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM1—ENV2—ATK, CSM1—ENV2—DCY, CSM1—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM1—LFO—RATE, CSM1—LFO—PRM1, CSM1—LFO—PRM2, |  
CSM2—PRM1, CSM2—PRM2, |  
TVA—ENV—ATK, TVA—ENV—DCY, TVA—ENV—REL, |  
TVA—LFO—RATE, TVA—LFO—LVL, TVA—LFO—PAN, |  
MFX—SEND, CHO—SEND, REV—SEND, |  
CSM2—ENV1—ATK, CSM2—ENV1—DCY, CSM2—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM2—ENV2—ATK, CSM2—ENV2—DCY, CSM2—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM2—LFO—RATE, CSM2—LFO—PRM1, CSM2—LFO—PRM2, |  
TVA—LVL, |  
MFX—PRM1, MFX—PRM2, MFX—PRM3  
|
00 56 | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 3 Sens 1  
(1 — 127) |  
TVA—ENV—ATK, TVA—ENV—DCY, TVA—ENV—REL, |  
TVA—LFO—RATE, TVA—LFO—LVL, TVA—LFO—PAN, |  
MFX—SEND, CHO—SEND, REV—SEND, |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
(0 — 77) |  
OFF, |  
|
00 57 | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 3 Dest 2  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
MFX—PRM1, MFX—PRM2, MFX—PRM3  
|
OSC1—PITCH, OSC1—TIME/PW, OSC1—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC1—LVL, |  
00 60 | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 5 Sens 1  
(1 — 127) |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
(0 — 77) |  
OFF, |  
|
OSC1—PENV—ATK, OSC1—PENV—DCY, OSC1—PENV—REL, |  
OSC1—TENV—ATK, OSC1—TENV—DCY, OSC1—TENV—REL, |  
OSC1—FENV—ATK, OSC1—FENV—DCY, OSC1—FENV—REL, |  
OSC1—AENV—ATK, OSC1—AENV—DCY, OSC1—AENV—REL, |  
OSC1—LFO—RATE, OSC1—LFO—PCH, OSC1—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC1—LFO—FR/FT, OSC1—LFO—LVL, |  
00 61 | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 5 Dest 2  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OSC1—PITCH, OSC1—TIME/PW, OSC1—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC1—LVL, |  
OSC1—PENV—ATK, OSC1—PENV—DCY, OSC1—PENV—REL, |  
OSC1—TENV—ATK, OSC1—TENV—DCY, OSC1—TENV—REL, |  
OSC1—FENV—ATK, OSC1—FENV—DCY, OSC1—FENV—REL, |  
OSC2—PITCH, OSC2—TIME/PW, OSC2—FORMA/FAT, |  
1 6 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OSC1—AENV—ATK, OSC1—AENV—DCY, OSC1—AENV—REL, |  
OSC1—LFO—RATE, OSC1—LFO—PCH, OSC1—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC1—LFO—FR/FT, OSC1—LFO—LVL, |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OSC1—LVL, |  
OSC1—PENV—ATK, OSC1—PENV—DCY, OSC1—PENV—REL, |  
OSC1—TENV—ATK, OSC1—TENV—DCY, OSC1—TENV—REL, |  
OSC1—FENV—ATK, OSC1—FENV—DCY, OSC1—FENV—REL, |  
OSC1—AENV—ATK, OSC1—AENV—DCY, OSC1—AENV—REL, |  
OSC1—LFO—RATE, OSC1—LFO—PCH, OSC1—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC1—LFO—FR/FT, OSC1—LFO—LVL, |  
OSC2—PITCH, OSC2—TIME/PW, OSC2—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC2—LVL, |  
OSC2—PENV—ATK, OSC2—PENV—DCY, OSC2—PENV—REL, |  
OSC2—TENV—ATK, OSC2—TENV—DCY, OSC2—TENV—REL, |  
OSC2—FENV—ATK, OSC2—FENV—DCY, OSC2—FENV—REL, |  
OSC2—AENV—ATK, OSC2—AENV—DCY, OSC2—AENV—REL, |  
OSC2—LFO—RATE, OSC2—LFO—PCH, OSC2—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC2—LFO—FR/FT, OSC2—LFO—LVL, |  
OSC2—PITCH, OSC2—TIME/PW, OSC2—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC2—LVL, |  
OSC2—PENV—ATK, OSC2—PENV—DCY, OSC2—PENV—REL, |  
OSC2—TENV—ATK, OSC2—TENV—DCY, OSC2—TENV—REL, |  
OSC2—FENV—ATK, OSC2—FENV—DCY, OSC2—FENV—REL, |  
OSC2—AENV—ATK, OSC2—AENV—DCY, OSC2—AENV—REL, |  
OSC2—LFO—RATE, OSC2—LFO—PCH, OSC2—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC2—LFO—FR/FT, OSC2—LFO—LVL, |  
CSM1—PRM1, CSM1—PRM2, |  
CSM1—ENV1—ATK, CSM1—ENV1—DCY, CSM1—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM1—ENV2—ATK, CSM1—ENV2—DCY, CSM1—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM1—LFO—RATE, CSM1—LFO—PRM1, CSM1—LFO—PRM2, |  
CSM2—PRM1, CSM2—PRM2, |  
CSM1—PRM1, CSM1—PRM2, |  
CSM2—ENV1—ATK, CSM2—ENV1—DCY, CSM2—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM2—ENV2—ATK, CSM2—ENV2—DCY, CSM2—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM2—LFO—RATE, CSM2—LFO—PRM1, CSM2—LFO—PRM2, |  
TVA—LVL, |  
CSM1—ENV1—ATK, CSM1—ENV1—DCY, CSM1—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM1—ENV2—ATK, CSM1—ENV2—DCY, CSM1—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM1—LFO—RATE, CSM1—LFO—PRM1, CSM1—LFO—PRM2, |  
CSM2—PRM1, CSM2—PRM2, |  
TVA—ENV—ATK, TVA—ENV—DCY, TVA—ENV—REL, |  
TVA—LFO—RATE, TVA—LFO—LVL, TVA—LFO—PAN, |  
MFX—SEND, CHO—SEND, REV—SEND, |  
CSM2—ENV1—ATK, CSM2—ENV1—DCY, CSM2—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM2—ENV2—ATK, CSM2—ENV2—DCY, CSM2—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM2—LFO—RATE, CSM2—LFO—PRM1, CSM2—LFO—PRM2, |  
TVA—LVL, |  
MFX—PRM1, MFX—PRM2, MFX—PRM3  
|
00 62 | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 5 Sens 2  
(1 — 127) |  
TVA—ENV—ATK, TVA—ENV—DCY, TVA—ENV—REL, |  
TVA—LFO—RATE, TVA—LFO—LVL, TVA—LFO—PAN, |  
MFX—SEND, CHO—SEND, REV—SEND, |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 63 | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 6 Source  
(0 — 108) |  
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95, BEND, AFT, |  
+PAD—X, +PAD—Y, PAD—X, PAD—Y, TRIP—R, |  
MFX—PRM1, MFX—PRM2, MFX—PRM3  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 6C | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 7 Sens 2  
(1 — 127) |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
BEAM—L, BEAM—R, KNOB1, KNOB2, VELO, KEYF  
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
00 64 | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 6 Dest 1  
(0 — 77) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 6D | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 8 Source  
(0 — 108) |  
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95, BEND, AFT, |  
+PAD—X, +PAD—Y, PAD—X, PAD—Y, TRIP—R, |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OFF, |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
OSC1—PITCH, OSC1—TIME/PW, OSC1—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC1—LVL, |  
BEAM—L, BEAM—R, KNOB1, KNOB2, VELO, KEYF  
|
OSC1—PENV—ATK, OSC1—PENV—DCY, OSC1—PENV—REL, |  
OSC1—TENV—ATK, OSC1—TENV—DCY, OSC1—TENV—REL, |  
OSC1—FENV—ATK, OSC1—FENV—DCY, OSC1—FENV—REL, |  
OSC1—AENV—ATK, OSC1—AENV—DCY, OSC1—AENV—REL, |  
OSC1—LFO—RATE, OSC1—LFO—PCH, OSC1—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC1—LFO—FR/FT, OSC1—LFO—LVL, |  
00 6E | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 8 Dest 1  
(0 — 77) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OFF, |  
OSC1—PITCH, OSC1—TIME/PW, OSC1—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC1—LVL, |  
OSC1—PENV—ATK, OSC1—PENV—DCY, OSC1—PENV—REL, |  
OSC1—TENV—ATK, OSC1—TENV—DCY, OSC1—TENV—REL, |  
OSC1—FENV—ATK, OSC1—FENV—DCY, OSC1—FENV—REL, |  
OSC1—AENV—ATK, OSC1—AENV—DCY, OSC1—AENV—REL, |  
OSC1—LFO—RATE, OSC1—LFO—PCH, OSC1—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC1—LFO—FR/FT, OSC1—LFO—LVL, |  
OSC2—PITCH, OSC2—TIME/PW, OSC2—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC2—LVL, |  
OSC2—PENV—ATK, OSC2—PENV—DCY, OSC2—PENV—REL, |  
OSC2—TENV—ATK, OSC2—TENV—DCY, OSC2—TENV—REL, |  
OSC2—FENV—ATK, OSC2—FENV—DCY, OSC2—FENV—REL, |  
OSC2—AENV—ATK, OSC2—AENV—DCY, OSC2—AENV—REL, |  
OSC2—LFO—RATE, OSC2—LFO—PCH, OSC2—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC2—LFO—FR/FT, OSC2—LFO—LVL, |  
OSC2—PITCH, OSC2—TIME/PW, OSC2—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC2—LVL, |  
OSC2—PENV—ATK, OSC2—PENV—DCY, OSC2—PENV—REL, |  
OSC2—TENV—ATK, OSC2—TENV—DCY, OSC2—TENV—REL, |  
OSC2—FENV—ATK, OSC2—FENV—DCY, OSC2—FENV—REL, |  
OSC2—AENV—ATK, OSC2—AENV—DCY, OSC2—AENV—REL, |  
OSC2—LFO—RATE, OSC2—LFO—PCH, OSC2—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC2—LFO—FR/FT, OSC2—LFO—LVL, |  
CSM1—PRM1, CSM1—PRM2, |  
CSM1—ENV1—ATK, CSM1—ENV1—DCY, CSM1—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM1—ENV2—ATK, CSM1—ENV2—DCY, CSM1—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM1—LFO—RATE, CSM1—LFO—PRM1, CSM1—LFO—PRM2, |  
CSM2—PRM1, CSM2—PRM2, |  
CSM1—PRM1, CSM1—PRM2, |  
CSM2—ENV1—ATK, CSM2—ENV1—DCY, CSM2—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM2—ENV2—ATK, CSM2—ENV2—DCY, CSM2—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM2—LFO—RATE, CSM2—LFO—PRM1, CSM2—LFO—PRM2, |  
TVA—LVL, |  
CSM1—ENV1—ATK, CSM1—ENV1—DCY, CSM1—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM1—ENV2—ATK, CSM1—ENV2—DCY, CSM1—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM1—LFO—RATE, CSM1—LFO—PRM1, CSM1—LFO—PRM2, |  
CSM2—PRM1, CSM2—PRM2, |  
TVA—ENV—ATK, TVA—ENV—DCY, TVA—ENV—REL, |  
TVA—LFO—RATE, TVA—LFO—LVL, TVA—LFO—PAN, |  
MFX—SEND, CHO—SEND, REV—SEND, |  
CSM2—ENV1—ATK, CSM2—ENV1—DCY, CSM2—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM2—ENV2—ATK, CSM2—ENV2—DCY, CSM2—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM2—LFO—RATE, CSM2—LFO—PRM1, CSM2—LFO—PRM2, |  
TVA—LVL, |  
MFX—PRM1, MFX—PRM2, MFX—PRM3  
|
00 65 | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 6 Sens 1  
(1 — 127) |  
TVA—ENV—ATK, TVA—ENV—DCY, TVA—ENV—REL, |  
TVA—LFO—RATE, TVA—LFO—LVL, TVA—LFO—PAN, |  
MFX—SEND, CHO—SEND, REV—SEND, |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
(0 — 77) |  
OFF, |  
|
00 66 | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 6 Dest 2  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
MFX—PRM1, MFX—PRM2, MFX—PRM3  
|
OSC1—PITCH, OSC1—TIME/PW, OSC1—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC1—LVL, |  
00 6F | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 8 Sens 1  
(1 — 127) |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
(0 — 77) |  
OFF, |  
|
OSC1—PENV—ATK, OSC1—PENV—DCY, OSC1—PENV—REL, |  
OSC1—TENV—ATK, OSC1—TENV—DCY, OSC1—TENV—REL, |  
OSC1—FENV—ATK, OSC1—FENV—DCY, OSC1—FENV—REL, |  
OSC1—AENV—ATK, OSC1—AENV—DCY, OSC1—AENV—REL, |  
OSC1—LFO—RATE, OSC1—LFO—PCH, OSC1—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC1—LFO—FR/FT, OSC1—LFO—LVL, |  
00 70 | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 8 Dest 2  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OSC1—PITCH, OSC1—TIME/PW, OSC1—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC1—LVL, |  
OSC1—PENV—ATK, OSC1—PENV—DCY, OSC1—PENV—REL, |  
OSC1—TENV—ATK, OSC1—TENV—DCY, OSC1—TENV—REL, |  
OSC1—FENV—ATK, OSC1—FENV—DCY, OSC1—FENV—REL, |  
OSC1—AENV—ATK, OSC1—AENV—DCY, OSC1—AENV—REL, |  
OSC1—LFO—RATE, OSC1—LFO—PCH, OSC1—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC1—LFO—FR/FT, OSC1—LFO—LVL, |  
OSC2—PITCH, OSC2—TIME/PW, OSC2—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC2—LVL, |  
OSC2—PENV—ATK, OSC2—PENV—DCY, OSC2—PENV—REL, |  
OSC2—TENV—ATK, OSC2—TENV—DCY, OSC2—TENV—REL, |  
OSC2—FENV—ATK, OSC2—FENV—DCY, OSC2—FENV—REL, |  
OSC2—AENV—ATK, OSC2—AENV—DCY, OSC2—AENV—REL, |  
OSC2—LFO—RATE, OSC2—LFO—PCH, OSC2—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC2—LFO—FR/FT, OSC2—LFO—LVL, |  
OSC2—PITCH, OSC2—TIME/PW, OSC2—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC2—LVL, |  
OSC2—PENV—ATK, OSC2—PENV—DCY, OSC2—PENV—REL, |  
OSC2—TENV—ATK, OSC2—TENV—DCY, OSC2—TENV—REL, |  
OSC2—FENV—ATK, OSC2—FENV—DCY, OSC2—FENV—REL, |  
OSC2—AENV—ATK, OSC2—AENV—DCY, OSC2—AENV—REL, |  
OSC2—LFO—RATE, OSC2—LFO—PCH, OSC2—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC2—LFO—FR/FT, OSC2—LFO—LVL, |  
CSM1—PRM1, CSM1—PRM2, |  
CSM1—ENV1—ATK, CSM1—ENV1—DCY, CSM1—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM1—ENV2—ATK, CSM1—ENV2—DCY, CSM1—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM1—LFO—RATE, CSM1—LFO—PRM1, CSM1—LFO—PRM2, |  
CSM2—PRM1, CSM2—PRM2, |  
CSM1—PRM1, CSM1—PRM2, |  
CSM2—ENV1—ATK, CSM2—ENV1—DCY, CSM2—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM2—ENV2—ATK, CSM2—ENV2—DCY, CSM2—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM2—LFO—RATE, CSM2—LFO—PRM1, CSM2—LFO—PRM2, |  
TVA—LVL, |  
CSM1—ENV1—ATK, CSM1—ENV1—DCY, CSM1—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM1—ENV2—ATK, CSM1—ENV2—DCY, CSM1—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM1—LFO—RATE, CSM1—LFO—PRM1, CSM1—LFO—PRM2, |  
CSM2—PRM1, CSM2—PRM2, |  
TVA—ENV—ATK, TVA—ENV—DCY, TVA—ENV—REL, |  
TVA—LFO—RATE, TVA—LFO—LVL, TVA—LFO—PAN, |  
MFX—SEND, CHO—SEND, REV—SEND, |  
CSM2—ENV1—ATK, CSM2—ENV1—DCY, CSM2—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM2—ENV2—ATK, CSM2—ENV2—DCY, CSM2—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM2—LFO—RATE, CSM2—LFO—PRM1, CSM2—LFO—PRM2, |  
TVA—LVL, |  
MFX—PRM1, MFX—PRM2, MFX—PRM3  
|
00 67 | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 6 Sens 2  
(1 — 127) |  
TVA—ENV—ATK, TVA—ENV—DCY, TVA—ENV—REL, |  
TVA—LFO—RATE, TVA—LFO—LVL, TVA—LFO—PAN, |  
MFX—SEND, CHO—SEND, REV—SEND, |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 68 | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 7 Source  
(0 — 108) |  
OFF, CC01 — CC31, CC33 — CC95, BEND, AFT, |  
+PAD—X, +PAD—Y, PAD—X, PAD—Y, TRIP—R, |  
MFX—PRM1, MFX—PRM2, MFX—PRM3  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 71 | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 8 Sens 2  
(1 — 127) |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
BEAM—L, BEAM—R, KNOB1, KNOB2, VELO, KEYF  
|
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
00 69 | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 7 Dest 1  
(0 — 77) |  
| 00 00 00 72 | Total Size  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OFF, |  
OSC1—PITCH, OSC1—TIME/PW, OSC1—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC1—LVL, |  
OSC1—PENV—ATK, OSC1—PENV—DCY, OSC1—PENV—REL, |  
OSC1—TENV—ATK, OSC1—TENV—DCY, OSC1—TENV—REL, |  
OSC1—FENV—ATK, OSC1—FENV—DCY, OSC1—FENV—REL, |  
OSC1—AENV—ATK, OSC1—AENV—DCY, OSC1—AENV—REL, |  
OSC1—LFO—RATE, OSC1—LFO—PCH, OSC1—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC1—LFO—FR/FT, OSC1—LFO—LVL, |  
Patch MFX  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
| Offset  
|
|
|
|
Address |  
Description  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|
|
00 00 | 0aaa aaaa | MFX Type  
(0 — 41) |  
|
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
OSC2—PITCH, OSC2—TIME/PW, OSC2—FORMA/FAT, |  
OSC2—LVL, |  
|
|
00 01 | 0aaa aaaa | MFX Master Level  
00 02 | 0aaa aaaa | MFX Chorus Send Level  
00 03 | 0aaa aaaa | MFX Reverb Send Level  
OSC2—PENV—ATK, OSC2—PENV—DCY, OSC2—PENV—REL, |  
OSC2—TENV—ATK, OSC2—TENV—DCY, OSC2—TENV—REL, |  
OSC2—FENV—ATK, OSC2—FENV—DCY, OSC2—FENV—REL, |  
OSC2—AENV—ATK, OSC2—AENV—DCY, OSC2—AENV—REL, |  
OSC2—LFO—RATE, OSC2—LFO—PCH, OSC2—LFO—TM/PW, |  
OSC2—LFO—FR/FT, OSC2—LFO—LVL, |  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|#  
|
00 04 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
CSM1—PRM1, CSM1—PRM2, |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 1  
(12768 — 52768) |  
CSM1—ENV1—ATK, CSM1—ENV1—DCY, CSM1—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM1—ENV2—ATK, CSM1—ENV2—DCY, CSM1—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM1—LFO—RATE, CSM1—LFO—PRM1, CSM1—LFO—PRM2, |  
CSM2—PRM1, CSM2—PRM2, |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|#  
|
00 08 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
CSM2—ENV1—ATK, CSM2—ENV1—DCY, CSM2—ENV1—REL, |  
CSM2—ENV2—ATK, CSM2—ENV2—DCY, CSM2—ENV2—REL, |  
CSM2—LFO—RATE, CSM2—LFO—PRM1, CSM2—LFO—PRM2, |  
TVA—LVL, |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 2  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|#  
|
00 0C | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
TVA—ENV—ATK, TVA—ENV—DCY, TVA—ENV—REL, |  
TVA—LFO—RATE, TVA—LFO—LVL, TVA—LFO—PAN, |  
MFX—SEND, CHO—SEND, REV—SEND, |  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 3  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
MFX—PRM1, MFX—PRM2, MFX—PRM3  
|
|#  
|
00 10 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
00 6A | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 7 Sens 1  
(1 — 127) |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
(0 — 77) |  
OFF, |  
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
00 6B | 0aaa aaaa | Matrix Control 7 Dest 2  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 4  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000 |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OSC1—PITCH, OSC1—TIME/PW, OSC1—FORMA/FAT, |  
1 6 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n  
|#  
|
00 14 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
|
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 32  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000 |  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 5  
(12768 — 52768) |  
| 00 00 01 04 | Total Size  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|#  
|
00 18 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
Patch Chorus  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 6  
(12768 — 52768) |  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
| Offset  
|
|
|
|#  
|
00 1C | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
Address |  
Description  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|
|
|
|
00 00 | 0000 aaaa | Chorus Type  
(0 — 8) |  
|
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 7  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
00 01 | 0aaa aaaa | Chorus Master Level  
|#  
|
00 20 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
00 02 | 0aaa aaaa | Chorus Reverb Send Level  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 03 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
|
|
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 8  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 24 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Chorus Parameter 1  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 07 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 9  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 28 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Chorus Parameter 2  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 0B | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 10  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 2C | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Chorus Parameter 3  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 0F | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 11  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 30 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Chorus Parameter 4  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 13 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 12  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 34 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Chorus Parameter 5  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 17 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 13  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 38 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Chorus Parameter 6  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 1B | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 14  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 3C | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Chorus Parameter 7  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 1F | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 15  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 40 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Chorus Parameter 8  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 23 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 16  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 44 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Chorus Parameter 9  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 27 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 17  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 48 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Chorus Parameter 10  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 2B | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 18  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 4C | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Chorus Parameter 11  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 2F | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 19  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 50 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
| 0000 dddd | Chorus Parameter 12  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000 |  
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 20  
(12768 — 52768) |  
| 00 00 00 33 | Total Size  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|#  
|
00 54 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
Patch Reverb  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 21  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|#  
|
00 58 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
| Offset  
|
|
|
|
Address |  
Description  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 22  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
00 00 | 0000 aaaa | Reverb Type  
(0 — 10) |  
|
(0 — 127) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|#  
|
00 5C | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
00 01 | 0aaa aaaa | Reverb Master Level  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 02 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
|
|
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 23  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 60 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 1  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 06 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 24  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 64 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 2  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 0A | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 25  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 68 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 3  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 0E | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 26  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 6C | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 4  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 12 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 27  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 70 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 5  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 16 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 28  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 74 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 6  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 1A | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 29  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 78 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 7  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 1E | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 30  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 7C | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 8  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
|
00 22 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 dddd | MFX Parameter 31  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 9  
|#  
|
01 00 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|#  
00 26 | 0000 aaaa |  
1 6 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n  
|
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
90, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, |  
600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1100, |  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 10  
(12768 — 52768) |  
1200  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
00 1B | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 1 Level  
(0 — 127) |  
(44 — 84) |  
|#  
|
00 2A | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
00 1C | 00aa aaaa | OSC 1 Level Keyfollow  
|
|
—200 — +200  
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
00 1D | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 1 Level LFO Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 11  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|#  
|
00 2E | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 1E | 0000 aaaa | OSC 1 Analog Waveform  
(0 — 8) |  
SAW, SQUARE, TRIANGLE, SINE, RAMP, JUNO, |  
HQ—SAW, HQ—SQUARE, NOISE  
(0 — 40) |  
0.0 — 4.0  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63 |  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 12  
(12768 — 52768) |  
00 1F | 00aa aaaa | OSC 1 Impact  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|#  
|
00 32 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
00 20 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 1 Pulse Width  
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
00 21 | 00aa aaaa | OSC 1 Pulse Width Keyfollow  
(44 — 84) |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 13  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
—200 — +200  
|
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
00 22 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 1 Pulse Width LFO Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
|#  
|
00 36 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
00 23 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 1 Pulse Width Envelope Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 14  
(12768 — 52768) |  
00 24 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 1 Fat  
(0 — 127) |  
(44 — 84) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
00 25 | 00aa aaaa | OSC 1 Fat Keyfollow  
|#  
|
00 3A | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
|
—200 — +200  
|
00 26 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 1 Fat LFO Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 15  
(12768 — 52768) |  
00 27 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 1 Fat Envelope Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63 |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|#  
|
00 3E | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|#  
|
|
|
|
|#  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 28 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 16  
(12768 — 52768) |  
| 0000 cccc |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
| 0000 dddd | OSC 1 Wave Number  
(0 — 999) |  
|#  
|
00 42 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
|
OFF, 1 — 999  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 2C | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
| 0000 cccc |  
| 0000 dddd |  
| 0000 eeee |  
| 0000 ffff |  
| 0000 gggg |  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 17  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|#  
|
00 46 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 18  
(12768 — 52768) |  
| 0000 hhhh | OSC 1 Start Offset  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
0000000h - FFFFFFFh  
|#  
|
00 4A | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
00 34 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 1 Time  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63 |  
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
00 35 | 00aa aaaa | OSC 1 Time Keyfollow  
(44 — 84) |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 19  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
—200 — +200  
|
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
00 36 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 1 Time LFO Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
|#  
|
00 4E | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
00 37 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 1 Time Envelope Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63 |  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|
|
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 20  
(12768 — 52768) |  
00 38 | 0000 00aa | OSC 1 Time Offset  
(0 — 2) |  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
BWD, ZERO, FWD  
|
|#  
|
00 52 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
00 39 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 1 Formant  
(1 — 127) |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
00 3A | 00aa aaaa | OSC 1 Formant Keyfollow  
(44 — 84) |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 21  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
—200 — +200  
|
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
00 3B | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 1 Formant LFO Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
|#  
|
00 56 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
00 3C | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 1 Formant Envelope Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON |  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|
|
|
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 22  
(12768 — 52768) |  
00 3D | 0000 000a | OSC 1 Tempo Sync Sw  
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|#  
|
00 5A | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
00 3E | 0000 000a | OSC 1 Robot Voice Sw  
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
00 3F | 0000 00aa | OSC 1 Playback Mode  
(0 — 3) |  
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 23  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
RETRIGGER, LEGATO, STEP, EVENT  
|
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
00 40 | 0000 000a | OSC 1 Loop Sw  
(0 — 1) |  
|#  
|
00 5E | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
|
OFF, ON  
|
00 41 | 0000 000a | OSC 1 Vari Sw  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON |  
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|
|
| 0000 dddd | Reverb Parameter 24  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
00 42 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 1 Energy  
(0 — 127) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
OFF, 1 - 127  
|
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
00 43 | 0000 000a | OSC 1 Time Trip Sw  
(0 — 1) |  
| 00 00 00 62 | Total Size  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|
|
|
OFF, ON  
|
00 44 | 0000 000a | OSC 1 Time Trip Beat Keep  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
00 45 | 0000 000a | OSC 2 Switch (0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Patch Oscillator  
|
|
|
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
| Offset  
00 46 | 0000 00aa | OSC 2 Type  
(0 — 2) |  
|
|
|
|
|
ANALOG, PCM, EXTIN  
|
|
Address |  
Description  
00 47 | 000a aaaa | OSC 2 Wave Gain  
(52 — 76) |  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
—12 — +12 [dB]  
|
|
|
00 00 | 0000 00aa | Structure Type  
(0 — 2) |  
1 — 3 |  
00 48 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 2 Pitch  
(1 — 127) |  
|
|
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
00 49 | 00aa aaaa | OSC 2 Pitch Keyfollow  
(44 — 84) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 01 | 0000 000a | MOD Switch  
(0 — 1) |  
|
|
—200 — +200  
|
|
|
OFF, ON  
|
00 4A | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 2 Pitch LFO Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
00 02 | 0000 0aaa | MOD Type  
(0 — 4) |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
|
|
|
MIX, RING(AM), FM, ENV RING, |  
00 4B | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 2 Pitch Envelope Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(16 — 112) |  
—48 — +48  
(14 — 114) |  
—50 — +50 [cent]  
(0 — 30) |  
OSC SYNC  
|
|
|
|
00 03 | 0aaa aaaa | MOD Original Level  
00 04 | 0aaa aaaa | MOD Attack Time  
00 05 | 0aaa aaaa | MOD Release Time  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
00 4C | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 2 Coarse Tune  
|
|
|
00 4D | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 2 Fine Tune  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 06 | 0000 000a | TVA Switch  
(0 — 1) |  
00 4E | 000a aaaa | OSC 2 Random Pitch Depth  
|
|
OFF, ON  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, |  
10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, |  
90, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, |  
600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1100, |  
00 07 | 0aaa aaaa | TVA Level  
(0 — 127) |  
(44 — 84) |  
00 08 | 00aa aaaa | TVA Level Keyfollow  
|
|
—200 — +200  
|
00 09 | 0aaa aaaa | TVA Level LFO Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
1200  
|
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
00 4F | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 2 Level  
(0 — 127) |  
(44 — 84) |  
00 0A | 0aaa aaaa | TVA Pan  
(0 — 127) |  
L64 — 63R |  
00 50 | 00aa aaaa | OSC 2 Level Keyfollow  
|
|
|
|
—200 — +200  
|
00 0B | 00aa aaaa | TVA Pan Keyfollow  
(44 — 84) |  
00 51 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 2 Level LFO Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
|
|
—200 — +200  
|
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
00 0C | 0aaa aaaa | TVA Pan LFO Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 52 | 0000 aaaa | OSC 2 Analog Waveform  
(0 — 8) |  
SAW, SQUARE, TRIANGLE, SINE, RAMP, JUNO, |  
HQ—SAW, HQ—SQUARE, NOISE  
(0 — 40) |  
0.0 — 4.0  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63 |  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 0D | 0aaa aaaa | MFX Send Level  
00 0E | 0aaa aaaa | Chorus Send Level  
00 0F | 0aaa aaaa | Reverb Send Level  
00 10 | 0000 00aa | Output Assign  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 2) |  
|
00 53 | 00aa aaaa | OSC 2 Impact  
|
|
|
00 54 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 2 Pulse Width  
|
|
MULTI, MAIN, DIR  
|
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
00 55 | 00aa aaaa | OSC 2 Pulse Width Keyfollow  
(44 — 84) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 11 | 0000 000a | OSC 1 Switch  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON |  
|
|
—200 — +200  
|
|
|
00 56 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 2 Pulse Width LFO Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
00 12 | 0000 00aa | OSC 1 Type  
(0 — 2) |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
|
ANALOG, PCM, EXTIN  
|
00 57 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 2 Pulse Width Envelope Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
00 13 | 000a aaaa | OSC 1 Wave Gain  
(52 — 76) |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
|
—12 — +12 [dB]  
|
00 58 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 2 Fat  
(0 — 127) |  
(44 — 84) |  
00 14 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 1 Pitch  
(1 — 127) |  
00 59 | 00aa aaaa | OSC 2 Fat Keyfollow  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
|
—200 — +200  
|
00 15 | 00aa aaaa | OSC 1 Pitch Keyfollow  
(44 — 84) |  
00 5A | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 2 Fat LFO Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
|
|
—200 — +200  
|
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
00 16 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 1 Pitch LFO Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
00 5B | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 2 Fat Envelope Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63 |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
|
00 17 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 1 Pitch Envelope Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(16 — 112) |  
—48 — +48  
(14 — 114) |  
—50 — +50 [cent]  
(0 — 30) |  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|#  
|
00 5C | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
|
|
00 18 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 1 Coarse Tune  
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
00 19 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 1 Fine Tune  
|
| 0000 dddd | OSC 2 Wave Number  
(0 — 999) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
OFF, 1 — 999  
|
|
|
|
00 1A | 000a aaaa | OSC 1 Random Pitch Depth  
|#  
|
00 60 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
|
|
|
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, |  
10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, |  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
1 6 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 dddd |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
| 0000 eeee |  
00 33 | 00aa aaaa | Env 4 Time Keyfollow  
(44 — 84) |  
| 0000 ffff |  
| 0000 gggg |  
| 0000 hhhh | OSC 2 Start Offset  
|
|
—200 — +200  
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|#  
|
00 34 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 5 Attack Time  
|
|
|
0000000h - FFFFFFFh  
(0 — 144) |  
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
00 68 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 2 Time  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|#  
|
00 36 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 5 Decay Time  
00 69 | 00aa aaaa | OSC 2 Time Keyfollow  
(44 — 84) |  
(0 — 144) |  
|
|
—200 — +200  
|
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
(0 — 127) |  
|
00 6A | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 2 Time LFO Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
00 38 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 5 Sustine  
00 39 | 0000 aaaa |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|#  
|
00 6B | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 2 Time Envelope Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 5 Release Time  
(0 — 144) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
00 6C | 0000 00aa | OSC 2 Time Offset  
(0 — 2) |  
|
00 3B | 0000 0aaa | Env 5 Velocity Curve  
(0 — 7) |  
|
|
BWD, ZERO, FWD  
|
|
|
|
FIXED, 1 — 7  
|
00 6D | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 2 Formant  
(1 — 127) |  
|
00 3C | 0aaa aaaa | Env 5 Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
00 6E | 00aa aaaa | OSC 2 Formant Keyfollow  
(44 — 84) |  
|
00 3D | 0aaa aaaa | Env 5 Attack Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(44 — 84) |  
—200 — +200 |  
|
|
—200 — +200  
|
|
|
|
|
00 6F | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 2 Formant LFO Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
|
00 3E | 0aaa aaaa | Env 5 Decay Velocity Sens  
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
|
|
|
00 70 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 2 Formant Envelope Depth  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
|
00 3F | 0aaa aaaa | Env 5 Release Velocity Sens  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 71 | 0000 000a | OSC 2 Tempo Sync Sw  
|
00 40 | 00aa aaaa | Env 5 Time Keyfollow  
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 72 | 0000 000a | OSC 2 Robot Voice Sw  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|#  
|
00 41 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 6 Attack Time  
|
00 73 | 0000 00aa | OSC 2 Playback Mode  
(0 — 3) |  
(0 — 144) |  
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
RETRIGGER, LEGATO, STEP, EVENT  
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 74 | 0000 000a | OSC 2 Loop Sw  
(0 — 1) |  
|#  
|
00 43 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 6 Decay Time  
|
|
OFF, ON  
|
(0 — 144) |  
00 75 | 0000 000a | OSC 2 Vari Sw  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
(0 — 127) |  
|
|
|
|
00 45 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 6 Sustine  
00 46 | 0000 aaaa |  
00 76 | 0aaa aaaa | OSC 2 Energy  
(0 — 127) |  
|#  
|
|
|
OFF, 1 - 127  
|
| 0000 bbbb | Env 6 Release Time  
(0 — 144) |  
00 77 | 0000 000a | OSC 2 Time Trip Sw  
(0 — 1) |  
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
|
OFF, ON  
|
|
00 48 | 0000 0aaa | Env 6 Velocity Curve  
(0 — 7) |  
00 78 | 0000 000a | OSC 2 Time Trip Beat Keep  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
FIXED, 1 — 7  
|
|
|
|
|
00 49 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 6 Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
|
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
| 00 00 00 79 | Total Size  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|
|
00 4A | 0aaa aaaa | Env 6 Attack Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(44 — 84) |  
—200 — +200 |  
|
|
|
|
|
00 4B | 0aaa aaaa | Env 6 Decay Velocity Sens  
|
|
|
|
Patch Envelope  
|
00 4C | 0aaa aaaa | Env 6 Release Velocity Sens  
|
|
|
|
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
| Offset  
|
00 4D | 00aa aaaa | Env 6 Time Keyfollow  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Address |  
Description  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|#  
|
00 4E | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 7 Attack Time  
|
|#  
|
00 00 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 1 Attack Time  
|
(0 — 144) |  
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
(0 — 144) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
|#  
|
00 50 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 7 Decay Time  
|#  
|
00 02 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 1 Decay Time  
(0 — 144) |  
(0 — 144) |  
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
(0 — 127) |  
|
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
(0 — 127) |  
|
00 52 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 7 Sustine  
00 53 | 0000 aaaa |  
00 04 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 1 Sustine  
00 05 | 0000 aaaa |  
|#  
|
|#  
|
| 0000 bbbb | Env 7 Release Time  
(0 — 144) |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 1 Release Time  
(0 — 144) |  
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
00 55 | 0000 0aaa | Env 7 Velocity Curve  
(0 — 7) |  
|
00 07 | 0000 0aaa | Env 1 Velocity Curve  
(0 — 7) |  
|
|
|
FIXED, 1 — 7  
|
|
|
|
FIXED, 1 — 7  
|
|
00 56 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 7 Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
|
00 08 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 1 Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
|
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
00 57 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 7 Attack Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(44 — 84) |  
—200 — +200 |  
|
00 09 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 1 Attack Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(44 — 84) |  
—200 — +200 |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 58 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 7 Decay Velocity Sens  
|
00 0A | 0aaa aaaa | Env 1 Decay Velocity Sens  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 59 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 7 Release Velocity Sens  
|
00 0B | 0aaa aaaa | Env 1 Release Velocity Sens  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 5A | 00aa aaaa | Env 7 Time Keyfollow  
|
00 0C | 00aa aaaa | Env 1 Time Keyfollow  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|#  
|
00 5B | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 8 Attack Time  
|
|#  
|
00 0D | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 2 Attack Time  
|
(0 — 144) |  
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
(0 — 144) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
|#  
|
00 5D | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 8 Decay Time  
|#  
|
00 0F | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 2 Decay Time  
(0 — 144) |  
(0 — 144) |  
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
(0 — 127) |  
|
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
(0 — 127) |  
|
00 5F | 0aaa aaaa | Env 8 Sustine  
00 60 | 0000 aaaa |  
00 11 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 2 Sustine  
00 12 | 0000 aaaa |  
|#  
|
|#  
|
| 0000 bbbb | Env 8 Release Time  
(0 — 144) |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 2 Release Time  
(0 — 144) |  
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
00 62 | 0000 0aaa | Env 8 Velocity Curve  
(0 — 7) |  
|
00 14 | 0000 0aaa | Env 2 Velocity Curve  
(0 — 7) |  
|
|
|
FIXED, 1 — 7  
|
|
|
|
FIXED, 1 — 7  
|
|
00 63 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 8 Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
|
00 15 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 2 Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
|
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
00 64 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 8 Attack Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(44 — 84) |  
—200 — +200 |  
|
00 16 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 2 Attack Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(44 — 84) |  
—200 — +200 |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 65 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 8 Decay Velocity Sens  
|
00 17 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 2 Decay Velocity Sens  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 66 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 8 Release Velocity Sens  
|
00 18 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 2 Release Velocity Sens  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 67 | 00aa aaaa | Env 8 Time Keyfollow  
|
00 19 | 00aa aaaa | Env 2 Time Keyfollow  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|#  
|
00 68 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 9 Attack Time  
|
|#  
|
00 1A | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 3 Attack Time  
|
(0 — 144) |  
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
(0 — 144) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
|#  
|
00 6A | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 9 Decay Time  
|#  
|
00 1C | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 3 Decay Time  
(0 — 144) |  
(0 — 144) |  
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
(0 — 127) |  
|
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
(0 — 127) |  
|
00 6C | 0aaa aaaa | Env 9 Sustine  
00 6D | 0000 aaaa |  
00 1E | 0aaa aaaa | Env 3 Sustine  
00 1F | 0000 aaaa |  
|#  
|
|#  
|
| 0000 bbbb | Env 9 Release Time  
(0 — 144) |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 3 Release Time  
(0 — 144) |  
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
00 6F | 0000 0aaa | Env 9 Velocity Curve  
(0 — 7) |  
|
00 21 | 0000 0aaa | Env 3 Velocity Curve  
(0 — 7) |  
|
|
|
FIXED, 1 — 7  
|
|
|
|
FIXED, 1 — 7  
|
|
00 70 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 9 Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
|
00 22 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 3 Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
|
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
00 71 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 9 Attack Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(44 — 84) |  
—200 — +200 |  
|
00 23 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 3 Attack Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(44 — 84) |  
—200 — +200 |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 72 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 9 Decay Velocity Sens  
|
00 24 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 3 Decay Velocity Sens  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 73 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 9 Release Velocity Sens  
|
00 25 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 3 Release Velocity Sens  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 74 | 00aa aaaa | Env 9 Time Keyfollow  
|
00 26 | 00aa aaaa | Env 3 Time Keyfollow  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|#  
|
00 75 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 10 Attack Time  
|
|#  
|
00 27 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 4 Attack Time  
|
(0 — 144) |  
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
(0 — 144) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
|#  
|
00 77 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 10 Decay Time  
|#  
|
00 29 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 4 Decay Time  
(0 — 144) |  
(0 — 144) |  
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
(0 — 127) |  
|
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
(0 — 127) |  
|
00 79 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 10 Sustine  
00 7A | 0000 aaaa |  
00 2B | 0aaa aaaa | Env 4 Sustine  
00 2C | 0000 aaaa |  
|#  
|
|#  
|
| 0000 bbbb | Env 10 Release Time  
(0 — 144) |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 4 Release Time  
(0 — 144) |  
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
00 7C | 0000 0aaa | Env 10 Velocity Curve  
(0 — 7) |  
|
00 2E | 0000 0aaa | Env 4 Velocity Curve  
(0 — 7) |  
|
|
|
FIXED, 1 — 7  
|
|
|
|
FIXED, 1 — 7  
|
|
00 7D | 0aaa aaaa | Env 10 Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
|
00 2F | 0aaa aaaa | Env 4 Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
|
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
00 7E | 0aaa aaaa | Env 10 Attack Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
|
00 30 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 4 Attack Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 7F | 0aaa aaaa | Env 10 Decay Velocity Sens  
|
00 31 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 4 Decay Velocity Sens  
|
|
|
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
01 00 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 10 Release Velocity Sens  
|
00 32 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 4 Release Velocity Sens  
1 6 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n  
|
|
|
|
|
—63 — +63  
(44 — 84) |  
—200 — +200  
|
|
|
|
00 16 | 0aaa aaaa | LFO 3 Fade Time  
00 17 | 0000 000a | LFO 3 Key Sync  
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 1) |  
01 01 | 00aa aaaa | Env 10 Time Keyfollow  
|
|
|
|
|
OFF, ON  
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|#  
|
01 02 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 11 Attack Time  
|
|
|
|
|#  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 18 | 0000 0aaa | LFO 4 Waveform  
(0 — 7) |  
SIN, TRI, SAW, SQR, RND, TRP, |  
(0 — 144) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
S&H, CHS  
|
|
|#  
|
01 04 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 11 Decay Time  
00 19 | 0000 aaaa |  
(0 — 144) |  
| 0000 bbbb | LFO 4 Rate  
(0 — 144) |  
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
(0 — 127) |  
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
01 06 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 11 Sustine  
01 07 | 0000 aaaa |  
00 1B | 0000 0aaa | LFO 4 Offset  
(0 — 4) |  
|#  
|
|
|
—100, —50, 0, +50, +100  
|
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 3) |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 11 Release Time  
(0 — 144) |  
00 1C | 0aaa aaaa | LFO 4 Delay Time  
00 1D | 0000 00aa | LFO 4 Fade Mode  
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
01 09 | 0000 0aaa | Env 11 Velocity Curve  
(0 — 7) |  
|
|
ON—IN, ON—OUT, OFF—IN, OFF—OUT  
|
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 1) |  
|
|
|
FIXED, 1 — 7  
|
00 1E | 0aaa aaaa | LFO 4 Fade Time  
00 1F | 0000 000a | LFO 4 Key Sync  
|
01 0A | 0aaa aaaa | Env 11 Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
|
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
|
OFF, ON  
|
|
01 0B | 0aaa aaaa | Env 11 Attack Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(44 — 84) |  
—200 — +200  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|#  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 20 | 0000 0aaa | LFO 5 Waveform  
(0 — 7) |  
SIN, TRI, SAW, SQR, RND, TRP, |  
|
01 0C | 0aaa aaaa | Env 11 Decay Velocity Sens  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
S&H, CHS  
|
|
|
01 0D | 0aaa aaaa | Env 11 Release Velocity Sens  
00 21 | 0000 aaaa |  
|
|
|
|
| 0000 bbbb | LFO 5 Rate  
(0 — 144) |  
|
01 0E | 00aa aaaa | Env 11 Time Keyfollow  
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
|
|
|
00 23 | 0000 0aaa | LFO 5 Offset  
(0 — 4) |  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
—100, —50, 0, +50, +100  
|
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 3) |  
|#  
|
01 0F | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 12 Attack Time  
|
00 24 | 0aaa aaaa | LFO 5 Delay Time  
00 25 | 0000 00aa | LFO 5 Fade Mode  
(0 — 144) |  
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
|
|
ON—IN, ON—OUT, OFF—IN, OFF—OUT  
|
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 1) |  
|#  
|
01 11 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 12 Decay Time  
00 26 | 0aaa aaaa | LFO 5 Fade Time  
00 27 | 0000 000a | LFO 5 Key Sync  
(0 — 144) |  
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
(0 — 127) |  
|
|
|
OFF, ON  
|
01 13 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 12 Sustine  
01 14 | 0000 aaaa |  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
| 00 00 00 28 | Total Size  
|#  
|
|
| 0000 bbbb | Env 12 Release Time  
(0 — 144) |  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
+---------------+  
|
01 16 | 0000 0aaa | Env 12 Velocity Curve  
(0 — 7) |  
| LFO 1 | OSC1  
| LFO 2 | OSC2  
|
|
|
|
|
FIXED, 1 — 7  
|
|
01 17 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 12 Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
| LFO 3 | COSM1 |  
| LFO 4 | COMS2 |  
|
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
01 18 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 12 Attack Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(44 — 84) |  
—200 — +200 |  
| LFO 5 | TVA  
+---------------+  
|
|
|
|
|
|
01 19 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 12 Decay Velocity Sens  
|
|
|
|
Patch COSM  
|
01 1A | 0aaa aaaa | Env 12 Release Velocity Sens  
|
|
|
|
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|
01 1B | 00aa aaaa | Env 12 Time Keyfollow  
| Offset  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Address |  
Description  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|#  
|
01 1C | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 13 Attack Time  
|
|
|
|
|
00 00 | 0000 000a | COSM Switch  
(0 — 1) |  
(0 — 144) |  
|
|
BYPASS, ON  
|
(0 — 15) |  
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
00 01 | 0000 aaaa | COSM Type  
|#  
|
01 1E | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 13 Decay Time  
|
|
(0 — 144) |  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
(0 — 127) |  
|
|#  
|
00 02 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
|
|
01 20 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 13 Sustine  
01 21 | 0000 aaaa |  
|#  
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
| 0000 bbbb | Env 13 Release Time  
(0 — 144) |  
|
| 0000 dddd | COSM Parameter 1  
(12768 — 52768) |  
|
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
|
|
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
01 23 | 0000 0aaa | Env 13 Velocity Curve  
(0 — 7) |  
|#  
|
00 06 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
|
|
FIXED, 1 — 7  
|
|
01 24 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 13 Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|
|
|
—63 — +63  
|
|
| 0000 dddd | COSM Parameter 2  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
01 25 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 13 Attack Velocity Sens  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(1 — 127) |  
—63 — +63  
(44 — 84) |  
—200 — +200 |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|#  
|
00 0A | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
01 26 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 13 Decay Velocity Sens  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|
01 27 | 0aaa aaaa | Env 13 Release Velocity Sens  
|
| 0000 dddd | COSM Parameter 3  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
01 28 | 00aa aaaa | Env 13 Time Keyfollow  
|#  
|
00 0E | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
|
|
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
| 00 00 01 29 | Total Size  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|
|
| 0000 dddd | COSM Parameter 4  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+--------------------------------+  
|#  
|
00 12 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
| ENV 1 | OSC1 Pitch  
|
| ENV 2 | OSC1 Time/Pulse Width |  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
| ENV 3 | OSC1 Formant/Fat  
| ENV 4 | OSC1 Level  
| ENV 5 | OSC2 Pitch  
|
|
|
|
| 0000 dddd | COSM Parameter 5  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|#  
|
00 16 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
| ENV 6 | OSC2 Time/Pulse Width |  
| ENV 7 | OSC2 Formant/Fat  
| ENV 8 | OSC2 Level  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|
| 0000 dddd | COSM Parameter 6  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
| ENV 9 | COSM1 Parameter 1  
| ENV 10 | COSM1 Parameter 2  
| ENV 11 | COSM2 Parameter 1  
| ENV 12 | COSM2 Parameter 2  
| ENV 13 | TVA Level  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|#  
|
00 1A | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|
| 0000 dddd | COSM Parameter 7  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
+--------------------------------+  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|#  
|
00 1E | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
Patch LFO  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|
| 0000 dddd | COSM Parameter 8  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
| Offset  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Address |  
Description  
|#  
|
00 22 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|#  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 00 | 0000 0aaa | LFO 1 Waveform  
(0 — 7) |  
SIN, TRI, SAW, SQR, RND, TRP, |  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 dddd | COSM Parameter 9  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
S&H, CHS  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 01 | 0000 aaaa |  
|#  
|
00 26 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
| 0000 bbbb | LFO 1 Rate  
(0 — 144) |  
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
00 03 | 0000 0aaa | LFO 1 Offset  
(0 — 4) |  
|
| 0000 dddd | COSM Parameter 10  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
—100, —50, 0, +50, +100  
|
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 3) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 04 | 0aaa aaaa | LFO 1 Delay Time  
00 05 | 0000 00aa | LFO 1 Fade Mode  
|#  
|
00 2A | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
|
ON—IN, ON—OUT, OFF—IN, OFF—OUT  
|
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 1) |  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
00 06 | 0aaa aaaa | LFO 1 Fade Time  
00 07 | 0000 000a | LFO 1 Key Sync  
|
| 0000 dddd | COSM Parameter 11  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OFF, ON  
|
|#  
|
00 2E | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|#  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 08 | 0000 0aaa | LFO 2 Waveform  
(0 — 7) |  
SIN, TRI, SAW, SQR, RND, TRP, |  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 dddd | COSM Parameter 12  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
S&H, CHS  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 09 | 0000 aaaa |  
|#  
|
00 32 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
| 0000 bbbb | LFO 2 Rate  
(0 — 144) |  
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
00 0B | 0000 0aaa | LFO 2 Offset  
(0 — 4) |  
|
| 0000 dddd | COSM Parameter 13  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
—100, —50, 0, +50, +100  
|
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 3) |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 0C | 0aaa aaaa | LFO 2 Delay Time  
00 0D | 0000 00aa | LFO 2 Fade Mode  
|#  
|
00 36 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|
|
ON—IN, ON—OUT, OFF—IN, OFF—OUT  
|
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 1) |  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
00 0E | 0aaa aaaa | LFO 2 Fade Time  
00 0F | 0000 000a | LFO 2 Key Sync  
|
| 0000 dddd | COSM Parameter 14  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OFF, ON  
|
|#  
|
00 3A | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|#  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 10 | 0000 0aaa | LFO 3 Waveform  
(0 — 7) |  
SIN, TRI, SAW, SQR, RND, TRP, |  
|
| 0000 cccc |  
|
|
|
|
|
| 0000 dddd | COSM Parameter 15  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000  
S&H, CHS  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 11 | 0000 aaaa |  
|#  
|
00 3E | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb |  
| 0000 bbbb | LFO 3 Rate  
(0 — 144) |  
|
|
0 — 127, MUSICAL—NOTES  
|
|
|
| 0000 cccc |  
00 13 | 0000 0aaa | LFO 3 Offset  
(0 — 4) |  
| 0000 dddd | COSM Parameter 16  
(12768 — 52768) |  
—20000 — +20000 |  
|
|
—100, —50, 0, +50, +100  
|
(0 — 127) |  
(0 — 3) |  
|
|
|
00 14 | 0aaa aaaa | LFO 3 Delay Time  
00 15 | 0000 00aa | LFO 3 Fade Mode  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
| 00 00 00 42 | Total Size  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|
|
|
ON—IN, ON—OUT, OFF—IN, OFF—OUT  
|
1 6 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
Patch Controller  
|#  
|
00 3E | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 31 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|
|#  
|
|
|
|
|
| Offset  
|
|
|
00 40 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 32 Velocity  
|
Address |  
Description  
(0 — 128) |  
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 00 | 0000 0aaa | Beam Type  
(0 — 4) |  
OFF, 1 — 4 |  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
| 00 00 00 42 | Total Size  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|
00 01 | 0000 000a | Pad Mode  
(0 — 1) |  
|
|
X—Y, TIME—TRIP  
|
00 02 | 0000 000a | Pad Hold  
(0 — 1) |  
|
|
OFF, ON  
|
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
00 03 | 0000 000a | Arpeggio Switch  
(0 — 1) |  
OFF, ON  
(0 — 1) |  
|
|
|
00 04 | 0000 000a | Arpeggio Hold  
|
|
OFF, ON  
|
00 05 | 0aaa aaaa | Arpeggio Motif  
(0 — 7) |  
|
|
|
|
UP, DOWN, UP&DOWN, RANDOM, |  
NOTE—ORDER, RHYTHM, PHRASE, AUTO  
|
00 06 | 0aaa aaaa | Arpeggio Duration  
(0 — 100) |  
(0 — 100) |  
(0 — 1) |  
00 07 | 0aaa aaaa | Arpeggio Shuffle Rate  
00 08 | 0000 000a | Arpeggio Shuffle Resolution  
|
|
16TH, 8TH  
|
00 09 | 0aaa aaaa | Arpeggio Keyboard Velocity  
(0 — 127) |  
|
|
REAL, 1 — 127  
|
00 0A | 0000 0aaa | Arpeggio Octave Range  
(61 — 67) |  
|
|
—3 — +3  
|
00 0B | 0000 0aaa | Arpeggio Grid  
(0 — 5) |  
|
|
|
|
QUARTER, 8TH, 8TH—T, 16TH, |  
16TH—T, 32TH  
|
00 0C | 000a aaaa | Arpeggio End Point  
(0 — 31) |  
1 — 32 |  
|
|
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
| 00 00 00 0D | Total Size  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
|
Patch Arpeggio  
+——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————+  
| Offset  
|
|
|
|
Address |  
Description  
|—————————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|
|
|
00 00 | 0000 000a | Control Switch  
(0 — 1) |  
|
|
NOTE, CTRL  
|
00 01 | 0aaa aaaa | Control Number  
(0 — 127) |  
|—————————————+———————————+————————————————————————————————————————————————————|  
|#  
|
00 02 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 1 Velocity  
|
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 04 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 2 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 06 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 3 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 08 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 4 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 0A | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 5 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 0C | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 6 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 0E | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 7 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 10 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 8 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 12 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 9 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 14 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 10 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 16 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 11 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 18 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 12 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 1A | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 13 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 1C | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 14 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 1E | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 15 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 20 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 16 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 22 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 17 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 24 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 18 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 26 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 19 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 28 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 20 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 2A | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 21 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 2C | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 22 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 2E | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 23 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 30 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 24 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 32 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 25 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 34 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 26 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 36 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 27 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 38 | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 28 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 3A | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 29 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
|
|
|
REST, 1 — 127, TIE  
|
|
|#  
|
00 3C | 0000 aaaa |  
| 0000 bbbb | Step 30 Velocity  
(0 — 128) |  
1 6 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n  
Examples of Actual MIDI Messages  
4. Supplementary Material  
<Example1> 92 3E 5F  
Decimal and Hexadecimal Table  
(An “H” is appended to the end of numbers in hexadecimal notation.)  
In MIDI documentation, data values and addresses/ sizes of Exclusive messages, etc. are  
expressed as hexadecimal values for each 7 bits.  
9n is the Note-on status, and n is the MIDI channel number. Since 2H = 2, 3EH = 62, and  
5FH = 95, this is a Note-on message with MIDI CH = 3, note number 62 (note name is D4),  
and velocity 95.  
The following table shows how these correspond to decimal numbers.  
<Example2> CE 49  
+——————+——————++——————+——————++——————+——————++——————+——————+  
CnH is the Program Change status, and n is the MIDI channel number. Since EH = 14 and  
49H = 73, this is a Program Change message with MIDI CH = 15, program number 74.  
| D  
| H  
|| D  
| H  
|| D  
| H  
|| D  
| H  
|
+——————+——————++——————+——————++——————+——————++——————+——————+  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0 | 00H ||  
1 | 01H ||  
2 | 02H ||  
3 | 03H ||  
4 | 04H ||  
5 | 05H ||  
6 | 06H ||  
7 | 07H ||  
8 | 08H ||  
9 | 09H ||  
10 | 0AH ||  
11 | 0BH ||  
12 | 0CH ||  
13 | 0DH ||  
14 | 0EH ||  
15 | 0FH ||  
16 | 10H ||  
17 | 11H ||  
18 | 12H ||  
19 | 13H ||  
20 | 14H ||  
21 | 15H ||  
22 | 16H ||  
23 | 17H ||  
24 | 18H ||  
25 | 19H ||  
26 | 1AH ||  
27 | 1BH ||  
28 | 1CH ||  
29 | 1DH ||  
30 | 1EH ||  
31 | 1FH ||  
32 | 20H ||  
33 | 21H ||  
34 | 22H ||  
35 | 23H ||  
36 | 24H ||  
37 | 25H ||  
38 | 26H ||  
39 | 27H ||  
40 | 28H ||  
41 | 29H ||  
42 | 2AH ||  
43 | 2BH ||  
44 | 2CH ||  
45 | 2DH ||  
46 | 2EH ||  
47 | 2FH ||  
48 | 30H ||  
49 | 31H ||  
50 | 32H ||  
51 | 33H ||  
52 | 34H ||  
53 | 35H ||  
54 | 36H ||  
55 | 37H ||  
56 | 38H ||  
57 | 39H ||  
58 | 3AH ||  
59 | 3BH ||  
60 | 3CH ||  
61 | 3DH ||  
62 | 3EH ||  
63 | 3FH ||  
64 | 40H ||  
65 | 41H ||  
66 | 42H ||  
67 | 43H ||  
96 | 60H |  
97 | 61H |  
98 | 62H |  
99 | 63H |  
<Example3> EA 00 28  
EnH is the Pitch Bend Change status, and n is the MIDI channel number. The 2nd byte (00H  
= 0) is the LSB and the 3rd byte (28H = 40) is the MSB, but Pitch Bend Value is a signed  
number in which 40 00H (= 64 x 12+80 = 8192) is 0, so this Pitch Bend Value is  
28 00H - 40 00H = 40 x 12+80 - (64 x 12+80) = 5120 - 8192 = -3072  
68 | 44H || 100 | 64H |  
69 | 45H || 101 | 65H |  
70 | 46H || 102 | 66H |  
71 | 47H || 103 | 67H |  
72 | 48H || 104 | 68H |  
73 | 49H || 105 | 69H |  
74 | 4AH || 106 | 6AH |  
75 | 4BH || 107 | 6BH |  
76 | 4CH || 108 | 6CH |  
77 | 4DH || 109 | 6DH |  
78 | 4EH || 110 | 6EH |  
79 | 4FH || 111 | 6FH |  
80 | 50H || 112 | 70H |  
81 | 51H || 113 | 71H |  
82 | 52H || 114 | 72H |  
83 | 53H || 115 | 73H |  
84 | 54H || 116 | 74H |  
85 | 55H || 117 | 75H |  
86 | 56H || 118 | 76H |  
87 | 57H || 119 | 77H |  
88 | 58H || 120 | 78H |  
89 | 59H || 121 | 79H |  
90 | 5AH || 122 | 7AH |  
91 | 5BH || 123 | 7BH |  
92 | 5CH || 124 | 7CH |  
93 | 5DH || 125 | 7DH |  
94 | 5EH || 126 | 7EH |  
95 | 5FH || 127 | 7FH |  
If the Pitch Bend Sensitivity is set to 2 semitones, -8192 (00 00H) will cause the pitch to  
change -200 cents, so in this case -200 x (-3072) ÷ (-8192) = -75 cents of Pitch Bend is being  
applied to MIDI channel 11.  
<Example4> B3 64 00 65 00 06 0C 26 00 64 7F 65 7F  
BnH is the Control Change status, and n is the MIDI channel number. For Control Changes,  
the 2nd byte is the control number, and the 3rd byte is the value. In a case in which two or  
more messages consecutive messages have the same status, MIDI has a provision called  
“running status” which allows the status byte of the second and following messages to be  
omitted. Thus, the above messages have the following meaning.  
B3 64 00  
(B3) 65 00  
(B3) 06 0C  
(B3) 26 00  
(B3) 64 7F  
(B3) 65 7F  
MIDI ch.4, lower byte of RPN parameter number:  
(MIDI ch.4) upper byte of RPN parameter number:  
(MIDI ch.4) upper byte of parameter value:  
00H  
00H  
0CH  
00H  
7FH  
7FH  
+——————+——————++——————+——————++——————+——————++——————+——————+  
(MIDI ch.4) lower byte of parameter value:  
D: decimal  
(MIDI ch.4) lower byte of RPN parameter number:  
(MIDI ch.4) upper byte of RPN parameter number:  
H: hexadecimal  
*
*
Decimal values such as MIDI channel, bank select, and program change are listed as one  
greater than the values given in the above table.  
In other words, the above messages specify a value of 0C 00H for RPN parameter number  
00 00H on MIDI channel 4, and then set the RPN parameter number to 7F 7FH.  
A 7-bit byte can express data in the range of 128 steps. For data where greater precision  
is required, we must use two or more bytes. For example, two hexadecimal numbers aa  
bbH expressing two 7-bit bytes would indicate a value of aa x 128+bb.  
In the case of values which have a +/ - sign, 00H = -64, 40H = +/ -0, and 7FH = +63, so  
that the decimal expression would be 64 less than the value given in the above chart. In  
the case of two types, 00 00H = -8192, 40 00H = +/ -0, and 7F 7FH = +8191. For example, if  
aa bbH were expressed as decimal, this would be aa bbH - 40 00H = aa x 128+bb - 64 x  
128.  
RPN parameter number 00 00H is Pitch Bend Sensitivity, and the MSB of the value indicates  
semitone units, so  
a
value of 0CH = 12 sets the maximum pitch bend range to +/ -12  
*
*
semitones (1 octave). (On GS sound generators the LSB of Pitch Bend Sensitivity is ignored,  
but the LSB should be transmitted anyway (with a value of 0) so that operation will be  
correct on any device.)  
Once the parameter number has been specified for RPN or NRPN, all Data Entry messages  
transmitted on that same channel will be valid, so after the desired value has been  
transmitted, it is a good idea to set the parameter number to 7F 7FH to prevent accidents.  
This is the reason for the (B3) 64 7F (B3) 65 7F at the end.  
Data marked “Use nibbled data” is expressed in hexadecimal in 4-bit units. A value  
expressed as a 2-byte nibble 0a 0bH has the value of a x 16+b.  
<Example1> What is the decimal expression of 5AH?  
From the preceding table, 5AH = 90  
It is not desirable for performance data (such as Standard MIDI File data) to contain many  
events with running status as given in <Example 4>. This is because if playback is halted  
during the song and then rewound or fast-forwarded, the sequencer may not be able to  
transmit the correct status, and the sound generator will then misinterpret the data. Take  
care to give each event its own status.  
<Example2> What is the decimal expression of the value 12 34H given as  
hexadecimal for each 7 bits?  
From the preceding table, since 12H = 18 and 34H = 52  
18 x 128+52 = 2356  
It is also necessary that the RPN or NRPN parameter number setting and the value setting  
be done in the proper order. On some sequencers, events occurring in the same (or  
consecutive) clock may be transmitted in an order different than the order in which they  
were received. For this reason it is a good idea to slightly skew the time of each event (about  
1 tick for TPQN = 96, and about 5 ticks for TPQN = 480).  
<Example3> What is the decimal expression of the nibbled value 0A 03  
09 0D?  
From the preceding table, since 0AH = 10, 03H = 3, 09H = 9, 0DH = 13  
((10 x 16+3) x 16+9) x 16+13 = 41885  
*
TPQN: Ticks Per Quarter Note  
<Example4> What is the nibbled expression of the decimal value 1258?  
16 ) 1258  
16 )  
16 )  
78 ...10  
4 ...14  
0 ... 4  
Since from the preceding table, 0 = 00H, 4 = 04H, 14 = 0EH, 10 = 0AH, the result is: 00 04 0E  
0AH.  
1 6 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n  
<Example3> Getting Temporary Patch (Part 1) data (RQ1)  
Example of an Exclusive Message and  
Calculating a Checksum  
Roland Exclusive messages (RQ1, DT1) are transmitted with a checksum at the end (before  
F7) to make sure that the message was correctly received. The value of the checksum is  
determined by the address and data (or size) of the transmitted Exclusive message.  
cf.) This operation is the same as Data Transfer function in Utility mode with “PATCH:  
TEMP” (Source parameter) options.  
(Part 1) is assigned as following:  
How to Calculate the Checksum  
(hexadecimal numbers are indicated by “H”)  
10 00 00 00  
Temporary Patch (Part 1)  
The checksum is a value derived by adding the address, size, and checksum itself and  
inverting the lower 7 bits.  
The offset address of Patch is also assigned as follows:  
Heres an example of how the checksum is calculated. We will assume that in the Exclusive  
message we are transmitting, the address is aa bb cc ddH and the data or size is ee ffH.  
00 00 00  
Patch Common  
:
00 10 00  
Patch Oscillator (Zone 1)  
Patch Envelope (Zone 1)  
Patch LFO (Zone 1)  
aa + bb + cc + dd + ee + ff = sum  
sum ÷ 128 = quotient ... remainder  
128 - remainder = checksum  
:
00 20 00  
:
00 40 00  
<Example1> Setting CHORUS TYPE of PATCH to CHORUS 1 (DT1)  
:
00 50 00  
Patch COSM1 (Zone 1)  
Patch COSM2 (Zone 1)  
Patch Arpeggio (Note 1)  
Patch Arpeggio (Note 16)  
is 10 00 00 00H, the offset address of PATCH CHORUS at PATCH is 04 00H, and the  
address of CHORUS TYPE is 00 00H. Therefore the address of CHORUS TYPE of PATCH  
CHORUS is;  
:
00 60 00  
:
00 70 00  
:
10 00 00 00H  
04 00H  
00 7F 00  
+)  
00 00H  
10 00 04 00H  
As the data size of Patch Arpeggio is 00 00 00 42H, summation of the size and the start  
address of Temporary Patch Arpeggio (Note 16) will be;  
CHORUS 1 has the value of 01H.  
So the system exclusive message should be sent is;  
10 00 00 00H  
00 00 7F 00H  
+) 00 00 00 42H  
10 00 7F 42H  
F0  
41  
10  
00 53  
(4)  
12  
10 00 04 00  
address  
01  
??  
F7  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(5)  
data  
checksum  
(6)  
And the size that have to be got should be;  
(1) Exclusive Status  
(2) ID (Roland)  
(5) Command ID (DT1)  
(3) Device ID (17)  
(4) Model ID (V-Synth)  
(6) End of Exclusive  
10 00 7F 42H  
-) 10 00 00 00H  
00 00 7F 42H  
Then calculate the checksum.  
Therefore the system exclusive message should be sent is;  
10H + 00H + 04H + 00H + 01H = 16 + 0 + 4 + 0 + 1 = 21 (sum)  
21 (sum) ÷ 128 = 0 (quotient) ... 21 (remainder)  
checksum = 128 - 21 (remainder) = 107 = 6BH  
F0  
41  
10  
00 53  
(4)  
11  
10 00 00 00  
address  
00 00 7F 42  
data  
??  
F7  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(5)  
checksum  
(6)  
This means that F0 41 10 00 53 12 10 00 04 00 01 6B F7 is the message should be sent.  
(1) Exclusive Status  
(2) ID (Roland)  
(5) Command ID (RQ1)  
(3) Device ID (17)  
(4) Model ID (V-Synth)  
(6) End of Exclusive  
<Example2> Getting the data (RQ1) of PATCH MFX in PATCH:003  
02 00 00H, and the offset address of PATCH MFX is 00 02 00H.  
Calculating the checksum as shown in <Example 2>, we get a message of F0 41 10 00 53 11  
10 00 00 00 00 00 7F 42 2F F7 to be transmitted.  
Therefore the start address of PATCH MFX in PATCH:003 is;  
20 02 00 00H  
+)  
00 02 00H  
20 02 02 00H  
As the size of PATCH MFX is 00 00 01 04H, the system exclusive message should be sent is;  
F0  
41  
10  
00 53  
(4)  
11  
20 02 02 00  
address  
00 00 01 04  
data  
??  
F7  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(5)  
checksum  
(6)  
(1) Exclusive Status  
(2) ID (Roland)  
(5) Command ID (RQ1)  
(3) Device ID (17)  
(4) Model ID (V-Synth)  
(6) End of Exclusive  
Then calculate the checksum.  
20H + 02H + 02H + 00H + 00H + 00H + 01H + 04H = 32 + 2 + 2 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 1 + 4  
= 41 (sum)  
117 (sum) ÷ 128 = 0 (quotient) ... 41 (remainder)  
checksum = 128 - 41 (remainder) = 87 = 57H  
This means that F0 41 10 00 53 11 20 02 02 00 00 00 01 04 57 F7 is the message should be sent.  
1 6 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n  
<Example4> Getting Temporary Patch data of whiole part (RQ1) at once;  
The Scale Tune Feature (address: 40 1x 40)  
The scale Tune feature allows you to finely adjust the individual pitch of the notes from C  
through B. Though the settings are made while working with one octave, the fine  
adjustments will affect all octaves. By making the appropriate Scale Tune settings, you can  
obtain a complete variety of tuning methods other than equal temperament. As examples,  
three possible types of scale setting are explained below.  
of whole part is assigned as following:  
10 00 00 00  
10 01 00 00  
:
Temporary Patch (Part 1)  
Temporary Patch (Part 2)  
Equal Temperament  
10 0F 00 00  
Temporary Patch (Part 16)  
This method of tuning divides the octave into 12 equal parts. It is currently the most widely  
used form of tuning, especially in occidental music. On the V-Synth, the default settings for  
the Scale Tune feature produce equal temperament.  
The offset address of Patch is also assigned as follows:  
00 00 00  
Patch Common  
Just Temperament (Tonic of C)  
:
The principal triads resound much more beautifully than with equal temperament, but this  
benefit can only be obtained in one key. If transposed, the chords tend to become  
ambiguous. The example given involves settings for a key in which C is the keynote.  
00 10 00  
Patch Oscillator (Zone 1)  
Patch Envelope (Zone 1)  
Patch LFO (Zone 1)  
:
00 20 00  
:
Arabian Scale  
00 40 00  
By altering the setting for Scale Tune, you can obtain a variety of other tunings suited for  
ethnic music. For example, the settings introduced below will set the unit to use the Arabian  
Scale.  
:
00 50 00  
Patch COSM1 (Zone 1)  
Patch COSM2 (Zone 1)  
Patch Arpeggio (Note 1)  
Patch Arpeggio (Note 16)  
:
00 60 00  
Example Settings  
:
Note name  
Equal Temperament Just Temperament (Key-tone C)  
Arabian Scale  
00 70 00  
:
C
C#  
D
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-6  
+45  
-2  
-8  
00 7F 00  
+4  
Eb  
E
+16  
-14  
-2  
-12  
-51  
-8  
As the data size of Patch Arpeggio is 00 00 00 42H, summation of the size and the start  
address of Temporary Patch (Port 16) Arpeggio (Note 16) will be;  
F
F#  
G
-10  
+2  
+43  
-4  
10 0F 00 00H  
00 00 7F 00H  
+) 00 00 00 42H  
10 0F 7F 42H  
G#  
A
+14  
-16  
+14  
-12  
+47  
0
Bb  
B
-10  
-49  
And the size that have to be got should be;  
10 0F 7F 42H  
-) 10 00 00 00H  
00 0F 7F 42H  
The values in the table are given in cents. Convert these values to hexadecimal, and transmit  
them as Exclusive data.  
For example, to set the tune (C-B) of the Part 1 Arabian Scale, send the following data:  
Therefore the system exclusive message should be sent is;  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 11 40 3A 6D 3E 34 0D 38 6B 3C 6F 40 36 0F 76 F7  
F0  
41  
10  
00 53  
(4)  
11  
10 00 00 00  
address  
00 0F 7F 42  
data  
??  
F7  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(5)  
checksum  
(6)  
ASCII Code Table  
(1) Exclusive Status  
(2) ID (Roland)  
(5) Command ID (RQ1)  
(3) Device ID (17)  
Patch Name and Performance Name, etc., of MIDI data are described the ASCII  
(4) Model ID (V-Synth)  
(6) End of Exclusive  
code in the table below.  
Calculating the checksum as shown in <Example 2>, we get a message of F0 41 10 00 53 11  
10 00 00 00 00 0F 7F 42 20 F7 to be transmitted.  
+——————+——————+——————++——————+——————+——————++——————+——————+——————+  
| D  
| H  
| Char || D  
| H  
| Char || D  
| H  
| Char |  
+——————+——————+——————++——————+——————+——————++——————+——————+——————+  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
32 | 20H | SP ||  
64 | 40H |  
65 | 41H |  
66 | 42H |  
67 | 43H |  
68 | 44H |  
69 | 45H |  
70 | 46H |  
71 | 47H |  
72 | 48H |  
73 | 49H |  
74 | 4AH |  
75 | 4BH |  
76 | 4CH |  
77 | 4DH |  
78 | 4EH |  
79 | 4FH |  
80 | 50H |  
81 | 51H |  
82 | 52H |  
83 | 53H |  
84 | 54H |  
85 | 55H |  
86 | 56H |  
87 | 57H |  
88 | 58H |  
89 | 59H |  
90 | 5AH |  
91 | 5BH |  
92 | 5CH |  
93 | 5DH |  
94 | 5EH |  
95 | 5FH |  
@ ||  
A ||  
B ||  
C ||  
96 | 60H |  
97 | 61H |  
98 | 62H |  
99 | 63H |  
` |  
a |  
b |  
c |  
d |  
e |  
f |  
g |  
h |  
i |  
j |  
k |  
l |  
m |  
n |  
o |  
p |  
q |  
r |  
s |  
t |  
u |  
v |  
w |  
x |  
y |  
z |  
{ |  
| |  
} |  
33 | 21H |  
34 | 22H |  
35 | 23H |  
36 | 24H |  
37 | 25H |  
38 | 26H |  
39 | 27H |  
40 | 28H |  
41 | 29H |  
42 | 2AH |  
43 | 2BH |  
44 | 2CH |  
45 | 2DH |  
46 | 2EH |  
47 | 2FH |  
48 | 30H |  
49 | 31H |  
50 | 32H |  
51 | 33H |  
52 | 34H |  
53 | 35H |  
54 | 36H |  
55 | 37H |  
56 | 38H |  
57 | 39H |  
58 | 3AH |  
59 | 3BH |  
60 | 3CH |  
61 | 3DH |  
62 | 3EH |  
63 | 3FH |  
! ||  
" ||  
# ||  
$ ||  
% ||  
& ||  
` ||  
( ||  
) ||  
* ||  
+ ||  
, ||  
— ||  
. ||  
/ ||  
0 ||  
1 ||  
2 ||  
3 ||  
4 ||  
5 ||  
6 ||  
7 ||  
8 ||  
9 ||  
: ||  
; ||  
< ||  
= ||  
> ||  
? ||  
D || 100 | 64H |  
E || 101 | 65H |  
F || 102 | 66H |  
G || 103 | 67H |  
H || 104 | 68H |  
I || 105 | 69H |  
J || 106 | 6AH |  
K || 107 | 6BH |  
L || 108 | 6CH |  
M || 109 | 6DH |  
N || 110 | 6EH |  
O || 111 | 6FH |  
P || 112 | 70H |  
Q || 113 | 71H |  
R || 114 | 72H |  
S || 115 | 73H |  
T || 116 | 74H |  
U || 117 | 75H |  
V || 118 | 76H |  
W || 119 | 77H |  
X || 120 | 78H |  
Y || 121 | 79H |  
Z || 122 | 7AH |  
[ || 123 | 7BH |  
\ || 124 | 7CH |  
] || 125 | 7DH |  
^ ||——————+——————+——————+  
_ |  
+——————+——————+——————++——————+——————+——————+  
D: decimal  
H: hexadecimal  
*
“SP” is space.  
1 7 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Synthesizer Keyboard  
Model V-Synth  
Date: Nov. 20, 2002  
Version: 1.00  
MIDI Implementation Chart  
Function...  
Transmitted  
Recognized  
Remarks  
Basic  
Channel Changed  
Default  
1–16  
1–16  
1–16  
1–16  
Memorized  
Default  
Mode 3  
Mode 3  
* 2  
Mode  
Messages  
Altered  
Mono, Poly  
Mode 3, 4 (M = 1)  
**************  
Note  
Number :  
0–127  
**************  
0–127  
0–127  
True Voice  
Note On  
Note Off  
O
O
O
O
Velocity  
After  
Touch  
Key's  
Channel's  
X
O
O
O
*1  
*1  
Pitch Bend  
O
O
*1  
0, 32  
1
2
5
6, 38  
7
O
*1  
O
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
*1  
*1  
*1  
Bank select  
Modulation  
Breath type  
Portamento time  
Data entry  
Volume  
Panpot  
Expression  
General purpose controller 1  
General purpose controller 2  
General purpose controller 3  
General purpose controller 4  
Breath type  
General purpose controller 1  
General purpose controller 2  
General purpose controller 3  
General purpose controller 4  
Hold 1  
O (Modulation)  
O (Knob 1)  
X
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
X
O (Pedal 1)  
X
10  
11  
16  
17  
18  
19  
34  
48  
49  
50  
51  
64  
65  
66  
80  
81  
82  
83  
91  
93  
O (Pedal 2)  
O (D Beam1-L)  
O (D Beam2-L)  
O (D Beam3-L)  
O (D Beam4-L)  
O (Knob 2)  
O (D Beam1-R)  
O (D Beam2-R)  
O (D Beam3-R)  
O (D Beam4-R)  
O (Hold)  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
Control  
Change  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
X
X
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
Portamento  
Sostenuto  
O (TT Pad XY-X)  
O (TT Pad XY-Y)  
O (TT Pad TT-X)  
O (TT Pad TT-Y)  
X
X
O
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
General purpose controller 5  
General purpose controller 6  
General purpose controller 7  
General purpose controller 8  
General purpose effects 1  
General purpose effects 3  
Pedal, Knob, D Beam, TT Pad  
RPN LSB, MSB  
O (Reverb)  
O (Chorus)  
X
O
1–31, 64–95  
100, 101  
*1  
X
Program  
Change  
O
*1  
*3  
O
0–127  
*1  
*1  
**************  
: True Number  
Program No. 1–128  
System Exclusive  
O
O
: Song Position  
: Song Select  
: Tune Request  
X
X
X
X
X
X
System  
Common  
System  
Realtime : Commands  
: Clock  
X
X
*1  
*1  
X
X
*1  
X
X
X
X
O
X
O
: All Sound Off  
: Reset All Controllers  
: Local On/Off  
: All Notes Off  
: Active Sensing  
: System Reset  
O
Aux  
Messages  
X
O (123–127)  
O
X
* 1 O X is selectable.  
* 2 Recognized as M=1 even if M1.  
* 3 Transmits when Data Transfer is executed or RQ1 received.  
Notes  
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY  
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY  
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO  
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO  
O : Yes  
X : No  
1 7 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sp e cifica tio n s  
V-Synth: Synthesizer Keyboard  
Nominal Input Level  
INPUT (LINE): -20 dBu  
INPUT (MIC): -46 dBu  
Keyboard  
61 keys (with velocity and channel aftertouch)  
Arpeggiator  
Sound Generator Configuration  
Oscillator (envelope x 4 + LFO x 1) x 2  
Modulator x 1  
Patterns: User programmable (support use of control change messages)  
Motifs: 8 types  
Tempo: 20 to 250 BPM  
OSM (envelope x 2 + LFO x 1) x 2  
TVA (envelope x 1 + LFO x 1) x 1  
Display  
Graphic 320 x 240 dot backlit LCD with touch screen  
Methods by Which Oscillators Produce Sound  
Analog Modeling, PCM / VariPhrase (Preset waveforms + Sampling  
waveforms), External Input  
Controllers  
Pitch Bend/ Modulation Lever  
Modulator  
Time Trip Pad  
4 types + MIX  
D Beam Controller (Twin beam)  
Assignable Control Knobs (C1, C2)  
COSM  
15 types + THRU  
Connectors  
Headphones Jack  
Zones (Splits)  
Main Output Jacks (L/ MONO, R) (1/ 4 inch phone type)  
Direct Output Jacks (L, R) (1/ 4 inch phone type)  
Input Jacks (L, R) (1/ 4 inch phone type, Equipped with line/ mic  
gain switch)  
16  
Parts  
16  
Maximum Polyphony  
Hold Pedal Jack  
24 voices  
Control Pedal Jacks (1, 2) (assignable)  
MIDI Connectors (IN, OUT, THRU)  
USB Connector  
(Varies depending on the load placed on the sound generator.)  
Internal Memory  
Project: 1  
Digital Audio Interface (24 bits, S/ P DIF)  
COAXIAL (IN, OUT)  
Patches: 512  
Waves: 999  
OPTICAL (IN, OUT)  
Wave memory (RAM): 50 M bytes  
(When the unit ships from the factory, 30 M bytes of this is taken up  
by the preset waves.)  
AC Inlet  
Power Supply  
AC 117 V, AC 230 V, AC 240 V  
Sample storage memory (FLASH): 10 M bytes  
Power Consumption  
External Storage Device  
16 W  
PC CARD slot  
Dimensions  
(Can be used Microdrive, SmartMedia or CompactFlash with PC  
card adapter.)  
1,056 (W) x 398 (D) x 111 (H) mm  
41-5/ 8 (W) x 15-11/ 16 (D) x 4-3/ 8 (H) inches  
Effects  
Weight  
MFX (Multi-effects): 41 sets  
Chorus: 8 sets  
13.1 kg / 28 lbs 15 oz  
Accessories  
Quick Start  
Reverb: 10 sets  
System EQ  
Owners Manual  
Sound List  
4 bands  
Sampling Frequency  
CD-ROM (Driver)  
PC CARD Protector  
Power Cable  
Internal: 44.1 kHz  
Digital Audio IN/ OUT: 96, 48, 44.1 kHz  
Signal Processing  
Options  
Internal processing  
Keyboard Stand: KS-12  
Pedal Switch: DP-2/ 6/ 8  
Foot Switch: BOSS FS-5U, BOSS FV-300L  
Expression Pedal: EV-5  
Microphone: DR-20  
Sound generating section: 32 bits (floating point)  
Effects section: 24 bits (fixed point)  
DA Conversion: 24 bits  
AD Conversion: 24 bits  
Nominal Output Level  
MAIN OUT: +4 dBu  
(0 dBu = 0.775 V rms)  
DIRECT OUT: +4 dBu  
* In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or  
appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice.  
1 7 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In d e x  
Common  
Symbols  
Numerics  
A
[ASSIGNABLE]  
D
Assigning a name  
B
C
1 7 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In d e x  
E
J
K
Key Follow  
Key follow  
F
L
LFO  
G
LFO depth  
H
[HOLD]  
I
Initialize  
1 7 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In d e x  
N
O
[ON/ OFF]  
M
P
Patch  
Patch Mode  
1 7 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In d e x  
S
Sample edit  
Save  
R
1 7 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In d e x  
T
V
[TIME TRIP]  
W
X
Y
Z
Zoom ....................................................................................................... 66  
U
1 7 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In sta llin g th e PC Ca rd Pro te cto r  
The V-Synth provides a PC card protector to prevent theft of the PC card. To install the PC card protector, use the  
following procedure.  
1 . Use a screwdriver to remove both of the screws from the bottom side of the PC CARD slot.  
2 . Insert the PC card into the PC CARD card slot.  
3 . Use the screws to fasten the PC card protector as shown below.  
PC card  
-Synth rear panel  
V
PC card protector  
1 7 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
For EU Countries  
This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.  
For the USA  
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION  
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee  
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the  
interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.  
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.  
For Canada  
NOTICE  
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.  
AVIS  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.  
1 7 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In fo rm a tio n  
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as  
shown below.  
PAN AMA  
ITALY  
ISRAEL  
SIN GAPO RE  
AFRICA  
SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A.  
Boulevard Andrews, Albrook,  
Panama City, REP. DE PANAMA  
TEL: 315-0101  
Roland Italy S. p. A.  
Viale delle Industrie 8,  
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY  
TEL: (02) 937-78300  
Halilit P. Greenspoon &  
Swee Lee Company  
150 Sims Drive,  
Sons Ltd.  
SINGAPORE 387381  
TEL: 6846-3676  
8 Retzif Ha'aliya Hashnya St.  
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL  
TEL: (03) 6823666  
EGYPT  
Al Fanny Trading Office  
9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street,  
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,  
Cairo 11341, EGYPT  
CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE  
LTD  
Blk 3014, Bedok Industrial Park E,  
#02-2148, SINGAPORE 489980  
TEL: 6243-9555  
N O RW AY  
Roland Scandinavia Avd.  
Kontor Norge  
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95  
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo  
NORWAY  
PARAGUAY  
Distribuidora De  
Instrumentos Musicales  
J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira  
Asuncion PARAGUAY  
TEL: (021) 492-124  
JO RDAN  
AMMAN Trading Agency  
245 Prince Mohammad St.,  
Amman 1118, JORDAN  
TEL: (06) 464-1200  
TEL: 20-2-417-1828  
REUN IO N  
Maison FO - YAM Marcel  
25 Rue Jules Hermann,  
Chaudron - BP79 97 491  
Ste Clotilde Cedex,  
TAIW AN  
ROLAND TAIWAN  
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.  
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan  
N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN,  
R.O.C.  
TEL: 2273 0074  
KUW AIT  
Easa Husain Al Yousifi Est.  
Abdullah Salem Street,  
Safat, KUWAIT  
PO LAN D  
P. P. H. Brzostowicz  
UL. Gibraltarska 4.  
PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND  
TEL: (022) 679 44 19  
URUGUAY  
Todo Musica S.A.  
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771  
C.P.: 11.800  
Montevideo, URUGUAY  
TEL: (02) 924-2335  
REUNION ISLAND  
TEL: (0262) 218-429  
TEL: 243-6399  
TEL: (02) 2561 3339  
SO UTH AFRICA  
That Other Music Shop  
(PTY) Ltd.  
11 Melle St., Braamfontein,  
Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA  
LEBAN O N  
Chahine S.A.L.  
Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine Bldg.,  
Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-5857  
Beirut, LEBANON  
PO RTUGAL  
THAILAN D  
VEN EZUELA  
Tecnologias Musica e Audio,  
Roland Portugal, S.A.  
Cais Das Pedras, 8/ 9-1 Dto  
4050-465 PORTO  
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.  
330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi 2,  
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND  
TEL: (02) 2248821  
Musicland Digital C.A.  
Av. Francisco de Miranda,  
Centro Parque de Cristal, Nivel  
C2 Local 20 Caracas  
TEL: (01) 20-1441  
P.O.Box 32918, Braamfontein 2017  
Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA  
TEL: (011) 403 4105  
PORTUGAL  
TEL: (022) 608 00 60  
Q ATAR  
Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio  
& Stores)  
P.O. Box 62,  
Doha, QATAR  
TEL: 4423-554  
VENEZUELA  
TEL: (212) 285-8586  
VIETN AM  
Saigon Music  
138 Tran Quang Khai St.,  
District 1  
Ho Chi Minh City  
VIETNAM  
TEL: (08) 844-4068  
Paul Bothner (PTY) Ltd.  
17 Werdmuller Centre,  
Main Road, Claremont 7708  
SOUTH AFRICA  
RO MAN IA  
FBS LINES  
Piata Libertatii 1,  
RO-4200 Gheorghehi  
TEL: (095) 169-5043  
EURO PE  
P.O.BOX 23032, Claremont 7735,  
SOUTH AFRICA  
TEL: (021) 674 4030  
AUSTRIA  
Roland Austria GES.M.B.H.  
Siemensstrasse 4, P.O. Box 74,  
A-6063 RUM, AUSTRIA  
SAUDI ARABIA  
aDawliah Universal  
Electronics APL  
Corniche Road, Aldossary Bldg.,  
1st Floor, Alkhobar,  
SAUDI ARABIA  
RUSSIA  
MuTek  
3-Bogatyrskaya Str. 1.k.l  
107 564 Moscow, RUSSIA  
TEL: (095) 169 5043  
AUSTRALIA/  
N EW ZEALAN D  
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260  
ASIA  
AUSTRALIA  
BELGIUM/ HOLLAND/  
LUXEMBO URG  
Roland Benelux N. V.  
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel  
(Westerlo) BELGIUM  
TEL: (014) 575811  
CHIN A  
Roland Shanghai Electronics  
Co.,Ltd.  
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road  
Shanghai, CHINA  
TEL: (021) 5580-0800  
SPAIN  
Roland Electronics  
de España, S. A.  
Calle Bolivia 239, 08020  
Barcelona, SPAIN  
Roland Corporation  
Australia Pty., Ltd.  
38 Campbell Avenue  
Dee Why West. NSW 2099  
AUSTRALIA  
P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952  
SAUDI ARABIA  
TEL: (03) 898 2081  
SYRIA  
Technical Light & Sound  
TEL: (93) 308 1000  
TEL: (02) 9982 8266  
Center  
DEN MARK  
SW EDEN  
Roland Shanghai Electronics  
Co.,Ltd.  
(BEIJING OFFICE)  
10F. No.18 Anhuaxili  
Chaoyang District, Beijing,  
CHINA  
Khaled Ebn Al Walid St.  
Bldg. No. 47, P.O.BOX 13520,  
Damascus, SYRIA  
TEL: (011) 223-5384  
N EW ZEALAN D  
Roland Scandinavia A/S  
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,  
DK-2100 Copenhagen  
DENMARK  
Roland Scandinavia A/S  
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE  
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.  
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN  
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20  
Roland Corporation Ltd.  
32 Shaddock Street, Mount Eden,  
Auckland, NEW ZEALAND  
TEL: (09) 3098 715  
TEL: 3916 6200  
TURKEY  
Barkat muzik aletleri ithalat  
ve ihracat Ltd Sti  
Siraselviler Caddesi Siraselviler  
Pasaji No:74/ 20  
TEL: (010) 6426-5050  
FRAN CE  
Roland France SA  
4, Rue Paul Henri SPAAK,  
Parc de l'Esplanade, F 77 462 St.  
Thibault, Lagny Cedex FRANCE  
TEL: 01 600 73 500  
CEN TRAL/ LATIN  
AMERICA  
SW ITZERLAN D  
Roland (Switzerland) AG  
Landstrasse 5, Postfach,  
CH-4452 Itingen,  
SWITZERLAND  
TEL: (061) 927-8383  
HO N G KO N G  
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.  
Service Division  
22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen  
Wan, New Territories,  
HONG KONG  
Taksim - Istanbul, TURKEY  
TEL: (0212) 2499324  
ARGEN TIN A  
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.  
Av.Santa Fe 2055  
(1123) Buenos Aires  
ARGENTINA  
TEL: (011) 4508-2700  
U.A.E.  
Zak Electronics & Musical  
Instruments Co. L.L.C.  
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,  
No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai, U.A.E.  
TEL: (04) 3360715  
FIN LAN D  
Roland Scandinavia As,  
Filial Finland  
Elannontie 5  
FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND  
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020  
UKRAIN E  
TEL: 2415 0911  
TIC-TAC  
Mira Str. 19/ 108  
IN DIA  
P.O. Box 180  
295400 Munkachevo, UKRAINE  
TEL: (03131) 414-40  
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.  
409, Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi  
Flats Compound Off. Dr. Edwin  
Moses Road, Mumbai-400011,  
INDIA  
BRAZIL  
Roland Brasil Ltda  
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B  
Parque Industrial San Jose  
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL  
TEL: (011) 4615 5666  
GERMAN Y  
Roland Elektronische  
Musikinstrumente HmbH.  
Oststrasse 96, 22844 Norderstedt,  
GERMANY  
UN ITED KIN GDO M  
N O RTH AMERICA  
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.  
Atlantic Close, Swansea  
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA  
SA7 9FJ,  
TEL: (022) 2493 9051  
IN DO N ESIA  
PT Citra IntiRama  
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150  
Jakarta Pusat  
INDONESIA  
TEL: (021) 6324170  
CAN ADA  
Roland Canada Music Ltd.  
(Head Office)  
5480 Parkwood Way Richmond  
B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA  
TEL: (604) 270 6626  
CO STA RICA  
JUAN Bansbach  
Instrumentos Musicales  
Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado 10237,  
San Jose, COSTA RICA  
TEL: 258-0211  
TEL: (040) 52 60090  
UNITED KINGDOM  
TEL: (01792) 702701  
GREECE  
STOLLAS S.A.  
Music Sound Light  
155, New National Road  
Patras 26442, GREECE  
TEL: 2610 435400  
MIDDLE EAST  
KO REA  
Roland Canada Music Ltd.  
Cosmos Corporation  
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,  
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA  
TEL: (02) 3486-8855  
CHILE  
Comercial Fancy S.A.  
Rut.: 96.919.420-1  
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor  
Santiago - Centro, CHILE  
TEL: (02) 688-9540  
(Toronto Office)  
170 Admiral Boulevard  
Mississauga On L5T 2N6  
CANADA  
BAHRAIN  
Moon Stores  
No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,  
P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,  
State of BAHRAIN  
HUN GARY  
Roland East Europe Ltd.  
Warehouse Area DEPO’ Pf.83  
H-2046 Torokbalint, HUNGARY  
TEL: (23) 511011  
TEL: (905) 362 9707  
MALAYSIA  
BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD  
140 & 142, Jalan Bukit Bintang  
55100 Kuala Lumpur,MALAYSIA  
TEL: (03) 2144-3333  
TEL: 211 005  
U. S. A.  
EL SALVADO R  
Roland Corporation U.S.  
5100 S. Eastern Avenue  
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,  
U. S. A.  
CYPRUS  
Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.  
17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia,  
CYPRUS  
OMNI MUSIC  
IRELAN D  
Roland Ireland  
Audio House, Belmont Court,  
Donnybrook, Dublin 4.  
Republic of IRELAND  
TEL: (01) 2603501  
75 Avenida Norte y Final  
Alameda Juan Pablo  
,
PHILIPPIN ES  
Edificio No.4010 San Salvador,  
EL SALVADOR  
TEL: 262-0788  
TEL: (323) 890 3700  
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.  
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue  
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,  
PHILIPPINES  
TEL: (022) 66-9426  
IRAN  
MOCO, INC.  
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,  
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad  
Tehran, IRAN  
MEXICO  
TEL: (02) 899 9801  
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.  
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar  
de los Padres 01780 Mexico D.F.  
MEXICO  
TEL: (021) 285-4169  
As of April 1, 2003 (Roland)  
TEL: (55) 5668-6699  
03126812  
’03-6-4N  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Radica Games Games 75034 User Guide
RCA Radio HD Receiver User Guide
Remington Electric Shaver R 4130 User Guide
RIDGID Battery Charger 140276002 User Guide
Rosen Entertainment Systems DVD Player 410X User Guide
Rowenta Styling Iron 039534 08 02 User Guide
Samsung Computer Drive HD080GJ User Guide
Samsung DVD Player DVD H1080 User Guide
Samsung Printer ML 5050G User Guide
SATO Label Maker M 8400S User Guide